Translation of the original instructions

BiesseWorks
Machining operation programming system

User Manual

6.4
5804A0107 ENGLISH
Information about the publication

Copyright © 2013 BIESSE S.p.A.. All rights reserved.

Code Edition Rev. Approval Publication vsw*

5804A0107 6 0 (10/2009)** UTS-1005806-09 12/2009 3.3.270

1 (04/2010) UTS-1006046-09 05/2010 3.4.123

2 (11/2010) 11/2010 3.4.sp3

3 (09/2011) 10/2011 3.4.9.580

4 (07/2013) 07/2013 3.4.18.1610

* Software version
** Modifications compared with previous document (58040094).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

3
 Information about the publication

4 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

Table of contents

Analytical Index ......................................................................................................................... 11

Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 31

Glossary ...................................................................................................................................... 33

TO BEGIN WITH

1 Presentation of the software

1.1 Applications or application software ...................................................................................... 48
1.2 Utilities .................................................................................................................................. 48
1.3 Structure of applications ....................................................................................................... 49
1.4 Structure of utilities ............................................................................................................... 54
1.5 Zoom tools ............................................................................................................................ 54
1.6 Using the mouse ................................................................................................................... 55
1.7 Keyboard commands ............................................................................................................ 57

2 Applications
2.1 Editor ..................................................................................................................................... 62
2.2 ToolManager ......................................................................................................................... 83
2.3 WorkTableTooling .................................................................................................................. 88
2.4 MachineConfiguration ........................................................................................................... 99

3 Utilities
3.1 BatchRun ............................................................................................................................ 105
3.2 BackupManager ................................................................................................................... 110

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

5
 Table of contents

4 General settings
4.1 Customising the toolbar ....................................................................................................... 112
4.2 Dialogue box setting Graphic options ................................................................................. 113
4.3 Settings for semi-automatic positioning .............................................................................. 115
4.4 Active machine change ....................................................................................................... 122
4.5 Description of the Setup dialogue box ................................................................................ 123
4.6 Password ............................................................................................................................ 143
4.7 Setting the language ........................................................................................................... 144

5 Basic programming concepts

5.1 Description of the piece ...................................................................................................... 146
5.2 The geometric profile .......................................................................................................... 147
5.3 Types of programmable machining operations .................................................................. 148

TOOLING

6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates
6.1 Basic concepts .................................................................................................................... 158
6.2 Notions on saving data ....................................................................................................... 161
6.3 Class management ............................................................................................................. 162
6.4 Type management .............................................................................................................. 165
6.5 Recording the tools ............................................................................................................. 167
6.6 Recording thickness tracers ................................................................................................ 175
6.7 Recording insertions ........................................................................................................... 177
6.8 Recording the labels ........................................................................................................... 178
6.9 Group management ............................................................................................................ 180
6.10 Dialogue box Filters ............................................................................................................ 182
6.11 Aggregate management ..................................................................................................... 184
6.12 Notes regarding the creation of the AGGRE81 aggregate ............................................... 192
6.13 Notes regarding the creation of a chip deflector ................................................................. 193

7 Consulting the machine/software data

7.1 Technical data of spindles T, TH and TP ............................................................................ 196
7.2 Technical data of the tool magazines ................................................................................. 201
7.3 Consulting the software limits ............................................................................................. 205
7.4 Visualising the distances between spindles ........................................................................ 206

6 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Table of contents

8 Machine tooling
8.1 Basic tooling concepts ........................................................................................................ 208
8.2 Tooling the label printer ........................................................................................................ 211
8.3 Tooling the operating section .............................................................................................. 212
8.4 Tooling the tool magazine ................................................................................................... 217
8.5 Aggregate tooling ............................................................................................................... 220
8.6 Misalignment between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data ................................. 222

9 Work table tooling

9.1 Basic concepts .................................................................................................................... 224
9.2 Checking and modifying the origins ................................................................................... 225
9.3 Description of the tooling environment context menu ......................................................... 227
9.4 Description of the movement environment context menu .................................................. 235
9.5 The work table configuration document .............................................................................. 236
9.6 Work table tooling environment .......................................................................................... 240
9.7 Table objects movement environment ................................................................................ 251
9.8 Deleting the tooling from the machining program .............................................................. 252
9.9 Removing the work table supports ...................................................................................... 252
9.10 Viewing the properties table ................................................................................................ 253
9.11 Consulting the positioning points ........................................................................................ 253
9.12 Viewing the shaped piece ................................................................................................... 253
9.13 Simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces on the same origin ........................................ 254
9.14 Systems management environment .................................................................................. 255
9.15 Cataloguing the shapeable suction cups ............................................................................ 258

10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

10.1 Managing tools/aggregates ................................................................................................. 262
10.2 Tooling ................................................................................................................................. 264
10.3 Managing a malfunctioning chip ......................................................................................... 266

11 Data import, backup and restore

11.1 Importing machine data and tool database ......................................................................... 268
11.2 Backup/restore machine data and tool database ............................................................... 272
11.3 Backup/restore machining programs and macros .............................................................. 275

12 Management of machine axes and working units

12.1 Consulting the machine axes .............................................................................................. 280
12.2 Resetting the machine axes ................................................................................................ 281
12.3 Moving the machine axes ................................................................................................... 281
12.4 Forced movement of the working units ............................................................................... 281

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

7
 Table of contents

USE/PROGRAMMING

13 Management of the machining program

13.1 Programming phases .......................................................................................................... 286
13.2 Editor application software document ................................................................................. 287
13.3 Program functions ............................................................................................................... 299
13.4 Program optimisation .......................................................................................................... 331
13.5 Program simulation ............................................................................................................. 336
13.6 Automatic program parameter setting ................................................................................. 339
13.7 Programs and macro storage ............................................................................................. 339

14 Creating profiles
14.1 Drawing procedures ............................................................................................................ 342
14.2 Definition of parameters used to draw with EGA tools ........................................................ 344
14.3 Tools used to create the drawing ....................................................................................... 350
14.4 Duplicating the selected geometry ...................................................................................... 364
14.5 Creating a text ..................................................................................................................... 367
14.6 Breaking up a GEO/ROUT .................................................................................................. 370

15 Programming the machining operations

15.1 Piece data definition ............................................................................................................ 374
15.2 Milling programming ............................................................................................................ 390
15.3 Programming boring operations .......................................................................................... 418
15.4 Programming cutting operations ......................................................................................... 427
15.5 Programming "insertions" ................................................................................................... 437
15.6 Programming piece tracing ................................................................................................. 440
15.7 Positioning statements for the work table objects ............................................................... 442

16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.1 Notes for programming using the chip deflector ................................................................. 452
16.2 Notes on programming milling with the sharp corner .......................................................... 454
16.3 Specifications for programming milling operations interpolated with C-axis ...................... 455
16.4 Specifications for programming vertical milling operations in YZ/XZ .................................. 457
16.5 Specifications for programming milling operations using the AGGRE81 aggregate .......... 458
16.6 Specifications for “multiple-run” milling operations ............................................................. 459
16.7 Notes for programming a machining operation with the “repositioning” ............................. 460
16.8 Specifications for programming support panel levelling ...................................................... 461
16.9 Notes on boring program symmetry .................................................................................... 462
16.10 Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items .............................................. 463

8 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Table of contents

16.11 Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin ................................................................. 464
16.12 Notes for programming "multi-descent" milling operations ................................................. 465

17 Macros
17.1 Creating macros .................................................................................................................. 468
17.2 Description of the dialogue box List of macros ................................................................... 474
17.3 Opening, modifying and saving the macro .......................................................................... 475
17.4 Activation/deactivation of the macros ................................................................................. 475
17.5 Inserting macros into the program ...................................................................................... 476
17.6 Macros for cleaning the hoods ............................................................................................ 477
17.7 Horizontal aggregate boring macro ..................................................................................... 477
17.8 Macros for unloading the electrospindle ............................................................................. 478
17.9 Macros to create sharp corner ............................................................................................ 479
17.10 The macros to enable/disable the roller presser ................................................................. 481

18 Importing graphic/technological files

18.1 Automatic mode ................................................................................................................. 484
18.2 Manual mode ...................................................................................................................... 485

19 Variables and VBScript instructions

19.1 Variables ............................................................................................................................. 494
19.2 Managing the variables ....................................................................................................... 495
19.3 Using the variables ............................................................................................................. 500
19.4 Predefined VBScript instructions ........................................................................................ 501

20 Planning DXF files

20.1 List of drawing commands .................................................................................................. 506
20.2 “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism ................................................................................... 507
20.3 “CNI DXF” type formalism .................................................................................................. 531
20.4 How to set the formalism .................................................................................................... 537

21 Running the programs

21.1 Creating the ISO file from Editor application software ........................................................ 540
21.2 Creating ISO files with BatchRun utility .............................................................................. 541
21.3 Running the programs and the list ...................................................................................... 549
21.4 Restarting the program after a machining suspension ....................................................... 549
21.5 Stop/cancel running of the program .................................................................................... 549

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

9
 Table of contents

22 Using the XNC

22.1 The Positions application software ..................................................................................... 552
22.2 Resetting the machine axes ................................................................................................ 561
22.3 Moving the machine axes ................................................................................................... 562
22.4 Moving the operating section elements .............................................................................. 565
22.5 Running single programs .................................................................................................... 566
22.6 work list ............................................................................................................................... 570
22.7 Debug application software ................................................................................................. 586
22.8 Statistics application software ............................................................................................. 590

APPENDICES

A Practice
A.1 General boring program ...................................................................................................... 602
A.2 Boring program for a “non-standard” side ........................................................................... 605
A.3 Milling program ................................................................................................................... 608
A.4 Boring program with parametric tooling ............................................................................. 612
A.5 Programs for multi-centre machines ................................................................................... 616

B List of commands and programming parameters

B.1 Commands Piece variables ................................................................................................ 622
B.2 Commands and geometric parameters ............................................................................... 624
B.3 Commands and parameters for boring ............................................................................... 631
B.4 Commands and parameters for cutting ............................................................................... 637
B.5 Commands and parameters for milling and insertions ........................................................ 643
B.6 Commands and parameters to create the drawing ............................................................. 662
B.7 Commands and parameters for the functions ..................................................................... 674
B.8 Positioning instructions and parameters ............................................................................. 684

C VBscript commands and Editor constants

C.1 Unit of measurement and functions .................................................................................... 688
C.2 VBscript commands ............................................................................................................ 689
C.3 Editor constants .................................................................................................................. 693

10 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

Analytical Index

A axis override, 555

axis positions box, 557
absolute origin
axis speed
(see glossary)
during manual movements, 562
absolute path
(see glossary)
absolute position
B
definition, 245 backup
active machine change, 122 machine data/tool database, 272
active machine replacement, 122 machining programs, 275
aggregates macro, 275
aggregate management, 184 (see glossary)
aggregate tooling procedures, 220 BackupManager
consult/modify the subspindles, 188 description, 110
create subspindles, 189 programs and macros restore/backup, 275
delete subspindles, 188 restore/backup machine data/tool database, 272
management of aggregates with chips, 261 balluff, 261
notes to create the AGGRE42 aggregate, 192 balluff device, 261
AGGRE42 aggregate bar code
notes on programming, 458 (see glossary)
air cushion surface bar Edit, 79
(see glossary) bar Functions
alarm indicator (ToolManager), 157 description, 299
alphanumeric Bar Graphic output, 79
(see glossary) bar Groups, 80
angled cuts on all sides of the piece, 152 Bar Main, 95
programming, 427 bar Main, 77
application bar Operations, 96
(see glossary) bar Repositioning work table, 97
application software bar Systems, 97
basic concepts, 48 bar Tools, 78
see "application" in the glossary BatchRun
applications body of the utility, 106
basic concepts, 48 description, 105
body of the application, 49 description of the data fields, 110
arc type tools, 353 how to create ISO files, 541
areas in the body of the application, 49 how to import files to be processed, 542
arithmetical operators of the VBScript language, 497 how to save ISO files, 548
Automatic import..., menu item, 484 save a list, 543
automatic mode, 566, 584 using the shortcut or context menu, 108
importing DXF/CID files, etc., 484 BatchRun areas

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

11
 Analytical Index

import area, 106 enlarge application button, 49

jobs area, 106 list and description (Editor), 76
BatchRun files list and description (MachineConfiguration), 102
how to modify data, 543 list and description (Statistics), 591
store them in the list, 543 list and description (ToolManager), 86
bitmap list and description (WorkTableTooling), 95
(see glossary) list/description of BatchRun buttons, 106
blade cuts minimise application to icon button, 49
definition, 152 option button, 52
programming, 427 search button, 51
block buttons for EGA buttons, see programming commands
(see glossary) buttons in the SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box, 568
blocks, 525, 535 bypass
body of BatchRun, 106 (see glossary)
body of the application, 49
Editor application software, 63 C
structure of applications, 49 CAD
ToolManager application software, 83 (see glossary)
WorkTableTooling application software, 88 calculation functions of VBScript language, 498
boring from geometric figures CAM
programming, 420 (see glossary)
boring operation CANC key
how to represent in the DXF, 519, 532 magazine untooling procedures, 217
boring operations to untool aggregates, 220
C-axis boring definition, 149 untooling the operating section, 212
definition, 148 cancelling running of the program, 549
definition of generic bore, 148 carrying out the program
definition of generic boring operation, 150 stop and cancel, 549
definition of horizontal bore, 149 Cartesian axes
definition of system boring, 149 (see glossary)
definition of vertical bore, 149 Cartesian co-ordinates
list of programmable types, 148 (see glossary)
boring with the aggregate C-axis boring
description of macro, 477 definition, 149
borings programming on a curved surface, 419
definition, 148 programming on a flat surface, 419
list of programmable machining operations, 148 CD-ROM
notes on program symmetry, 462 (see glossary)
programming, 418 chamfer
breaking up a GEO/ROUT, 370 (see glossary)
Break/Parameters box, 588 check box
BsLock, 115 (see glossary)
BsLock parameters, 115 check boxes, 52
button check of the positions
(see glossary) mobile panel supports, 232
buttons shapeable suction cup/clamps, 228
accessory commands (Debug), 589 stops, 230
check boxes, 52 chip deflector
close application button, 49 classification, 193
command fields, 51 notes on programming, 452
Decorations of the simulator, 339 CID

12 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

(see glossary) use to manage tools, 159

circular face WorkTableTooling application software menu, 94
(see glossary) co-ordinates
circular sides, 324 (see glossary)
CIX copy
(see glossary) files imported to BatchRun, 542
clamps locking system geometric parts, 364
view, 255 open or closed geometries, 364
clamps (Uniclamp), 227 parts of the program, 294
cleaning hoods Copy, context menu items, 294
use of macro, 477 copy/paste
click shapeable suction cup/clamps, 227
(see glossary) CORNER_SHAPING macro, 479
colours couple/decouple
Editor, 64 carriages, 227
command coupling
(see glossary) (see glossary)
command buttons, 53 crash
list and description, 558 (see glossary)
command fields, 51 create single BPP files, 540
check boxes, 52 creating
description of buttons, 51 cutting tools, 172
option button, 52 document, 288
search button, 51 file with extension ISO, 540
(see glossary) files with extension DXF, 505
commands area GEO/ROUT breaking up a GEO/ROUT, 370
area description and structure, 51 jobs, 545
Editor application software area, 63 macro, 468
use, 291 milling and boring tools, 167
(see glossary) new aggregates, 184
compatible new groups, 180
(see glossary) new tool types, 165
consult notes for creating the deflector, 193
aggregate data, 185 notes to create the AGGRE42 aggregate, 192
data relating to tool type, 166 texts with the EGA, 367
tool class data, 162 Uniclamp associating a number of objects, 227
tool magazine data, 201 variables, 495
context menu CTRL key
BatchRun import area menu, 108 select various scattered drawing elements, 293
BatchRun jobs area menu, 108 to establish symmetry, 215
description, 53 cursor, 55
Editor application software menu, 75 zoom in pointer, 54
List menu, 571 zoom out pointer, 54
MachineConfiguration application menu, 100 (see glossary)
menu for Editor import area, 486 curved surface sides
menu for the Automatic environment (Positions), 559 notes on use, 326
ToolManager application software menu, 85 customise the graphics, 113
use for group management, 181 customise the layer keys, 508
use for tooling the machine, 209 customise toolbars, 112
use in the movement environment, 235 cuts along the X-axis, 152
use in the tooling environment, 227 programming, 427

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

13
 Analytical Index

cuts along the Y-axis, 152 files imported to BatchRun, 542

programming, 427 jobs, 546
cuts from geometric drawing, 153, 428 parts of the program, 294
cuts to square the piece, 153 tool types from the list, 166
programming, 427 tools from the database, 159
cutting operation work table tooling from the program, 252
how to represent in the DXF, 524, 534 description of Debug application software, 586
cutting operations description of List application software, 570
definition, 152 description of Positions application software, 552
Cut, context menu items, 294 description of the BackupManager, 110
C_Cutting, 158 description of the data fields
C_Drilling, 158 BatchRun, 110
C_Inserting, 158 dialogue box Geometry offset, 364
C_Routing, 158 in dialogue box Geometry definition, 344
C_Tracing, 158 in dialogue box Simulator, 336
in dialogue box Text, 367
D Setup dialogue box, 123
data area thickness tracer window, 440
description, 50 description of the Statistics application software, 590
ToolManager application software area, 83 diagnosis
(see glossary) consult the optimisation results, 335
data bank environment structure, 331
(see database) (see glossary)
data field diagnostics environment
(see glossary) description, 331
data fields, 52 use and consultation, 335
description of simulator fields, 336 dialogue box
description of the fields in BatchRun, 110 Aggregate manager, 184
data restore Aggregate tooling, 220
machine data/tool database restore, 274 Aggregate, description, 185
machining programs restore, 277 Axis -, 280
macros restore, 277 AXIS DATA, 563
database Axis manager, 280
(see glossary) Bad tooling !, 222
Debug, 586 Bar support, 449
accessory command buttons, 589 Bore from geometry, 420
Break/Parameters box, 588 Bore with C axis on circular side, 420
information bars, 589 Bore with C axis on straight side, 419
instructions, 589 Call Macro, 476
instructions box, 588 Carriage transfer, 445
ISO strings area, 588 Customised panel parameters, description, 377
menu description, 586 Cut from geometry, 429
(see glossary) Enable/Disable vacuum, 442
Debug application software, 586 Filters, 182
Decorations, context menu items, 338 Generic bore, 418
default Generic cut, 427
(see glossary) Geometry definition, 344
defining colours Group manager, 180
Editor, 64 Horizontal bore, 418
deleting Insertion, 437
aggregates from the list, 185 Insertion from geometry, 438

14 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

Layer management, 295, 490 drag and drop

List of macros, 474 (see glossary)
List of macros, description, 474 drag the selection
Machine tooling, 196, 212, 214 (see glossary)
Magazine tooling, 201, 217 drawing
Milling, 391 arcs with the EGA, 353
Milling from geometry, 393 circles with the EGA, 358
Milling from geometry, description of fields, 394 commands for creating DXF files, 506
Milling, description of fields, 394 ellipse with the EGA, 356
Mobile support transfer, 443 enter the start point, 343
Object properties, description, 229, 231, 233 how to create a text, 367
Opens the layer modification window for the drawing, how to customise, 113
296 how to define a geometry, 344
Open/Close clamp, 443 how to update, 294
Origin - , description, 225 lines with the EGA, 351
Origin manager, 225 list and description of tools, 350
Piece formatting, 428 ovals with the EGA, 357
Piece variables, 288, 582 polygons with the EGA, 360
Piece variables, description, 374 rectangles with the EGA, 359
Pocketing, 412 select one or more elements, 293
Pocketing, description of fields, 413 stars with the EGA, 361
Rectangular cut, 428 with EGA tools, 342
SELECT PROGRAMS, 568 drawing buttons, 342
Settings (ALT+S) (BatchRun), 541 arc type, 353
Setup, description, 123 description, 350
Simulator, 336 geometric figures, 356
SOFTWARE LIMITS, 205 line type, 351
Summary, 213, 218 start point, 343
System bores, 418 drive
Text, 367 (see glossary)
to program piece thickness tracing, 440 drop down menu
Tool class manager, 162 (see glossary)
Tool holder - , description, 203 drop-down button
Tool magazine - , description, 201 (see glossary)
Tool parameters, boring/milling/cut, 167 duplicate geometries, 364
Tool parameters, insertions, 177 DXF
Tool parameters, labels, 178 create the layers with BiesseWorks DXF formalism,
Tool parameters, thickness tracers, 175 507
Tool type manager, 165 create the layers with CNI DXF formalism, 531
Vertical bore, 418 drawing rules, 506
dialogue box Simulator how to create them with the CAD, 505
description of buttons, 337 keys created by the system while saving, 290
dialogue boxes (see glossary)
(see glossary)
directory E
(see glossary) Editor, 62
disabling a job, 546 body of the application, 63
distance between centres graphics customisation, 113
(see glossary) information on colours, 64
distance between spindles, 206 menu description, 64
Divide machining operation, menu item, 370 Editor application, 62

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

15
 Analytical Index

Editor application software, 62 TAB, 57

Editor application software document, 145, 287 field
EGA (see glossary)
(see glossary) file
EGA tools (see glossary)
drawing tools, 350 file processing procedures, 547
how to use them for drawing, 342 file status indicator, 575
text creation tools, 367 files with extension MTA, 221
tool used to define a geometry, 344 files with extension MTC, 218
enter parameters for work table, 243 files with extension MTM, 213
Enter password, 143 files with extension PCF, 237
errors present warning indicator, 556 files with extension TLS, 239
examples filling in a job list, 576
angled repetitions, 346 filter
how to create a curved side, 326 (see glossary)
how to create a drawing with the EGA, 362 Filters bar, 86
how to create a macro, 468 flat surface sides
how to create a piece from a geometric profile, 314 notes on use, 328
how to create a straight side, 329 floppy disk
milling operations with multi-descent, 466 (see glossary)
milling with a general geometric profile, 393 forced movement of the spindles, 565
milling with an integrated geometric profile, 391 FreeForm
profile pocketing, 415 (see glossary)
repeats on the circumference, 347 freeform (splines), 506
setting parameters by inserting algebraic expres- function keys
sions, 245 (see glossary)
spindles symmetry, 215
use of filters, 182 G
examples of inclined/vertical faces General bar, 104
sides from geometries on several faces, 321 generic boring operation
examples of non-standard faces definition, 148, 150
sides from geometric profile, 315 programming, 418
sides on side faces, 319 geometric data
examples of trapezoidal faces (see glossary)
sides from geometries on several faces, 322 geometric profile
explode a node definition, 147
(see glossary) Global type variable, 494
Explode, context menu items, 293 graphics area, 208
exporting area description and structure, 49
documents in CID format, 290 Editor application software area, 63
documents in DXF format, 290 hiding the graphics, 297
documents in WMF format, 290 how to update, 294
extension WorkTableTooling application area, 88
(see glossary) (see glossary)
groups
F using the shortcut or context menu, 181
fastpath key combinations
ARROW, 57 H
CTRL, 57 hardware
ESC, 57 (see glossary)
SHIFT, 57

16 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

hoods instruction “WFC”, 324

cleaning, 477 notes on use, 326
horizontal boring instruction “WFL”, 326
definition, 149 notes on use, 328
horizontal flip instructions box, 588
(see glossary) instructions (Debug), 589
horizontal machining operations instruments Graphic output, 294
definition, 148 interactive
(see glossary)
I interpolated milling with C-axis, 455
icon interpolation
(see glossary) (see glossary)
ID interpolation speed
(see glossary) (see glossary)
Implode, context menu items, 292 inverter
import area, 108 (see glossary)
BatchRun area, 106 ISO, 541
description of Editor area, 485 (see glossary)
description of the quick or context menu, 486 ISO code, 300
Editor application software area, 63 ISO files
import the files how to generate them from Editor, 540
using automatic mode, 484 ISO instruction, 300
importing ISO strings area, 588
machine data/database, 268
work table setting (TLS file), 239 J
importing DXF/CID files, etc., 483 job List
using manual mode, 485 (see glossary)
importing to BatchRun job order
files to be processed, 542 definition, 545
in line how to create, 545
(see glossary) how to delete, 546
information bars, 558, 575, 589 how to disable, 546
input how to rename, 546
(see glossary) jobs, 108
INS key jobs area
to tool aggregates, 220 BatchRun area, 106
to tool the magazine, 217 JOG movements, 562
tooling the operating section, 212 (see glossary)
insert programs table, 574
inserting files in the list, 577 K
insertions keyboard fast path key combinations, 57
recording/cataloguing, 177 keyboard keys
instruction “ENDPATH”, 342 list of fast path key combinations, 57
instruction “GEO”, 342
instruction “ROTATE”, 302
instruction “ROUTG”, 342
L
instruction “ROUT”, 342 labels
instruction “SCALE”, 303 recording/cataloguing, 178
instruction “SHIFT”, 304 language
instruction “WAIT”, 309 setting the language, 144
notes on use, 311 large piece

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

17
 Analytical Index

definition, 243 commands to move, 557

launch machine replacement, 122
see "run" in the glossary machine axes
layer data description, 280
creating and modifying, 296 setting the speed of manual movements, 562
creation using the BiesseWorks DXF keys, 507 machine axes reset
creation using the CNI DXF keys, 531 definition and procedures, 561
creation using the Editor parameters, 527 machine axis
dialogue box Layer management, 490 see the machine manual
managing imported layers, 490 machine configuration
Layer keys consult the magazine tool-holders, 203
customise the keys, 508 consult the magazines, 201
keys for exporting DXF files, 290 consult the T, TH and TP spindles, 196
list of parameters, 508 customising the work table, 237
layer of the DXF open the customised configuration of the tables, 239
BiesseWorks DXF, 507 save the configuration document, 238
CNI DXF, 531 Work table configuration document, 236
layout machine data
(see glossary) backup/restore data, 272
lead-in speed Machine data bar, 103
(see glossary) machine environments
line type tools, 351 description, 557
linear face machine environments box, 557
(see glossary) machine status
List, 570 indicator, 556
description of buttons, 575 machine status indicator, 556
description of the application software, 570 machine systems
description of the insert programs table, 574 vacuum systems/clamps management, 255
description of the quick menu, 571 MachineConfiguration, 99
file status indicator, 575 menu description, 100
how to modify data in the programs, 581 MachineConfiguration application, 99
how to modify variables in the programs, 581 MachineConfiguration application software, 99
information bars, 575 machining macro
menu description, 572 (see glossary)
List application buttons, 575 machining operation
List application software, 570 suspending the program, 549
List instructions machining operation programming
instruction “END”, 581 define the piece variables, 374
instruction “JMP”, 579 machining operations
instruction “READ”, 580 how to create variables, 495
instruction “STOP”, 578 types of programmable machining operations, 148
instruction “WRIT”, 580 machining program
instruction “_NOR”, 581 backup/restore data, 275
instruction “_SXG”, 581 basic concepts, 287
instruction “”, 578 copy graphics area elements, 294
instruction “ copy programming rows, 294
”, 578 create the document, 288
list programming instructions, 577 definition, 145
delete graphics area elements, 294
M delete programming rows, 294
machine deleting the table tooling, 252

18 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

display the hidden parameters, 292 structure of applications, 49

display the parameters list, 292 menu Database (MachineConfiguration)
display the properties windows, 295 list of options, 101
hiding the graphics, 297 option Aggregates, 184
how to run, 566 option Origins, 225
insert comments, 292 option Spindles, 196
insert indents in the rows, 292 option Tool magazines, 201
modify levels, 296 menu description
program creation phases, 286 Debug, 586
program functions, 299 Editor, 64
programming and moving, 286 List, 572
types of programmable machining operations, 148 MachineConfiguration, 100
update graphics area, 294 Positions, 553
Using the command Explode, 293 Statistics, 591
Using the command Implode, 292 ToolManager, 84
(see glossary) WorkTableTooling, 89
macro menu Display
backup/restore data, 275 list of options, 72
definition, 467 menu Display (MachineConfiguration)
enable/disable the buttons, 475 list of options, 102
how to create, 468 menu Display (ToolManager)
insertion in the program, 476 list of options, 85
opening and modifying structure, 475 menu Display (WorkTableTooling)
saving, 471 list of options, 91
(see glossary) option Displays the shaped piece, 253
macro HODD_CLE, 477 menu Display(Editor)
macro NoPRK, 477 option Graphic options..., 113
macro UNLOAD_T, 478 option Layer management, 295, 490
magazine tool-holder option Toolbars>Graphic output, 294
consult the data, 203 toolbar customising options, 112
Main bar, 86 menu Edit (Editor)
manual mode list of options, 66
importing DXF/CID files, etc., 485 menu Edit (WorkTableTooling)
marker list of options, 90
(see glossary) option Positions, 241
MDI, 562 option Removable supports..., 252
MDI positioned movements, 562 menu Edit(Editor)
medium piece option Properties..., 295
definition, 243 menu Export(Editor)
menu option To CID file, 290
description (Debug), 586 option To CIX file, 290
description (Editor), 64 option To DXF file, 290
description (List), 572 option To WMF file, 290
description (MachineConfiguration), 100 menu File (MachineConfiguration)
description (Positions), 553 list of options, 100
description (Statistics), 591 menu File (WorkTableTooling)
description (ToolManager), 84 list of options, 89
description (WorkTableTooling), 89 menu File(Editor)
menu bar, 53 list of options, 65
(see glossary) option New, 288
menu bar, 53 option Open, 289

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

19
 Analytical Index

option Print, 291 list of options, 94

option Save, 289 menu Windows (Editor)
menu Filters (ToolManager) list of options, 75
list of options, 85 menu ? (WorkTableTooling)
option Activate filters, 182 list of options, 94
option Groups manager, 180 milling
menu Help (Editor) definition, 151
list of options, 75 definition of pocketing, 151
menu Help (MachineConfiguration) types of milling operations, 151
list of options, 102 (see glossary)
menu Help (ToolManager) milling operation
list of options, 85 how to represent in the DXF, 524, 535
menu Insert milling operations
option Millings(Editor), 350 definition, 151
menu Insert (WorkTableTooling) types of milling operations, 151
list of options, 92 milling operations with multi-descent
menu Insert(Editor) notes on programming, 465
list of options, 67 milling with a general geometric profile, 393
option Circular side, 324 milling with an integrated geometric profile, 391
option Geometry scale, 303 mobile panel support limits
option ISO code, 300 positions reading, 121
option Move geometry mobile panel supports
option Move piece, 301 positioning management, 231
option Rotate geometry, 302 mobile support symmetrical tooling, 232
option Side from geometry on side faces, 317 modify variables
option Side from geometry using section plan, 320 inserted in the list programs, 581
option Sides from geometry, 312 modifying
option Straight side, 326 aggregate data, 185
option Wait for piece positioning, 309 data in files imported to BatchRun, 543
menu Main (ToolManager) data relating to tool type, 166
list of options, 84 name of levels, 296
menu Program(Editor) piece dimensions, 288
list of options, 74 tool class data, 162
option Variables, 495 modifying panel data
menu Tooling (MachineConfiguration) inserted in the list programs, 581
list of options, 101 module
option Aggregate tooling, 220 (see glossary)
option Machine tooling, 212 mouse
option Magazine tooling, 217 buttons, 55
menu Tools (Editor) cursor, 55
list of options, 74 (see glossary)
menu Tools (MachineConfiguration) mouse buttons, 55
list of options, 102 mouse pointer, 55
menu Tools (ToolManager) movement environment
list of options, 84 using, 251
option New tool, 167, 175, 177 moving the geometry, 304
option Tool class manager, 162 moving the machine axes, 562
option Tool type manager, 165 manual movement, 562
menu Tools (WorkTableTooling) MDI movement, 562
option Delete table tooling, 252 setting speed, 562
menu Window (WorkTableTooling) moving the operating section

20 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

procedures, 565 operating section

multiple selection software limits, 205
mobile panel supports, 232 tooling procedure, 212
shapeable suction cup/clamps, 227 (see glossary)
stops, 230 operating section spindles
consult the data, 196
N operating section stroke
NC maximum and minimum positions, 205
(see glossary) optimise single BPP files, 540
node optimise the imported files in the BatchRun, 544
see "tree list" in the glossary optimised machining operation
non-optimised machining operation (see glossary)
(see glossary) optimising the list, 582
non-parametric tooling option button
tooling procedures, 248 (see glossary)
non-standard faces output
functions to create new sides, 299 (see glossary)
non-standard sides overturning the piece
functions to create new sides, 299 inserting the suspension in the program, 309
notes on use
boring program symmetry, 462 P
creating the aggregate, 192 parameter
creating the chip deflector, 193 (see glossary)
curved surface sides, 326 parameterising
data items for tool lead-in and lead-out, 463 definition of automatic program parameter setting,
flat surface sides, 328 339
machining operations with "repositioning, 460 parametric tooling
milling operations on the mirror origin, 464 tooling procedures, 244
milling operations with C-axis, 455 password, 143
milling operations with the AGGRE42 aggregate, 458 (see glossary)
milling operations with "multi-descent", 465 Paste, context menu items, 294
milling with a sharp corner, 454 path
programming with chip deflector, 452 (see glossary)
sides from geometric profile, 314 piece
sides on side faces, 318 definition of standard sides, 146
support panel levelling, 461 how to represent in the DXF, 513, 532
suspending the machining operation, 311 positioning management, 233
vertical milling operations in YZ/XZ, 457 reference corners, 146
"multiple-run" milling operations, 459 piece pocketing, 151
notice window piece positioning
(see glossary) inserting the suspension in the program, 309
NOTUSED variable, 244 piece profiling
(see glossary)
O piece reference corners, 146
offset piece tracing, 440
(see glossary) piece variables, 494
open a document, 289 CKOP, 494
opening CUSTSTR, 494
(see glossary) FCN, 494
opening a job list, 576 JIGTH, 494
LPX, 494

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

21
 Analytical Index

LPY, 494 how to use BatchRun, 541

LPZ, 494 processing files with BatchRun
MATERIAL, 494 procedure, 547
ORLST, 494 processing programs, 540
SYMMETRY, 494 profile
TLCHK, 494 (see glossary)
TOOLING, 494 profile pocketing, 412
UNIQUE, 494 profiling
XCUT, 494 (see glossary)
YCUT, 494 program
planning DXF, 505 stop/cancel, 549
PLC program errors
(see glossary) warning indicator, 556
pocketing program functions
(see glossary) definition, 299
polar co-ordinates definition of curved surface sides, 324
(see glossary) definition of flat surface sides, 326
polylines, 506 ISO code, 300
(see glossary) moving the geometry, 304
positioning instructions, 442 reducing/increasing the size of the geometry, 303
positioning management, 227 rotating the geometry, 302
Positions, 552 sides from geometric profile, 312
axis positions box, 557 sides from geometries on several faces, 320
command buttons, 558 sides on side faces, 317
description of the quick menu, 559 suspending the machining operation, 309
errors present warning indicator, 556 temporary translation of the origin, 301
information bars, 558 program optimisation, 331
machine environments box, 557 programming commands
machine status indicator, 556 BCA command, 419
menu description, 553 BCL command, 419
positions BG command, 418
reading of limit support positions, 121 BH command, 418
Positions application software, 552 BV command, 418
practice B_GEO command, 420
boring on a "non-standard" side, 605 CUT_F command, 427
boring with parametric tooling, 612 CUT_FR command, 428
examples for multi-centre machines, 616 CUT_G command, 427
in general borings, 602 CUT_GEO command, 428
milling, 608 CUT_X command, 427
predefined data fields, 52 CUT_Y command, 427
predefined field GEO command, 342
see "data field" in the glossary GEOTEXT command, 367
printing the document, 291 INSERT command, 437
procedures INSERTG command, 437
aggregate tooling/untooling, 220 ISO command, 300
importing DXF/CID files, etc., 483 list of commands and parameters, 621
operating section tooling/untooling, 212 OFFGEO command, 364
to create DXF files, 505 POCK command, 390
to tool/untool the tool magazine, 217 ROUT command, 390
process single BatchRun files, 544 ROUTG command, 390
processing files S32 command, 418

22 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

TT command, 440 inserting different materials, 437

using the command “GEO”, 344 instruction “ROTATE”, 302
WFGL command, 317 instruction “SCALE”, 303
WFGPS command, 320 instruction “SHIFT”, 304
WTCARRIAGE instruction, 445 interpolated milling with C-axis, 455
WTEND instruction, 448 ISO instruction, 300
WTGROUP instructions, 448 making the boring symmetrical, 462
WTLIFT instruction, 449 milling, 390
WTPLANE instruction, 443 milling applied to a text, 415
WTUNICLAMP instruction, 443 milling operations with multi-descent, 465
WTVACUM instruction, 442 milling with a general geometric profile, 393
“ENDPATH” command, 342 milling with an integrated geometric profile, 391
“GEO” command button, 342 modifying piece dimensions, 288
“OFFSET” command, 301 modifying the structure of the macros, 475
“ROTATE” command, 302 notes about carrying out a "repositioning”, 460
“ROUTG” command button, 342 notes for creating sharp corners, 454
“ROUT” command button, 342 OFFGEO command, 364
“SCALE” command, 303 open the macros, 475
“SHIFT” command, 304 optimising the program, 331
“WAIT” command, 309 parameterising the program, 339
“WFC” command, 324 positioning instructions, 442
“WFG” command, 312 procedure defining a geometry, 344
“WFL” command, 326 procedures for use of EGA, 342
programming instructions profile pocketing, 412
see programming commands programming piece tracing, 440
programming machining operations representation of the piece, 146
basic concepts on variables, 494 save macros, 471
boring from geometry, 420 save the program (document), 289
boring operations, 418 saving documents in different formats, 290
create flat surface sides, 326 sides from geometric profile, 312
creating curved surface sides, 324 sides from geometries on several faces, 320
creating the ISO file, 540 sides on side faces, 317
cut from geometric drawing, 428 support panel levelling, 461
cutting operations, 427 suspending the program, 309
definition of macro, 467 text creation procedure, 367
description of the simulator, 336 UpdatePanel function, 288
drawing tools, 350 use of the commands area, 291
DXF export keys, 290 using field Exports the symmetric section, 464
emptying applied to a text, 416 using the aggregate AGGRE42, 458
enable simultaneous machining of two pieces, 582 using the functions, 299
enable/disable the macros, 475 using the tool lead-in/lead-out data items, 463
enter the WTEND instruction, 448 using then chip deflector, 452
enter the WTGROUP instruction, 448 vertical milling in YZ/XZ, 457
entering the WTCARRIAGE instruction, 445 "multiple-run" milling operations, 459
entering the WTLIFT instruction, 449 “OFFSET” instruction, 301
entering the WTPLANE instruction, 443 programming rows, 51
entering the WTUNICLAMP instruction, 443 Properties..., context menu items, 295
entering the WTVACUM instruction, 442 pure number
how to create a macro, 468 (see glossary)
how to create variables, 495
insert the macros in the program, 476

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

23
 Analytical Index

Q S
quadrangular cuts, 153 safety position
programming, 428 (see glossary)
quick menu saving
(see glossary) aggregate configuration (MTA file), 221
aggregate tooling, 221
R backup machine data, 272
random backup macros, 339
(see glossary) backup tool database, 272
range BatchRun data, 548
(see glossary) carrying out a backup of machining programs, 339
rapid tool search, 182 document, 289
reducing/increasing the size of the geometry, 303 documents in different formats, 290
refresh list, 582
(see glossary) list from BatchRun, 543
relative path macro, 471
(see glossary) magazine configuration (MTC file), 218
relative position operating section configuration (MTM file), 213
definition, 245 Operating section tooling, 213
release tool database data, 161
(see glossary) tool magazine tooling, 218
remove from the table (see glossary)
suction cups/clamps, 227 saving modifications to the List, 582
remove the table supports, 252 saving the database
Renaming a job, 546 indicator disk, 161
replacing a program in the list, 577 search button
repositioning of the tool (see glossary)
notes on programming, 460 select one or more drawing elements, 293
reset selected element data area, 208
(see glossary) selecting
restore (see glossary)
machine data/tool database restore, 274 semiautomatic mode, 567, 584
machining programs restore, 277 setting
macros restore, 277 automatic tooling parameters, 115
(see glossary) setting the language, 144
rotating Settings bar, 87
shapeable suction cup/clamps, 227 Setup
rotating the geometry, 302 active machine change, 122
rotating the piece field Active type, 537
inserting the suspension in the program, 309 setting the formalism, 537
run tab Boring data, 133
(see glossary) tab Cutting data, 135
running single programs, 566 tab DXF Definition, 139
automatic mode, 566 tab Editor Environment, 132
semiautomatic mode, 567 tab Editor windows, 133
running the job list, 584 tab General, 141
automatic mode, 584 tab Import from NC, 138
semiautomatic mode, 584 tab Insertion data, 142
tab Job list, 141
tab Lead-in Lead-out, 139

24 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

tab Machine, 130 spindle override, 555

tab Machining operations, 130 spindle windows
tab Milling data, 136 description of the data fields, 196
tab Optimiser, 126 spindles
tab Password, 142 how to move, 565
tab Tooling, 141 splines (freeform), 506
tab Tools, 128 standard sides of the piece, 146
tab User, 124 start point tool, 343
tab Work tables, 142 Starting BackupManager, 110
(see glossary) Statistics
Setup dialogue box, 111 description and usage, 590
shapeable suction cups description of buttons, 591
positioning management, 227 menu description, 591
sharp corner Statistics application software, 590
notes on programming, 454 status bar, 54
sharp corners Editor application software bar, 63
description of macro, 479 structure of applications, 49
shortcuts status bar traffic light (Editor), 63
ARROW, 57 step
CTRL, 57 (see glossary)
ESC, 57 stopping the program, 549
generic, 57 stops
SHIFT, 57 positioning management, 230
TAB, 57 store
side stops supports machine data, 272
positioning management, 231 machining programs, 339
sides from geometric profile macro, 339
examples, 315, 319 tool database, 272
notes on use, 314 straight sides, 326
sides from geometries on several faces string
examples of inclined/vertical faces, 321 (see glossary)
examples of trapezoidal faces, 322 stroke
sides on side faces (see glossary)
notes on use, 318 structure of BatchRun, 106
simulate the imported files in the BatchRun, 544 structure of the Editor application, 63
simulator structure of the tooling windows, 208
definition and use, 336 structure of the ToolManager application, 83
description of buttons, 337 structure of the WorkTableTooling application, 88
simulator buttons, 337 sub-program
slot (see glossary)
(see glossary) subspindles of the tools
small piece managing, 188
definition, 243 supplementary devices
software (see glossary)
(see glossary) support
software interface (see glossary)
(see glossary) support panel
software limit (see glossary)
(see glossary) support panel levelling
software limits, 205 notes on programming, 461
software tools, 53 suspending the machining operation, 549

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

25
 Analytical Index

notes on use, 311 basic concepts, 158

to position the piece, 309 consult/modify the type data, 166
symmetrical milling create new types, 165
notes on programming, 464 delete the type from the list, 166
system boring toolbar
definition, 149 (see glossary)
(see glossary) toolbars, 53
system window customising, 112
(see glossary) macros enabling/disabling bar, 475
systems management environment structure of applications, 49
use and description, 255 tooling
Systems (WorkTableTooling) cataloguing aggregates, 157
list of options, 92 cataloguing tools, 157
management of tools with chips, 261
T Tooling bar, 104
tab tooling environment
(see glossary) automatic positioning, 249
table management of piece positioning, 233
(see glossary) management of shapeable suction cup positioning,
technological data 227
(see glossary) management of stop positioning, 230
technological information non-parametric positioning, 248
see "technological data" in the glossary parametric positioning, 243
temporary translation of the origin perform the tooling, 240
setting the new offset, 301 support positioning management, 231
text box tooling errors
see "data field" in the glossary misalignment between tooling and data, 222
the rotation speed tooling the machine, 208
(see glossary) aggregate tooling procedures, 220
the tool magazines comparing two configurations, 213
machine tooling procedures, 217 description of buttons, 208
thickness tracers machine tooling procedures, 217
recording/cataloguing, 175 procedures for tooling the operating section, 212
title bar, 49 structure of the tooling windows, 208
structure of applications, 49 using the shortcut or context menu, 209
Tool bar, 104 tooling the table
tool class automatic tooling parameters, 115
basic concepts, 158 Tooling window buttons, 208
consult class data, 162 tooling windows
modify class data, 162 description of buttons, 208
tool data area, 208 ToolManager, 83
tool database, 157 body of the application, 83
backup/restore data, 272 description of the quick or context menu, 159
tool group how to update the tool database, 161
basic concepts, 158 menu description, 84
description of procedures, 180 use of the data area table, 159
tool magazine tooling ToolManager application, 83
comparing two configurations, 218 ToolManager areas
tool Normal cursor, 293 data area, 83
tool search filters, 182 tree list area, 83
tool type tools

26 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

add a tool to a group, 159 UpdatePanel instruction, 288

basic concepts on units/types/classes, 158 updating the drawing, 294
cataloguing/recording, 157 updating the tool database, 161
class management, 162 utilities, 105
create new aggregates, 184 BackupManager, 110
create new types, 165 basic concepts, 48
delete aggregates from the list, 185 BatchRun, 105
delete tool types, 166 replace the machine, 122
delete tools from the database, 159 (see glossary)
grouping tools, 180
modify types, 166 V
modify/consult aggregate data, 185 vacuum system
modify/consult class data, 162 view, 255
notes for creating the deflector, 193 variables
notes to create the AGGRE42 aggregate, 192 arithmetical operators of the VBScript functions, 497
quick search filters, 182 how to arrange them in sequential order, 499
record insertions in the database, 177 how to consult the available variables, 500
record the aggregates, 184 how to create, 495
record the labels in the database, 178 how to delete them from the list, 500
record tools in the database, 167 how to modify the type, 499
recording thickness tracers in the database, 175 how to modify them in the list, 581
rename a tool, 159 how to print the list, 500
type management, 165 how to store them, 500
tools with chips how to update the list, 499
cataloguing/tooling, 261 list of VBScript language, 498
Tools (WorkTableTooling) types of variable used, 494
list of options, 93 VBScript instructions
tooltip description of certain instructions, 501
(see glossary) instruction For...Next, 501
Tree, 63 instruction If...Then, 501
tree area instruction If...Then...Else, 501
see "tree list area" instruction While...WEnd, 503
tree list, 50 VBScript language
see "tree list" in the glossary Arithmetical operators, 497
(see glossary) calculation functions, 498
tree list area, 208 instruction For...Next, 501
area description and structure, 50 instruction If...Then, 501
Editor application software area, 63 instruction If...Then...Else, 501
ToolManager application software area, 83 instruction While...WEnd, 503
WorkTableTooling application area, 88 pre-set instructions, 501
TrueType vertical boring operations
(see glossary) definition, 149
TT (10-2009) = 3805 - sistemati parametri, fatti corss a vertical machining operations
param delle fresature, 413 definition, 148
type variable Environment, 494 vertical milling in YZ/XZ, 457
type variable Local, 494 visualise
(see glossary)
U
unload the electrospindle W
description of macro, 478 waste
UpdatePanel function, 288

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

27
 Analytical Index

(see glossary) remove the work table supports, 252

WFG instruction, 312 save the configuration document, 238
examples, 315 save the tooling, 224
notes on use, 314 simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces, 254
WFGL instruction, 317 support positioning management, 231
examples, 319 the movement environment, 251
notes on use, 318 the movement environment context menu, 235
WFGPS instruction, 320 the systems management environment, 255
examples of faces, 321 the tooling environment, 240
wooden panel the tooling environment context menu, 227
(see glossary) tooling environments, 224
work centre view the clamps locking system, 255
(see glossary) view the shaped piece, 253
work list view the systems settings, 255
generate list with BatchRun, 543 view the vacuum system, 255
how to fill in, 576 working area
how to insert files, 577 how to enlarge or reduce, 54
how to open, 576 working cycle
how to optimise programs, 582 (see glossary)
how to replace a program, 577 working dimensions
how to run the programs, 584 (see glossary)
how to save it, 582 working units
how to save modifications, 582 (see glossary)
programming instructions, 577 WorkTableTooling, 88
work table body of the application, 88
automatic tooling, 249 menu description, 89
configuring, 237 perform the tooling, 240
non-parametric tooling procedures, 248 save the tooling, 224
open the customised configuration of the tables, 239 the movement environment, 251
origins check/change, 225 the movement environment context menu, 235
parametric tooling procedures, 244 the systems management environment, 255
remove the supports, 252 the tooling environment context menu, 227
save the PCF file, 238 tooling environments, 224
tooling, 223 work table tooling, 223
Work table configuration document, 236 WorkTableTooling application, 88
work table object properties table, 253 WorkTableTooling application software, 88
work table origins, 225 WorkTableTooling areas
work table tooling, 223 graphics area, 88
automatic positioning, 249 tree list area, 88
configure the table (PCF file), 237 write-enabled data fields, 52
deleting the tooling from the program, 252 write-enabled field
management of piece positioning, 233 see "data field" in the glossary
management of shapeable suction cup positioning, WTCARRIAGE instruction, 445
227 WTEND instruction, 448
management of stop positioning, 230 WTGROUP instructions, 448
non-parametric positioning, 248 WTLIFT instruction, 449
open the customised configuration of the tables, 239 WTPLANE instruction, 443
parametric positioning, 243 WTUNICLAMP instruction, 443
position input window, 241 WTVACUM instruction, 442
positioning point table, 253
properties table, 253

28 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Analytical Index

Z
zoom
tool description, 54
zoom in pointer, 54
zoom out pointer, 54
zoom tools, 54
"multiple-run" milling operation, 459

%
dialogue box
Program variables -, 495

–¦
“Figure” type tools, 356
“generic” geometric profile, 390
definition, 342
“OFFSET” instruction, 301
“step” type, 562, 563
”integrated” geometric profile, 390
definition, 342
”positioned” type, 562, 563
”single step” type, 562, 563

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

29
 Analytical Index

30 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

Introduction

This manual has been prepared by BIESSE for use by its customers only, and it contains
information protected by copyright. It must not be photocopied or reproduced in any form, either
fully or in part, without the prior written consent of BIESSE.

To avoid any incorrect manoeuvres that could endanger people, it is important to read and fully
understand all the documents that come with the machine. BIESSE cannot be held responsible or
liable for any damage resulting from the improper use of the documentation.

Information on trade marks

BiesseWorks is a registered trademark of BIESSE S.p.A.

Warnings
No operations not envisaged and specified in the User Instructions must be carried out on the PC
connected to the machine. In particular:
z it is forbidden to modify the configuration of the operating system

z it is forbidden to upgrade the operating system

z it is forbidden to install any antivirus, firewall or software in general

z it is forbidden to install any peripheral USB devices not envisaged, apart from USB flash drives

BIESSE cannot be held responsible for any malfunctioning caused by the failure to observe these
warnings.

Information about the document

This document is supplied with the software package, and it gives all the information needed in
order to use the interface correctly.

The procedures described must only be carried out by suitably trained personnel.

It is assumed that the user has a good knowledge of the machine, and of the Microsoft Windows
operating system environment.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

31
 Introduction

Conventional symbols used

The parts of the text requiring special attention are highlighted and preceded by the symbols
illustrated and explained below.

DANGER: this indicates dangerous actions that must be carefully considered in

order to avoid serious accidents.

WARNING: this indicates procedures and behaviour to be adopted in order to avoid any
damage to property.

NOTE: indicates additional suggestions that are particularly important and must not be
ignored.

32 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

Glossary

Absolute origin Basic reference used to determine the various machine offsets.

Route showing the complete position of a file starting from the root, i.e.
that reports the name of the drive and the list of all the folders/sub-
Absolute path
folders containing the file (e.g.:
C:\Programmi\Lavori\Fresature\rettangolo.bpp).

Worked wooden panel, to be fixed to the FT work table, allowing a light

Air cushion surface layer of air to be released in order to facilitate the loading/unloading of
pieces.

Alphanumeric Code made up of both numbers and letters.

A synonym of "program" - software with the specific task of managing

Application
data, graphics, etc.

Safety copy. Files are duplicated and saved on a support other than
Backup the one that is normally used. This operation is carried out so as to
have a copy of the document in case the original is damaged.

Bar code Bar code. Parallel bars of various sizes used to identify a product.

Map of bits. Bit map graphic format representing the images as a

series of dots (pixels). Bit maps are created in various file formats (GIF,
Bitmap
JPEG, BMP etc.) and can be read by various graphics programs
(Photoshop, Paint etc.).

General term used to indicate one or more AutoCAD objects that are
Block
associated to create a single object.

Field sensitive to a click on the mouse, which enables a command,

Button
displays a window, etc. (command field)

Bypass To avoid or exclude a data item.

Acronym of Computer Aided Design. Identifies a type of Editor for 2-D

CAD
or 3-D graphic design (example: AutoCAD, Solid Edge etc.).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

33
 Glossary

Acronym of Computer Aided Manufacturing. Type of software that

allows the use of a CAD installed in a computer to control and manage
CAM
operation of processing machines. A CAD-CAM system allows
planning, design and machining of a piece on a machine.

Label of the dialogue boxes which, if selected with the cursor, shows a
Card
list of data.

System of co-ordinates obtained by fixing on the plane a point ("origin")

Cartesian (linear) co-
and two straight lines, generally perpendicular, passing through it and
ordinates
called abscissa (X-axis) and ordinate (Y-axis).

The three oriented lines (X, Y and Z) used to give the co-ordinates to a
Cartesian axes
point on the table.

Abbreviation of Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Information storage

CD-ROM support comprising a circular disk that can be read using a laser beam.
It can contain up to 700 Megabytes of data.

Chamfer Eliminate sharp corners from the piece.

Command field for activating or deactivating

Check box specific operations.

Acronym of CAD/CAM interchange format (system of exchanging

CID drawings from one CAD/CAM package to another). File format
containing graphic information and technological data.

Portion of the piece resulting from the rounding of a part of the piece
Circular face
itself.

Acronym of CAD/CAM Interchange format (system of exchanging

CIX drawings from one CAD/CAM package to another). File extension
containing geometric information and technological data.

Indicates the action of pressing and immediately releasing the mouse

Click button on an object (icon, button, etc.) located under the pointer on
screen.

Press and immediately release the left mouse button to enable the
Click
function of a selected command.

Tool designed to perform a specific function/operation. For example,

Command
the “Print” command allows you to print a document.

Sensitive button or box for activating specific functions or confirming

Command field
the settings.

34 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Glossary

Commands area Software interface zone showing the programming rows.

Element with characteristics that enable it to be used with a specific

Compatible
program or with a specific machine.

Device (or part) that joins two elements; for example in the tool it is the
Connection device (1)
part that is inserted in the spindle.

All the numbers that allow determination of the position of a point on a

Co-ordinates
plane or in space.

Coupling (2) Method by which the tool enters the piece.

Block, system stoppage. When the PC blocks and stops working it is

Crash
said to have crashed.

Synonym: pointer
Mobile element visible on screen, which moves as the mouse is
Cursor
moved. It is usually shown as an arrow and serves to indicate and
select commands.

Data area Software interface zone that includes data fields.

Area within a frame, where it is possible to enter

values (text box) or choose predefined options
(combined box).
Data field

Database. Stored data arranged in an organised manner so that it is

Database
readily available using a search and management program.

Process for the removal of errors from a software program, carried out
Debug
using special application software.

Predefined / pre-set. Basic information used by the control, set in the

Default software to respond to the needs of users in the event of failure to input
the information requested.

Set of messages visualised by the processing unit to indicate any

Diagnostics
errors in the use of the commands.

A box that lets you dialogue with the active application; generally used
Dialogue boxes to choose options or define data in order to perform a specific
command.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

35
 Glossary

Synonym:dir
Directory
Container or folder used to hold files or documents.

Distance between Distance between two parallel axes.

centres

Drag and drop Drag and drop. See “Dragging the selection”.

Refers to the action of pressing the left mouse button on an object, icon
Drag the selection
or element, and dragging it by holding down the button.

Computer hardware device (magnetic disk) displayed using a letter of

Drive the alphabet followed by a colon (A:, C:, etc.) and used to store and
read data.

Button allowing the development of fields,

the visualisation of a drop down menu or a
Drop-down button
list of predefined options (e.g. the button of
the combined box).

List of commands that develops vertically by clicking on the buttons,

Drop-down menu
commands, etc.

Acronym of Drawing Interchange Format. File format containing

DXF
vectored graphics.

Acronym of Editor Grafico Assistito (Assisted Graphic Editor). Method

EGA
of designing the profiles using special geometric elements.

With the left mouse button, click on the “+” symbol that comes before
Explode a node the icon and/or the name of the root (node) of a tree list, so that the list
of items inside the root itself is displayed.

Indicates the type of file, i.e. the application with which the file is
associated, and is made up of three or four characters preceded by a
Extension dot. The extension txt indicates a text only file that can be read using
any text Editor; the extension bmp indicates a graphic raster file that
can be displayed using special graphic Editors, etc.

A defined area containing data or commands (data field or command

Field
field).

Defined set of information collected in a single unit, stored in a drive

File
under a name and an extension.

Used to eliminate undesired data or fields in order to speed up certain

Filter
operations, for example search operations.

36 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Glossary

Floppy disk. Information storage support comprising a magnetic disk

Floppy disk contained in a plastic cover. Usually measures 3.5 inches and will hold
1.44 Megabytes of data.

Commands present in the CAD interface, that create freeform arcs

FreeForm
(Splines).

FreeForm See “FreeForm”.

Special keyboard keys (F1..F12) which, if pressed, can be used to

Function keys
carry out certain functions.

Geometric data Set of graphic information used to create a drawing

Graphics area Software interface zone dedicated to graphic representations.

Physical elements of the computer: Tabs, cables, keyboard, monitor,

Hardware
peripheral devices, etc.

Overturning an object along the horizontal axis; in this way, the

Horizontal flip
overturned object will mirror the previous one.

Icon Graphic image used to represent a button, an item in a tree list, etc.

ID Identification code.

In line Two or more elements connected together.

Input Incoming pulses.

Interactive Used to indicate an element that acts in correlation with others.

Connect the paths of two or more axes so that both arrive

Interpolation
simultaneously at the end point of the machining operation.

Speed used by the various machine axes when moving in unison to

Interpolation speed
reach a specific point.

Inverter Device used to feed and control the rotation speed of an alternating
current motor.

Acronym of International Standardisation Organisation. International

standardisation body determining technological and industrial
ISO
standards. The term is currently used to indicate file formats containing
the numerical control machine programming language.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

37
 Glossary

Movements made by the axis with the aid of a specific manual

JOG movements
command.

Levels created when producing a drawing. Think of them as if they

were transparent sheets of paper, each of which contains an element
Layer
in the drawing, which are placed on top of each other to form the
complete drawing.

Layout Diagram showing the arrangement of the document to be printed.

Lead-in speed Speed at which a spindle penetrates.

Portion of the piece resulting from the straight cutting of a part of the
Linear face
piece itself.

Boring and milling subprograms with automatic parameter settings,

Machining macros
created to be called up during programming of the piece.

Type of document (file) containing not only the vector graphics but also
Machining program
technological data regarding the working of the piece.

Set of instructions written using a high level language, to be associated

Macro with a name that can be called up every time the instructions in
question are to be repeated (subprograms).

Synonym: tick
Marker Mark put in the check boxes or in menu options to enable certain
functions/operations.

List of commands (to be selected with the mouse) that develop a sub-
Menu menu, i.e. a list of options that allow certain functions/operations to be
carried out.

Milling The milling operation or the machining of a piece with a milling cutter.

Collection of instructions or data required to carry out a specific task.

Module This is usually made up of an interface with data fields and command
fields, and an integral software part.

Mouse Tool used to move the cursor around the screen.

Acronym of Numerical Control. Electronic device used to control

NC machine operations, employing a software interface that allows it to
dialogue with the user.

Non-optimised In this type of machining operation, the order in which the machining
machining operation operations are to be carried out is decided by the operator.

38 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Glossary

Notice window Box showing messages or indicating errors.

Offset Distance from a reference point.

Display the internal structure of a program on screen in order to consult

Open
the alphanumeric data it contains.

Operating section Set of elements (working units and devices) for working the piece.

In this type of machining operation, the order in which the machining

Optimised machining
operations are to be carried out is decided by the NC, based on the
operation
parameters indicated by the operator.

Circular button allowing you to choose the

Option button option you want to make active. Used when only
one choice is possible.

Output Outgoing pulses.

An alphanumeric symbol associated with values or mathematical

Parameter expressions, to be used as a data item during the creation of a
machining program.

Password A secret alphanumeric code to protect the data from violation.

Route. String with the names of the folders in which the file to be found
Path
is stored (e.g. C:programmi\Biesse\Editor\editor.exe).

Piece profiling Machining the profile of the piece without modifying its thickness

Acronym of “Programmable Logic Controller”. An interface between

PLC the machine and the NC, for managing and controlling certain
functions.

Removal of a part of material from the surface of the piece, to create a

Pocketing
hollow.

System of co-ordinates to identify the position of a

point (p) on the plane. The point “p” is determined Y
Polar co-ordinates in by the length of the radius vector “r”, i.e. the P
the plane distance of the point “p” from the fixed point (pole), r
and by the angle “α” formed by the polar axis (x or y)
and the radius vector “r”. α
0
X

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

39
 Glossary

AutoCad command used to create figures formed of one or more

Polylines segments of lines and circular arcs connected together and treated as
a single object.

Electronically controlled area of the machine. Machines may have

Processing centre
several controlled processing centres.

Geometric figure created using a vector graphic program, representing

Profile
the machining operation to be carried out on the piece.

Milling the worked piece to produce the profile established with the
Profiling
software.

Number without symbols (e.g. brackets) and algebraic operators (+, -,

Pure number
*, /).

Synonym: quick menu

List of options that appears on the screen when the right mouse button
is pressed on an area of the application software. According to the
Quick menu
area in which the mouse cursor is located when the button is clicked,
this menu can be used to carry out operations relating to the specific
area.

Random Casual, made at random.

Set of values bounded by a maximum and minimum, or the distance

Range between a minimum value and a maximum value during a specific
period of measured time.

Refresh. Refreshes the graphic or text data displayed, using the new
Refresh
data entered.

Partial route relating to the current observation point (e.g. the current
Relative path folder). The relative route shows the position of a file or a directory in
relation to the current directory.

Release Issue, version.

Reset, zero-set. Indicates the procedure used to reset a software or a

Reset process and return its values to their original state. This operation will
cause all the data stored in the computer’s main memory to be lost.

Recovery of information saved during backup on supports other than

Restore
the original ones.

Rotation speed Speed at which the tool rotates during perforation of the piece.

40 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Glossary

To run a program; to start it working. For example, when a graphic

program with extension exe is started, this triggers a process that
Run
allows the interface, the working area in which to create the drawings,
to be displayed on screen.

Point at a certain distance from the piece, in which the boring unit/
electrospindle positions itself during the movements in X/Y before
Safety position
beginning a machining operation, to prevent the tools colliding with the
table elements or the piece itself.

Record the information in file form on a disk or directly in a memory

Save
area.

Button used to visualise the window, in order to navigate within the

Search button
operating system folders.

Highlight or mark a graphic element, a menu item or an option in a list.

Selecting This operation can be carried out using either the mouse or the arrow
keys.

Setup Set, configure. Arrange, prepare, correct and organise the data.

Parts of the machine where the components suitable for machining are
Slot installed, i.e. the chucks for circular blade, the unit with boring chucks,
the milling units, the multifunction units, the gluing unit, etc.

Set of languages and application software programs registered in the

Software
PC ROM and displayed on the video interface.

The visible part of a program or operating system that interacts with the
Software interface user, allowing communication with the computer via icons, menus,
buttons, etc.

Limit points in the working field, defined in the software, beyond which
Software limit
the parts of the machine cannot go.

Step Distance between two consecutive machining operations.

String Line made up of a series of alphanumeric characters.

Stroke The space travelled by the machine in order to carry out a certain
machining operation.

Sub-program Machining program contained within another one.

Supplementary Parts of the operating section that allow the functions of the working
devices units (aggregates, deflector, C-axis, etc.) to be extended.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

41
 Glossary

Support Device on which the data is recorded (e.g. CD-Rom, floppy-disk, etc.).

Wooden panel positioned beneath the piece to be machined, in order

Support panel to protect the work table objects from any through machining
operations.

System boring Boring repeated at constant intervals.

Synonym: Windows pop-up

System window
Window for navigating in the Windows operating system.

Table Large wooden panel to be used during Nesting design.

Set of parameters used to specify the way in which the elements of the
Technological data drawing inserted in machining programs are actually to be machined
on the piece.

Software interface data boxes containing a list of buttons (command

Toolbar
fields).

Small yellow boxes containing a brief help message or explanation,

Tooltip which appear when the pointer passes over a data field, an item, a
button, etc.

Structure that contains several elements, called nodes, inter-linked in

hierarchical order, creating a tree list with branches and sub-branches.
Tree list
The node at the highest level is called the root. All the others derive
from one single node and, in turn, can have other nodes.

Family of vector fonts. The icons of the TrueType font for the Windows
TrueType
operating system are marked with a double T .

Software designed to facilitate work, which has the job of carrying out
Utility
extremely specific operations or functions.

Visualise Show the data, images, dialogue boxes etc. on the monitor.

Waste Part left over after a machining operation (residue).

General term to define a wood-based panel

Wooden panel
, such as one in plywood, chipboard, MDF, etc.

work list List of programs to be carried out by the machine.

Working cycle Set of operations necessary to work a piece.

42 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 Glossary

Working dimensions Space or volume occupied by an object, on the basis of its dimensions.

Parts (elements) of the operating section used to install the tools and/
Working units
or aggregates required for the machining operation.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

43
 Glossary

44 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

TO BEGIN WITH
1 Presentation of the software

BiesseWorks is a machining operation programming system, compatible with Microsoft Windows

2000/XP operating systems only, that comprises a series of software described as “applications or
application software” and a certain number of “utilities”.

List of topics
• 1.1 “Applications or application software”
• 1.2 “Utilities”
• 1.3 “Structure of applications”
• 1.4 “Structure of utilities”
• 1.5 “Zoom tools”
• 1.6 “Using the mouse”
• 1.7 “Keyboard commands”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

47
1 Presentation of the software

1.1 Applications or application software

The applications or application software are those softwares, by means of a special user interface,
are used to create the drawings and machining programs, list tools and tool-up the machine.
Editor (main application): used to create the machining programs (“documents”) containing
the data required to operate the machine and produce the finished panels. It also allows the
other application softwares to be started, and interacts with some of them.
ToolManager: used to list the tools to be employed.
MachineConfiguration: used to tool-up the operating section and the tool magazines.
WorkTableTooling: used to tool-up the work table.

1.2 Utilities
Utilities are softwares that carry out utility functions, such as creating a copy of the data (backup)
and the multiple generation of ISO format files for the NC.
BackupManager: used to create a copy of the required data.
BatchRun: used to process the selected files and create files in ISO format.
Change active machine: used to replace the active machine (see paragraph “Active machine
change”, page 122).

48 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

1.3 Structure of applications

The applications comprise the following elements:
z Title bar (page 49).

z Body of the application (page 49).

z Menu bar (page 53).

z Toolbars (page 53).

z Status bar (page 54).

Title bar
The title bar is located at the top of the application, and contains the software name, the title of the
document and the buttons used to minimise to icon (A), enlarge (B) and close (C) the application.
Figure 1

Body of the application

The body of the application is represented by the central area in which the contents of the
application are displayed. These contents vary according to the application to which they belong,
and they comprise the following elements:
z Graphics area (page 49)

z Data area (page 50)

z Tree list area (page 50)

z Commands area (page 51)

z Software windows (page 51)

z Context menu (page 53)

Graphics area
This area visualises all the graphic representations, i.e. the elements that make up the machine,
the machining operation drawings, etc. Two types of graphic area are shown below.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

49
1 Presentation of the software

Figure 2

Data area
The data area comprises a table with a series of lines and columns. Each cell corresponds to a
data field. To enlarge the columns, position the cursor between two headings in the column itself,
then when a double arrow is shown, press the left mouse button and drag the cursor.
Figure 3

Tree list area

The area with the tree list varies according to the application to which it belongs and consists of a
list of items organised into a hierarchical structure (with branches) that make interaction with other
parts of the said application possible. Two types of tree lists are illustrated below:

A list of machining operations;

B list of tools.

50 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

Figure 4

Commands area
The commands area is the part of the Editor application where the programming rows are entered.
Each programming row represents a command or a function. A number of lines entered in
sequence form the whole machining operation.
Figure 5

Software windows
The software windows, known as “dialogue boxes”, are boxes used to dialogue with the current
active application. The command fields and data fields in the dialogue boxes are described and
illustrated in the following paragraphs.

Command fields
For the description, see the glossary. To activate one of these field, select it with the left-hand
mouse key.
z Search button
For the description, see the glossary.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

51
1 Presentation of the software

z Option button
For the description, see the glossary. This button is activated by simply clicking with the
mouse.

z Check boxes
For the description, see the glossary.

Data fields
For the description, see the glossary. There are two types of data field, “write-enabled” and
“predefined” fields.
Write-enabled:
these are the data fields where the text cursor is shown, and where the data desired can be
entered using the PC keyboard.

Predefined:
these are data fields containing a list of items. The value is entered by selecting the required
item with the mouse.

52 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

Context menu
The context menu is a menu created to facilitate operations within the various applications, and it
comprises a list of items containing the most frequently used commands. To display the context
menu, position the cursor in any area within the application (for example on a table or an image)
and click the right mouse button.
Figure 6

Menu bar
The menu bar is located under the title bar and contains the menus.
Figure 7

Toolbars
The toolbar is made up of command buttons or command fields. It shows the most frequently used
commands, allowing to activate them quickly.
Figure 8

It can be dragged to any point on the screen, using the hand icon. To return it to its original
position, simply double-click with the mouse on the bar title.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

53
1 Presentation of the software

Status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the application, and displays information on the current
application.

1.4 Structure of utilities

Utilities do not have the same structure. Each utility has its own structure, which varies according
to the functions of the utility itself (see chapter 3).

1.5 Zoom tools

These tools are used to change the percentage at which the Editor application and
WorkTableTooling application graphics areas are displayed, so as to show a specific area in
greater detail. The buttons to be used are the following: , , .

To display the Zoom in pointer used to enlarge the graphics area image, click on . To enlarge a
certain portion of the graphics area, create a selection area using the Zoom in pointer.

To display the Zoom out pointer used to reduce the graphics area image, click on . To reduce
the image, select it with the Zoom out pointer and click the left mouse button.

To restore the image in the graphics area to the default size, click on .

54 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

1.6 Using the mouse

The mouse is used to move around within the applications. When it is used, a pointer or cursor will
be displayed on the screen to indicate the point where the next operation will be carried out.

The left mouse button can be used as follows:

z click once to select the elements and items in each area of the application;

z click once to enlarge the graphic elements in the tooling window;

z click once to select the data fields and command fields in the dialogue boxes;

z click once to select the toolbar buttons or menu commands;

z display the technical data dialogue boxes by selecting an item of the tree list areas, the table
fields, the graphic elements, etc.;
z create a selection area around the graphic elements to highlight them (see figure 9). To do
this, place the cursor close to the elements you wish to select, then press the left mouse
button and drag the mouse to create an area that encloses the required elements.
Figure 9

z select one or more elements in the graphic area of the Editor application software. To perform
this operation, press the SHIFT key, place the cursor on the element to be selected and press
the left mouse button; the selected element turns red. To continue the selection, press the
SHIFT key and the CTRL key and click on the required element.
z together with the CTRL key in the keyboard, select several lines in the data area of the
ToolManager application software.
z together with the CTRL key in the keyboard, select more graphic elements of the
MachineConfiguration application software, WorkTableTooling and the tooling windows.
z together with the CTRL key in the keyboard, set the symmetry between the two spindles
present in the tooling windows.

The right mouse button can be used to:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

55
1 Presentation of the software

z display the context menu, by clicking on an area of the application, for example a status bar, a
border bar, a table or a graphic element in the tooling window (see “Context menu”, page 53);
z tool the machine (see chapter 8);

z select only one element of the profile in the graphic area of the Editor application software and
display the context menu at the same time. Place the cursor on an item to select, press the
SHIFT key and the right mouse button;
z view the technical data, tool holder etc., listed in the dialogue box of the MachineConfiguration
application.

56 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

1.7 Keyboard commands

Some of the keys on the keyboard can be used to carry out specific operations, such as copying,
saving, opening, etc.

Pressing ALT together with a letter key opens the menu and selects an option. The letter to be
used with the ALT key is the one that is underlined (see figure 10).
Figure 10

The following tables give a description of the functions of the CTRL, SHIFT, TAB, ALT, ESC and
ARROW keys.

CTRL key Description

CTRL + N Creates a new document.

CTRL + O Opens the document.

CTRL + S Saves the document.

CTRL + P Prints the document.

CTRL + Z Cancels one or more of the operations performed.

CTRL + X Cuts the selected programming row.

CTRL + C Copies the selected programming row.

CTRL + V Pastes the selected programming row.

CTRL + A Selects the whole text of the document.

CTRL + F Finds the required word.

CTRL + H Replaces a text string.

CTRL + SPACE Adds a new parameter in the programming row.

CTRL + SHIFT + O Optimises the machining program.

CTRL + SHIFT + SPACE BAR Displays the parameters list in the commands area
according to the text cursor.

CTRL + SPACE BAR Shows hidden parameters in the programming row

the text cursor is in, so that their value can be
checked or modified.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

57
1 Presentation of the software

CTRL key Description

CTRL + U Updates the selected programming row but not the

graphics.

CTRL + R Updates the graphics.

SHIFT key Description

SHIFT + F4 Deletes the machining operation selected in the

graphics area.

SHIFT + F2 Displays the properties dialogue box.

SHIFT + F3 Opens the CAD to modify geometry.

SHIFT + F5 Displays the panel data dialogue box.

SHIFT + F6 Displays the variables dialogue box.

SHIFT + F7 Displays the program description dialogue box.

SHIFT + DOWN or UP ARROW KEY Selects or deselects a number of lines in a table.

SHIFT + TAB Goes back to the previous box.

SHIFT + left mouse button Enter a positioning instruction in the

WorkTableTooling application software.

General keys Description

ALT + RIGHT ARROW KEY Explodes a machining operation.

ALT + LEFT ARROW KEY Implodes a machining operation.

ALT + F4 Closes the dialogue box.

ARROW KEYS Scrolls through the lines in the table and to select an
item in any list of options.

F3 Repeats the search operation on the text string.

TAB Used to move from one box in the table to the next
or to jump from one command field to another in the
dialogue boxes.

58 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 1 Presentation of the software

General keys Description

ESC Used to quit the dialogue boxes quickly without

saving.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

59
1 Presentation of the software

60 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

2 Applications

The BiesseWorks machining operation programming system comprises four applications

(application softwares):
• Editor
• ToolManager
• WorkTableTooling
• MachineConfiguration

List of topics
• 2.1 “Editor”
• 2.2 “ToolManager”
• 2.3 “WorkTableTooling”
• 2.4 “MachineConfiguration”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

61
2 Applications

2.1 Editor
The Editor application is used to carry out the machining programs to be executed in the machine.
To run this application use the Start menu of the Windows applications bar (see figure 11).
Figure 11: Windows Start menu

List of topics
• Structure of the body of the application (page 63)
• Information on the status bar (page 63)
• Information on colours (page 64)
• Menu bar (page 64)
• The context menu (page 75)
• Description of buttons (page 76)
• Description of the area “List of sub-programs” (page 82)

62 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Structure of the body of the application

Figure 12: Editor
A B C

The body of the application displays the working document (Editor application document),
consisting of several areas:

A Tree list area: displays the hierarchy of machining operations. Click the left mouse button on
the “+” symbol before the icon and the name to expand the list, or click the “–” symbol before
the icon and the name to close the list.

B Import area: visualises the imported drawing.

C Graphics area: displays the drawings of the panel and of the machining operation.

D Commands area: displays the programming rows relating to the machining operation shown
in the graphics area.

E Area “List of sub-programs”: for the description, see paragraph “Description of the area
“List of sub-programs”” on page 82.

Information on the status bar

The Editor application status bar contains the data relating to panel dimensions. When the flashing
traffic light is displayed on the right hand corner of the status bar, this indicates that a data
item has been modified and it is necessary to carry out an update using the button.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

63
2 Applications

Information on colours
To set the colours used in the different areas of the application, display the Editor Environment
Setup tab (see chapter 4).

Menu bar
This is the list of the menus with descriptions of all the options they contain.
z File

z Edit

z Insert

z Display

z Program

z Tools

z Windows

z Help

64 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

File
New:
creates a new document.

Open;
opens a document. For the graphic/technological documents in DXF, CID or CIX format, their
opening works in the same way as the automatic import command (see chapter 18).

Close;
closes the current document.

Save;
stores the data in a file with extension BPP.

Save as:
creates a copy of the current document, with a different name.

Environment variables...;
displays the dialogue boxParameter table with the list of variables of type Environment.

Macros;
displays the dialogue box with the list of all macros created (see chapter 17).

Commands;
displays the dialogue box used to define the commands to be made visible in the programming
rows.

Import;
imports a document in format DXF, CID etc. into the active document (see chapter 18).

Export;
transforms the active document, generating a file in format DXF, CID, WMF, etc. To be saved in
format DXF or CID, the document must contain not only the geometry but also the machining
operations (i.e. the ROUT or ROUTG commands).

Create macro...;
displays the dialogue box to create macros (see chapter 17).

Macro properties...;
displays the dialogue box used to consult the data on the macros created.

Print;
prints the current document.

Print preview;
displays the programming row printout result.

Set printer;
displays the dialogue box used to define the printer characteristics.

Settings...;
displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Exit;
closes the Editor application.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

65
2 Applications

Edit
Undo;
cancels one or more of the operations performed.

Copy the text;

copies the selected text to the commands area so that it can be pasted onto another document (for
example TXT, DOC, etc.).

Cut;
deletes the selected text from the commands area.

Copy;
copies the selected text to the commands area.

Paste;
inserts the cut or copied text into the commands area.

Delete;
deletes any empty spaces between the rows in the commands area.

Select all;
selects all the text in the commands area.

Properties...;
displays the properties window for the drawing elements selected, or for the programming row
where the cursor is positioned.

Edit geometry...;
accesses CAD to modify the drawing. To enable this function, the CAD must be run from the Editor
application.

Explode; breaks up the programming row containing the cursor, displaying all the elements that
make it up, one after the other.

Implode;
reduces all the programming rows for the same geometry or the same machining operation to a
single row.

Find;
searches for the text required in the commands area.

Repeat;
repeats the search for the text required in the commands area.

Replace;
replaces a text line in the commands area.

Add comment;
changes the programming row selected in the commands area into a comment.

Remove comment;
changes the comment selected in the commands area into a programming row.

Adds indent;
adds an indent at the beginning of the selected line in the commands area.

66 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Remove indent;
removes the indent at the beginning of the selected line in the commands area.

Next parameter;
adds the single parameters available to complete the programming row in sequence.

Display parameters;
displays a list of parameters that can be used to complete the programming row.

Insert
Instructions;
adds the VBScript instructions.

Macros;
displays the dialogue box to enter the macros in the program (see paragraph 17.5 “Inserting
macros into the program”).

Bores;
gives access to the boring operations list (see chapter 15):
Basic;
gives access to the basic list of options.
• Generic bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the vertical or horizontal spindle.
• Vertical bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the vertical spindle.
• Horizontal bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the horizontal spindle.
• System bores;
creates a “parametric system” type boring operation to be performed with the vertical
spindle.
• Bore with C axis on straight side;
creates a boring operation on the flat side of the piece to be performed using the C-axis.
• Bore with C axis on circular side;
creates a boring operation on the curved side of the piece to be performed using the C-axis.
• Bore from geometry;
assigns to a circle the parameters relating to the boring operation to be performed with the
vertical or horizontal spindle.
Macros;
used to view the list of macros to enter in the program. This option is displayed only if the
boring macros have been enabled (see paragraph 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the
macros”).

Cuts;
gives access to the list of cutting operations executable with circular blade tools (see chapter 15):
Basic;
gives access to the basic list of options.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

67
2 Applications

• Cut in X;
creates a cut along the X-axis on the upper or lower side of the piece.
• Cut in Y;
creates a cut along the Y-axis on the upper or lower side of the piece.
• Generic cut;
creates an angled cut on all sides of the piece.
• Piece formatting;
creates a squaring operation centred on the piece.
• Rectangular cut;
creates a squaring operation not centred on the piece.
• Cut from geometry;
changes the lines of a selected geometry into cuts.
Inserts a call-up for a macro;
used to view the list of macros to enter in the program. This option is displayed only if the
cutting macros have been enabled (see paragraph 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the
macros”).

Millings;
gives access to the list of options for milling and cutting operations (see chapter 15):
Basic;
gives access to the basic EGA list of options.
• Milling;
used to create a drawing to which machining parameters can be attributed (ROUT
command).
• Milling from geometry;
associates the selected drawing with a milling operation (ROUTG command).
• Geometry definition;
used to create the drawing (GEO command). Refer to chapter 14.
• Pocketing;
carries out pocketing operations on the selected profile.
• Text;
used to create a text to which machining operation parameters can be attributed (GEOTEXT
command).
• Geometry offset;
allows you to create a copy of the selected geometry. For a detailed description, see
paragraph 14.4 “Duplicating the selected geometry”, page 364.
• End of path;
finishes the drawing.
• Starting point;
defines the X and Y co-ordinates for the drawing start point.
Inserts a call-up for a macro;
used to view the list of macros to enter in the program. This option is displayed only if the
milling macros have been enabled (see paragraph 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the
macros”).

68 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Lines;
allows you to access the list of EGA options to create the lines. For a detailed description, see
paragraph ““Line” type tools”, page 351.
• Line given end point;
creates a line using the co-ordinates of a known endpoint as reference value.
• Line given length and angle;
creates a line using a length and the angle of the line with respect to the X-axis positive
direction as reference values.
• Line given angle and final X;
creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the endpoint and the angle of the line with respect
to the X-axis positive direction as reference values.
• Line given angle and final Y;
creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the endpoint and the angle of the line with respect
to Y-axis positive direction as reference values.
• Chamfer;
creates a chamfer.
• Line given length and final X;
creates a line using the X co-ordinate of its endpoint and a length as reference values.
• Line given length and final Y;
creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of its endpoint and a length as reference values.
• Line given length and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the length and the tangency to the preceding element as reference
values.
• Line given end point angle and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the endpoint co-ordinates, the angle of the line with respect to the X-
axis positive direction and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
• Line given end point and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the endpoint co-ordinates and the tangency to the preceding element as
reference values.
• Incremental line given end point;
creates a line, defining the endpoint co-ordinates as increases to the endpoint co-ordinates
of the preceding element.
Curves;
allows you to access the list of EGA options to create the arches. For a detailed description,
see paragraph ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.
• Curve given end point and centre;
creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc and the co-ordinates of a
known endpoint as reference values.
• Curve given end point and tangency to previous item;
creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the endpoint of the arc and the tangency to the
preceding element as reference values.
• Connector A;
creates a connection between the selected element and the preceding one (of type A).
• Connector B;
creates a connection that can be used to machine door and window frames (type B).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

69
2 Applications

• Curve given end point and radius;

creates an arc using the arc radius and the co-ordinates of the endpoint of the arc as
reference values.
• Curve given angle and centre;
creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc and the angle of the arc with
respect to the X-axis positive direction as reference values.
• Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point determined);
creates an arc with a known start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc and
the tangency to the following element as reference values.
• Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates an arc with an unknown start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc
and the tangency to the following element as reference values.
• Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point determined);
creates an arc with a known start point, using the arc radius and the tangency to the
following element as reference values.
• Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates an arc with an unknown start point, using the arc radius and the tangency to the
following element as reference values.
• Curve given end point radius and tangency to previous item;
creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the arc endpoint, the arc radius
and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
• Curve given angle centre radius and tangency to previous item;
creates an arc using the arc radius and the co-ordinates of the arc centre, the tangency to
the preceding element and the arc angle with respect to the X-axis positive direction as
reference values.
• Curve using three points;
creates an arc passing through three points.
• Incremental curve given angle and centre point;
creates an arc using the centre of the arc, which is obtained by incrementing the co-
ordinates of the endpoint for the preceding element, and the arc angle with respect to the X-
axis positive direction as reference values.
• Incremental curve given radius and end point;
creates an arc using the arc radius and the endpoint, which is obtained by incrementing the
co-ordinates of the endpoint for the preceding element, as reference values.
Figures;
gives access to the EGA list of options to create figures; for a more detailed description, see
““Figure” type tools” on page 356.
• Ellipse;
creates an ellipse.
• Oval;
creates an oval.
• Circle given centre and radius;
creates a circle using the centre and the radius as reference values.
• Circle given three points;
creates a circle passing through three points.

70 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

• Rectangle;
creates a rectangle with or without chamfers/radiusing.
• Polygon;
creates a polygon with or without chamfers/radiusing.
• Star;
creates a star-shaped drawing with or without chamfers/radiusing.

Insertions;
gives access to the list of options for insertion operations, for example hinge and hinge mounting
plate fixing operations, etc.
Insertion;
includes the INSERT command among the programming rows (see chapter 15).
Insertion from geometry;
includes the INSERTG command among the programming rows (see chapter 15).

Probes;
gives access to the list of options for thickness tracers.
Probe;
includes the command for piece tracing among the programming rows (see chapter 13).

Repositioning;
gives access to the list of options to enter the positioning instructions in the machining program
(see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work table objects”, page 442), i.e. the
instructions to manage the movement of objects on the EPS work table.
Basic;
gives access to the basic list of options.
• Repositioning work table;
adds the starting command (WTMOVING command) to program the movement of the work
table objects to the programming rows.
• Vacuum;
adds the instruction to enable/disable locking the required shapeable suction cup to the
WTMOVING command.
• Clamp;
adds the instruction to enable/disable locking the required Uniclamp clamp to the
WTMOVING command.
• Mobile support transfer;
adds the instruction to command moving the mobile panel supports to the WTMOVING
command.
• Carriage transfer;
adds the instruction to command moving the carriages to the WTMOVING command.
• Start parallel unit;
adds the instruction to set the start of a movement unit (WT_GROUP command) to the
WTMOVING command, that is, to indicate which objects on the table should be moved
simultaneously (e.g., two mobile panel supports).
• End of parallel unit;
adds the instruction to set the stop of a movement unit defined with the WT_GROUP
command to the WTMOVING command.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

71
2 Applications

• Bar support;
adds to the WTLIFT command the instruction to move the bar support.

Functions;
gives access to the list of options for milling and cutting operations (see chapter 13):
Basic;
gives access to the basic list of options.
• ISO code;
adds the ISO codes to the programming rows.
• Move piece;
moves the piece origin.
• Rotate geometry;
rotates the drawing.
• Geometry scale;
applies a scale factor to the drawing.
• Move geometry;
moves the drawing.
• Wait for piece positioning;
inserts a suspension between the programming rows to allow the transfer, rotation or
overturning of the piece.
• Sides from geometry;
changes the drawing elements into sides of the piece.
• Side from geometry on side faces;
creates one side from the geometry created on one of the four standard side faces.
• Side from geometry using section plan;
creates one side from the geometry created on face zero and on one of the four standard
side faces.
• Circular side;
creates a side with a curved surface.
• Straight side;
creates a side with a flat surface.
Macros;
used to view the list of macros to enter in the program. The option only displays if the functions
macros have been enabled (see paragraph 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”).

Display
Zoom in;
enlarges a portion of the graphics area.

Zoom out;
reduces a portion of the graphics area.

Adapt program view; adapts the drawing to the graphics area dimensions.

Adapt import view; adapts the imported drawing to the import area dimensions.

72 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Import background;
displays the imported drawing according to the side of the panel selected.

Toolbars:
Main;
enables or disables the Main toolbar.
Edit;
enables or disables the Edit toolbar.
Tools;
enables or disables the Tools toolbar.
Graphic output;
enables or disables the Graphic output toolbar.
Technology;
enables or disables the Technology toolbar.
Additions Toolbar;
enables or disables the additional toolbar.
Machining operations;
enables or disables the Machining operations toolbar.
Tool positions;
displays or hides the tree list of the diagnosis environment (see paragraph 13.4 “Program
optimisation”, page 331).
Diagnostics errors;
displays or hides the information area of the diagnosis environment (see paragraph 13.4
“Program optimisation”, page 331).
Addins bar
shows the barAddin of the additional modules.
Custom Toolbar 00;
enables or disables the customised toolbar. There are five available commands, and each
command is used to view a bar to be customised.
Status bar;
enables or disables the status bar.

Shows/Hides the sub-program loading device

shows the area with the list of machining operation programs incorporated (stored) in the open
document, so they can be inserted as sub-programs using the “PUTPROG” instruction (see
paragraph “Description of the area “List of sub-programs”” on page 82).

Layer management;
shows the dialogue box Layer management. For a detailed description, see paragraph “Managing
the levels (layers)” on page 295, and “Consulting the layers in the imported files” on page 490.

Graphic options...;
displays the dialogue box used to enter the graphic characteristics of machining operations. For a
detailed description, see paragraph 4.2 “Dialogue box setting Graphic options”, page 113.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

73
2 Applications

Program
Piece data;
displays the dialogue box used to configure the panel main data.

Variables;
displays the variables window in the current document (see paragraph 19.1 “Variables”).

Description;
displays the dialogue box used to enter notes. This dialogue box is automatically displayed upon
the opening of a machining program in which a description has already been inserted.

Enables Diagnostics;
shows the data related to the optimised machining program diagnosis.

Automatic update;
updates the graphics and the programming row automatically.

Updates graphics; updates the drawing on the basis of the new settings.

Tools
Optimise;
optimises the machining program.

Create NC Code;
processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run on the machine.

Create NC Code on file...;

processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run on the machine. Also
allows the generated file to be given a name and saved in a specific directory.

Simulate;
processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.

Show the piece on the machine...;

shows the piece loaded onto the work table and the tooling included in the program.

Add to job list;

adds the current program to the list table, when the List application is running, or to the Positions
application when the List application is closed. This function is enabled only on the machine and
can only be executed by enabling AUTOMATIC from the Positions application (see chapter 22).

Table tooling;
starts the WorkTableTooling application to tool-up the work table.

Delete table tooling;

eliminates the work table tooling data from the machining program.

Machine tooling...;
opens the dialogue box used to tool-up the machine.

Machine configuration...;
starts the MachineConfiguration application to configure the machine.

74 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Tools...;
starts the ToolManager to catalogue tools.

Modifies the list of Addins;

allows the various additional modules to be run, for example BiesseNest, BiesseWin, etc.

Windows
Cascade windows:
arranges open documents in cascade.

Tile horizontally:
arranges open documents side by side, horizontally.

Tile vertically:
arranges open documents one after the other, vertically.

Arrange icons:
aligns the documents, reduced to icons, in the lower part of the application software.

Editor and CAD:

Tile vertically;
arranges the CAD and the Editor application side by side horizontally.
Tile horizontally;
arranges the CAD and the Editor application side by side vertically.

Help
Subjects;
displays the on-line Help.

Information on Editor;
displays the software release information window.

The context menu

The context menu shows the list of most commonly used commands which vary depending on the
position of the mouse cursor in the document.
The options of the context menu are shown below, followed by a brief description.

Cut; deletes the drawing or selected text.

Copy; copies the drawing or selected text.

Paste; inserts the previously copied or cut drawing or text.

Delete; deletes any empty spaces between the rows in the commands area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

75
2 Applications

Properties...; displays the properties window for the drawing elements selected, or for the
programming row where the cursor is positioned.

Edit geometry...; accesses CAD to modify the drawing. To enable this function, the CAD must be
run from the Editor application.

Opens the layer modification window for the drawing; visualises the dialogue box to modify the
name of the level of each single machining operation selected (see “Creating and modifying levels”
on page 296).

Shows/Hides the layer of the machining operation in the graphics;for a detailed description, see
“Examples of how to hide the graphics”, page 297.

Insert; inserts the machining operations in the document. The options available are the same as
those listed in the Insert menu (see page 67).

Operations; Divide machining operationoption allows the selected string, ROUT or GEO to be
divided, creating (for every geometric profile the string contains) a new ROUT or GEO string.

Explode; breaks up the programming row containing the cursor, displaying all the elements that
make it up, one after the other.

Implode; reduces all the programming rows for the same geometry or the same machining
operation to a single row.

Update; updates the drawing on the basis of the new settings.

Highlight non-optimised lines; highlights the programming rows that the optimiser has been unable
to optimise.

Zoom in; enlarges a portion of the graphics area.

Zoom out; reduces a portion of the graphics area.

Adapt import view; adapts the imported drawing to the import area dimensions.

Adapt program view; adapts the drawing to the graphics area dimensions.

Automatic import...; automatically imports the document type DXF, CID, etc. This button only
appears in the Editor application software when the use of the CAD graphic area - in place of the
Editor application software area - has been defined in Setup.

Description of buttons
The following is a list of the Editor application toolbars, with a description of the buttons.

76 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

MainBar

Button Description

Creates a new document.

Opens a document.

Stores the data in a file with extension BPP.

Deletes the selected element.

Copies the selected text to the commands area so that it can be pasted onto
another document (for example TXT, DOC, etc.).

Inserts the cut or copied text into the commands area.

Prints the current document.

Restores the cursor to a pointer.

Enlarges a portion of the graphics area.

Reduces a portion of the graphics area.

Adapts the imported drawing to the size of the import area.

Adapts the drawing to the size of the graphics area.

For the description, see option “Layer management” of the menu “Display”.

Displays the SW release information window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

77
2 Applications

MainBar

Button Description

Displays the on-line Help.

ToolsBar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to enter the main panel data.

Displays the variables window in the active document (see paragraph 19.1
“Variables”).

Shows the data relating to the diagnosis of the optimised machining program.

Updates the drawing according to the new settings. The need to carry out an
update is indicated by a flashing traffic light on the status bar (see “Information
on the status bar”, page 63).

Optimises the machining program.

Processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run
on the machine.

Processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.

Adds the current program to the list table, when the List application is running,
or to the Positions application when the List application is closed. This function
is enabled only on the machine and can only be executed by enabling
AUTOMATIC in the Positions application (see chapter 22).

Starts the WorkTableTooling application.

Starts the MachineConfiguration application.

Starts the ToolManager application.

78 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

ToolsBar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to tool-up the machine.

Displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

EditBar

Button Description

Changes the selected programming row in the commands area into a

comment.

Changes the selected comment in the commands area into a programming

row.

Inserts an indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected line.

Removes the indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected
line.

Graphic outputBar

Button Description

Displays or hides the elements drawn in the graphics area.

Displays or hides the type of tool correction.

Displays or hides the tool lead-in and lead-out paths.

Displays the machining thickness.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

79
2 Applications

GroupsBar

Button Description

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar used to program boring

operations.

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar used to program cutting

operations.

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar, to program milling

operations, and the bar used to draw the profiles in EGA mode

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar to carry out insertion

operations, for example hinge and mounting plate fixing operations etc.

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar used to insert, between the
programming rows, the command ordering piece tracing.

Used to display the Machining operations toolbar to add the positioning

instructions to the programming rows (see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning
statements for the work table objects”, page 442).

Used to display the Functions toolbar to program auxiliary operations.

Used to view the toolbar to insert macros between the programming rows.
This button can only be seen if the active machining macros have been
enabled.

Used to return to the start geometry/machining operation commands, when

commands for the creation of lines, arcs, etc. are being used.

Gives access to the list of tools to draw lines.

Gives access to the list of tools to draw arcs.

Gives access to the list of tools to draw geometric figures.

80 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

List of macro buttons

Button Description

For a detailed description of the macro, refer to paragraph 17.6 “Macros for
cleaning the hoods”, page 477.

For a detailed description of the macro, refer to paragraph 17.7 “Horizontal

aggregate boring macro”, page 477.

For a detailed description of the macro, refer to paragraph 17.8 “Macros for
unloading the electrospindle”, page 478.

For a detailed description of the macro, refer to paragraph 17.9 “Macros to

create sharp corner”, page 479.

For a detailed description of the macro, refer to paragraph 17.9 “Macros to

create sharp corner”, page 479.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

81
2 Applications

Description of the area “List of sub-programs”

Function only active from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.

The area List of sub-programs allows machining operation programs in various formats (BPP, DXF,
etc.) to be filed, copying them into the open document. The programs copied in this file lose every
reference with the file of origin, so as not to alter it in the event of future modifications. This file is
linked to the use of the “PUTPROG” instruction (see paragraph “Inserting sub-programs”, page
331).
Programs inside another program are called “sub-programs”.

To visualise it, use option Shows/Hides the sub-program loading device of the Display menu, or
position the cursor on the lower bar of the tree area and drag it upwards.

The context menu

Add; adds to the list the programs to be copied in the active document.

Update; updates the selected program, if this has been modified after being copied into the active
document.

Remove; deletes the selected program.

Rename; renames the selected program.

Edit; opens, in the graphics area of the Editor application, the selected program in order to modify
it. In this case, the modification only concerns the copy stored in the active document (not the file
of origin).

82 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

2.2 ToolManager
The ToolManager application is a tool database. It allows the tools to be used in the machining
operation to be catalogued, recording all their technical characteristics in a file. To run this
application, click on the button in the Editor application or use the Start menu in the Windows
applications bar (figure 11).

List of topics
• Structure of the body of the application (page 83)
• Menu bar (page 84)
• The context menu (page 85)
• Description of buttons (page 86)

Structure of the body of the application

Figure 13: ToolManager

The body of the application is divided into two areas:

z Tree list area: displays the hierarchy of tools, divided according to the class to which each tool
belongs. Click the left mouse button on the “+” symbol before the icon and the name to expand
the list of tools in a specific class. Click the left mouse button on the “–” symbol before the icon
and the name to close the list of tools. When a tool is selected from the tree list, the tool with
the same name in the table changes colour.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

83
2 Applications

z data area: indicates the technical characteristics of the tools recorded.

To display the list of tools by name, type, diameter, etc., click on the title of the required
column.
To modify fields in the table, use the context menu (see chapter 6).
To select a number of lines in the table in sequence, click on the line you wish to start from,
press the SHIFT key and click on the line you wish to finish on. To select a number of
nonadjacent lines, press CTRL and click on the lines you wish to highlight.

Menu bar
This is the list of the menus with descriptions of all the options they contain.
z Main

z Tools

z Filters

z Display

z Help

Main
Settings;
displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Import Data;
displays the dialogue box used to import the machine data.

Export data;
displays the dialogue box used to export the machine data.

Save tools;
saves the data relating to tools in the database.

Exit;
closes the ToolManager application.

Tools
New tool;
displays the dialogue box to create a new tool.

Tool class manager;

displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool class.

Tool type manager;

displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool type.

84 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Filters
Activate filters;
displays the dialogue box used to find the required tools.

Groups manager;
displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the groups of tools.

Display
Status bar;
enables or disables the status bar.

Main bar;
enables or disables the tool Main bar .

Setup Bar;
enables or disables the tool Settings bar .

Filters bar;
enables or disables the tool Shows the filters window .

Displays machine status;

shows or hides the button.

Displays all the tool data;

shows all the listed tools in the data area.

Help
Help Index;
displays the on-line Help.

Information on ToolManager...;
displays information on the software version.

The context menu

The context menu of the ToolManager application software allows tool cataloguing to be managed
directly on the table or tree structure list (for information on its use, see “The application context
menu”, page 159).
The options of the context menu are shown below, followed by a brief description.

Copy tool; creates a new tool by copying the characteristics of the selected tool.

Delete tool; removes the selected tool.

New tool; displays the dialogue box to create a new tool.

Modify tool; modifies the data of the selected tool.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

85
2 Applications

Modify Value ->; modifies the value of the selected tool.

Rename tool; renames the selected tool.

Add tool to a new group; adds the selected tool to a new group.

Add tool to an existing group; adds the selected tool to an existing group that is already present in
the list.

Description of buttons
The following is a list of the ToolManager application toolbars, with a description of the buttons.

Main bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool class.

Displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool type.

Displays the dialogue box to create a new tool.

Displays the SW release information window.

Displays the on-line Help.

Filters bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to find the required tools.

Displays the dialogue box used to consult and modify the groups of tools
created.

86 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Settings bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Displays the dialogue box used to import data from the NC to the software.

Saves the data entered.

Updates the ToolManager application software loading the data stored in the
NC or in the PC (only when the machine is connected).

Indicates when the machine is moving.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

87
2 Applications

2.3 WorkTableTooling
The WorkTableTooling application is used to manage the work table: position the piece on the
table, place the table elements (stops, suction cups, etc.) in the right position so that they do not
get damaged during the machining operation (“table tooling”), associate the positioning
instructions (movement of the table objects) to the work table objects, and check/manage the
pneumatic system connected to the work table.

To run this application, click on the button in the Editor application or use the Start menu in the
Windows applications bar (figure 11).

List of topics
• Structure of the body of the application (page 88)
• Menu bar (page 89)
• The graphics area context menu (page 94)
• Description of buttons (page 95)

Structure of the body of the application

Figure 14: WorkTableTooling

The body of the application displays the configuration document of the work table, consisting of the
following areas:
z Graphics area: displays the work table and the panel to be machined.

88 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

z Right tree area: displays the tree of the objects to be used to set the work table. This area can
be enabled or disabled by clicking on the Tools bar option in the Display menu.
z Left tree area: displays the tree for managing the work table tooling in case the machining
program shows the positioning instructions (see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for
the work table objects”, page 442). This area can be enabled or disabled by clicking on the
Repositioning program bar option in the Display menu.

Menu bar
This is the list of the menus with descriptions of all the options they contain.
z File

z Edit

z Display

z Insert

z Systems

z Tools

z Window

File
New;
starts a new document.

Open;
opens a work table configuration document (PCF) or imports a graphic/technological document
(DXF, ISO, BPP, etc.), positioning the piece on the table. For ISO files, import is only allowed if the
PC is connected to the machine.

Close;
closes the document.

Save;
overwrites the data of the active PCF document or memorises the data of the new document in a
file with extension PCF.

Save as..;
creates a copy of the current PCF document with a different name.

Set as default;
memorises the active work table configuration document as the default configuration.

Import file type tls;

imports files with extension TLS.

Save tooling in %1;

saves the tooling.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

89
2 Applications

Save to ‘Editor‘ and exit;

confirms the tooling and closes the WorkTableTooling application, going back to the Editor
application.

Change work table configuration;

modifies the configuration of the work table.

Print;
prints the current document.

Print preview;
displays the current work table printout result.

Set printer...;
displays the dialogue box used to define the printer characteristics.

Settings;
displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Exit;
exits the WorkTableTooling application.

Edit
Cut;
deletes the selected element.

Copy;
copies the selected element.

Paste;
pastes the cut or copied element into the graphics area.

Reset;
clears the document and deletes all the elements present in the graphics area.

Reset tooling in the piece; resets the tooling associated with the piece loaded on the work table.

Piece parameters; displays the list of parameters.

List of variables;
displays the variables list.

Update the dxf folders;

updates the folders containing machine component files with extension DXF.

Parametric tooling (relative values);

enables the parametric positioning of work table objects (mobile supports, shapeable suction cups,
etc.).

Non-parametric tooling (absolute values);

disables the parametric positioning of work table objects (mobile supports, shapeable suction
cups, etc.).

Positions; displays the window with the position values for the selected object.

90 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Removable supports...;
displays the window with the list of mobile supports and side stops supports defined as removable,
i.e. that can be removed manually from the work table surface.

Start;
enables the use of commands to simulate the movement of the work table objects.

Stop;
used to disable the use of the simulator commands of the work table objects.

Advance one step;

simulates the movement of the work table objects, selecting one instruction at a time, to be able to
check single movements.

Advance one unit;

simulates the movement of the work table objects, selecting one instruction or unit at a time and
checking possible crashes among work table objects and the machining operations.

Advance by phases;
simulates the whole movement sequence of the work table objects, showing the final result
(automatically scrolling the tree instructions up to the END instruction) and checking possible
crashes among work table objects and the machining operations.

Display
Toolbar;
enables or disables the Main Toolbar.

Operations bar;
enables or disables the Operations Toolbar.

Repositioning commands bar;

enables the Repositioning work table toolbar.

System commands bar;

enables the Systems toolbar.

Status bar;
enables or disables the status bar.

Tools bar;
enables the right tree area (see description on page 88).

Repositioning program bar;

enables the left tree area (see description on page 88).

Adapt zoom;
restores the image to normal dimensions, adapting it to the area.

Zoom in; enlarges a portion of the graphics area.

Zoom out;
reduces a portion of the graphics area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

91
2 Applications

Normal cursor:
restores the cursor to its pointer function.

Zoom in on active piece;

enlarges the piece on the work table.

Tooling information;
displays the tooling information.

Tooling positions;
displays the table with the positioning values for work table objects.

Shaped piece;
displays the shape of the piece to be machined (marked option), if non-standard sides have been
created.

Hide piece;
hides the piece.

Pointer positions refer to piece;

it enables as the starting origin, for the calculation of the XY position displayed on the status bar,
the one in which the piece has been positioned.

Display all subsequent machining operations;

shows all the machining operations to be performed on the piece in the graphics area.

Properties;
displays the properties list for the selected element.

Insert
Piece;
inserts the piece on the work table.

Systems
Change to zones mode;
gives access to the system management environment, to display the structure of the pneumatic
system connected to the work table and to create independent and customisable locking zones
(multi-zone).

Show the vacuum system;

displays the vacuum system connected to the work table, defined upon machine installation.

Show the uniclamp system;

displays the Uniclamp clamps locking system connected to the work table, defined upon machine
installation.

Show the vacuum configurations;

shows the list of the default settings relating to the locking zones for the use of shapeable suction
cups.

Show the vacuum configurations;

shows the list of the settings relating to the locking zones for the use of Uniclamp clamps.

92 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Shows the manual configuration;

shows the setting environment of the independent and customisable locking zones (multi-zone).

Shows the configuration associated with the piece;

displays the locking zones setting associated to the current machining program.

Associates the current configuration with the piece;

associates the active locking zone setting, which can be customised or default, to the program.

Create Manual zone;

gives access to the setting environment of the independent and customised locking zones (multi-
zone), automatically associating the systems connected to the carriages under the piece to the
active origin and to the piece.

Select origin for manual zone;

used to indicate the origin to which the carriages should be associated when creating the
customised zone.

Deselect origin for manual zone;

used to separate the origin from the customised zone.

Delete the zone for origin...;

deletes the zones created for the specified origin, to be selected in the corresponding window
suggested by the system.

Delete all zones;

deletes all the created zones.

Tools
Simulate machining on origin...;
displays the simulator window of the work table, loading the piece on the origin selected in the
corresponding dialogue box.

Optimise;
optimises the machining program.

Show the tooling on origin...;

displays the window to generate the preview document, not modifiable, where the tooling
associated to a new origin is displayed.

Tooling check;
checks the tooling that has been performed to see potential collisions.

Semiautomatic tooling properties...;

shows the window to set the required parameters to be able to perform the semi-automatic tooling
(see paragraph 4.3 “Settings for semi-automatic positioning”, page 115).

Shows the suction cup magazine; visualises the dialogue box Suction cup magazine. For a
detailed description, see paragraph 9.15 “Cataloguing the shapeable suction cups”, page 258.

Semiautomatic tooling;
performs the semi-automatic tooling, according to the data defined in the machining program. For
a detailed description, see paragraph “Semi-automatic positioning”, page 249.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

93
2 Applications

Read bottom limits of tables;

reads the minimum reachable position of the single support and stores it in the corresponding tab
in the Semiautomatic tooling property dialogue box (see paragraph 4.3 “Settings for semi-
automatic positioning”, page 115); for the ATS work table only.

Read top limits of tables;

reads the maximum reachable position of the single support and stores it in the corresponding tab
in the Semiautomatic tooling property dialogue box (see paragraph 4.3 “Settings for semi-
automatic positioning”, page 115); for the ATS work table only.

Save tooling;
stores the data of the tooling performed in a file with extension TLG. The files are stored in the
default folder C:\Biesse\BiesseWorks\WTTooling\Dati\Attrezzaggi.

Load tooling;
loads the tooling data stored in the TLG file in the work table tooling environment.

Window
New window;
creates a new work document by making a copy of the open file.

Cascade:
arranges open documents in cascade.

Tile;
arranges the open documents horizontally on the screen without overlapping them, so they can all
be seen.

Change to tooling mode;

enables work table tooling.

?
Help;
displays the on-line Help.

Information on WorkTableTooling...;
displays information on the software version.

The graphics area context menu

The context menu enables managing the work table tooling in the application software graphics
area. The menu options are not always enabled, as their activation is connected to the type of
work table object selected and the type of environment displayed: tooling, tables movement or
systems management environment. For the description of the context menu options, see the
paragraphs related to the management of the three WorkTableTooling application software
environments in chapter 9.

94 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Description of buttons
The following is a list of the WorkTableTooling application toolbars with a description of the buttons.

MainBar

Button Description

Opens a new document to create a new configuration.

Opens files with extension PCF.

Imports files with extension TLS.

Saves the data in a file with extension PCF.

Displays the current work table printout results.

Cleans the document, deleting all the elements in the graphics area.

Prints the current work table.

Displays the list of properties for the selected work table element.

Displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Used to change to tooling environment. Only active if the application is run

independently, that is to say, not in connection with the Editor application.

Restores the image to normal dimensions, adapting it to the area.

Enlarges a portion of the graphics area.

Reduces a portion of the graphics area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

95
2 Applications

MainBar

Button Description

Enlarges the piece on the work table.

Restores the cursor to a pointer.

For the description, refer to the Start option of the Edit menu.

For the description, refer to the Stop option of the Edit menu.

For the description, refer to the Advance one step option of the Edit menu.

For the description, refer to the Advance one unit option of the Edit menu.

For the description, refer to the Advance by phases option of the Edit menu.

OperationsBar

Inserts the panel on the work table.

Saves the tooling operation.

Confirms the tooling operation and exits the WorkTableTooling application,

going back to the Editor application.

Exits the WorkTableTooling application without saving and goes back to the
Editor application.

For the description, refer to the Simulate machining on origin... option of the
Tools menu.

For the description, refer to the Optimise option of the Tools menu.

96 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

OperationsBar

Displays the dialogue box used to enter the main panel data.

Displays the parameters list.

Displays the list of tooling positions.

For the description, refer to the Show the tooling on origin... option of the Tools
menu.

For the description, refer to the Semiautomatic tooling option of the Tools
menu.

Repositioning work tableBar

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

For the description, see paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work
table objects” on page 442.

SystemsBar

For the description, refer to the Change to zones mode option of the Display
menu.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

97
2 Applications

SystemsBar

For the description, refer to the Show the vacuum system option of the Display
menu.

For the description, refer to the Show the uniclamp system option of the
Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Shows the manual configuration option of the
Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Shows the configuration associated with the
piece option of the Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Associates the current configuration with the
piece option of the Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Create Manual zone option of the Display
menu.

For the description, refer to the Select origin for manual zone option of the
menu. Display

For the description, refer to the Deselect origin for manual zone option of the
Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Delete the zone for origin... option of the
Display menu.

For the description, refer to the Delete all zones option of the Display menu.

98 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

2.4 MachineConfiguration
The MachineConfiguration application allows the parts of the machine to be configured and the
magazines, operating section and aggregates to be tooled.
It comprises a graphics area representing the machine. Click the mouse on an element in the
graphics area to enlarge it; double click to view the information window containing the technical
characteristics of that element.
To run this application, click on the button in the Editor application or use the Start menu in the
Windows applications bar (figure 11).
Figure 15: MachineConfiguration

List of topics
• Information on colours in the graphics area (page 100)
• The context menu (page 100)
• Menu bar (page 100)
• Description of buttons (page 102)

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

99
2 Applications

Information on colours in the graphics area

To set the colours used in the different areas of the application, display the Machine Setup tab (see
chapter 4).

The context menu

The context menu of the MachineConfiguration application allows the display of the elements
present in the graphics area to be managed.
The options of the context menu are shown below, followed by a brief description.

Show all; used to display the whole of the graphics area image.

Show previous item in foreground; used to enlarge the selected image.

Show top item in foreground; used to display the element immediately above the one displayed in
the foreground.

Information on the item; used to display the technical characteristics of the selected element.

Menu bar
Most of the commands in the MachineConfiguration application are used by the Technician to
configure the machine, and for this reason only the menus that can be used by the operator will be
illustrated and described here.
z File

z Database

z Tooling

z Tools

z Display

z Help

File
Settings;
displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Import data;
displays the dialogue box used to import the machine data.

Machine data wizard;

to be used by Biesse technicians only.

Exit;
closes the MachineConfiguration application.

100 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Database
Main Unit;
to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the main sections list.

Processing centres;
to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the list of the work centres where the operating
sections can be found.

Operating sections;
to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the operating sections list.

Vertical boring units/electrospindles;

to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the list of the Slots on the machine (see the
glossary).

Boring units;
to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the list of the chucks that make up the boring units.

Spindles;
displays the dialogue box with the list of spindles.

Working areas;
to be used by Biesse technicians only. Displays the list of working areas.

Axes;
displays the list of all existing axes.

Tool magazines;
displays the dialogue box showing the list of magazines.

Origins;
displays the list of all existing origins.

Aggregates;
displays the dialogue box showing the list of aggregates.

Tooling
Machine tooling;
displays the Machine tooling dialogue box used for video tooling of the operating section (see
paragraph 8.3 “Tooling the operating section”).

Magazine tooling;
Magazine tooling displays the dialogue box used for video tooling of the tool magazines (see
paragraph 8.4 “Tooling the tool magazine”).

Aggregate tooling;
Aggregate tooling displays the dialogue box used for video tooling of the aggregates (see
paragraph 8.5 “Aggregate tooling”).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

101
2 Applications

Tools
Distance between spindles;
displays the dialogue box with the data relating to the distance between spindles (see paragraph
7.4 “Visualising the distances between spindles”).

Software limits;
displays the dialogue box containing the data regarding the operating section working field (see
paragraph 7.3 “Consulting the software limits”).

Data tables;
displays a dialogue box with a list of the machine components.

Display
Status bar;
enables or disables the status bar.

Machine data bar;

enables or disables the Machine data bar.

Tooling bar;
enables or disables the Tooling bar.

General bar;
enables or disables the General bar.

Tool bar;
enables or disables the Toolbar.

Machine status;
shows the status of the machine.

Help
Help subjects;
displays the on-line Help.

Information on MachineConfiguration;
displays the SW release information window.

Description of buttons
The following is a list of the MachineConfiguration application toolbars, with a description of the
buttons.

102 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 2 Applications

Machine data bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box with the list of machine components. Data reserved
to the Biesse technician.

Displays the main sections list. Data reserved to the Biesse technician.

Displays the list of the work centres where the operating sections can be
found. Data reserved to the Biesse technician.

Displays the operating sections list. Data reserved to the Biesse technician.

Displays the list of the Slots on the machine (see the glossary). Data reserved
to the Biesse technician.

Displays the list of the chucks that make up the boring units. Data reserved to
the Biesse technician.

Displays the dialogue box with the spindles list (see paragraph 7.1 “Technical
data of spindles T, TH and TP”, page 7.1).

Displays the list of working areas. Data reserved to the Biesse technician.

Displays the list of all the existing origins (see paragraph 9.2 “Checking and
modifying the origins”, page 225).

Displays the list of all the existing axes (see paragraph 12.1 “Consulting the
machine axes”, page 280).

Displays the dialogue box with the magazines list (see paragraph 7.2
“Technical data of the tool magazines”, page 201).

Displays the dialogue box with the aggregates list (see paragraph 6.11
“Aggregate management”, page 184).

Displays the SW release information window.

Displays the on-line Help.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

103
2 Applications

Tool bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box with the data relating to the distance between
spindles (see paragraph 7.4 “Visualising the distances between spindles”,
page 206).

Displays the dialogue box containing the data regarding the operating section
working field (see paragraph 7.3 “Consulting the software limits”, page 205).

Tooling bar

Button Description

Displays the Machine tooling dialogue box used for video tooling of the
operating section (see paragraph 8.3 “Tooling the operating section”, page
212).

Displays the Magazine tooling dialogue box used for video tooling of the tool
magazines (see paragraph 8.4 “Tooling the tool magazine”, page 217).

Displays the Aggregate tooling window used for video tooling of the
aggregates (see paragraph 8.5 “Aggregate tooling”, page 220).

General bar

Button Description

Displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.

Displays the dialogue box used to import data from the NC to the software.

Saves the data entered.

Updates the MachineConfiguration application software, loading the data

stored in the NC or in the PC.

104 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

3 Utilities

The BiesseWorks machining operation programming system comprises the Applications,

described in chapter 2, and the following Utilities:
z BatchRun

z BackupManager

3.1 BatchRun
BatchRun is a utility that is used to process graphic and/or technological files (CID, CIX, DXF, BPP,
etc.) in order to export formats that can be run on the machine (e.g. ISO, BPP).

To start it, click on the Start menu in the Windows application bar and then on the items: Programs,
BiesseWorks, Tools, BatchRun. For a detailed description on how to use BatchRun, see “Creating
ISO files with BatchRun utility” on page 541.
Figure 16: BatchRun

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

105
3 Utilities

The body of BatchRun is divided into two areas:

A jobs area: displays a list of jobs.

B import area: visualises the imported files.

Description of fields
Enables the positioner for suction cups; used to define whether or not to carry out semiautomatic
positioning of the objects on the table when processing the imported files.

Export Bpp; transforms the imported documents into BPP format files. This option can be of use to
transform DXF or similar files into BPP files.

Export Iso; transforms the imported documents into ISO format files.

Sub-folder; see paragraph “Imported file processing procedure”.

Process all; see paragraph “Imported file processing procedure”.

Process selected files; see paragraph “Imported file processing procedure”.

Description of buttons
This the list and description of the buttons.

Button Description

Exits the application and saves the settings.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Saving the data and closing the
utility”, page 548.

Exits the application without saving.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Saving the data and closing the
utility”, page 548.

Displays the on-line Help.

Displays the dialogue box used to set up the application.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Setting the utility”, page 541.

Processes the files. For a detailed description, see paragraph “Imported file
processing procedure”, page 547.

Saves the settings. For a detailed description, see paragraph “Saving the data
and closing the utility”, page 548.

106 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 3 Utilities

Button Description

Opens the file with information on the processed files.

Displays the dialogue box Semiautomatic tooling property. For a description of

the window, see paragraph 4.3 on page 115.

Displays the system window to search for the files to be imported in the
BatchRun.
For a detailed description, see paragraph “Importing files for processing”,
page 542.

Copies the file selected in the import area.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Creating copies of files”, page 542.

Pastes the file cut or copied previously to the import area.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Importing files for processing”,
page 542.

Deletes the selected file from the import area or the selected job from the jobs
area. For a detailed description, see paragraph “Deleting imported files”, page
542.

Cleans the import area, deleting all the files present.

For a detailed description, see “Deleting imported files” on page 542, and
“Deleting a job” on page 546.

Displays the dialogue box used to modify the main panel data.
For a detailed description, see paragraph “Modifying imported files”, page
543.

Optimises the selected file.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Optimising and simulating imported
files”, page 544.

Processes the selected file and displays the simulator window.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Optimising and simulating imported
files”, page 544.

Processes the selected file, generating a file with extension ISO to be run on
the machine.
For a detailed description, see paragraph “Processing the selected file”, page
544.

Displays the dialogue box used to modify variables.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Modifying imported files”, page
543.

Restores the initial data defined in the files, deleting settings made from within
the BatchRun application.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

107
3 Utilities

Button Description

Displays the system window to search for the documents with CSV extension
containing the list of programs to be imported in the BatchRun utility.
To ensure this command functions correctly, you must save the configuration
document XML format - produced during the storage of the CSV file - in the
following path:”...BiesseWorks\BatchRun”.

Generates the list of imported programs with the relative BPP, CID, DXF
extensions etc. (e.g. window.bpp), storing it in a document with DSTN
extension, to be opened in the “work list” application software of the NC. For a
detailed description, see paragraph “Generating the list for the work list”, page
543.

Generates the list of imported programs - formed by the name plus ISO
extension (e.g. window.iso), storing it in a document with DSTN extension, to
be opened in the “work list” application software of the NC. For a detailed
description, see paragraph “Generating the list for the work list”, page 543.

Creates a new job.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Creating a job”, page 545.

Modifies the name of the job.

For a detailed description, see paragraph “Renaming a job”, page 546.

Description of the import area context menu

Add items; displays the dialogue box used to find the files to be imported to BatchRun.

Copy; copies the file selected in the import area.

Paste; inserts the file cut or copied previously in the import area.

Remove items; deletes the selected file.

Rename; renames the selected file.

Set piece data; displays the dialogue box used to modify the main panel data.

Reset list; cleans the import area, deleting all the files present.

Description of the jobs area context menu

New; creates a new job.

108 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 3 Utilities

Delete; deletes the job created.

Rename; renames the job.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

109
3 Utilities

3.2 BackupManager
BackupManager is a utility used to create copies of the machine data and machining programs.

For a detailed description of how to use the BackupManager, see 11.2 “Backup/restore machine
data and tool database” on page 272 and “Programs and macro storage” on page 339.

To start BackupManager click on the Start menu in the Windows application bar and then on the
items: Programs, BiesseWorks, Tools, BackupManager.
Figure 17: BackupManager

Description of fields
Copy; used to make a copy of the required data.

Restore; used to restore the copied data.

Data; enables copying of all the machine data, the tooling data and the tool database.

Tool bitmap; enables copying of all the image files created; for example files with extension bmp.

Programs; enables copying of all the programs created.

Macros; enables copying of all the macros created.

110 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

4 General settings

This chapter provides the necessary information for customising the working environment and the
toolbars and for defining the default technological data.

List of topics
• 4.1 “Customising the toolbar”
• 4.2 “Dialogue box setting Graphic options”
• 4.3 “Settings for semi-automatic positioning”
• 4.4 “Active machine change”
• 4.5 “Description of the Setup dialogue box”
• 4.6 “Password”
• 4.7 “Setting the language”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

111
4 General settings

4.1 Customising the toolbar

To speed up the most common operations, you can insert customised toolbars with the buttons
you use most. Click on the Display menu and on one of the five options available, e.g. on the
Custom Toolbar 00 option. Place the cursor on a toolbar button, right click on the mouse and click
on the item Customize (customise the toolbar).
Figure 18

E
D

A
C

Description of fields
A List of available buttons.

B List of buttons to be added to the toolbar.

C Commands to organise the buttons by moving them up and down.

D Command to reset operations and reset buttons on toolbar when the window opens.

E Command to save settings and close the window.

Toolbar creation procedure

1. Move buttons from area A to area B by double clicking.

2. Organise the buttons using buttons C.

3. Confirm with button E.

112 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

4.2 Dialogue box setting Graphic options

To define the way the profile and the machining operations of the Editor application software
graphics area are viewed, select the Display menu and the Graphic options... option.
Figure 19

A B

D
C

Description of fields
A Box Drawing:
Geometry; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the geometry.
Direction; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the arrow indicating the geometry
direction.
Start point; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the start point.
Pocket geometry; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the pocketing geometry.

B Box Projections:
Bores; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box), on the piece zero side, the boring
projection done on the side faces.
Cuts; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box), on the piece zero face, the cut projection
done on the side faces.
Millings; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box), on the piece zero face, the milling
projection done on the side faces.
Non-standard side projections; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box), on the piece zero
face, the non-standard face projection done on the side faces.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

113
4 General settings

Non-standard side extension; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the established
non-standard face extension.

C Box Tool path:

Machining operation; same function as button (see page 79).

Lead-in/lead-out; same function as button (see page 79).

Tool thickness; same function as button (see page 79).

Direction; shows (enabled box) or hides (disabled box) the arrow indicating the tool direction.

Start point; same function as button (see page 79).

D Box Optimisation:
Hide empty user sides; hides in the graphics area the faces that have not been machined, in
case of machining operations with “multipiece”.
Show the machining operations above the piece; shows the machining operations set as
“multipiece” (see Customised panel parameters dialogue box) directly on the graphics area
piece (see figure 20).
Figure 20

114 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

4.3 Settings for semi-automatic positioning

To perform the semi-automatic positioning of table objects in the WorkTableTooling application
software, define the parameters in the Semiautomatic tooling property dialogue box.
To display the window, click on the Tools menu, option Semiautomatic tooling properties....
Figure 21: dialogue box Semiautomatic tooling property.

Description of fields
Settings
On this tab you can define the standard data required to correctly perform the semi-automatic
positioning of the work table objects.
Minimum distance from through machining operations; used to define the safety distance
between the through machining operations and the shapeable suction cups (ref. A, figure 22).
Figure 22

Minimum distance from edges; used to define the distance that the shapeable suction cups
should keep from the piece edges (ref. B, figure 23). During semi-automatic positioning, the

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

115
4 General settings

shapeable suction cups maintain a minimum distance from the piece edges; the distance is
equal to the value entered in this field.
Figure 23

Minimum distance between adjacent carriages; used to define the minimum distance there
should be between adjacent carriages.
Minimum distance between adjacent mobile supports; used to define the minimum distance
there should be between adjacent mobile panel supports.

Maximum distance from edgebanding strips; used to define the distance from the piece
edges, to establish the maximum limit beyond which the shapeable suction cups cannot be
positioned.

Discretion step; used to define the subdivision of the locking area, in order to carry out a more
accurate control of suction cups and machining operations and check for potential collisions.
The lower the value, the more precise the positioning. The recommended value is 0.
0 = automatic setting; in this case, the calculation is made automatically, on the basis of the
piece dimensions.

Rotation step of suction cups; angle to establish the rotation step of the shapeable suction
cups during the semi-automatic positioning.

Thickness of the suction cups to be used; thickness of the shapeable suction cups catalogued
in the magazine, to be used during the semi-automatic positioning.

Thickness of carriages; thickness of the carriages.

Suction cup tooling from magazine; allows you to decide whether to use the shapeable
suction cups catalogued in the magazine.
• Yes; the shapeable suction cups catalogued in the magazine are used for the semi-
automatic positioning.
• No; the shapeable suction cups present on the work table are used for the semi-automatic
positioning (option).

File containing the default tooling to be used; allows you to choose which work table
configuration file (e.g. file with PCF extension) to use during the semi-automatic positioning.

Removable support removal; allows you to decide whether to remove from the work table the
side stop supports classified as removable (see the Removable field, page 233).
• Yes; the supports are removed.
• No; the supports are not removed.

Tooling for pendular loading; indicates whether to position the work table objects on both the
active origin and the one associated with it (used for machining operations in pendular mode).

116 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

• Yes; the positioning is performed on both the active origin and the one associated with it. To
activate this option, check the Sole origin data field is disabled (see “Dialogue box Piece
variables”, page 374).
• No; the positioning is performed on the active origin only.

Maximum overall dimensions of an aggregate for bores on side faces; working dimensions of
the boring aggregate during the machining operation on the side faces of the piece (see ref. A,
figure 24).

Maximum overall dimensions of an aggregate for milling on side faces; working dimensions of
the milling aggregate during the machining operation on the side faces of the piece (see ref. A,
figure 24).

Maximum overall dimensions of an aggregate for cutting on side faces; working dimensions of
the aggregate during the cutting operations on the side faces of the piece (see ref. A, figure
24).
Figure 24

Maximum overall dimensions of a deflector used for machining operations on side faces;
working dimensions of the chip deflector during the machining operations on the side faces of
the piece (see ref. A, figure 25).
Figure 25

Maximum overall dimensions of an aggregate for machining operations on lower side;

working dimensions of the milling aggregate during the machining operation on the lower side
of the piece (see ref. A, figure 26).
Figure 26

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

117
4 General settings

Maximum depth reached for bores on side faces; maximum depth which the aggregate can
reach in order to make bores on the side faces of the piece.

Maximum depth reached for milling on side faces; maximum depth which the aggregate can
reach in order to make milling operations on the side faces of the piece.

Maximum depth reached for cuts on side faces; maximum depth which the aggregate can
reach in order to make cuts on the side faces of the piece.

Maximum depth reached for edgebanding; maximum depth which any edgebanding
aggregate can reach during piece edgebanding operations.

Maximum depth reached for machining operations on lower side; maximum depth which the
milling aggregate can reach during operations on the lower face of the piece.
Prefix of the geometries indicating areas to be locked; used to define the prefix (e.g. RAW_) to
recall in the Geom. identif. field in the geometries (GEO) to specify that the geometry carried
out represents a piece to be locked.
When the prefix is not used, the positioner uses the standard piece defined in the LPX and
LPY fields as reference for locking.
Example of a programming row:
GEO ID=”RAW_anta” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=20 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO
START_POINT X=120 Y=264.2061763 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=191.4352226 XC=584 YC=264.2061763 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=584 YE=168.2038705 XC=607.9429514 YC=168.2038705 DIR=dirCW
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763
ENDPATH

Mobile support 1 stroke bottom limit; used to define the minimum position reachable by a
single support. Define this position for each support. These data are only visible for the ATS
work table. This data item can be imported automatically for all the supports by using the
specific options of the Tools menu; see “Reading of maximum reachable positions of supports
and carriages (ATS)”.
Mobile support 1 stroke top limit; used to define the maximum position reachable by a single
support. Define this position for each support. These data are only visible for the ATS work
table. This data item can be imported automatically for all the supports by using the specific
options of the Tools menu; see “Reading of maximum reachable positions of supports and
carriages (ATS)”.

Origins in pendular mode

In this card, you can make associations between origins in order to perform the machining
operations in pendular mode. In the Value field (figure 27), indicate the origin to be associated with
the one given in the Description field.

118 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Figure 27

Carriages
In this card, you can define the lower and upper limits that may be reached by each single
carriage.

Optimisation data
In this card, you can define the data for the correct optimisation of the area to be locked.

Locking percentage with larger suction cups; the part of the surface to be locked with the aid of the
larger shapeable suction cups present in the magazine (calculated from the total, really lockable
surface).
For example, if a value of 20 is entered, it must be possible to lock at least 20% of the entire
lockable area of a piece, using the largest suction cup catalogued in the magazine.

Locking percentage with all the suction cups available; the part of the surface to be locked with the
aid of at least one shapeable suction cup from the magazine (calculated from the total, really
lockable surface).
For example, if a value of 10 is entered, it must be possible to lock at least 10% of the entire
lockable area of a piece, using any shapeable suction cup catalogued in the magazine.

Stops
On this tab you can define the origins of the work table for activating each single stop line (see
figure 28).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

119
4 General settings

Figure 28
X
1
Example of a table with 4 stop lines:
Y 1 = first stop line
2
2 = second stop line
3 = third stop line
4 = fourth stop line

In the Value field (figure 29), indicate the list of origins (separated by a comma) to be associated
with the stop line given in the Description field.
Figure 29

120 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Reading of maximum reachable positions of supports and

carriages (ATS)
To read the maximum reachable position of each single support and automatically save it in the
specific tab in the parameter window BsLock, proceed as follows:

1. Take all the supports to their left limit and the carriages to their upper limit, click on the Tools
menu, option Read bottom limits of tables.

2. Take all the supports to their right limit and the carriages to their lower limit, click on the Tools
menu, option Read top limits of tables.

In case the work table has the objects defined as “removable”, the above mentioned
operations should be carried out without these objects so as to be able to define the real
limit positions correctly.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

121
4 General settings

4.4 Active machine change

To change the active machine open one part of the Setup independently from BiesseWorks. Close
all applications, click on the Start (Start-up) menu on the Windows application bar and on these
options: Programs, BiesseWorks, Tools, Active machine change (see figure 30).
Enter the password in the Password tab (see paragraph 4.6 “Password”, page 143) and click on
the User tab.
Figure 30

z To replace an active machine with another one (established beforehand), choose the machine

from the Machine name field. Exit by clicking on the button.

z To establish and activate a new machine, click on , enter the new machine name in the
Machine name field and select the family of machines it belongs to in the Family field:
• Arrow; comprises all the machine models of the Arrow line.
• Excel; comprises all machine models of the Excel line.
• Ftt; comprises all the machine models of the FTT line.
• Rover; comprises all the machine models of the Rover line except for the Rover with
edgebanding unit.
• RoverEdge; comprises all the machine models of the Rover line with the components
suitable for edgebanding (gluing unit and banding material container).
• Skipper; comprises all the machine models of the Skipper line.

Exit Setup by clicking on the button and import the machine data. To import the data, run
the ToolManager or MachineConfiguration applications and click on (see “Import
procedure”, page 269). The button is enabled only when the right password level has been
set.

122 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

4.5 Description of the Setup dialogue box

The Setup dialogue box enables you to set the default data for applications and consists of a
series of tabs, each for a different type of data. To display this box, select the menu File , option
Settings... or click on the button.

The descriptions shown below concern the data fields that can be accessed using the
level 5 password. The description of the disabled fields, exclusively for use by
technicians, is shown in the instructions for Service dept.
Figure 31: Setup

• Tab User, page 124

• Tab Optimiser, page 126
• Tab Tools, page 128
• Tab Machine, page 130
• Tab Machining operations, page 130
• Tab Editor Environment, page 132
• Tab Editor windows, page 133
• Tab Boring data, page 133
• Tab Cutting data, page 135
• Tab Milling data, page 136
• Tab Import from NC, page 138
• Tab Lead-in Lead-out, page 139
• Tab DXF Definition, page 139
• Tab Tooling, page 141
• Tab Job list, page 141
• Tab General, page 141
• Tab Password, page 142
• Tab Work tables, page 142
• Tab Insertion data, page 142

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

123
4 General settings

Tab User
Tab used to define the directives on which all the applications and utilities work.

The disabled fields are not described since only Biesse technicians have access to
them.

; used to establish a new machine, that is to say, to prepare the directories to keep the
machine data. A new machine can be established only if this one belongs to the active family
present in the Family field in tab Machine. Enter the name of the new machine in the Machine
name field. Each machine belongs to a family of machines. Therefore, when setting a machine
that does not belong to the active family, see paragraph 4.4 “Active machine change”, page 122.

; used to save the settings defined in the Setup to a file.

; used to reload the settings saved before to a file.

; deletes the selected machine data.

Application Path; displays the path in which the system for programming the BIESSEWORKS
machining has been installed.

Main sector; displays the folder for the sector in which the current machine folder is located.

Machine name; name of the current machine. By clicking on the field, the established machine list
drops down.
To replace the active machine with another one belonging to the same family, select the required
machine and exit Setup by clicking on then button. If a machine belonging to a different family
is selected, the system will display an error message. In that case, see paragraph 4.4 “Active
machine change”, page 122 for carrying out the replacement.

Version; shows the software version.

SP version; shows the Service Pack version.

; displays the dialogue box with a list of the versions of all BiesseWorks modules.

; displays the table showing a list of options enabled in the software. The table consists of two
columns: column Option with a list of all the options present in the software; column Enabled (0/1)
indicating whether the option is included or not in the software. 1 = option present; 0 = option not
present.

Options Description

Basic 1 = enables the basic version comprising the use of all

application software.

0 = use of the ToolManager and MachineConfiguration

applications disabled.

124 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Options Description

CAD 1 = enables the use of integrated SmartSketch CAD.

0 = CAD disabled.

Multiple panel positioning 1 = enables the use of instructions for table object
positioning.

0 = instructions disabled.

3D simulation 1 = enables the use of the 3D simulator window.

0 = simulator window disabled.

Macros 1 = enables the use of macros.

0 = macros disabled.

Non standard faces 1 = enables the use of commands to machine the non-
standard sides.

0 = commands disabled.

Pocketing 1 = enables the use of commands for pocketing.

0 = commands disabled.

Parametric tables 1 = enables the possibility to carry out the work table
parametric positioning.

0 = parametric positioning disabled.

Deflector 1 = enables the use of data for programming with the

deflector.

0 = programming with the deflector disabled.

Work tables optimiser 1 = enables the command for automatic tooling execution.

0 = command disabled.

Texts 1 = enables the use of commands for text-type milling the

profiles.

0 = commands disabled.

NC connection 1 = enables the connection with the numerical control.

0 = connection disabled.

Edgebanding 1 = enables the commands for edgebanding.

0 = commands disabled.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

125
4 General settings

Options Description

Door and window frames 1 = enables the use of the BiesseWin module.

0 = module disabled.

Nesting 1 = enables the use of the BiesseNest module.

0 = module disabled.

Multiple machine 1 = enables the active machine replacement, without having

to carry out a new installation, in case it is necessary to
machine with more machines belonging to different machine
families.

0 = active machine change disabled.

Tab Optimiser
This tab is used to define optimiser default data.

The disabled fields are not described since only Biesse technicians have access to
them.

Box Optimisation type; ; used to select the type of optimisation. The three options are connected to
the fields in the Typical optimisation data box.

By Job list; used to order the machinings, following the sequence indicated in the source
program.
By Job list and head boring; used to order the optimisable boring machining operations at the
beginning of the program or according to the instructions or according to the non-optimisable
machining operations (see paragraph 13.3 “Program functions”, page 299), grouping them so
as to keep drilling moments as few as possible.
In the programs comprising non-optimisable boring and instructions/machining operations, for
example suspensions, the optimisable borings the optimiser finds after the instructions do not
need to be moved to the beginning of the program but ordered and entered after the
instructions. In the programs comprising non-optimisable borings without instructions/
machining operations, the optimiser searches all the optimisable borings and moves them to
the beginning of the program. Example:
• in a R1, B1, B2, B3, R2, B4 sequence, where R refers to the optimisable millings and B to
the optimisable borings, the optimiser will move all the borings to the beginning, grouping
them as: (B1, B2, B3, B4), R1, R2.
• in a B1, R1, B2, non-optimisable R2, B3, B4 sequence, the optimiser will carry out the
following operations: (B1, B2) R1, non-optimisable R2, (B3, B4).
By Time; used to minimise machining times.
By Type of machining op.; allows you to prioritise the machining operations on the basis of the
type (W_CUTTING, W_ROUTING, etc.).

126 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Box Typical optimisation data; fields connected to the options selected in the Optimisation type
box.
Direction X+; forces the optimiser to order boring operations so that the processing centre
always moves in the positive X direction.
Direction X-; forces the optimiser to order boring operations so that the processing centre
always moves in the negative X direction.
Change tool order; authorises the optimiser to group together machining operations that use
the same tool. In this way it is possible to reduce the number of tool change operations and
the time required to start up and shut down the electrospindle.
Optimise first boring operation; forces the optimiser to group the consecutive boring
operations, optimising them so as to keep drilling moments as few as possible.
Order by tool direction; forces the optimiser to group together boring operations according to
their working direction.

Box Tool change options:

Unload spindles; makes the tool change device draw tool from the spindle to the end of the
programmed machining operation. To enable this function, tick the check box.

Box Create symmetrical program:

Change direction allowed; used to change the working direction of a profile, to adapt the
machining operation to the tool being used (according to the direction of rotation). Enable the
field by clicking on the check box.
Symmetrical programs; enables optimisation of the programs defined as symmetrical, i.e. with
the Symmetry field of the dialogue box Piece variables enabled. The box must be marked.

Box Run calculation optimisation:

Type; used to choose the principle the CAM should follow to optimise boring operations.
• No; used to give the CAM maximum freedom during boring optimisation process.
• Man.; enables the options stated below so as to decide how the CAM should respond during
the boring optimisation process.
Max. X centre distance; used to indicate the maximum distance between centres in X two
boring spindles should have so as to be joined in one boring moment.
Max. Y centre distance; used to indicate the maximum distance between centres in Y two
borings spindles should have so as to be joined in one boring moment.
.Max. number spindles; used to indicate the maximum number of spindles to group in one
single boring moment.
Stop at first maximum run; used to stop the CAM search after the first optimal boring moment,
no other operations are carried out then. Check the box to carry out this operation.

Box Various data:

Enable sw limits; enables spindle verification and checks that they comply with software limits.
This operation is carried out during the optimisation phase. To make this test available, enable
the field by clicking on the check box.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

127
4 General settings

Enable multiple electrospindle lowering; enables (checked box) the concurrent operation of
both electrospindles.
Multiple lowering tolerance; used to indicate the difference in millimetres that there can be
between both usable tools in one same boring and/or milling moment. In this case, the CAM,
finding more than one spindle combination, can decide which tools to use in one moment
according to the tolerance limit among the bit lengths.
Through mach. at end; enables the optimisation criteria of the through and non-through
machining operations. When the box is checked, the optimiser first carries out the non-through
machining operations and then the through machining operations.
Best drop; used to make a selection from the several possible combinations of spindles that
can be used in a single boring moment. In this case, the CAM, finding more than one spindle
combination, can have the chance to select the best one.

Unified lead-out sections; used to enable the final movement of the milling unit towards the
safety position, in a single step (without making an intermediate stop), in order to optimise the
work time between one machining operation and the next. This function is only active when
making boring and milling operations on the upper side of the piece, using the same rotation
speed as the electrospindle.
This function is only possible under these conditions:
• That the machining operation has been programmed only on the zero face and on the face
five.
• That the machining operation is perpendicular to the programmed face; data field (AZ) equal
to 90.
• That the data field “Enable TCP” has been disabled.
• That the data field “Sharp corners” has been disabled.
• That in the data field “Lead-out type” the option None has been defined.
• That the data field “Two-way run” has been disabled.

Box Opposite machining: box only visible for the “Skipper” machine. The fields in this box are
disabled because they require the insertion of the high level password (used exclusively by the
technician).

Box Through machining: box only visible for the “Skipper” machine. The fields in this box are
disabled because they require the insertion of the high level password (used exclusively by the
technician).

Tab Tools
This tab is used to define tool default data.

The disabled fields are not described since only Biesse technicians have access to
them.

Safety distance for boring tools; defines the default safety distance for boring tools.

Safety distance for milling tools; defines the default safety distance for milling tools.

Safety distance for cutting tools; defines the default safety distance for cutting tools.

128 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Default diameter for cutting tools; defines the default diameter of cutting tools.

Default image; used to assign a default image in BMP format to a tool. Tick the box if you wish the
system to assign a default image to the tool created, if there is no pre-set image for that tool.

Show bitmap in tool table ; used to display the selected tool in BMP format in the ToolManager
application tree list area.

Automatic class management; enables automatic calculation of speed, according to the tool
diameter, with reference to the arcs shown in the data for that tool class.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

129
4 General settings

Tab Machine
This tab is used to set the Cartesian co-ordinates system in the MachineConfiguration application,
defining the arrangement of the Cartesian axes on the machine and the references for angles and
inclinations. It also allows definition of the colours used for the elements displayed.

The disabled fields are not described since only Biesse technicians have access to
them.

Item colours; used to set the colours with which the elements are displayed in the graphic area.
For each element drawn it is possible to define the colours for the Edge field, the Filling field and
set the Line field type.

Global colours; used to set the colours that define the status of elements in the graphics area of
the Machine Configuration application.

Use a single DXF ; used to associate a single DXF file with the whole machine (default value 0).

Use a background image ; used to display a 3D representation of the machine in the background
of the graphics area of the MachineConfiguration application and in the tooling windows.

Family; indicates the family of the active machine. This field cannot be modified since it varies
according to the type of active machine (see paragraph 4.4 “Active machine change”, page 122).

Tab Machining operations

This tab is used to set certain data regarding the machining operations that can be performed on
the machine.

Active machining operations; list of machining operations managed by the active machine.

Active Inputs and Outputs; used to define which options appear in the data field Lead-in Type and
the data field Lead-out type in the machining operation programming windows.

Piercing Z; used to indicate the maximum default value (ref. A figure 32) the tool can reach after
drilling the piece. This data is used in the through machining.
Figure 32

Accuracy; mainly used to correct the distance between centres of the spindles in the boring units
during conversion into “millimetres” or “inches”.

3D Curve Segment; used to set the length of the segments obtained from the discretisation
(fraction) of a 3D arc or helix. A very low value will increase the number of segments and allow a
greater level of precision.

130 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Safety; safety value in Z to apply when carrying out tilted machining operations. For example,
when the tilting axis (see figure 33) is used, this data is very important since it allows to position the
electrospindle in a safe position before rotating it. This prevents collisions with the piece or the
table.

Minimum angle; if this default tilting is exceeded, the system applies the specific safety data
defined in the Safety field.
Figure 33

Tool correction: relative tool positions and path; used to select the “logic” of the tool correction.
If the check box User correction is enabled, the “logic” is: tool to the right/left of the path. If the User
correction check box is disabled, the “logic” is: path to the right/left of the tool.

User correction; used to select the tool correction mode, that is to say to define the position of the
tool with respect to the machining path.

Enable report; used to enable the diagnosis environment display and therefore, to enable the use
of the button to enter or exit from this environment.

Enable test OK report; used to show the red and green results in the diagnosis environment data
area (for a description, see “Informative area” on page 333).

Enable the report for unperformed tests; used to show the red and grey results in the diagnosis
environment data area (for a description, see “Informative area” on page 333).

Mode; used to define the mode type used by the optimiser to execute the program, assessing all
the possible tests in order to create a rather detailed diagnosis. Choose one of the following
options:
• Automatic; the optimiser selects the modality to be adopted according to the number of
programmed machining operations.
• Perform all the tests; the optimiser carries out all the possible compatibility controls between
the programmed tools and the machine tool holders/spindles. This function is only enabled if
the programming rows of the Editor application software do not exceed the value defined in
the Number of machining operations field.
• Stop at the first error; the optimiser carries out the appropriate compatibility controls
between the programmed tools and the machine tool holders/spindles; it stops when the
first error is encountered.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

131
4 General settings

• Reduced test and stop at the first error; the optimiser carries out all the possible
compatibility controls between the programmed tools and the machine tool holders/spindles,
and limits the control to the following data:
• data inherent to the presence of tools in the spindles or in the tool holders;
• data inherent to the tool name;
• data inherent to the tool diameter;
• data inherent to the tool type;
• data inherent to spindle direction;
• data inherent to tools X limit switch;
• data inherent to tools Y limit switch;
• data inherent to tools Z limit switch;

Number of machining operations; number of defaults inherent to the programming rows that are
useful to carry out the appropriate controls.

Tab Editor Environment

This tab is used to set the display mode in the Editor application.

2D CAD ; allows the CAD application graphics area to be used to draw and display all the
programmed machining operations, disabling the Editor graphics area.

CAM ; enables the default setting that allows all programmed machining operations to be
displayed in the Editor graphics area.

Show milling errors in CAD; enables or disables display of alarm messages when a drawing is
modified in the CAD integrated with the Editor application software.

Show macro messages; enables or disables display of alarm messages when macros are created.

Show standard side number; shows the number of each side of the panel.

Show piece data on opening; activates the window containing the variables used to define the
main characteristics and dimensions of the panel, when creating a new machining program.

Activate colour; used to display the programming rows in the colours set in the Environmental data
box.

Environmental data; used to set the colours with which to display the texts that appear in the
command area of the Editor application software.

Graphic view colours; used to set the colours with which the elements are displayed in the graphic
area.

132 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Tab Editor windows

This tab is used to select which data fields of the machining operations are to be enabled and to
define which fields are to be displayed in the first tab of the machining dialogue boxes.

Check box Piece data; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first tab of
dialogue box Piece variables. Check the boxes of the required fields.

Check box Boring windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
tab of the boring operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.

Check box Cutting windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
tab of the cutting operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.

Check box Milling windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
tab of the milling operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.

Visible parameters list; used to enable the assisted selection of parameters or variables,
transforming some write-enabled data fields A into default data fields B in which the list of
variables created and basic parameters are displayed.
A B

Show the full tool list; used to enable the selection of the tool to use in the machining operations
window, disabling the selection of the type, i.e. data field Tool type. When this check box in the
machining operations windows is checked, data field Tool code displays the complete list of all the
tools.

Input and output level; used to select in which tab of the machining operation windows to display
the data fields used to define the type of tool lead-in/lead-out from the piece.

Help images level; used to select which help image (0, 1 or 2) to display in the dialogue boxes.

Show parameters for aggregate 21; displays the Aggr21 angle data field in the boring and milling
operation dialogue box for enabling or disabling the use of aggregate AGGRE42.

Tab Boring data

This tab is used to define the default settings that appear in the boring programming windows.
These values will also be used when importing a technological DXF file in which the technology
has not all been specified.

Box General Data

Type; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue boxes are opened.
Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

133
4 General settings

Diameter; used to set the default diameter of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is
opened.
Depth; used to set the machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Through; defines the fact that, when the window is first opened, the machining depth must be
a through machining operation.

Box Speed
Working Speed; used to define the tool speed of advance during the machining operation.
Rotation speed; used to define the tool rotation speed during the machining operation. For a
better correspondence between the machine data and the data indicated in the machining
operation program, define the rotational speed of the boring unit spindles in this field.
Appr./output speed; used to define the tool lead-out speed at the end of the machining
operation.
Lowering speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.

Box Typical Data

Runs; used to define the default number to display in Vertical runs field of the boring operation
dialogue box.
Lowering distance; used to define the default point at which the tool must begin slowing down
during through machining, i.e. the distance between the point and the piece lower surface.

Minimum distance stapled; used to define the distance D between opposing bores (see figure
34), one on top of the piece and the other underneath, in order to generate synchronised
boring operations during optimisation.
If the distance between the two opposing bores exceeds the value set in this field, the boring
operations will not be synchronised but will be carried out individually, that is to say first on one
surface and then on the opposite one.
Figure 34: D = distance between opposing bores.

Box Multiple runs

Step; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool to
bring it back to the working position for the preceding step.

134 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Safety; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
to bring it back to the safety position.
Position; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
for a distance equal to the set position.
Impact; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
to bring it back to the position in which it contacts the surface of the panel.

Tab Cutting data

This tab is used to define the default settings that appear in the cutting programming windows.
These values will also be used when importing a technological DXF file in which the technology
has not all been specified.

Box General Data

Type; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue boxes are opened.
Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Thickness; used to set the thickness of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Depth; used to set the machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Through; defines the fact that, when the window is first opened, the machining depth must be
a through machining operation.

Box Speed
Working Speed; used to define the tool speed of advance during the machining operation.
Rotation speed; used to define the tool rotation speed during the machining operation.
Piercing speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.
Appr./output speed; used to define the tool lead-out speed at the end of the machining
operation.

Box Typical Data

Correction; used to establish the position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory.
Total thickness; used to establish the thickness of the machining operation, that is to say the
thickness of the groove being cut.
Runs; used to define the default number to display in field Vertical runs of the cutting operation
dialogue box.
Blade tolerance; this is used to define the minimum position (mm) required to guarantee that
one passage is superimposed on another passage of the tool during the machining operation.
Allows any errors caused by worn tools to be reduced to a minimum. When the value 1, value
0 or a value less than 0.1 is entered, the machine interprets this data as though it had been set
at 1.
Reverse possible; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software optimiser to
reverse the tool’s direction of movement during the machining operation, according to the
direction of rotation of the blade. This procedure improves the blade’s machining quality, as

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

135
4 General settings

during the machining operation the material towards the inside of the panel is compressed,
thus preventing the surfaces from chipping.
Reverse tool working direction; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software to
reverse the tool’s direction of movement only during the machining operation.
Radius correction; enables correction of the blade radius during the machining operation.

Box Multiple runs

Step; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool to
bring it back to the working position for the preceding step.
Safety; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
to bring it back to the safety position.
Position; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
for a distance equal to the set position.
Impact; enables an automatic procedure that during the multiple passes checks the new
ascent of the tool taking it back to the point of contact with surface of the piece.

Tab Milling data

This tab is used to define the default settings that appear in the milling programming windows.
These values will also be used when importing a technological DXF file in which the technology
has not all been specified.

Box General Data

Type; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue boxes are opened.
Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is first opened.
Diameter; used to set the default diameter of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is
opened.
Depth; used to set the default machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Through; defines the fact that, when the window is first opened, the machining depth must be
a through machining operation.

Box Speed
Working Speed; used to define the tool speed of advance during the machining operation.
Rotation speed; used to define the tool rotation speed during the machining operation.
Piercing speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.
Appr./output speed; used to define the tool lead-out speed at the end of the machining
operation.

Box Typical Data

Correction; used to establish the position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory.
Reverse possible; enables the automatic procedure that allows the software to decide whether
to maintain or reverse the tool direction of advance during the machining operation.

136 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Enable Zs Ze; enables the management of field Starting Z and data field End Z, both defined
during the programming phase. If the check box is disabled, the CAM does not manage the
data defined in the two above-mentioned fields.
Runs; used to define the default number to display in field Vertical runs of the milling operation
dialogue box.
Overmaterial; used to define the amount of material to be removed during finishing of the
machining operation.
Min dec. length ; used to define the point close to the piece corner where the electrospindle
must begin to slow down. The value is expressed in millimetres and represents the minimum
distance from the corner that can be used by the system in the case where a lower value has
been entered in field Decel. Dist. of the milling operations dialogue boxes.
Sharp corners; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software to interpret and run
programmed sharp corner machining operations.
Corner lead-out; used to define the default value of the distance to be maintained between the
tool and the piece when the tool comes out near the sharp corner.
Corner angle; used to define the default value for the tool lead-out angle to create the sharp
corner. This value is applied to the graphics only when, upon programming milling operations,
the tool name is omitted. Conversely, by stating the tool name, the system uses the Corner
ang. data defined in the dialogue box Tool parameters.
Floating; used to enable the software to use the copier. By enabling the box, that field in the
milling dialogue box is opened.
Chip deflector; used to enable the software to use the chip deflection aggregate. The ticked
box enables you to access the data field in the milling dialogue box to use the chip deflection
aggregate.

Minimum distance stapled; used to define the distance in Y between opposing milling
operations, one on top of the piece and the other underneath, in order to generate
synchronised machining operations during optimisation. Synchronisation is only applied to
profiles with a straight X and with a Y distance less than or equal to the value set in this field
(see figure 35). If the Y distance exceeds this set value, the milling operations will be made
independent of each other, that is to say they will be carried out first on one face and then on
the opposing one.
Figure 35: A= straight milling in X on face 0; B= straight milling in X on face 5; D= distance in X between the
two opposing milling operations.
X

Y
A
D

Box Lead-in Lead-out

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

137
4 General settings

Lead-in type; used to establish the type of tool lead-in proposed when the dialogue boxes are
opened.
Lead-out type; used to establish the type of tool lead-out proposed when the dialogue boxes
are opened.
Lead-in angle; used to define the tool lead-in angle with respect to Cartesian plane X-Y.
Entry Dist; refers to translation of the machining operation point of origin further forwards or
further back along the same path. Only used on closed profiles.
Decel. Dist; used for the distance between the tool deceleration point and the point of
geometrical discontinuity. Slowdown takes place both when the tool approaches the end of the
geometry, and when it moves away from that point.
Lead-out angle; used for the tool lead-out angle with respect to the Cartesian plane X-Y.
Overlap Dist; used for the distance between the tool lead-in point and the tool lead-out point.
% Radius; used to define the default value for the tool lead-in and lead-out radius.
Lead-out Delta; used to define the default value of the tool lead-out delta.
Comp. without Lead-in Lead-out; defines the fact that, in the absence of tool lead-in and lead-
out, automatic compensation will be carried out in any case in the air.
Comp. on Lead-in Lead-out; defines the fact that tool lead-in and lead-out will be carried out
with compensation.
Enable percentage speed; enables percentage speed management. The enabled field
modifies the data setting in field Work.Speed [mm/min] of the milling operation windows. In this
case, in fact, this data item takes on another meaning; the value to enter no longer concerns a
speed but rather a percentage used to increase or decrease the speed value entered in tool
data field Std WorkSpd.
For example, in the case where the tool to be used has a working speed of 3000mm/min, in
order to modify it and reduce it to 1500mm/min, the number 50 (3000 x 50% = 1500) and not
1500 must be entered in field Work.Speed [mm/min] of the machining windows.
Default angle; used to define the default angle according to the type of lead-in or lead-out
selected in the top list.

Tab Import from NC

The data contained in this tab are used by the modules importing machine data from the various
NCs (XNC, NC4xx, etc.). Part of this data is used in the MachineConfiguration application, during
import phases, as default values for all missing data items.

Confirm dimensions; enables the message confirming the dimensions of each element.

Confirm speed; enables the message requesting confirmation of machining speed data for
imported machine components.

Confirm diameter; enables the message requesting confirmation of data relating to the minimum
and maximum diameter of tools compatible with the imported spindle data.

138 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Insert DXF ; enables the message confirming the name of the DXF file to be associated with each
element.

Magazine position if unknown; enables the message confirming the magazine tool holder, if this is
not specified in the import tables.

Insert slide positions; enables the message confirming the number of positions on the slide, if this
number is not found in the PLC tables.

Spindle diam.; default value for the minimum/maximum diameter of tools compatible with the
spindle to be assigned to spindles that do not have this value.

Rotation Spd; default value for the minimum/maximum rotation speed to be assigned to tools and
aggregates that do not have this value.

WkSpeed; default value for the minimum/maximum machining speed (advance) to be assigned to
tools and aggregates that do not have this value.

Lower.Spd; default value for the minimum/maximum descent speed to be assigned to tools that do
not have this value.

Clockwise spindle, Anticlockwise spindle, Indifferent spindle; are used to define the default
direction of rotation to be assigned to imported boring spindles.

Confirm rot. speed; used to enable the message confirming the rotation speed for each boring tool.

Boring coupling; used to define the type of coupling for boring tools.

TPTCHAggregate coupling; used to define the type of coupling for milling tools and for aggregates.

Blade coupling; used to define the type of coupling for circular blade cutting tools.

Tab Lead-in Lead-out

Tab used to define the Post Processors assigned to the machine and any parameters required for
them.
The data in this tab is for the use of Biesse technicians only.

; button used to define the default directory where to download the ISO files.

Tab DXF Definition

This tab is used to define the settings used to import files in DXF format. For more detailed
information, see chapter 20

Active type; used to establish the formalism, that is to say the type of rules, used when importing
DXF files.

Parameters; list of parameters to which are associated the keys for the DXF layers to be imported.
The list of parameters varies according to the type of formalism selected in field Active type (for a
description of the parameters, see chapter 20, page 505).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

139
4 General settings

Keys; lists the keys to use in order to generate the syntax of the DXF layers to import. The list
varies according to the type of formalism selected in the field Active type. The listed keys can be
modified, i.e. customised (see chapter 20, page 505).

, used to save a file with extension LAY containing the keys configuration defined in the tab.
This file can be used to set the DXF files to be imported to BatchRun.

, opens a keys configuration.

String separator; separator character for alphanumeric values used for the layer syntax. Default
value.

Symbols are effected by capitals; used to enable or disable the “case sensitive” function, i.e. to
distinguish lower from upper case letters. For example, for the keys in the table to be recognised
by the system they must correspond to ones originally defined in the layer; the capitals or lower
case letters must be correctly typed (the word “panel” will not be recognised if “Panel” or “PANEL”
is written). The black box flag indicates the function is enabled.

Piece X dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the X axis.
This value is automatically taken up if it is not indicated in the imported DXF layer.

Piece Y dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the Y axis.
This value is automatically taken up if it is not indicated in the imported DXF layer.

Piece Z dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the Z axis.
This value is automatically taken up if it is not indicated in the imported DXF layer.

DXF Tolerance; used to define the precision of decimal figures for DXF conversion.

Discretise ellipses; used to decompose the elliptical geometries present in the DXF file,
fragmenting them in many curved segments. This function may be useful when the ellipse arc is
part of a profile. Check the box to enable this function. On the contrary, the disabled box allows to
import the ellipse as a single entity.

Unit of measurement; used to define the default unit of measurement. The unit of measurement
indicated in this field is used by the system in the case a specific unit of measurement has not
been defined in the file in DXF format.

Import layer in alphabetical order; this makes it possible to decide the order with which to import
the layers of the DXF, if the BIESSE type of formalism is chosen (BiesseWorks DXF option). The
enabled box indicates that the DXF layers are imported in alphabetical order. The disabled box
indicates that the layers imported have not been arranged at all but keep the order in which they
were created.

140 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

Figure 36: Definition of symbols in the software settings (setup).

Table of parameters A and table of symbols (blocks) B.

Tab Tooling
This tab is used to define certain aspects relating to how tooling dialogue boxes are displayed.

Show data tree in machine tooling; shows the tree list area in the Machine tooling dialogue box.

Show data tree in magazine tooling; shows the tree list area in the Magazine tooling dialogue box.

Store last item in foreground; stores the last display setting used in the Machine tooling dialogue
box, and displays the box in this way when it is next opened.

Check aggregate subspindle tooling; enables the system to check whether the tools and
aggregates are compatible.

Tab Job list

The data in this tab is for the use of Biesse technicians only. The settings must not be modified for
any reason.

Tab General
Tab used to set certain values that determine general operation of the BiesseWorks modules.

Large buttons; used to display large buttons on the toolbars. The size of these buttons is 32 by 32
pixel.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

141
4 General settings

Small buttons; used to display small buttons on the toolbars. The size of these buttons is 16 by 16
pixel.

User buttons; used to customise the size of buttons on the toolbars. Enter the value in pixel in the
Dimensions field (the default value is 24).

Unit of measurement; used to define the default unit of measurement. When a unit of
measurement is set, for example “millimetres”, and you wish to use another unit of measurement
during programming operations, for example “inches”, it is possible to force the setting by typing
the value followed by an asterisk plus the unit of measurement (e.g. 500*inch).

Language; used to change the software language. Reboot the application after selecting.

Tab Password
This tab is used to enable users to carry out modifications on certain software data.

Password; used to enable new users by entering the password (see “Password activation”, page
143).

Change Password; indicates the enabled users and allows them to be selected in order to change
the password (see “Password level management”, page 143).

Tab Work tables

The data in this tab is for the use of Biesse technicians only.

Tab Insertion data

The data in this tab is for the use of Biesse technicians only.

142 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 4 General settings

4.6 Password
The password is an alphanumeric code that protects certain data from any possible tampering.
There are several password levels, depending on the use of the software. A high level password
will enable all possible operations to be carried out and will allow the data to be saved in a
permanent manner.

Password activation
To enable new users to have one of the 5 password levels available, display the Setup dialogue
box and click on tab Password. Enter the code in the appropriate data field, click on command
Confirm and on button Save and exit.

Password level management

To associate a password to each individual user level or to modify the password associated to a
specific user level, display the Setup dialogue box and click on tab Password. Select the required
user level from the list and enter the code in field Insert new password and in field Confirm
password. Confirm the setting by clicking button Confirm.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

143
4 General settings

4.7 Setting the language

To set the language, display the Setup dialogue box, insert the fifth level password, click on tab
General and choose the language in data field Language. Close the Setup dialogue box by
clicking on button Save and exit. To activate the language that has been set, close the open
applications and then open them again.

144 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

5 Basic programming concepts

In the following chapter there is some necessary basic information for programming.

The term programming indicates the creation of a file with extension BPP (Editor application
document or machining program) containing the data for the machining operations to be
performed by the machine on the panel.

List of topics
• 5.1 “Description of the piece”
• 5.2 “The geometric profile”
• 5.3 “Types of programmable machining operations”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

145
5 Basic programming concepts

5.1 Description of the piece

Description of the standard sides of the piece:

side 0: top part of the piece;

side 1: left-hand part of the piece;

side 2: front part of the piece;

side 3: right-hand part of the piece;

side 4: rear part of the piece;

side 5: bottom part of the piece.

Figure 37

Corners of the piece

Each piece side uses the corners as reference points (figure 38) from where to start in order to
carry out any type of machining operation.
Figure 38

146 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 5 Basic programming concepts

The reference corners are used to establish the zero point from where to start in order to
determine the co-ordinates of the geometric drawings; the drawing will change position according
to the corner selected.
The drawing illustrated in figure 39 shows an example of two bores with the same co-ordinates,
machined starting from different corners.

Figure 39

5.2 The geometric profile

The geometric profile represents the shape to be machined (cut, bore, mill) and it may made with
the EGA tools present in the Editor application software (see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”) or with
an external CAD (see chapter 20 “Planning DXF files”). The profile represents the tool working
path that the machining operation parameters must be associated with, i.e. information about the
speed of the tools, speed of the work, runs to be performed with the tool, etc.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

147
5 Basic programming concepts

5.3 Types of programmable machining

operations
Vertical as well as horizontal boring, milling and cutting operations can be programmed. Vertical
operations are carried out with the tool positioned perpendicular to the work table (ref. A figure 40),
whereas horizontal operations are carried out with the tool positioned parallel to the work table (ref.
B figure 40).
Figure 40

Boring operations
Boring operations can be “optimised” and “non optimised”. Both types can be carried out using the
boring unit spindles or the electrospindles. The NC will automatically search for tools according to
the data set (diameter, type of bit, etc.) selecting the spindles best suited for the type of work
started from among the ones present in the machine configuration.
There is only one difference between these two types of machining operation, which relates to the
order in which the machining program is carried out. In the case of “non optimised” machining
operations the program will be carried out in sequence, as created by the operator, whereas in the
case of “optimised” machining operations, the machining program will be processed by the NC
which selects the fastest route to be used for machining operations.

List of programmable boring operations (see paragraph 15.3 “Programming boring operations”,
page 418):
z General boring operations on any piece side.

148 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 5 Basic programming concepts

Figure 41

z Vertical boring on side 0 or on side 5 of the piece.

Figure 42.

z Horizontal boring on side 1, side 2, side 3 or side 4 of the piece.

Figure 43

z Boring using C-axis, to be carried out on straight or circular sides.

Figure 44

z System boring, i.e. parametric repeated boring operations, to be carried out on all sides of the
piece:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

149
5 Basic programming concepts

centre-bore type: creates a row of bores, placing the first bore at the centre of the piece and
distributing the others at equal distances from each other. The bores machined are always
centred on the panel regardless of their size.
Figure 45

centre-space type: creates a row of bores, placing the centre distance of the first two bores at
the centre of the piece and distributing the others at equal distances from each other. The
centre of the distance between the bores is always at the centre of the panel.
Figure 46

correction with movement type: creates a row of bores, calculating that machining operations
stop at the set position. This position refers to the distance of the last bore from the end of the
piece (ref. A, figure 47).
Figure 47
A

centre correction type: creates a row of bores, always correcting them at the centre on the
basis of the varying piece lengths.
Figure 48

z Geometric boring, i.e. boring based on a geometric pattern, to be carried out on each side of
the piece.

150 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 5 Basic programming concepts

Milling operations
Milling operations are carried out with a geometric profile (see ch. 14 “Creating profiles”, 18
“Importing graphic/technological files”). Milling operations are carried out with the tools fitted on the
collet spindles or on the aggregates installed on the electrospindles.

List of programmable milling operations:

z Machining the contour of the panel using a geometric drawing as a profile.

Figure 49

z Machining operations on any side of the piece by creating figures or geometric drawings on
which to carry out a milling (ref. A, figure 50) or pocketing operation (ref. B and C, figure 50).
z Creating texts for milling on any side of the piece (ref. D, figure 50).

Figure 50
B

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

151
5 Basic programming concepts

Cuts
It is possible to program various types of cutting operation to be carried out using the circular blade
tools fitted on the electrospindles or on the units present in the slots.

List of programmable cutting operations (see paragraph 15.4 “Programming cutting operations”,
page 427):
z Cuts in the direction of X-axis to be carried out on side 5 and side 0 of the piece.

Figure 51

z Cuts in the direction of Y-axis to be carried out on side 5 and side 0 of the piece.

Figure 52

z Angled cuts on all sides of the piece

152 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 5 Basic programming concepts

Figure 53

z Cuts around the perimeter of the piece in order to square it, to be carried out on all sides of the
piece.
Figure 54

z Quadrangular cuts, to be carried out on all sides of the piece.

Figure 55

z Cuts resulting from a geometric drawing, to be carried out on each side of the piece.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

153
5 Basic programming concepts

Figure 56

154 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

TOOLING
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Cataloguing the tools and the aggregates means recording their physical and technical
characteristics in a database to be used for machine tooling-up. This operation is managed by the
ToolManager application for tools, and by the MachineConfiguration application for aggregates.
Before actually tooling-up of the machine, always check that the tools to be fitted are present in the
tool database; record them if they are not in the database.
When the software is connected to the machine, before making modifications to the database,
always check the state of the alarm indicator . Red indicates that the machine is moving to
carry out a reset or a machining operation; in this case modifications are not allowed. Green
indicates that the machine is stopped and that any type of modification can be carried out. The
flashing disk on the status bar indicates that the data is being modified, and it is not possible to run
any program until the modifications have been saved.

The data provided in the following chapter is expressed in millimetres. If the unit of
measurement is set to inches in the Setup, the data in BiesseWorks applications will be
expressed in inches.

List of topics
• 6.1 “Basic concepts”
• 6.2 “Notions on saving data”
• 6.3 “Class management”
• 6.4 “Type management”
• 6.5 “Recording the tools”
• 6.6 “Recording thickness tracers”
• 6.7 “Recording insertions”
• 6.8 “Recording the labels”
• 6.9 “Group management”
• 6.10 “Dialogue box Filters”
• 6.11 “Aggregate management”
• 6.12 “Notes regarding the creation of the AGGRE81 aggregate”
• 6.13 “Notes regarding the creation of a chip deflector”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

157
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.1 Basic concepts

Cataloguing cutting, boring and milling tools has been designed so that tools can be grouped
together on the basis of a scale of hierarchy, giving each tool a “type”, a “class” and a “unit”.

A “class” represents the starting level in the tool hierarchy. When a tool is assigned to a “class”,
this means it is distinguished from other tools on the basis of the machining operations that it can
be used to carry out. The “class” must be assigned when the tool is created, so that it will be
associated with other tools that carry out the same machining operation.
The following classes listed below are the default classes which are displayed only when enabled.
z C_ROUTING: defines all the types of mills to be used in the machining operations that can be
programmed as milling.
z C_CUTTING: defines all the circular-shaped tools (circular blades) to be used in the
machining operations that can be programmed as cutting.
z C_DRILLING: defines all the types of boring bits to be used in the machining operations that
can be programmed as boring.
z C_INSERTING: defines all the objects that can be applied to the piece (e.g. hinges, mounting
plates, suspension brackets, guides, bushes, etc.) and programmed as insertions, which are
catalogued and considered as tools for management purposes.
z C_TRACING: defines the thickness tracer, which for management purposes is catalogued and
considered to be a tool.
z C_LABELING: defines the labels (see paragraph 6.8 “Recording the labels”).

The “type” represents the second level in the hierarchy. When a tool is assigned to a certain type,
this means it is distinguished from other tools on the basis of its physical characteristics. The type
must be assigned when the tool is created, so that it will be associated with other tools that fulfil
the same requirements. For example, all candle mills must belong to the same type.

The “unit” is the last level in the hierarchy. This classification is not compulsory like the preceding
ones, as all the tools used to carry out specific machining operations are assembled under this
heading. For further clarification, see paragraph 6.9 “Group management” on page 180.

To facilitate tool cataloguing operations, Biesse offers a database with a pre-set list of “class” and
“type” items. To use these settings, launch the ToolManager application and record tools only. To
create new “types” or new "classes”, launch the ToolManager application and follow the
instructions below:
Display the dialogue box used to create new “classes” (see “Class management” on page
162).
Display the dialogue box used to create new “types” (see “Type management” on page 165).

As regards the aggregates, Biesse offers a pre-set list containing all the aggregates available.
When acquiring new aggregates, see paragraph 6.11 “Aggregate management” on page 184 for
how to catalogue them.

Certain commands relating to tool management, such as create, modify and delete, might
not be active, as they require a suitable password. To enter the correct level of password,
see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143.

158 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Use of the data area table

Certain tool management operations can be carried out directly using the table in the data area.
z Double click on an item in column CODE to modify the data of each single tool. The dialogue
box Tool parametersis displayed. For a description of the fields in the window, see 6.5
“Recording the tools” on page 167.
z To modify a value in the table, double-click on a box in the required column. If the value cannot
be modified, a short message will be displayed indicating the reason for the failure of the
operation.
z Display tools according to their technical and physical characteristics using the filters window.
For a description of the window, see paragraph 6.10 “Dialogue box Filters” on page 182.
z To perform certain operations, for example creation of a tool, rapidly, use the context menu by
clicking on any point in the table.

The application context menu

The context menu can be used to manage tool cataloguing, working directly on the data area or on
the tree list. To display the menu, position the cursor on a box in the table or on an item in the tree
list.
z To create a tool by copying the characteristics of an existing one, select the tool to be copied in
the tree list or in the table, then select item Copy tool in the context menu. The Tool
parameters dialogue box is displayed, then enter the missing data. For a description of the
fields, see paragraph 6.5 “Recording the tools”, page 167.
z To delete a tool from the database, select the tool to be deleted in the tree list or in the area
table, then select item Delete tool in the context menu.
z To create a new tool, select any tool in the tree list or in the table, then select item New tool in
the context menu. The Tool parameters dialogue window is displayed, then enter the missing
data. For a description of the fields, see paragraph 6.5 “Recording the tools”, page 167.
z To modify the data for a tool, select the tool to be modified in the tree list or in the table, then
select item Modify tool in the context menu. This displays the Tool parameters dialogue box
(see figure 59 page 167) in which it is possible to modify the missing data. Click on before
closing the window.
z To modify a tool value, select the box in the required column (for example diameter) and then
select item Modify Value -> in the context menu. Enter the new value. If you wish to change
the values in the whole column, tick the check box. Click on to confirm the operation.
z To rename a tool, select the tool to be renamed in the tree list or in the table, then select item

Rename tool in the context menu. Enter the new name and click on before closing the
window.
z To add a tool to a new group, select the required tool in the tree list or in the table, then select
item Add tool to a new group (see paragraph 6.9 “Group management”, page 180).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

159
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

z To add a tool to an existing group, select the required tool in the tree list or in the table, then
select item Add tool to an existing group (see paragraph 6.9 “Group management”, page 180).
z To create a new tool class, in the tree list select the TOOL TABLE , option, display the context
menu and select New class. For a description of the fields, see paragraph 6.3 “Class
management”, page 162.
z To consult or modify the data of a class, select from the tree list the name of the required class
and double click with the left mouse button, or display the context menu and select Modify
class. For a description of the fields, see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”, page 162.

160 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.2 Notions on saving data

Saving the data is divided into two processes:

z the first simply relates to saving the data in the temporary memory, using the button inside
the dialogue boxes;

z the second relates to final saving of the data, using the button on the ToolManager
application toolbar. The data is then stored on the hard disk, for software installed on the office
PC, or in the NC, for software connected to the machine.

When any data is saved in a temporary manner, the floppy-disk on the status bar will start to flash
and will continue to do so until a final save has been performed using . Should you wish to
restore the data to the values set before modifications to the application software, click on ; this
will update the application software and reset the previous data, providing that has not been
pressed. For example, if you make temporary modifications using alone, and you then wish to
return to the original data without making the modifications final, use .

When the ToolManager, application is closed, if the data has not been saved an information box
will be displayed requesting that this operation be carried out. Click on to save and close the
application software, click on to close the application software without saving the data, or click
on to exit the window without doing anything.

To avoid the risk of data loss in the event of a computer crash or power cut, save the
settings periodically; a flashing disk on the status bar indicates that it is necessary to
save the data.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

161
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.3 Class management

Certain commands relating to class management, such as create, modify and delete, might
not be active, as they require a suitable password. To enter the correct level of password,
see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143.

In order to manage the classes, display the Tool class manager dialogue box, select the Tools
menu and the Tool class manager option, or click on the button of the toolbar.

Figure 57: dialogue box Tool class manager

; Creates a new class. Function only enabled with a high level password, used exclusively by
the technician.

; Creates a new class by copying the data from the class selected. Function only enabled with
a high level password, used exclusively by the technician.

; Visualises the dialogue box Tool class parameters with the data of the selected class. For the
description of the data fields, see page 163.

; Deletes the class selected. Function only enabled with a high level password, used
exclusively by the technician.

; Stores the new class added to the list in the temporary RAM.

Consultation and modification

To consult or modify the data of a particular class, double click on a list item to select it;
alternatively, use the button. In the case of a modification, close the Tool class manager
dialogue box using the button.

162 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Description of the dialogue box Tool class parameters

Code; name of the class.

Description; data field reserved for comments.

Pre-set type; reference ID allowing the post processor to recognise the class to which the tool
belongs. If you enter a value between 0 and 2 the machining operations in the Machining list field
will be highlighted.
A value of “0” will select the W_Drilling machining operation;
A value of “1” will select the W_Drilling and W_Routing machining operation;
A value of “2” will select the W_Cutting machining operation.

Machining list; list of machining operations to be associated with the class. The ID setting will
select the machining operation.

Type list; list of types to be associated with the class. To create new items to be added to the list,
display the specific dialogue box (see paragraph 6.4 “Type management”).

All types; enable the check box by clicking it with the mouse to associate all the items in the list of
types with the class.

Data area: table of read-only fields displaying the diameter, rotation speed, speed of advance and
descent speed of the tools. Through this area it is possible to generate reference graphs on the
basis of general values set in the following data fields:
• Diameter [mm]; write the reference diameter value.
• RotSpd [rpm]; type in the value for the rotation speed in rpm, according to the reference
diameter.
• Work. speed [mm/min]; write the value for the speed of advance in mm/min., according to
the reference diameter.
• Lower.Spd [mm/min]; write the value for the descent speed in mm/min., according to the
reference diameter.

To enter the values in the table, click on .

To modify the values in the table, select the required line and click on .
After modifying the value in the required data field, click on to display it in the table.

To delete a line in the table, select the line and click on .

Entering these data is not mandatory, and it is possible to set an indefinite number of tool
diameter values with relative speed values.
This data is useful when creating new tools, if you wish the tool rotation speed, speed of
advance and descent speed to be calculated automatically when the tool diameter value is
entered (see “The cutting tools” on page 172, data field: Speed parameters box).

Minimum Maximum; box containing the fields relating to speed variation expressed in millimetres
per minute. These fields are used as control values for the data entered in the data area. To
activate them, click on the following check boxes:
• RotSpd [rpm]; rotation speed.
• Work. speed [mm/min]; speed of advance.
• Lower.Spd [mm/min]; descent speed.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

163
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Close the window illustrated in figure 57 and save the settings.

164 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.4 Type management

Certain commands relating to type management, such as create, modify and delete, might
not be active, as they require a suitable password. To enter the correct level of password,
see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143.

To display the type management window, select the Tools menu and the Tool type manager option
or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 58: dialogue box Tool type manager

; Creates a new type.

; Creates a new type by copying the data from the selected one.

; Visualises the dialogue box Tool type parameters with the data of the selected type.

; Deletes the type selected.

; Memorises the new type added to the list in the temporary RAM.

Creation
To create a new type, click on or, if starting with an existing data type, click on .
To save the settings and close the window, click on button . To close the windows without
saving, click on button .

For a description of the fields, see “Description of the dialogue box Tool type parameters” on page
166.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

165
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Consultation and modification

To consult or modify the data of a particular type, double click in a list item to select it; alternatively,
use the button. In the case of a modification, close the Tool type manager dialogue box using
the button.

Delete
To delete a type from the list, select the required item and click on . Close the Tool type
manager dialogue box saving the settings.

Description of the dialogue box Tool type parameters

Code; type name.

Class list; list of classes to be associated with the selected type.

Pre-set data field: list of images depicting the tools. Scroll through the list and select the item to
wish to associate with the type.

Priority level; priority level used by the optimiser to decide the order in which tools are to be used.
A low value represents a higher priority; if a tool is given a value of 0 this means it has top priority.

Type ID; unique number to assign to the type and used by the system for type management.

DXF: button to find the file with extension DXF to be associated with a tool type. The file selected
is used to display an image in the Editor application software graphics area, so that it is possible,
for example, to distinguish a machining operation carried out with a “lance” type tool from a
machining operation carried out with a “countersunk” type tool. Associate a DXF file to each type
of tool so that graphic representations of the machining operations created can be distinguished
according to the type of tool used.

Description; data field reserved for comments.

If you wish to display the class definition window to create a new class or view the data for existing
classes, click on . For further information regarding class management, see paragraph 6.3
“Class management” on page 162.

To create a new type using data copied from an existing type, select an item in the list and click on
. Enter the name of the new type and save.

Close the window (see figure 58) and save the settings.

166 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.5 Recording the tools

Enter the correct level of Password in the Setup dialogue box.

To create new tools, select the Tools menu and the New tool option, or click on the toolbar.

Figure 59: dialogue box Tool parameters

Fill in the fields in the window and click on the button to save the settings. The tool created will
be added to the list of tools in the application table.
The compilation of the fields in the window varies according to the type of tool to catalogue; to
record the boring and milling tools, refer to the following paragraph, to record cutting tools, see
page 172.
z “Milling and boring tools” (page 167).

z “The cutting tools” (page 172).

Milling and boring tools

To record or modify milling and boring tools, define the following fields in the Tool parameters
dialogue box:

Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class you wish to associate with
the tool to be created: C_Routing for a milling tool and C_Drilling for a boring tool. If you wish to
add new items to the list or view the data for a class, click on (see paragraph 6.3 “Class
management”).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

167
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the tool. If
you wish to add new items to the list or view the data for a type, click on (see paragraph 6.4
“Type management”).

Code; field used for the tool name. Due to incompatibility with the control, the name description
does not allow the following characters: # ~ ! $ % ^ & ” ' ( ) [ ] { }.

Coupling; pre-set list of existing couplings. Select the coupling you require.

Description; field used for comments.

BMP search button: button that associates an image in bitmap format with the tool created.
Displays the window using the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
in which the tool image files are stored. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the
relative square in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the tool
when tooling-up the machine using the MachineConfiguration application.

DXF search button: button used to find the DXF extension file containing the tool section.
After entering the DXF file, click on Run 3D simulation of the tool and change the section into a 3D
drawing. When the drawing is saved it creates a file with the same name and extension bmp in the
folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp\ Custom. Click on the BMP search
button and select the drawing to enter it in the relative square in the dialogue box.

Direction of rotation; box used to set the tool direction of rotation. Enable one of the two option
buttons using the cursor. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.

Diameter [mm]; tool diameter expressed in millimetres.

Length [mm]; tool length expressed in millimetres.

For boring tools, the length is the distance between the lower tip of the tool and the nose of the
spindle (ref. A, figure 60).
For milling tools, the length is the distance between the lower tip of the tool and the nose of the
electrospindle (ref. B, figure 60).
Figure 60
ISO 30

HSK

A B B

C C

Max Diameter [mm]; maximum tool diameter expressed in millimetres. The field is not used in the
case of boring tools.

Max Length [mm]; maximum tool length expressed in millimetres. The field is not used in the case
of boring tools. The data input in this field is used by the system to establish the safety position of
the boring unit or electrospindle.

168 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

In the software versions before version 2.2, the system - when calculating the safety
position of the boring unit or electrospindle - does not take account of the data item
shown in the Max Length [mm] field.

Overall dimensions; pre-set list of codes relating to the tool working dimensions. This data item is
used during the automatic housing of the tools in magazines defined as “random” (see paragraph
7.2 “Technical data of the tool magazines” on page 201). It indicates whether the dimensions of the
tool are such that they prevent other tools from being housed in tool holders adjacent to the one in
which it is housed. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.
z 0 = management disabled.

z 1 = small compact tool occupying the tool holder in which it is housed and without interfering
with the spaces of other tool holder positions.
z 2 = medium size tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the following
tool-holder position.
z 3 = medium size tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the
preceding tool-holder position.
z 4 = large tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the preceding and
following tool-holder positions.

Useful length [mm]; length of the tool, used during the machining operation (ref. C, figure 61). For
the boring tools, the field is not used as this length coincides with that of the tool.
Figure 61

C
C

Max Vert step [mm]; depth that can be reached by the tool during vertical machining of the panel.
Enter a maximum value beyond which the tool cannot go.

Floating; indicates the presence of the copier. To use the tool with the copier, tick the box. By
enabling this option, the Presser box is automatically deactivated. The field is not used in the case
of boring tools.

Presser; indicates the presence of the presser. To use the tool with the electrospindle with
presser, tick the box. By enabling this option, the Floating box is automatically deactivated. The
field is not used in the case of boring tools.

Blower; indicates the presence of the blower. The box is enabled only when one of the former two
boxes has been marked. To use the tool with the electrospindle with blower, tick the box. The field
is not used in the case of boring tools.

Deflector; used to specify the identification code for the chip deflector to be associated with the
tool during the machining operation. When enabled for use during the machining operation, by

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

169
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

ticking the relative check box, the aggregate will always be picked up before the tool.
As for the milling tool with integrated deflector, the name of the deflector must be indicated in this
data field.

Enable class management; check box that can be used to delete the values in the Speed
parameters box which are displayed automatically after the tool diameter is entered. If you wish to
set the parameters relating to the speed at which the tool is to work yourself, disable the check box
by clicking with the mouse. The values present in the box will depend on the data entered in the
Tool class parameters dialogue box (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).
Description of the parameters in the box:
• Std WorkSpd; tool standard speed of advance. The value to be indicated in this field must be
the one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Std RotSpd; tool standard rotation speed. The value to be indicated in this field must be the
one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Std LowSpd; tool standard descent speed. The value to be indicated in this field must be the
one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Max WorkSpd; tool maximum speed of advance.
• Max RotSpd; tool maximum rotation speed.
• Max LowSpd; tool maximum descent speed.
• Min WorkSpd; tool minimum speed of advance.
• Min RotSpd; tool minimum rotation speed.
• Min LowSpd; tool minimum descent speed.

Dec. Time; tool deceleration time. Enter the required value. The field is not used in the case of
boring tools.

Safety; safety distance that the tool must keep from the piece in order not to ruin it, used by the
system to establish the safety position, that is to say the positioning point of the boring unit or the
electrospindle above the piece before the machining operation begins.
As for the tools in the boring unit, seeing that it is possible to install tools of varying lengths on the
vertical and/or horizontal spindles, it is necessary to start from the longest tool when establishing
the safety distance of every single tool (see figure 62).
Example: supposing the safety distance for the longest tool 1 (figure 62) is 10, the other tools will
adopt the following safety distances:
• tool 2 = (L1-L2) +10, i.e. 20;
• tool 3 = (L1-L3) +10, i.e. 14;
• tool 4 = (L1-L4) +10, i.e. 17.

If you insert a value equal to zero, when storing the dialogue box a message will appear, indicating
the automatic insertion of the default value.

170 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Figure 62

Acc. Time; tool acceleration time. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.

Corner ang.; tool cutting edge angle when creating a sharp corner. The field is not used in the
case of boring tools.

Uniclamp saf. [mm]; safety position beyond which the tool must not go. It is advisable to enter a
value at least 15 millimetres above the value set in the Safety field.
This data item is utilised by the system when the use of Uniclamps has been enabled in Piece
variables dialogue box (Uniclamp field).
If you insert a value equal to zero, when storing the dialogue box a message will appear, indicating
the automatic insertion of the default value.

Correction; field not used. Leave a value of 0.

Active on cutting operation; it allows the use of the tool created as a mill also for the machining
operations programmed as cuts (see paragraph 15.4 “Programming cutting operations”, page
427). In this case, in the cut dialogue boxes (CUT commands), the tools associated to the
C_Routing class, defined as blade when the “Tool code” field is activated, will also appear in this
field.

Max. cutting prof.; maximum depth that the tool can reach during machining operations. This field
is linked to the “Active on cutting operation” field activation. If the depth of the program machining
( “Depth” field in the cut windows) exceeds this value, optimisation will not be successful.

Distance travelled; total path covered by the tool during machining operations. This value is
automatically increased as the tool works.

Field only active from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.

Tool life; it allows you to establish when a tool should be changed, due to wear. Indicate the
maximum path that the tool can cover when working. When the value indicated in this field
appears in the Distance travelled field, this means the tool should be serviced or changed.

Field only active from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

171
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

The cutting tools

To record or modify cutting tools, define the following fields in Tool parameters dialogue box:

Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select C_Cutting. If you wish to add new
items to the list or view the data for a class, click on (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).

Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the blade.
If you wish to add new items to the list or view the data for a type, click on (see paragraph 6.4
“Type management”).

Code; field used for the blade name. Enter an alphanumeric code. Due to incompatibility with the
control, the name description does not allow the following characters: # ~ ! $ % ^ & ” ' ( ) [ ] { }.

Coupling; pre-set list of existing couplings. Select the coupling you require.

Description; field used for comments.

BMP search button: button that associates an image in bitmap format with the blade created.
Displays the window using the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
in which the tool image files are stored. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the
relative square in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the tool
when tooling-up the machine using the MachineConfiguration application.

DXF search button: button used to find the DXF extension file containing the blade section.
After entering the DXF file, click on Run 3D simulation of the tool and change the section into a 3D
drawing. When the drawing is saved it creates a file with the same name and extension bmp in the
folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp\ Custom. Click on the BMP search
button and select the drawing to enter it in the relative square in the dialogue box.

Direction of rotation; window used for setting the direction of rotation of the blade (clockwise or
anticlockwise). Enable one of the two option buttons using the cursor.

Diameter [mm]; blade diameter expressed in millimetres.

Thickness; blade thickness expressed in millimetres.

Max Diameter [mm]; field not used.

Max Length [mm]; field not used.

Overall dimensions; field not used.

Useful length [mm]; length of the cutting edge.

Max Vert step [mm]; depth that can be reached by the blade during vertical machining of the
panel. Enter a maximum value beyond which the blade cannot go.

Deflector: the deflection aggregate cannot be used when machining operations are being carried
out with the circular blade. Leave the field empty.

Floating; field not used.

Blower; indicates the presence of the blower. The box is enabled only when one of the former two
boxes has been marked. To use the tool with the electrospindle with blower, tick the box.

172 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Presser; indicates the presence of the presser. To use the tool with the electrospindle with
presser, tick the box.

Enable class management; check box that can be used to delete the values in the Speed
parameters box which are displayed automatically after the blade diameter is entered. If you wish
to set the parameters relating to the speed at which the blade is to work yourself, disable the check
box by clicking with the mouse. The values present in the box will depend on the data entered in
the Tool class parameters dialogue box (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).
Description of the parameters in the box:
• Std WorkSpd; blade standard speed of advance. The value to be indicated in this field must
be the one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Std RotSpd; blade standard rotation speed. The value to be indicated in this field must be
the one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Std LowSpd; blade standard descent speed. The value to be indicated in this field must be
the one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.
• Max WorkSpd; blade maximum speed of advance.
• Max RotSpd; blade maximum rotation speed.
• Max LowSpd; blade maximum descent speed.
• Min WorkSpd; blade minimum speed of advance.
• Min RotSpd; blade minimum rotation speed.
• Min LowSpd; blade minimum descent speed.

Dec. Time; blade deceleration time. Enter the required value.

Safety; safety distance that the blade must keep from the piece in order not to ruin it (example
10mm) used by the system to establish the safety position, i.e. the safety position of the blade
above the piece before starting the machining operation. If you insert a value equal to zero, when
storing the dialogue box a message will appear, indicating the automatic insertion of the default
value.

Acc. Time; blade acceleration time.

Corner ang.; field not used.

Uniclamp saf. [mm]; safety position beyond which the blade must not go. These data are used by
the system when the (Uniclamp) clamps are used. If you insert a value equal to zero, when storing
the dialogue box a message will appear, indicating the automatic insertion of the default value.

Correction; point of reference for the blade, for positioning it as defined in the machining program
(see figure 63):
• 0 = reference on the coupling axis (blade centre of rotation A).
• 1= reference on the lower cutting edge B of the blade.
• 2 = reference on the upper cutting edge C of the blade.
• 3 = reference on the lower cutting edge B of the blade; only for tools that can be installed in the
"5-axis" milling unit.
• 4 = reference on the upper cutting edge C of the blade; only for tools that can be installed in the
"5-axis" milling unit.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

173
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Figure 63

C
A

Active on milling operation; it allows to use the tool created as a blade also for programable
milling machining operations (see paragraph 15.2 “Milling programming”, page 390). In this case,
in the milling dialogue boxes (ROUT commands), the tools associated to the C_Cutting class,
defined as mills when the “Tool code” field is activated, will also appear in this field.

Distance travelled; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 171.

Tool life; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 171.

174 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.6 Recording thickness tracers

Enter the correct level of Password in the Setup dialogue box.

In the following paragraph there is a description of the phases to adjust type A, B and C thickness
tracers (figure 64).
Figure 64: A = thickness tracer for vertical tracing; B = thickness tracer for vertical and horizontal tracing; C =
thickness tracer tool that can be fitted in the electrospindle for vertical and horizontal tracing.

Select the Tools menu and select the New tool option, or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 65: dialogue box Tool parameters

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

175
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Description of fields
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class C_Tracing. To add new
items to the list or consult the class data, click on (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).

Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the
thickness tracer. To add new items to the list or consult the data for a type, click on (see
paragraph 6.4 “Type management”).

Code; field reserved for the name of the thickness tracer. Due to incompatibility with the control,
the name description does not allow the following characters: # ~ ! $ % ^ & ” ' ( ) [ ] { }.

BMP search button; button used to associate the thickness tracer with an image in bitmap
format. Displays a window with the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\
Toolsbmp) used to record the image files. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the
relative square in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the
thickness tracer when tooling/up the machine using the MachineConfiguration application.

Description; field used for comments.

Length; length expressed in millimetres.

Diameter [mm]; tool diameter expressed in millimetres.

Std WorkSpd; tool standard speed of advance. The value to be indicated in this field must be the
one given in the technical Tabs supplied with the tool purchased.

Max WorkSpd; tool maximum speed of advance.

Min WorkSpd; tool minimum speed of advance.

Safety [mm]; distance on the surface of the piece at which the thickness tracer should be placed
at the beginning of the tracing, in case of machining operations with piece locking through
shapeable suction cups. If you insert a value equal to zero, when storing the dialogue box a
message will appear, indicating the automatic insertion of the default value.

Uniclamp saf. [mm]; distance on the surface of the piece at which the thickness tracer should be
placed at the beginning of the tracing, in case of machining operations with locking through clamps
(Uniclamp). If you insert a value equal to zero, when storing the dialogue box a message will
appear, indicating the automatic insertion of the default value.

176 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.7 Recording insertions

Enter the correct level of Password in the Setup dialogue box.

The following paragraph describes the phases involved in recording the materials to be used to
carry out insertion operations.

Select the Tools menu and select the New tool option, or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 66: dialogue box Tool parameters

Description of fields
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class C_Inserting. To add new
items to the list or consult the class data, click on (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).

Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the
insertion. To add new items to the list or consult the data for a type, click on button (see
paragraph 6.4 “Type management”).

Code; field reserved for the name of the insertion. Due to incompatibility with the control, the name
description does not allow the following characters: # ~ ! $ % ^ & ” ' ( ) [ ] { }.

BMP search button; button used to associate the insertion with an image in bitmap format.
Displays a window with the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
used to record the image files. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the relative square
in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the insertion when
tooling/up the machine using the MachineConfiguration.

Description; field used for comments.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

177
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.8 Recording the labels

The labels are managed as if they were tools. The following paragraph describes the phases to
record the labels that are to be applied to the piece.

Enter the correct level of Password in the Setup dialogue box.

Select the Tools menu and select the New tool option, or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 67: dialogue box Tool parameters

Description of fields
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class C_LABELING. To add new
items to the list or consult the class data, click on (see paragraph 6.3 “Class management”).

Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the label.
To add new items to the list or consult the data for a type, click on button (see paragraph 6.4
“Type management”).

Code; field used for the label name. Due to incompatibility with the control, the name description
does not allow the following characters: # ~ ! $ % ^ & ” ' ( ) [ ] { }.

BMP search button: button used to associate the label with an image in bitmap format.
Displays a window with the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
used to record the image files. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the relative square
in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the label when tooling
up the machine using the MachineConfiguration application.

Description; field used for comments.

X-dimension; label length.

178 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Y-dimension; label width.

(Ax) X reference; X-axis co-ordinate of the label application point. The starting origin is on the
lower left-hand corner.

(Ay) Y reference; Y-axis co-ordinate of the label application point. The starting origin is on the
lower left-hand corner.

Centre; allows the calculation of the label application point on the basis of its size, setting the point
in the centre. In this case, the values indicated in the data fields (Ax) X reference and (Ay) Y
reference are automatically modified.

Printer orientation; allows the definition of how the labels printed will be directed in relation to the
work table. This direction depends on the position of the label printer.
Choose one of the following options:
z 90° option: in this case, the label printer is positioned on the left side of the loading pallet (ref.
A, figure 68).
z 0° option: in this case, the label printer is positioned on the rear of the loading pallet (ref. B,
figure 68).
Figure 68

A B

Print layout; layout of the document for labels, defined in the application LEdit.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

179
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.9 Group management

The groups are filters created to improve tool management operations.
Each tool can be associated with others in a group that represents it and distinguishes it, so as to
facilitate search operations within the database.
For example, in the case of a door machining operation that always uses the same tools, it is
possible to assign a number of tools to a single group named “DOOR”, so as to allow all the tools
that can be used to machine the doors to be found more quickly.

To display the group management window, select the Filters menu and the Groups manager option
or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 69: dialogue box Group manager

; Renames the selected group.

; Deletes the selected group.

; Deletes the tools associated to the group.

; Confirms the settings and closes the window.

Renaming a group
To rename a group, select the group to rename in column Group manager and click on . Enter
the new name and confirm by pressing .

180 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Deleting a group
To delete a group, select the line to delete from the table and click on . Confirm the setting by
pressing .

Deleting tools
To delete the tools associated with a group, without deleting the name of the group itself, select the
line containing the tools to be deleted and click on . Confirm the setting by pressing .

Creating groups using the context menu

To associate a tool with a group to be created, select the required tool in the tree list or in the table,
then display the context menu and select item Add tool to a new group.
Rename the group created by selecting the box in the Group manager column (figure 69) and
clicking on the button, enter the new name and confirm using the button.

To associate a tool with an existing group, select the required tool in the tree list or in the table,
then display the context menu, select item Add tool to an existing group and the group.
The tool will automatically be added to the list in the Group manager dialogue box. Confirm the
setting by pressing .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

181
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.10 Dialogue box Filters

The filters window is used to find only those tools with the required qualities, and to display them in
the table in ToolManager application .
The search can be carried out on the basis of certain characteristics, for example:
tool length
tool descent speed
tool working speed
tool rotation speed
tool thickness
type of tool coupling
direction of rotation of the tool tools forming part of a particular group.

To display the filters window, select the Filters menu, scroll through the list with the cursor and
select the Activate filters option, or click on the button on the toolbar.

Figure 70: dialogue box:Filters

Follow the indications given below:

z To display only tools with certain characteristics in the application table, click on the Select
filters tab and select the required parameters, which will appear in the Activ. filters tab. Select
button B for the chosen parameter, select the symbols = (equal to); > (more than); < (less
than) or >< (more than and less than), and enter the value to be looked for in field C.
If the search is also to be extended to the tool type, select button D, select the required type
from the list and tick the Type check box. Click on button A Run filter activation. The
application table will only show tools with the characteristics requested in the filters window.
z To display only tools belonging to a certain group in the application table, click on the Groups
tab, select the group, activate the Show only tools belonging to the groups check box and click
on button A Run filter activation.

For example, to find all the tools with a maximum descent speed higher than 4000 and lower than
5000, the following operations must be carried out:

1. click on the Select filters tab and enable Max Lowering speed (this should only be done if this
parameter is not visible);

2. click on the filters active tab;

182 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

3. click on the button for the Max Lowering speed parameter and select ><;

4. in the write-enabled field, type: 4000 - 5000 (meaning more than 4000 and less than 5000);

5. tick the check box for the Max Lowering speed parameter;

6. click on Run filter activation.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

183
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.11 Aggregate management

To manage the aggregate catalogue, start the MachineConfiguration application, select the
Database menu and select the Aggregates option, or click on .

Figure 71: dialogue box Aggregate manager

To memorise the new aggregate added to the aggregate list in the temporary RAM, save the
settings by clicking on the button.

; Creates a new aggregate.

; Creates a new aggregate by copying the data from the selected aggregate.

; Visualises the dialogue box Aggregate with the data of the selected aggregate.

; Eliminates the aggregate selected.

; Displays a summary table of existing aggregates.

Creation
To create a new aggregate, click on or, if starting with the data of an existing aggregate, click
on .
To save the settings and close the window, click on button . To close the windows without
saving, click on button .

For a description of the fields, see “Description of dialogue box Aggregate” on page 185.

184 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Consultation and modification

To consult or modify the data of a particular aggregate, double click on a list item to select it;
alternatively, use the button.
In the case of a modification, close the Aggregate manager dialogue box saving the settings .

For quicker consultation, display the Aggregate tooling dialogue box by clicking on the button
and operating directly, using the mouse, on the aggregate graph.
Figure 72: dialogue box Aggregate

Delete
To delete an aggregate from the list, select it and click on . Close the Aggregate manager
dialogue box saving the settings.

Description of dialogue box Aggregate

Name; aggregate name.

X-: co-ordinate in a negative direction along the X-axis for the left hand side of the aggregate, with
respect to the reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.

X +; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the X-axis for the right hand side of the aggregate,
with respect to the reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

185
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Y-: co-ordinate in a negative direction along the Y-axis for the left hand side of the aggregate, with
respect to the reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.

Y +; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the Y-axis for the right hand side of the aggregate,
with respect to the reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.

Z-: co-ordinate in a negative direction along the Z-axis of the aggregate, with respect to the
reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working dimensions.

Z +; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the Z-axis of the aggregate, with respect to the
reference point (see figure 73). Field used to calculate the aggregate working dimensions.
Figure 73

d a: electrospindle.
X+ a
b: aggregate centre of rotation (reference point) which
usually coincides with the electrospindle centre of rotation.
Z+
c: aggregate.
b
Z-
d: electrospindle axis or centre of rotation.

c Z+

X- X+
X+

Y+ Y-

Y+

; used to calculate the working dimensions of the aggregate automatically according to the
position of the subspindles.

; used to redraw the working dimensions of the aggregate using the new data entered.

X offset; reference point co-ordinate along the X-axis (figure 73). Enter the co-ordinate only in
case the aggregate rotation centre is different from the electrospindle rotation centre. If this is not
the case, leave the value set to 0.

Y offset; Y-axis co-ordinate (see figure 73). Enter the co-ordinate only in case the aggregate
rotation centre is different from the electrospindle rotation centre. If this is not the case, leave the
value set to 0.

Z offset; Z-axis co-ordinate (see figure 73). Enter the co-ordinate only in case the aggregate
rotation centre is different from the electrospindle rotation centre. If this is not the case, leave the
value set to 0.

Active X offset; X-axis co-ordinate. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate contains
free elements that are capable of modifying its position during machining operations.

186 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Active Y offset; Y-axis co-ordinate. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate contains
free elements that are capable of modifying its position during machining operations.

Active Z offset; Z-axis co-ordinate. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate contains
free elements that are capable of modifying its position during machining operations.

Type; aggregate type:

• STANDARD; milling, cutting or boring aggregate.
• DEFLECTOR; chip deflector.
• SCRAPING-DOUBLE EDGE TRIMMING; tilting aggregate used to perform inclined
machining operations.
• DEFL-INTEGR; milling tool with integrated deflector.

CW: enables the direction of rotation of the aggregate. Check the box to indicate that the
aggregate rotates clockwise.

CCW: enables the direction of rotation of the aggregate. Check the box to indicate that the
aggregate rotates anticlockwise.

Overall dimensions; predefined list of numerical codes that define the working dimensions of the
aggregate in order to ensure that it does not collide with other tools present in the magazine. This
data item is used during automatic housing of aggregates in magazines defined as being
“random”. Indicates whether the aggregate dimensions are such as to impede the housing of other
tools in adjacent tool-holders.
Use the adjacent arrows to indicate the working dimensions.
z 0 = management disabled.

z 1 = small compact tool occupying the tool-holder in which it is housed and without interfering
with the spaces of other tool-holder positions.
z 2 = medium size tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the following
tool-holder position.
z 3 = medium size tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the
preceding tool-holder position.
z 4 = large tool occupying the tool-holder position in which it is housed plus the preceding and
following tool-holder positions.

Coupling; type of aggregate coupling. Select the correct type of coupling from the predefined list.

Ing. Z; working dimensions in Z of the aggregate.

Max RSpd [rpm]; maximum aggregate rotation speed, expressed as rpm.

Min RSpd [rpm]; minimum aggregate rotation speed, expressed as rpm.

Max WSpd; maximum aggregate machining speed, expressed as rpm.

Multiplier; value indicating the transmission ratio between aggregate and subspindles.

DXF file; enables or disables the search button for files with DXF extension, with the graphics of
the aggregate displayed in the top window. Tick the box, click on the search button and select the
DXF files from the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ techdata\ Library\ Figure). An empty field
indicates that the aggregate does not have an associated graphics file.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

187
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Bitmap; file with extension BMP containing the aggregate image. Click on the adjacent button to
associate the aggregate with a bitmap image to be displayed in the Aggregate manager dialogue
box. If the field is empty, the aggregate will be associated with the default image.

Active; enables the display of all existing subspindles in window Spindles.

Spindles; window containing a list of the aggregate subspindles.

Before closing the aggregate data window, confirm the settings by clicking on .

Aggregate subspindles
The aggregate subspindles are managed directly from inside Aggregate the dialogue box (figure
72) in the Spindles box (figure 74).
Figure 74

; Creates a new subspindle.

; Deletes the selected subspindle.

; Creates a copy of the selected subspindle.

The red tick in the subspindle code indicates the presence of the subspindle in the aggregate. To
remove the subspindle from the aggregate, select it with a double click.

Consultation/modification
To consult or modify subspindle data, click the right mouse button on an item in the list Spindles.

Delete
To delete subspindles from the list, select those to be deleted and click on .

188 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Creation
To create aggregate subspindles, click on and fill in the following data fields:

X offset; value indicating the distance along the X-axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
and the aggregate centre of rotation. A value other than zero indicates that the subspindle centre
of rotation is different from that of the aggregate (see figure 75).

Y offset; value indicating the distance along the Y-axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
and the aggregate centre of rotation. A value other than zero indicates that the subspindle centre
of rotation is different from that of the aggregate (see figure 75).

Z offset; value indicating the distance along the Z-axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
and the aggregate centre of rotation. A value other than zero indicates that the subspindle centre
of rotation is different from that of the aggregate (see figure 75).
Figure 75

a b a: electrospindle.
X+
b: electrospindle axis or centre of rotation.

Z+ c: aggregate centre of rotation, which usually coincides

with the electrospindle centre of rotation.
c
d: subspindle centre of rotation.
Off Z

d
X+

Y+

Off Y

Name; subspindle name consisting of the prefix plus index. Detail entered by system.

Prefix; code identifying the type of subspindle. Detail entered by system.

Index; number associated by the system to the code displayed in field Prefix in order to name the
spindle in field Name.

Distance; distance between the nose of the subspindle and its centre of rotation.

Show angle; pre-set field, cannot be modified.

AZ: subspindle angle of inclination with respect to the aggregate.

Min AZ; minimum inclination angle that the subspindle can reach, computable from the aggregate
rotation centre (ref. A, figure 76). This value is displayed only for the tilting aggregate.

Max AZ; maximum inclination angle that the subspindle can reach, computable from the
aggregate rotation centre (ref. B, figure 76). This value is displayed only for the tilting aggregate.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

189
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Figure 76
X

AR: subspindle angle of rotation with respect to the aggregate.

Absolute ID; subspindle numerical code. This order number is univocal for all the existing
subspindles.

Relative ID; subspindle numerical code. This order number is univocal for all the subspindles on
the specific aggregate selected.

Overall dimensions; field not used.

Coupling; pre-set list of subspindle coupling types.

Change rotation; used to change rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that when
the subspindle is in use, the aggregate must rotate in the opposite direction to the one specified in
the subspindle itself.

CW: enables the direction of rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that the
subspindle rotates clockwise.

CCW: enables the direction of rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that the
subspindle rotates anticlockwise.

TChng Type; field not used.

Repeats; used to create a series of subspindles adjacent to that already active along the X-axis or
Y-axis. Click on button X or button Y and fill in the following fields:
Step; distance between adjacent subspindles.
Repeats; number of subspindles in a row.

Max tool diameter; maximum tool diameter supported by the subspindle. Enter the correct
diameter.

190 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Min tool diameter; minimum tool diameter that can be inserted in the subspindle. Enter the
correct diameter.

Max RSpd [rpm]; subspindle maximum rotation speed in rpm.

Min RSpd [rpm]; subspindle minimum rotation speed in rpm.

Max tool length; maximum tool length that can be inserted in the subspindle.

Type; type of aggregate with which the spindle is associated.

Tool classes; list of classes that can be associated with the spindle. Double-click on an item with
the left mouse button to enable or disable the class.

Before closing the subspindles window, confirm the settings by clicking on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

191
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.12 Notes regarding the creation of the

AGGRE81 aggregate
When the AGGRE81 (EX AGGRE42) aggregate is created, it is important that the aggregate name
indicated in the Code field is AH42 or A42 and that the -90 value is entered in the AZ field.
Figure 77: AGGRE42 aggregate

192 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

6.13 Notes regarding the creation of a chip

deflector
The deflector is treated and managed in the same was as an aggregate. To insert it in the
aggregate database, display the appropriate dialogue box (see paragraph 6.11 “Aggregate
management”, page 184) and click on .
z Select the DEFLECTOR option in the Type field.

z Create the subspindle which, in the case of the deflector, is the curtain guard A (figure 78).

Figure 78

z Define the following data items:

Enter the radius of the deflector in field Distance.

Enter the value 0 in field AZ.
Enter the angle of rotation of the curtain guard in field AR. For example, if the angle of rotation
of the curtain guard is 18.3, then in the case of the right deflector (ref. right, figure 79) the
calculation should be 90+18.3=108.3, while for the left deflector (ref. left, figure 79) the
calculation should be 270-18.3=251.3.
Figure 79
270 270
Y Y
α

left

180 0 180 0
X X
right

90 90

Select the direction of rotation : CW for the right deflector; CCW for the left deflector.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

193
6 Cataloguing tools/aggregates

Since the deflector is managed as if it were an aggregate, before it can be used, the curtain guard
A (figure 78) must be tooled with any of the tools and then inserted in the magazine.

194 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

7 Consulting the machine/
software data

Machine configuration and modification of machine data can only be carried out by Biesse
technicians; users are only allowed to consult the machine data.

Before proceeding with tooling-up, check the configuration of the spindles, aggregates and
magazine tool holders to see the characteristics and qualities required for tools in order to be fitted
on the machine. To do this, start the MachineConfiguration application by clicking the button.

Figure 80: MachineConfiguration

The tools stored in the application softwares used for tooling must correspond to the ones
physically present on the machine.

List of topics
• 7.1 “Technical data of spindles T, TH and TP”
• 7.2 “Technical data of the tool magazines”
• 7.3 “Consulting the software limits”
• 7.4 “Visualising the distances between spindles”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

195
7 Consulting the machine/software data

7.1 Technical data of spindles T, TH and TP

In order to consult the technical data of all the spindles present in the machine, follow one of these
methods:
z Position the cursor on the graphic element where the spindle to be viewed is located, and
double-click on the required spindle to display the relative information window.

z Display the list of all the spindles present in the database by clicking on the button.
Double click on the spindle to be viewed to select it.
Figure 81: dialogue box with the complete list of the spindles present in the machine units.

This consultation can be conducted directly from the Machine tooling dialogue box during
the tooling procedure, using the mouse.

Letter T identifies the boring unit vertical spindles. The same letter has also been applied (for
management purposes) to the label printer.

Letters TH identify the boring unit horizontal spindles.

Letters TP identify the spindles of all the other units fitted on the Slots (see glossary), which, in
turn, are identified with the same letters as the Slots themselves (e.g. the TP1 spindle is the
spindle for the TP1 slot). The chuck for circular blades - assembled on the boring unit - also carries
the letters TP.

Description of the spindles (T, TH and TP) window fields

The grey fields cannot be modified (they are reserved for the use of Biesse technicians).

X offset; distance along the X-axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
with which it is associated.

Y offset; distance along the Y-axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
with which it is associated.

Z offset; distance along the Z-axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
with which it is associated.

196 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 7 Consulting the machine/software data

Distance; distance between the spindle nose and its centre of rotation.

AZ: spindle angle of inclination.

AR: spindle angle of rotation.

Show angle; pre-set field, cannot be modified.

Absolute ID; univocal number of the spindle, from among all those present in the machine.

Relative ID; univocal index of the spindle in the specific unit to which it belongs.

Overall dimensions; numerical code defining the working dimensions of the tool. Enter a value
between 0 and 4 (0 = field disabled; 4 = maximum working dimensions). This code is linked to that
set in the field of the same name in the tool data and aggregate data.

Coupling; type of spindle coupling.

Change rotation; change of the spindle rotation direction.

CW: clockwise rotation of the spindle.

CCW: anticlockwise rotation of the spindle.

TChng Type; indicates whether the spindle can carry out automatic tool change. This field is
updated by the system: 0 = the spindle is not able to carry out automatic tool changes; 1 = the
spindle can carry out automatic tool changes; 2 = a tool has been manually fitted on the machine
and must be removed manually.

Max tool diameter; maximum diameter allowed for the tool to be fitted on this spindle.

Min tool diameter; minimum diameter allowed for the tool to be fitted on this spindle.

Max RSpd [rpm]; maximum spindle rotation speed in rpm.

Min RSpd [rpm]; minimum spindle rotation speed in rpm.

Max tool length; maximum length allowed for the tool to be fitted on the spindle.

Type; spindle type. Indicates the type of spindle, i.e. if it is a boring spindle, a milling unit spindle,
etc..
• DEFLECTOR; deflector spindle.
• LABELLING MACHINE; spindle to define the label printer.
• BORE; boring spindle.
• INSERTER; device allowing hardware materials to be picked up and inserted in the piece.
For management reasons, this device is treated as if it were a spindle.
• BLADE; spindle of the circular blade chuck.
• MILL; electrospindle.
• PRESSER; presser.
• TRACER; slot identifying the thickness tracer.

Sub-type of spindle; indicates the type of electrospindle of the working unit (e.g. the
electrospindle of the multifunction unit, the electrospindle of the 5-axis milling unit, etc.).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

197
7 Consulting the machine/software data

Tool classes; list of classes that can be associated with the spindle. Indicates the type of tools
that can be fitted in the spindle making reference to the class to which they belong:
z C_BLOWING; indicates that the blowing tools can be fitted on the spindle (see the attachment
on the use of Edgebanding).
z C_CUTTING; indicates that the blades (ref. B, figure 82) can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_DRILLING; indicates that the bits (ref. C, figure 82) can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_EDGING; indicates that the gluing tools can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_INSERTING; indicates that the materials for the insertion machining operation can be fitted
on the spindle.
z C_LABELING; indicates that labels can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_ROUTING; indicates that the milling cutters (ref. A, figure 82) can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_SCRAPING; indicates that the scraping tools can be fitted on the spindle (see the
attachment on the use of Edgebanding).
z C_TRACING; indicates that the thickness tracer (ref. E, figure 82) can be fitted on the spindle.

z C_TRIMMING; indicates that the trimming tools can be fitted on the spindle (see the
attachment on the use of Edgebanding).
z C_AGGREGATE; indicates that the aggregates (ref. D, figure 82) can be fitted on the spindle.

Figure 82

A D E
B
C

Specific data fields for the “Matrix” machine

The spindle parameter box contains parameters (ref. A, figure 83) that allow the working field of
certain boring spindles to be limited, in order to avoid any collision between the moving machine
parts. To define these limits, visualise the spindle parameters box by clicking on each spindle in the
list of the Spindle manager dialogue box, and fill in the A data fields (figure 83).

198 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 7 Consulting the machine/software data

Figure 83

Extra Xm; distance in X from corner 1 or corner 2 of the piece, to the edge of the internal workable
rectangle (see figure 84).

Extra Xp; distance in X from corner 3 or corner 4 of the piece, to the edge of the internal workable
rectangle (see figure 84).

Extra Ym; distance in Y from corner 1 or corner 4 of the piece, to the edge of the internal workable
rectangle (see figure 84).

Extra Yp; distance in Y from corner 2 or corner 3 of the piece, to the edge of the internal workable
rectangle (see figure 84).
Figure 84: A = workable area inside the piece; B = unworkable areas.
Xm Xp

Ym 1 B 4 Ym

B A B

Yp 2 B 3 Yp

Xm Xp

These four parameters allow the creation of an edge around the piece, on which machining
operations cannot be carried out. To disable these parameters, and therefore collision control,
insert the value 9999 in the fields.

To ensure the collision controls are effective, check the data regarding the dimensions of
each operating section are correct (e.g. ref. B, figure 85).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

199
7 Consulting the machine/software data

Figure 85

200 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 7 Consulting the machine/software data

7.2 Technical data of the tool magazines

The magazines will not hold all the existing tools. In fact, particularly large aggregates must be
fitted in the electrospindle manually, as the magazines are not always equipped to take these
types of tools. For this reason it is advisable to consult the technical data for the magazine to avoid
making errors.

In order to consult the technical data of the magazines or tool holders, follow one of these
methods:
z Position the cursor on the graphic element to be viewed (tool holder or magazine), and
double-click with the left mouse button to display the relative information window.

z Display the list of magazines present in the database by clicking on the button. Double
click on the magazine to be viewed in order to select it and, to display the technical data
window of the tool holders, right click with the mouse on each item of the list Tool holders
(figure 86).

This consultation can be conducted directly from the Magazine tooling dialogue box during
the tooling procedure, using the mouse.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Tool magazine -

The grey fields cannot be modified (they are reserved for the use of Biesse technicians).

X-, Y-, Z-: co-ordinates of the upper left-hand vertex of the magazine in relation to its reference
point.

X+, Y+, Z+: co-ordinates of the lower right-hand vertex of the magazine in relation to its reference
point.

Enable; the checked box indicates that the magazine has been enabled.

Balluff manag.; the checked box indicates that the magazine is equipped with the “Balluf” optical
device for reading the chips present on the tools or in the aggregates.

Absolute ID; magazine numerical code.

DXF Files; DXF file with a drawing of the magazine.

Character; magazine type.

Type; magazine type.

Positioning; magazine position.

Top view; enables the numbering of the magazine too-holders, seen from above, to obtain the
same numerical correspondence as the tool-holders that are physically present in the magazine.

Rotate view; allows you to rotate the magazine view shown in the graphic area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

201
7 Consulting the machine/software data

X offset, Y offset, Z offset; co-ordinates for the magazine reference point with respect to the
machine origin.

Z for tool change; Z position for tool change, if tool change has not been enabled during the
machining operation.

Tool change time; average time taken for tool change (used by simulator).

Release speed; indicates tool removal speed from magazine tool-holder during tool change.

Random; the checked box indicates that the magazine is “random”, i.e. at least one tool-holder
present is managed as “random”.

Change while working; the checked box indicates that the machine is enabled to carry out a tool
change on one electrospindle while the other is working. When this function is activated, the CAM
attempts to mask the tool change operations on the enabled magazines, anticipating as much as
possible the machining operations (there is no machining sharing criteria provided for).

Booking; the checked box indicates that tool reservation management is enabled. This value
helps speed up tool change operations, in that each time a tool is changed, the CAM reserves the
tool for the next change. In order to be reserved, tools must have the same working dimensions as
the tool unloaded from the magazine.

Simult. change; the checked box indicates that simultaneous tool change management has been
enabled, i.e. the magazine can insert two tools in two electrospindles at the same time.

X pick-up, Y pick-up, Z pick-up; define the loading position for Revolver type tool magazines.

Radius; radius of tool magazine, for the Revolver type tool magazine. Radius of the circular
segment of the chain, for the chain type tool magazine.

Chain distance; length of the straight segment of the chain, for the chain type tool magazine.

Aggregates; list of the aggregates that the magazine can contain.

Electrospindles; list of electrospindles that the magazine can serve, considering all positions.

Axes; list of axes.

Tool holders; list of magazine tool-holders (see “Description of dialogue box Tool holder -”, page
203).

202 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 7 Consulting the machine/software data

Figure 86

Description of dialogue box Tool holder -

The grey fields cannot be modified (they are reserved for the use of Biesse technicians).

Absolute ID; univocal number of tool-holder from among all those present in the machine.

Relative ID; univocal index of tool-holder in the selected magazine.

Overall dimensions; numerical code defining the capacity of the tool-holder. This value, which
ranges from 1 to 4, is linked to that defined in the tools/aggregates and allows the automatic tool
change to be managed correctly. This data item cannot be modified.

Coupling; type of coupling required for tools to be inserted in the tool-holder.

Z offset; co-ordinate for the tool-holder position with respect to the machine origin.

Enabled; the checked box indicates that the tool-holder has been enabled.

Random tool; the checked box indicates that the tool-holder can hold all types of tool present in
the magazine.

Electrospindles; list of all the electrospindles that the tool-holder can serve.

C: position to be reached by the C-axis in order to load the tool into the magazine.

CR: rotation value required by the magazine in order to load the tool.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

203
7 Consulting the machine/software data

CRT: magazine rotation value necessary so that the tool positions itself under the detection
sensor.

Direction of release; operating section direction of movement when extracting the tool from the
tool-holder.

Release position; indicates how far the operating section has to move in order to free the tool.

Z release position; indicates how far the operating section has to move along the Z-axis in order
to lay the tool in the tool-holder.

Aggregates; set of aggregates that the tool-holder can contain.

204 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 7 Consulting the machine/software data

7.3 Consulting the software limits

The software limits are limit points on the working field beyond which the operating section cannot
go. They do not relate to the mechanical limit switches present on the machine, but are simply
limits set in the software.

To consult the minimum and maximum positions for the operating section stroke, run the
MachineConfiguration application software and click on .

Figure 87: dialogue box SOFTWARE LIMITS

The positions shown in the X, Y and Z field columns vary according to the origin selected and
according to the element in the operating section selected in the application software graphic area
(single spindle, whole unit, etc.).

For example, if a spindle is selected in the graphic area and the machine origin in the window
SOFTWARE LIMITS, the positive X stroke of the spindle must not exceed a minimum position of
31 millimetres and a maximum position of 4014 millimetres (see figure 88).
Figure 88

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

205
7 Consulting the machine/software data

To consult the spindle limits taking into account the length of the tool fitted, enable the With tool
check box.
Figure 89

7.4 Visualising the distances between

spindles
To view the window containing the values for distances between spindles on the operating section,
run the MachineConfiguration application software and click on .

To check the distances between spindles, select the first reference spindle in the graphic area,
press CTRL and select the second spindle.

206 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

8 Machine tooling

This chapter gives all the information required for tooling the working units located at various
points on the machine, along with the aggregates and the tool magazines.

List of topics
• 8.1 “Basic tooling concepts”
• Structure of the tooling windows
• Tooling window buttons
• Tooling window context menus
• 8.2 “Tooling the label printer”
• 8.3 “Tooling the operating section”
• 8.4 “Tooling the tool magazine”
• 8.5 “Aggregate tooling”
• 8.6 “Misalignment between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

207
8 Machine tooling

8.1 Basic tooling concepts

Tooling the operating section, aggregates and tool magazine is managed by the
MachineConfiguration application through the appropriate tooling environments (tooling windows).

Structure of the tooling windows

The tooling windows are divided into five areas:
z Left-hand area with tree list: this displays in the window with the aggregate tooling and
magazines the tree with the list of the elements to be tooled. Click on an item in the list to
highlight the image connected with it in the graphics area.
z Right-hand tree list area: displays the tree with the list of the tools, divided into classes. This
area interacts with the image of the graphics area.
z Graphics area: displays the graphic image of the element to be tooled-up. When clicking on an
element of the image, the item corresponding to the selected image is shown in the tree of the
right-hand area and left-hand area.
z Tool data area: displays the graphic representation, the name, the diameter and the type of the
tool selected in the tree of the right-hand area.
z Selected element data area: area in which the data relating to the element selected in the
graphics area is displayed.

Tooling window buttons

The following is a list and description of tooling window buttons.

Button Description

Used to save the tooling operation so that it will be displayed the next time the tooling
window is opened.

Used to exit the tooling window without saving the data settings.

Used to display the list of spindles, showing the symmetrical spindle for each one.

Used to tool-up the spindle.

Used to tool-down the spindle.

208 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

Button Description

Used to display the summary window with the list of tooled spindles.

Used to search and open the tooling setting files:

files with extension MTM for tooling the boring and milling unit spindles; files with
extension MTC for tooling the tool magazine; files with extension MTA for tooling
aggregates.

Used to save tooling data and to create files with extension MTM for machine tooling,
with extension MTC for tool magazine tooling and with extension MTA for aggregate
tooling.

Used to compare two tooling configuration files and view the differences found
between them.

Used to display the Filters dialogue box; see paragraph 6.10 “Dialogue box Filters”,
page 182 on how to use the filters.

Used to search the file with the boring unit spindles tooling (file with extension MTM)
and to load it in the tooling window.
Unlike the command, this command does not collect all the tooling data from the
MTM file; it only collects the data related to the boring unit spindles tooling.

Tooling window context menus

In the graphics area of each tooling environment it is possible to view a context menu. The number
of options in each context menu will vary according to the environment to which it belongs.

Description of the menu options:

Show all; used to display the whole of the selected image.

Show item in foreground; used to enlarge the image selected with the cursor.

Show previous; used to display the element preceding the one just displayed.

Show parent; used to display the element hierarchically above the one just displayed.

Add the tool .... to the selected spindles; used to tool-up the spindle selected in the graphics
area with the tool selected in the tree list.

Untool the selected spindle; used to remove the tool from the selected spindle.

Delete symmetry; used to remove the symmetrical setting from the selected spindle.

Information on the item; allows the technical characteristics of the selected element to be
displayed (spindle, group, magazine, etc.).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

209
8 Machine tooling

Information on the tool fitted in the selected spindle; used to display the dialogue box with the
technical characteristics for the tool fitted in the spindle.

Information on rejected tools; used to display the dialogue box with a list of all the tools that
cannot be fitted on the selected spindle.

Delete all selections; used to delete the selections made.

Enable disable presence; only enabled when the software is connected to the machine. Allows
the magazine tool holder to be marked with an “X”. An “X” on the tool holder indicates that the tool
has been picked up and is momentarily housed elsewhere, for example on the electrospindle. The
tool has been stated as being in the tool holder but it is not there.

210 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

8.2 Tooling the label printer

The label printer is managed as if it were a boring spindle (letter T) assembled on a slot. To tool it,
select the Tooling menu and the Machine tooling option, or click on the button .

In the graphic area, select the printer spindle and proceed with the tooling. For the tooling
procedures, see paragraph 8.3 “Tooling the operating section”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

211
8 Machine tooling

8.3 Tooling the operating section

In order to tool the operating section, select the Tooling menu and the Machine tooling option, or
click on the button.

Figure 90: Machine tooling

For the operating section tooling procedures, use one of the following methods:
z Select the spindle from the graphics area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press the

right mouse button or click on the button.

z Select the required tool from the tree list and install it on the spindle using the Drag and drop
method.
z In the graphic area, select the spindle then select the tool from the tree list; display the context
menu and choose the Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles option.
z Select the spindle/s from the graphics area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press the
INS key on the PC keyboard.

To untool the operating section, use one of the following methods:

z Select one or more spindles from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole
operating section, create a selection area around the spindles and click on .
z Select the spindle(s) from the graphics area, display the context menu and select the Untool
the selected spindle option.
z Select the spindle/s from the graphics area and press the CANC key on the PC keyboard. To
untool the whole operating section, create a selection area around the spindles and press
CANC.

212 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

Display the technical characteristics of the groups and/or

spindles of the operating section
In order to display the technical data windows of the spindles, electrospindle and/or boring unit,
work directly in the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate option
in the context menu.

Save operating section tooling

After tooling the operating section, to create the file with extension MTM in which to save the
configuration data, click on . The file will be saved in the default folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the tooling window, click
on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.
When the button is used, the configuration is saved to disk and opened again when the
machine tooling is next opened.

After saving the tooling, any changes in the data present in the tool database or machine
data following a data import or modification may mean that this data is no longer consistent
with the tooling set-up. In this case, the information boxBad tooling ! will be displayed (see
paragraph 8.6 “Misalignment between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data” on page
222).

Compare two machine tooling configurations

To compare two different machine tooling configurations, open the first tooling file by pressing ,
click on and double-click on the second required file to open it. The Summary dialogue box is
displayed (ref. A figure 91) with a list of the spindles that are fitted with different tools for the
different configurations. To display the names of the two tools fitted in the same spindle (ref. B
figure 91), double-click on the required item.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

213
8 Machine tooling

Figure 91

Description of the procedures used to establish symmetry

between spindles
To modify the symmetry between the spindles of the boring unit, enlarge the image of the group
and click on the button.

Figure 92: Machine tooling

The software only allows machining operations with symmetrical spindles to be carried out along
the X-axis, so that the spindles to be symmetrically connected to each other must only be the ones
that carry out boring operations along the X-axis.

Attributing symmetry to spindles means that each spindle is bound to another which has the same
type of tool, so that the control, when optimising machining operations, can use the symmetrical
spindles to machine two or more pieces loaded on the symmetrical or mirror origins. In order to be

214 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

symmetrical, two spindles must always be fitted with the same type of tool, in that they carry out
the same machining operations on a number of pieces, starting both from the straight and from the
symmetrical origin (for further information on symmetrical origins, see the machine User Manual).
Figure 93: example of a machining operation containing the instructions for machining a bore at 100 in X and
at 70 in Y, applicable to 4 pieces positioned on the straight origin (1 and 3) and on the symmetrical origin (2
and 4).

To establish symmetry, work directly in the graphics area of the window (figure 92) or on the list on
the right hand side.

If you wish to work in the graphics area, select a spindle, press the CTRL key on the keyboard and
click on the spindle to be made symmetrical; the name of the associated symmetrical spindle will
be shown in the list on the right-hand side, in the SYMMETRICAL column, in correspondence with
the name of the selected spindle.
Figure 94

If you wish to work directly on the right-hand list, select the code for the required spindle and press
the right mouse button; select the code for the spindle to be associated from the list, and click on
the option button.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

215
8 Machine tooling

Figure 95

216 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

8.4 Tooling the tool magazine

In order to tool the tool magazine, select the Tooling menu and the Magazine tooling option, or
click on the button.

Figure 96: Magazine tooling

For the magazine tooling procedures, follow one of these methods:

z Select the tool holder from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;

press the right mouse button or click on .

z Select the required tool from the tree list and install it in the tool-holder using the Drag and
drop method.
z In the graphic area, select the tool-holder then select the tool from the tree list; display the
context menu and choose the Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles option.
z Select the tool-holder(s) from the graphic area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press
INS on the PC keyboard.

To untool the tool magazine, follow one of these methods:

z Select one or more tool-holders from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole
magazine, create a selection area around the tool-holders and click on .
z Select the tool-holder(s) from the graphics area, display the context menu and select the
Untool the selected spindle option.
z Select the tool-holder/s from the graphics area and press the CANC key on the PC keyboard.
To untool the whole magazine, create a selection area around the tool-holders and press
CANC.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

217
8 Machine tooling

Viewing the technical characteristics of magazines and tool

holders
In order to view the technical data windows of the magazines and/or tool holders, work directly in
the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate option in the context
menu.

Saving magazine tooling

After tooling the magazine, to create the file with extension MTC in which to save the configuration
data, click on the button. The file will be saved in the default folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the magazine tooling
window, click on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.

When the button is used, the configuration is saved to the disk and opened again when the
magazine tooling is next opened.

After saving the tooling, any changes in the data present in the tool database or machine
data following a data import or modification may mean that this data is no longer consistent
with the tooling set-up. In this case, the information boxBad tooling ! will be displayed (see
paragraph 8.6 “Misalignment between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data” on page
222).

Comparing two magazine configurations

To compare two tool magazine configurations, open the first tooling file using the button, click
on the button and double-click on the second required file to open it. The Summary dialogue
box is displayed (ref. A figure 97), with a list of the tool-holders that are fitted with different tools for
the different configurations. To display the names of the two tools present in the same tool holder,
double-click on the required item (ref. B figure 97).

218 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

Figure 97

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

219
8 Machine tooling

8.5 Aggregate tooling

In order to tool the aggregates, select the Tooling menu and the Aggregate tooling option, or click
on the button.

Figure 98: Aggregate tooling

For the aggregate tooling procedures, use one of the following methods:
z Select the subspindle from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;

press the right mouse button or click on the button.

z Select the required tool from the tree list and install it in the subspindle using the Drag and
drop method.
z In the graphic area, select the subspindle then select the tool from the tree list; display the
context menu and choose the Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles option.
z Select the subspindle/s from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;
press the INS key on the PC keyboard.

To untool the aggregates, use one of the following methods:

z Select one or more subspindle from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole of
the operating section, create a selection around the aggregate subspindles and click on .
z Select the subspindle(s) from the graphics area, display the context menu and select the
Untool the selected spindle option.
z Select the subspindle/s from the graphics area and press CANC on the PC keyboard. To
untool a number of aggregates simultaneously, create a selection around the subspindles and
press CANC.

220 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 8 Machine tooling

Viewing the technical characteristics of the aggregates and/or

spindles
In order to display the technical data windows of the aggregates and/or aggregate spindles,
working directly in the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate
option in the context menu.

Saving aggregate tooling

After tooling the operating section, to create the file with extension MTA in which to save the
configuration data, click on . The file will be saved in the default folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the aggregate tooling
window, click on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.

When the button is used, the configuration is saved to disk and opened again when the
aggregate tooling is next opened.

After saving the tooling, any changes in the data present in the tool database or machine
data following a data import or modification may mean that this data is no longer consistent
with the tooling set-up. In this case, the information boxBad tooling ! will be displayed (see
paragraph 8.6 “Misalignment between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data” on page
222).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

221
8 Machine tooling

8.6 Misalignment between the tooling saved

and the machine/tool data
When the tooling of the operating section, tool magazine or aggregates are saved by pressing the
button, the settings imposed are stored to disk to reappear the next time the tooling window is
opened. After this operation, if any modifications are made to the tool database or to the machine
data, the information window Bad tooling ! (figure 99) will be displayed the next time the tooling
window is opened, listing the errors caused by misalignment between the tooling stored and the
data actually present on the machine.

Figure 99: dialogue box Bad tooling !

Click on A to confirm the tooling, or on C to untool all the spindles whose tools are not stored in the
database. Button B can be used to display a window containing information on why the tool cannot
be installed on the machine.

222 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

9 Work table tooling

The following chapter presents all the information related to the work table tooling, including the
management of the pneumatic system connected to the table.

For a general description of the WorkTableTooling application software, see paragraph 2.3
“WorkTableTooling”, page 88.

List of topics
• 9.1 “Basic concepts”
• 9.2 “Checking and modifying the origins”
• 9.3 “Description of the tooling environment context menu”
• 9.4 “Description of the movement environment context menu”
• 9.5 “The work table configuration document”
• 9.6 “Work table tooling environment”
• 9.7 “Table objects movement environment”
• 9.8 “Deleting the tooling from the machining program”
• 9.9 “Removing the work table supports”
• 9.10 “Viewing the properties table”
• 9.11 “Consulting the positioning points”
• 9.12 “Viewing the shaped piece”
• 9.13 “Simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces on the same origin”
• 9.14 “Systems management environment”
• 9.15 “Cataloguing the shapeable suction cups”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

223
9 Work table tooling

9.1 Basic concepts

Tooling the work table is used to establish the optimum position of the objects it comprises, to
ensure that they will not be damaged while machining the piece. To carry out the tooling, open the
required machining program from the Editor application (BPP document) and start the
WorkTableTooling application by clicking on the button.
Before going to the WorkTableTooling application, optimise the machining program.

When the application software is run, the work table configuration document is displayed with the
work table default configuration; the configuration document creation and modification operations
are reported in paragraph 9.5 “The work table configuration document” on page 236.

Inside this application software three different work environments can be viewed:
z “Work table tooling environment” (see page 240);

z “Table objects movement environment” (see page 251);

z “Systems management environment” (see page 255).

When opening a machining program that already includes the tooling, if the tooling has
been carried out on a different configuration to that proposed when running the
WorkTableTooling application, the system displays a message informing of the change and
provides the option to replace the configuration with that already stored by the program.

Once the tooling operations are finished, click on the button to store them inside the program
and go back to the Editor application. Click on the button to exit the WorkTableTooling
application without saving the operations that have been performed.

To store piece tooling in the file with extension BPP, save the file before you close it.

Upon the EPS work tables tooling, it is advisable to carefully check the position of the
carriages as their movement is conditioned by constraints that are not managed
automatically by the NC software interface. In this case, remember not to force the
carriages beyond the positions specified in the machine user manual (chapter
dealing with the performance of machining operations, warnings paragraph).

224 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.2 Checking and modifying the origins

The Origin manager dialogue box includes a list of all the existing work table origins. To display it,
run the MachineConfiguration application software, click on the button or select the Database
menu and the Origins option.
To check or change the origins data, display the window mentioned above and double click on the
required option.

Description of the dialogue box Origin -

Figure 100: dialogue box with the selected origin data.

IDS; associated origin, when short pieces are machined. Modification reserved to the Biesse
technician.

IDL; associated origin, when long pieces are machined. Modification reserved to the Biesse
technician.

X offset, Y offset, Z offset; origin co-ordinate in relation to the working area that contains it.

Offset+ X,Offset+ Y, Offset+ Z; origin additional offset in relation to the working area that contains
it.

Symmetrical X; the checked box enables the symmetric origin along the X axis. Modification
reserved to the Biesse technician.

Symmetrical Y; the checked box enables the symmetric origin along the Y axis . Modification
reserved to the Biesse technician.

Translated X; the checked box enables the translated origin along the X axis . Modification
reserved to the Biesse technician.

Translated Y; the checked box enables the translated origin along the Y axis . Modification
reserved to the Biesse technician.

Startable; the checked box indicates that the origin is present on the machine and can therefore be
selected by pressing the START button. Modification reserved to the Biesse technician.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

225
9 Work table tooling

Type; origin type: STANDARD (base origin); LASER (origins that are obtained with the laser
alignment projector); CUSTOM (customised origins). Modification reserved to the Biesse
technician.

226 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.3 Description of the tooling environment

context menu
List of topics
• Cursor on the shapeable suction cup and on the clamps (Uniclamp) (page 227).
• Cursor on the stops (page 230).
• Cursor on the mobile piece supports and on the side stops supports (page 231).
• Cursor on the piece (page 233).

Cursor on the shapeable suction cup and on the clamps

(Uniclamp)
When the menu is displayed over a shapeable suction cup or a uniclamp, the following options will
be enabled:

Show; shows the selected object (suction cup or clamp) in the foreground.

Show all; shows the whole work table.

Copy; copies the selected object (suction cup or clamp).

Paste; inserts the previously copied object (suction cup or clamp) on the selected carriage.

Delete; deletes the suction cup from the work table.

Select; used to select all the shapeable suction cups simultaneously; select the Shapeable suction
cups option and one of the following items: By column, to select all the shapeable suction cups on
the support; By row, to select all the shapeable suction cups positioned horizontally.

Rotation; used to rotate the shapeable suction cups. The Continous option is used to carry out
manual rotation. The Discrete option is used to carry out assisted rotation, entering the required
data.
Figure 101

Couple the carriages; couples the selected carriages.

Uncouple the carriages; separates the previously coupled carriages.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

227
9 Work table tooling

Create associate; used to save the Uniclamp clamp (created by associating a base and a plate) in
a file with extension ASM.

Check positions; used to check whether or not the work table objects have been positioned
correctly.

Move all selected objects to the same position; moves all the selected objects to the position of
the last selected object.

Positions; used to visualise the dialogue box, to define the positions of the shapeable suction
cups.
Table 1: fields of the position insertion box for suction cups and clamps.

Databoxes and buttons Description of fields

Box Position type Not parametric; see “Description of the position input window”
on page 241.

Parametric; see “Description of the position input window” on

page 241.

Reference side; used to set the reference side from which to

start when calculating the movement of the object (shapeable
suction cup or clamp).

• Central
Indicates the centre of the object as the reference side.

• Upper
Indicates the upper edge of the object as the reference side.

• Lower
Indicates the lower edge of the object as the reference side.

• Stop
This option only appears when a shapeable suction cup
installed on a carriage fitted with fixed or pneumatic stop is
selected (ref. A, figure 107).
In this case, it is possible to define the inner edge of the stop
as the reference side.

228 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Databoxes and buttons Description of fields

Databoxes X and Y For a description, see “Description of the position input window”
on page 241.

Buttons For a description, see “Description of the position input window”

on page 241.

Properties; used to display the Object properties dialogue box containing the properties of the
shapeable suction cups.
Table 2: fields in the dialogue box Object properties.

Cards Description of fields

Card General shapeable suction cup positioning values and general

information.

Card Settings Mobile; disables or enables the movement of the suction cup.
Deactivating the check box locks the suction cup at its current
position.

Restrict position to origin Y axis only.; associates the suction cup

to a specific origin defined in field Associated origin. This data
item is normally used to associate uniclamps to an origin in order
to create a reference, in other words, to use the clamp rod as a
stop.

Associated origin; number of the origin to which the uniclamp is

associated. This field is associated with the Restrict position to
origin Y axis only. field.

Height; used to define the maximum thickness of the clamps or

the suction cups. Maximum thickness means the thickness of
the clamp/suction cup plus to the thickness of the carriage.

Enable rotation; used to enter the shapeable suction cup rotation

data, i.e. used to define which option to display in the Rotation
context menu.

Discrete; used to define the angle of rotation in “discrete” mode.

When enabled it can be used to display, in item Rotation of the
context menu, the Discrete option. Enter the shapeable suction
cup rotation pitch value.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

229
9 Work table tooling

Cards Description of fields

Continous; used to define the angle of rotation in “continuous”

mode. When enabled it can be used to display, in item Rotation
of the context menu, the Continous option. Enter the required
value in the field Absolute angle of rotation.

Card Uniclamp Washer angle; used to indicate the plate rotation angle.

0°

30°

90°

Name of dxf; used to indicate the name of the DXF file to which
the clamp is associated.

Type of spacer; used to select the type of spacer: magnetic

spacer to be inserted in the (cylindrical) clamp stem or bar
spacer.

Thickness; used to indicate the spacer thickness.

Spacer; used to indicate the first and second spacer angle.

90° 180° 270° 360°

Cursor on the stops

When the menu is displayed over a stop the following options will be enabled:

Show; shows the selected stop in the foreground.

Show all; shows the whole work table.

Select; to select all the stops simultaneously; select the Stops option and one of the following
items: By column to select all the stops on the support; By row, to select all the stops positioned
horizontally; By origin to select all the stops that form part of the same origin.

Check positions; used to check whether or not the work table objects have been positioned
correctly.

230 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Properties; used to display the Object properties dialogue box containing the properties of the
stops:
Table 3: fields in the dialogue box Object properties.

Cards Description of fields

General Tab stop positioning values and general information.

Settings Tab Mobile; enables movement of the stop. Deactivating the

check box locks the stop at its current position.

Associated origin; list of origins to be associated with the

stop.

Piece support side; fields used to define the side of the stop
(ref. A) against which the piece is to rest.
Top side B; bottom side C; left-hand side D; right-hand side
E.
B

A
D E

Enable plate; used to enable insertion of a plate on the stop.

Cursor on the mobile piece supports and on the side stops

supports
By displaying the menu on a mobile panel support (ref. A, figure 102) or on a side stops support
(ref. B, figure 102) the following options are activated.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

231
9 Work table tooling

Figure 102: A = mobile piece supports; B = side stops supports.

A

Show; shows the mobile piece support selected, in the foreground.

Show all; shows the whole work table.

Select; used to simultaneously select all mobile piece supports with the Mobile support option.

Restrict the mobile support to the origin; used to restrict the selected piece support to its origin,
only if the support has been entered as mobile.

Check positions; used to check whether or not the work table objects have been positioned
correctly.

Positions; used to visualise the dialogue box, to define the positions of the mobile or fixed
supports.
Table 4: fields of the support position insertion box.

Box fields Description of fields

Box Position type Not parametric; see “Description of the position input window”
on page 241.

Parametric; see “Description of the position input window” on

page 241.

Reference side; used to set the reference side from which to

start when calculating movement of the object.

• Central
Indicates the centre of the object as the reference side.

• Right
Indicates the right-hand edge of the object as the reference
side.

232 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Box fields Description of fields

• Left
Indicates the left-hand edge of the object as the reference
side.

• Stop
Indicates the edge of the stop against which the piece is
positioned as the reference side.

Databoxes X and Y For a description, see “Description of the position input window”
on page 241.

Buttons For a description, see “Description of the position input window”

on page 241.

Properties; used to display the Object properties dialogue box containing the properties of the
mobile piece supports.
Table 5: fields in the dialogue box Object properties.

Cards Description of fields

General Tab mobile panel supports positioning values and general

information.

Settings Tab Mobile; enables movement of the support. Deactivating the

check box locks the support at its current position.

Removable; enables the removal of the support, i.e. it

permits the declaration that the specific support can be
removed from the work table.

Cursor on the piece

When the menu is displayed over the panel the following options will be enabled:

Show; shows the selected piece in the foreground.

Show all; shows the whole work table.

Move the piece to origin...; used to translate the piece to another origin.

Duplicate the piece on origin...; used to create a copy of the piece by loading it on another origin.

Move the piece and tool it to origin...; used to translate the piece to another origin, copying the
tooling too.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

233
9 Work table tooling

Duplicate the piece and tool it to origin...; used to create a copy of the piece and tooling by
loading the piece on another origin.

Set as active piece; used to make the selected piece active, and therefore allow it to be modified,
if a number of pieces have been loaded onto the work table.

Show machining operations; used to display the machining operation.

Check positions; used to check whether or not the work table objects have been positioned
correctly.

Properties; used to display the dialogue box containing the piece properties, and to check the
values for positioning the piece on the work table.

234 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.4 Description of the movement

environment context menu
Create repositioning; enter a positioning instruction that enables object movement in the selected
table.

Correct repositioning; used to change the parameters of the positioning instruction associated to
the object of the selected table.

Hold/Release; enables or disables the use of the vacuum, for shapeable suction cups, or clamp
locking for Uniclamp clamps. For a description of the dialogue box, see “Entering the instruction
Enable/Disable vacuum”, “Entering the instruction Open/Close clamp” on page 442.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

235
9 Work table tooling

9.5 The work table configuration document

The work table setting document, integral part of the WorkTableTooling application software,
enables video reproducing the machine work table to load the piece on the mobile panel supports
and tooling the objects that make up the table; it can also be customised.

When the application is launched, the display shows the default document defined by the Biesse
technicians in field Default configuration in tab Work tables of the Setup when configuring the
machine.

The following paragraphs indicate the main steps to follow in order to create, modify and save the
configuration document.

List of topics
• “Customising the document”
• “Saving the document”
• “Save the document as default”
• “Import TLS files”
• “Replacing the document”

236 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Customising the document

To customise the setting document according to your own requirements, run the WorkTableTooling
application independently from the Editor application software through the Start menu of the
Windows applications bar. Change the document that is displayed when running the application
software or click on the button, to start from a new document.

Figure 103: Windows Start menu

Inserting objects
In order to insert new components in the document, select the necessary table objects from the
tree list and transfer them to the graphics area using the Drag and drop technique. The objects
must be inserted in hierarchical order, that is, each object can only be inserted onto the one
immediately above it in the hierarchy. For example, if the mobile panel supports (ref. A) are not
fitted, it is not possible to fit the carriages (ref. B) or the shapeable suction cups (ref. C).
When inserting the shapeable suction cups, the carriages (ref. B) do not need to be present, they
are automatically fitted on the mobile panel supports (ref. A) every time a shapeable suction cup is
inserted.
Figure 104

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

237
9 Work table tooling

Description of the objects on the tree list

The first column shows the list of objects to use for configuring the work table. The second column
indicates the elements where the objects are installed, while the third column shows the elements
that each object can contain.
Table 6

Objects where they are

Work table objects Objects they can contain
installed

Mobile supports (ref. A, figure Working area Stops

104) Bars
Mobile supports

Stops (ref. D, figure 104) Mobile supports Washers

Bars (ref. F, figure 104) Mobile supports ---------------

Carriages (ref. B, figure 104) Mobile supports Suction cups/Uniclamp

Suction cups/Uniclamp (ref. C, Carriages ---------------

figure 104)

Washers (ref. E, figure 104) Stops ---------------

Removing objects
In order to eliminate objects from the table, select the object to eliminate, display the context menu
and select the Delete option.

Saving the document

To save the work table configuration document under a new name, select the File menu and the
Save as.. option. By default, the file with a PCF extension is saved in the default directory
...BiesseWorks\WTTooling\Dati\Configurazioni. Enter the name of the file in the appropriate field of
the window displayed by the system and save.

Save the document as default

To save the current work table configuration document as the default document that can be
displayed when the WorkTableTooling application software is launched, select the File menu and
the Set as default option.

238 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Import TLS files

To import the work table setting with extension TLS, click on the button.

Replacing the document

In order to tool a machining program using a customised configuration (different from the default
one proposed at application start-up), select the File menu and the Change work table
configuration option. Select the required file from the system window. Tool the work table (see
paragraph “Non-parametric type positioning”) and save.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

239
9 Work table tooling

9.6 Work table tooling environment

This environment is used to perform the work table tooling specifying the type of positioning to be
implemented:
z non-parametric positioning (see paragraph “Non-parametric type positioning”, page 248);

z parametric positioning (see paragraph “Parametric type positioning”, page 243).

It is also possible to perform the semi-automatic tooling, which enables positioning the table
objects considering the data specified in the machining program (see paragraph “Semi-automatic
positioning”, page 249).

In case the machining program presents the WTMOVING basic positioning instruction (see
paragraph 9.7 “Table objects movement environment”, page 251), select the icon of the left
tree area to display the tooling environment.

List of topics
• Description of the position input window
• Parametric type positioning
• Procedure for setting parameters for the work table objects
• NOTUSED variable
• Modifying the relative position
• Non-parametric type positioning
• Semi-automatic positioning
• Semi-automatic positioning

240 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Description of the position input window

The position input window can only be displayed during the work table tooling phase but not in the
table objects movement phase. Shows the positioning value of the selected object and enables
moving the object by entering the required values in the corresponding fields (algebraic
expressions, conditional instructions, etc.).
Figure 105

To display the window to enter the positions, select the required object and choose the Positions
option of the context menu or of the Edit menu.

Description of the window buttons (figure 105)

; confirms the settings and closes the window.

; closes the window without confirming the settings made.

; used to activate the settings made without closing the widow.

; in the Expression field, shows the positioning of the object on the selected table (see “Using
the field Expression”) and is activated only in case of parametric positioning. You are advised to
pay attention since pushing the button converts any algebraic expression in the Expression field
into a pure number (see the glossary).

; used to enter the NOTUSED variable (see “Using the field Expression”) in the Expression
field and it is only activated if the positioning is parametric.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

241
9 Work table tooling

Description of the window fields (figure 105)

Box Description of fields

Position type The description of the fields varies according to the type of
object selected in the tooling environment. See the description
of the box in the following paragraphs:
• Cursor on the shapeable suction cup and on the clamps
(Uniclamp) (page 227).
• Cursor on the mobile piece supports and on the side stops
supports (page 231).

X and Y Boxes to enter the positioning values for mobile supports (X),
shapeable suction cups, clamps or carriages (Y).

Expression; for a description, see “Using the field Expression”.

Condition; for a description, see “Using the field Condition”.

Using the field Expression

This field shows the positioning point of the object selected or the NOTUSED variable (see
“NOTUSED variable”, page 244). The type of position indicated in the field varies according to the
type of positioning:

1. If the positioning is non parametric, the position shown is an absolute value, calculated starting
from the origin of the work table (see paragraph “Non-parametric type positioning”, page 248).

2. In the case of parametric positioning, the position shown is a relative value calculated from the
edge of the piece positioned on the origin selected. By default this position is represented by a
pure number but it can be modified by entering an algebraic expression (e.g. LPX - LPY/4).
Click on the button to display the pure number.

Using the field Condition

Through this field the positioning point of the selected object can be shown by means of a
VBScript conditional instruction (e.g. “If…Then…Else”). The conditional instruction does represent
an absolute value but a relative value calculated starting from the edge of the piece positioned on
the selected origin. The field is only activated when positioning is parametric.

Example of a condition:
if (LPX > 500) then
result = LPX+100-LPZ
else
result = LPX/2

242 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

end if
The word result represents the position destination value.

Parametric type positioning

Setting the parameters for the work table objects is linked to the X dimensions of the piece itself
and is only applicable when the dimensions of the piece defined in the machining program need to
be reduced.
For example, to produce a program in which to set the parameters to machine 6 pieces of different
dimensions (2000mm, 1500mm, 800mm, 700mm, 400mm and 300mm), first create the machining
program with length X of the piece set at the maximum, i.e. 2000, then subsequently reduce the
dimensions of the piece.

To set the parameters of objects on the work table, follow the rule below:
• if the X dimension of the piece is such as to enable the piece to occupy two working areas
(ref. A, figure 106), it is necessary to make all the mobile supports parametric;
• if the X dimension of the piece occupies one part or an entire working area (ref. B, figure
106), it is necessary to make all the supports of just the area involved parametric.

This rule is also valid for shapeable suction cups, i.e. the parameters of all the suction cups
forming part of the working area involved in the tooling must be set.

The work table objects not involved in tooling the piece but that belong to the working area or
areas on which the piece has been deposited (e.g. ref. C, figure 106) must be excluded from the
parametric positioning (see point 3, next paragraph).
Figure 106
A B

C C

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

243
9 Work table tooling

Procedure for setting parameters for the work table objects

1. Launch the WorkTableTooling application software by clicking on the button on the Editor
toolbar. Before entering the work table tooling environment, make sure that the active
machining operation dialogue box Piece variables field Origins list indicates the origin for
piece positioning, and that the check box has been enabled Sole origin. Otherwise, the system
displays an error message where it is necessary to carry out the above-mentioned operations.

2. Select the Edit menu and click with the mouse on Parametric tooling (relative values) to select
it. The positioning values for every single work table object involved in the parametric
positioning are automatically converted from absolute to relative (see the Expression field on
page 241). To check and/or modify these values, see “Modifying the relative position” on page
245.

3. Exclude the mobile support, the shapeable suction cups and/or clamps not involved in the
piece tooling from the parametric positioning by using the NOTUSED variable (see
“NOTUSED variable” on page 245).

4. Launch the preview to see the result of the parametric positioning by clicking on the
button. Through the preview a new document can be generated in which it is possible to
indicate the dimensions of the piece and the reference origin. The document does not allow
any type of operation or saving, it only shows the result of the tooling and the correct position
of the work table objects declared to be NOTUSED.

5. Process the machining program and display the simulator by clicking on .

6. Save the tooling and go back to the Editor application.

To ensure that the ISO file also contains the tooling information, enable the Exports the work
table tooling set-up check box in the Piece variables dialogue box (see “Creating the
document” on page 288).

NOTUSED variable
The NOTUSED variable indicates the work table object is excluded from the parametric
positioning. All the objects to be excluded from the tooling must therefore show this variable in the
Expression data field of the position input dialogue box.
To enter this variable, select the work table objects one by one, display the context menu, select
the Positions option and click on the button.

The objects excluded must be positioned at a distance of around 300mm in X and 100mm in Y
with respect to the piece loaded on the work table.
To modify these two values, create the following variables of the type Environment:
• TOOLMARGINX; the value indicated in this variable is used by the NOTUSED variable for
positioning of the objects in X.
• TOOLMARGINY; the value indicated in this variable is used by the NOTUSED variable for
positioning of the objects in Y.

244 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Modifying the relative position

When the parametric positioning of work table objects is carried out, the system, on the basis of
the data inserted by the installer in the PCFT table, automatically converts all the positioning points
of the work table objects involved in tooling the piece, from absolute to relative. The absolute
position means the position of the object calculated from the origin of the work table, relative
position means the position of the object starting from the edge of the piece loaded on the origin
selected.

To modify these values follow the following instructions:

z To move the objects manually, press the SHIFT button and drag the object to the required
position using the mouse cursor. This type of operation is only possible if the position of the
selected object inserted in the Expression field is represented by a pure number.

z To define a specific positioning point by inserting, for example, an algebraic expression or a

conditional instruction, select the object to be moved, display the position input window, define
the reference side in the Reference side field and complete the Expression field or the
Condition field (see “Description of the position input window”, page 241). Confirming the
settings without closing the window, by clicking on .

Example of parameter setting by using an algebraic expression

1. Select the first support starting from the right and define the following fields:
Reference side = Right
Condition =
if (LPX<1000) then
result = LPX+200
else
result = LPX-20

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

245
9 Work table tooling

end if
Confirm the setting by clicking on .

2. Select the second support and set the following fields:

Reference side = Central
Expression = 2/3*LPX
Confirm the setting by clicking on .

3. Select the third support and set the following fields:

Reference side = Central

246 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Expression = 1/3*LPX
Confirm the setting by clicking on .

4. Select the fourth support and set the following fields:

Reference side = Left
Expression = 20
Confirm the setting by clicking on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

247
9 Work table tooling

Non-parametric type positioning

Non-parametric positioning of the work table objects can be performed manually with the aid of the
mouse cursor, or by inputting the right position in the position input window (see paragraph
“Description of the position input window”“Description of the position input window”, page 241).
To perform this type of positioning, do the following:

1. Select the Edit menu and click with the mouse on Non-parametric tooling (absolute values) to
select it.

2. Manually move the objects with the button, or select the object to be moved, display the
position input window (see “Description of the position input window”“Description of the
position input window”, page 241) and enter the position in the Expression field.

3. Input the required data, rotate the objects, control the positions, etc., using the context menu
(see paragraph 9.3 “Description of the tooling environment context menu”, page 227);
Every time a shapeable suction cup is under a through machining operation it turns red to
show that there is an alarm situation; be careful to check that it is always green.
For quick display of the properties window with the position of the object on the table, double
click on the object to select it.

4. Process the machining program and display the simulator by clicking on .

5. Save the tooling and go back to the Editor application.

To ensure that the ISO file also contains the tooling information, enable the Exports the work
table tooling set-up check box in the Piece variables dialogue box (see paragraph “Creating
the document” on page 288).

248 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

Semi-automatic positioning
The term semi-automatic positioning indicates the work table tooling carried out automatically by a
suitable positioner employing the support for the specific parameters present in the BsLock
dialogue box; for this reason it is assumed that these parameters have been properly set (see
paragraph 4.3 “Settings for semi-automatic positioning” , page 115).

The positioner manages both EPS work tables (with automatic movement) and ATS work tables
(with manual movement). In this case, for the ATS work tables, it is necessary to read the
maximum reachable positions of supports and carriages (see chapter 4 “General settings”, page
121).
To tool the table, the positioner defines the position of the mobile panel supports and carriages
(taking into account the area to be locked and the overall dimensions), and chooses the shapeable
suction cups to be used, adjusting them so they lock the piece perfectly. When choosing the
shapeable suction cups, it always favours the bigger ones (e.g. 132 x 146) rather than the smaller
ones (e.g. 132 x 54).

This type of positioning does not manage the shapeable suction cups installed on carriages
fitted with a fixed or pneumatic stop (ref.A, figure 107).
Figure 107

Semi-automatic positioning
To perform the semi-automatic positioning of the objects on the table, display the tooling
environment (see paragraph 9.6 “Work table tooling environment”) and select the button
(Tools menu, Semiautomatic tooling option).

This command is an aid tool; it does not replace the tooling, as it is constrained (see
the following paragraph). Before saving the program therefore, it is advisable to
check and assess the resulting tooling.

Warnings relating to the limits of the semi-automatic positioning

command
As there are different constraints regarding the use of the following command,
always carry out a program simulation on the machine before using it.
z Warnings relating to machining operations:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

249
9 Work table tooling

• When calculating the positioning for table objects, the machining operations entered after
the first WTMOVING positioning instruction are not considered.
• "Through machining operations" are those defined on the zero side of the piece with a depth
greater than the piece thickness. To establish whether a machining operation is "through",
the maximum tool length is examined.
• The workable areas and the reject areas are not always taken into consideration. In the
case of closed geometries, the area between the piece edge and the geometry is usually
considered a reject area. In the GEO, it is advisable to use the RAW_ prefix to define the
areas to be locked and the WRK_ prefix to define those that should not be locked as they
are waste areas.
• The reject area produced by a cut or a through milling operation, and to be removed, is not
recognised.
z Warnings regarding the use of shapeable suction cups, carriages and stops:
• To define the orientation of a shapeable suction cup, only the 90º, 180º and 270º rotations
are used.
• The use of shapeable suction cups is not constrained: it is possible to use an unlimited
number of compatible suction cups, and they can be placed on all carriages.
• If the field related to the list of shapeable suction cups in the BsLock dialogue box has not
been filled in, the shapeable suction cups placed on the table are the only ones that are
used. In this case, the positioner cannot rotate them, move them from one carriage to
another one or replace them.
• No compatibility check is carried out between the thicknesses of the shapeable suction cups
that are used. In this case, the final result could produce a tooling using suction cups with
different thicknesses. The incorrect use of suction cups with different thicknesses is
only indicated when saving the tooling by means of an error message.
• The shapeable suction cups are not automatically inserted on the empty carriages.
Therefore, the work table initial configuration should already include shapeable suction
cups.
• There is no control over the overlapping of table objects, such as carriages and stops.
Therefore, some carriages could be positioned above the shapeable suction cups.
• The vacuum system constraints are not managed: the shapeable suction cups used for
locking could be disabled.
z Warnings relating to collision control and overall dimensions:
• In the case of through machining operations, the collision calculation may not fully detect
potential collision situations between work table objects and tools, as the positioner uses
only the locking part of the shapeable suction cups when making this calculation. It is
advisable to carefully carry out the checks and a simulation directly on the machine.
• The collision control between unused tools and shapeable suction cups is not managed.
• The deflector and horizontal aggregate working dimensions are not managed.
• The side stops supports defined as removable are not eliminated if the X dimension of the
piece to be machined has a length that could cause crashes.

250 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.7 Table objects movement environment

In this environment it is possible to enter instructions that, while the piece is being machined,
enable transferring the objects that make up the work table in a controlled way; only in case of
machines equipped with the automatic movement system of the (EPS) work table objects.

In case the machining program presents the WTMOVING basic positioning instruction related to
the work table objects movement, the left tree area is displayed when the application is run, which
enables going from the table tooling environment (see page 240) to the table objects movement
environment.
In that case, select the icon of the left tree area to display the movement environment. Enter
the required instructions, using the corresponding commands of the Repositioning work table bar
or dragging the table objects with the SHIFT key; for the description of the commands, see
paragraph 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work table objects” on page 442.

In this environment it is also possible to check machining operations, displaying them on the piece
by selecting the icon of the left tree area.

To run the simulation and check the movement of the work table objects, use the corresponding
commands.

Save the tooling and go back to the Editor application.

In case the table objects semi-automatic positioning has been carried out in the
tooling environment, it is necessary to bear in mind that in this calculation all the
machining operations that follow the first WTMOVING positioning instruction are not
used (see paragraph “Semi-automatic positioning”, page 249).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

251
9 Work table tooling

9.8 Deleting the tooling from the machining

program
To perform a new tooling, deleting the data related to the previously performed tooling from the
machining program, open the required machining program from the Editor application, select the
Tools menu and the Delete table tooling option. Launch the application software by clicking on the
button and carry out the new tooling.

9.9 Removing the work table supports

To remove the mobile panel supports and/or the side stops supports (see figure 102) from the work
table follow the procedure described below:

1. Select the support to be removed, display the context menu and choose the Properties option.
Check the Removable field has been activated; if it has not, click on the adjacent check box.

2. Select the Edit menu and click on the Removable supports... option.

3. From the Removable supports window, disable the required support by removing the tick from
the box next to the name of the support, using the mouse. Every support is identified by a
numerical index that can be controlled inside the Properties window in the Name field.

252 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.10 Viewing the properties table

To display the table containing the selected object properties in the lower part of the application,
click on .

9.11 Consulting the positioning points

To consult all the positioning points of the various work table objects, click on the button.

9.12 Viewing the shaped piece

To display on the work table the shape of the piece produced via the creation of non-standard
sides, select the Display menu and click on the Shaped piece option (the adjacent tick indicates
that the display has been enabled).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

253
9 Work table tooling

9.13 Simultaneous tooling of a number of

pieces on the same origin
To open a number of machining programs (BPP files) and load the pieces onto the same work
table origin so as to carry out simultaneous tooling, proceed as follows:

1. run the WorkTableTooling application using the Start menu on the Windows applications bar;

2. click on to enable the tooling environment;

3. click on ; the window used to search for machining program files with extension BPP will
be displayed. Select the required file and select the origin on which to deposit the piece;

4. carry out the operations described in point 3 above to open other files and deposit other
pieces on the table. Select the same origin as previously defined;

5. move the table elements to carry out tooling;

6. click on the button to associate the table tooling with the active program.

254 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

9.14 Systems management environment

This environment is used to display the pneumatic system connected to the work table and the
locking zones settings; it is also used to create independent and customised locking zones (multi-
zone).

To enter the systems management environment, select the icon of the left-hand tree area and
click on the Change to zones mode option of the Systems menu.

List of topics
• Viewing the vacuum system
• Viewing the clamp locking system
• Viewing the pre-set settings
• Viewing the setting associated to the machining program
• Customised locking zones management
• Associating a setting with the machining program

Viewing the vacuum system

To view the vacuum system connected to the work table (defined upon machine installation),
select the Show the vacuum system option of the Systems menu.

Viewing the clamp locking system

To view the Uniclamp clamp locking system connected to the work table (defined upon machine
installation), select the Show the uniclamp system option of the Systems menu.

Viewing the pre-set settings

z To call the settings related to the locking zones for shapeable suction cups to be displayed in
the interface, select the Show the vacuum configurations option of the Systems menu and
choose the required setting from the pre-set list.
z To call the settings related to the Uniclamp clamp locking zones to be displayed in the
interface, select the Show the vacuum configurations option of the Systems menu and choose
the required setting from the pre-set list.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

255
9 Work table tooling

Viewing the setting associated to the machining program

To view the locking zones setting associated with the machining program, select the Shows the
configuration associated with the piece option of the Systems menu.

Customised locking zones management

To enter the settings environment of the independent and customised locking zones, in order to
associate a specific setting with the machining program, select the Create Manual zone option or
the Shows the manual configuration option of the Systems menu:
z By selecting the first option, when the environment is opened, the system -considering the
objects located under the piece, the active origin and the position of the piece- automatically
creates a manual zone. All involved carriages turn white and the active origin number appears
on each one of them. To change the setting, see the following paragraph.
z By selecting the second option, the customised locking zones setting environment is
displayed. The environment shows the customised setting, only if it is stored in the program; in
this case, the necessary changes can be made.
The environment does not show any setting that is not included in the program; in this case,
the setting can be created.

Procedure to create locking zones

Customised locking zones can be created following two different procedures:

1. Create the locking zones activating an origin. In this case, follow the indications listed below:
• Indicate the origin to be associated with the customised locking zone, selecting the Systems
menu and the Select origin for manual zone option. Choose the required origin from the
corresponding list suggested by the system. The origin turns electric blue. To disable it, click
on the Deselect origin for manual zone option.
• Select the carriages to be associated with the active origin and click on the Add to active
origin zone option of the Systems menu. All involved carriages turn white and the number of
the origin to which they have been associated appears on each one of them. To separate
the carriages, select the Remove from zone menu.
• To separate the zone created from the active origin, select a carriage associated to the
specific zone, and click on the Remove from zone option of the Hide piece context menu.
• To delete the zones created associated with a specific origin, select the Systems menu and
the Delete the zone for origin... option. Choose the required origin from the corresponding
list suggested by the system.
• To delete all the zones created, select the Systems menu and the Delete all zones option.

2. Create the locking zones without activating an origin; directly associate the carriages to the
required origin. In this case, follow the indications listed below:
• Select the carriage and associate it with an origin by clicking on the Add to the zone of
origin... option of the Hide piece context menu. In this case all the carriages connected from
the system to the selected carriage are associated to the specific origin. The involved

256 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

carriages turn white and the number of the origin to which they have been associated is
displayed on each one of them. If more carriages are associated to more origins, the “#”
symbol is displayed on them.
• To separate the zone created from the origin, select a carriage associated with the specific
zone, and click on the Remove from zone option of the Hide piece context menu.
• To change the origin associated with the zone created, select a carriage and click on the
Move to the zone of origin... option of the Hide piece context menu.
• To delete the zones created associated with a specific origin, select the Systems menu and
the Delete the zone for origin... option. Choose the origin from the corresponding list
suggested by the system.
• To delete all the zones created, select the Systems menu and the Delete all zones option.

Associating a setting with the machining program

To associate a locking zones setting with the machining program, choose one from the settings
suggested in the corresponding pre-set list (see page 255) or create a setting in the customised
locking zones creation environment (see page 256) and select the Associates the current
configuration with the piece option of the Systems menu.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

257
9 Work table tooling

9.15 Cataloguing the shapeable suction cups

The Suction cup magazine dialogue box allows you to catalogue the shapeable suction cups used
to tool the work table. This cataloguing facilitates the best possible semi-automatic positioning of
the work table objects (see paragraph “Semi-automatic positioning”).

Description of the dialogue box Suction cup magazine

To visualise the Suction cup magazine dialogue box (figure 108), click on the Tools menu and the
Shows the suction cup magazine option.
Figure 108

E C D

A Shapeable suction cup cataloguing table; shows a list of the catalogued suction cups.

Suction cup; type of suction cup.

Quantity; number of suction cups that make up the type defined in the previous cell.

]Description; description.

Height; suction cup thickness.

B Insert data fields; used to insert a row in table or modify the values in the selected row.

C Button to exit the window, saving the settings.

D Button to exit the window, without saving the settings.

E Table management buttons:

; to modify the data of the selected table line.

258 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 9 Work table tooling

; to enter a new line in the table.

; to eliminate the selected line from the table.

Compiling the data table

z To catalogue the shapeable suction cups, proceed as follows:
• Choose - from the predefined list - the type of suction cup to be catalogued.

• In field A, enter the quantity of suction cups belonging to the type you have chosen.
A

• In write-enabled field B , enter a brief description.

B

• Click on the button.

z To modify the data on a line of the table, proceed as follows:

• Select the table line you want to modify.
• Make the necessary modifications in the data entry fields.

• Click on the button.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

259
9 Work table tooling

260 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

10 Managing the tools with the
Balluff device

The following chapter provides some indications about the classification and tooling of the tools
equipped with the “Balluff” device.

The tools or aggregates equipped with the “balluff” device -the optical reading chip that stores the
tool technical data- can be managed with BiesseWorks through a data transmission system from
the chip to the NC and vice versa.
This option is only active on the software connected to the NC and only when the “balluff” device
has been enabled.

To enable the management of tools equipped with the “balluff” device when using
BiesseWorks, close the MACHINE DATA application of the NC.

List of topics
• 10.1 “Managing tools/aggregates”
• 10.2 “Tooling”
• 10.3 “Managing a malfunctioning chip”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

261
10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

10.1 Managing tools/aggregates

Once the use of the “balluff” device is enabled, the tools/aggregates management interface of the
software connected to the machine will slightly change its appearance.

The rows of the table of the ToolManager application (figure 109), as well as the Code and Name
fields (figure 110), change colour to distinguish the tools/aggregates with or without the chip.
Figure 109

The colours displayed are:

z Magenta: states that the tool is equipped with a chip but it is not present in the tool magazine;
the transmission of data from and to the chip is not possible.
z Blue: states that the tool is equipped with a chip and is present in the tool magazine;
transmission of data from and to the chip is possible. This colour replaces magenta only after
the created tool/aggregate has been tooled.
z Pink: states that the tool is equipped with a chip but the chip is currently non operational.

z Green: identifies a standard tool, i.e. without chip.

Creating tools/aggregates
The name of the tools/aggregates equipped with chips is indicated by the character @ followed by
a number. The management of the tools/aggregates is identical to that of the tools/aggregates
without chips (see chapter 6 “Cataloguing tools/aggregates”, page 157), the only difference being
in the name and in the option to select in the Chip field.

To create tools/aggregates equipped with chips, enter the name of the tool in the appropriate field
of either the tool or aggregate dialogue box, ref. A, or enter the name of the aggregate, ref. B,
which must have a maximum of 6 characters, and a numerical extension (from 0 to 9) in the @
adjacent field, ref. C (figure 110).

In the Chip field, select one of the following options:

NO_CHIP; standard tool or aggregate without chip;

262 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

CHIP; tool or aggregate with chip;

CHIP_AGGR; tool to be used only on an aggregate with chip.

CHIP_ERROR; tool or aggregate fitted with non-working chip.

Figure 110: A = Code field of the dialogue box Tool parameters; B = Name field of the dialogue box
Aggregate.
A C

B C

To save the newly created tools in the NC, click on the button on the toolbar of the application
in use.

Modification of data in the database and transmitting data to

the chips
Modification of data appertaining to created tools/aggregates with chips is only allowed if the tools/
aggregates with chips have been tooled in the magazine tooling environment.
The blue colour present in the tool table and in aggregate field Name indicates that the tool/
aggregate in question can be modified as it is present in the magazine.
Display the window with the technical data of the tool/aggregate to modify and save. Saving the
modifications using the button automatically updates the individual chips present on the tools/
aggregates housed in the machine magazine.

Check that the tools/aggregates equipped with chips physically housed in the magazine
correspond to those tooled in the tooling window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

263
10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

10.2 Tooling
To carry out the tooling, click on buttons or , according to whether accessing the
aggregate tooling environment or the magazine tooling environment.

When tooling tools/aggregates with chips, the following rules must be observed:
z Each single tool/aggregate equipped with a chip can only be housed in one tool-holder.

z Each tool defined as a tool for an aggregate equipped with a chip can only belong to one
aggregate with a chip.

For the tooling procedures, see chapter 8 “Machine tooling” on page 207.

Transmission of data from the chips to the tooling

environment
To update the tools/aggregates database and the magazine tooling by transferring the data stored
in the chips present on each single tool housed in the magazine, display window Magazine tooling
and click on .
This operation allows the tooling data stored in the NC to be aligned with that on the machine. If
the data transferred from the chip does not correspond with that of the NC, the updating is carried
out by overwriting the data on the NC. If the tool/aggregate is not present in the NC, it is
automatically given a name using the character “@” and a number to distinguish it from those
without chips saved in the database and inserted in the magazine tool-holder.

Example
Let's suppose the name of the tool stored in the chip of the tool located in the tool-holder 4 is
FORA@1, and the name of the tool inserted in the tool-holder 4 in the NC tooling environment is
FORAT@2, click on and the system automatically updates the NC: the FORA@1 tool is
created in the database and inserted in the tool-holder 4 of the tooling window where the
FORAT@2 is located.

Transmission of data from the tooling environment to the

chips
Data can be transmitted from the tooling environment to the chips in a number of ways:
z Selecting the individual tool holder in the graphics area to update the individual chip of the
selected tool-holder. In BiesseWorks versions higher than 3.3, it is possible to select several
tool-holders or magazines.
z Selecting the name of the magazine from the tree list, to update all the chips in the specified
magazine.
z Selecting the name of the machine from the tree list, to update all the chips of all the
magazines; only from version 3.3 sp2 onwards.

264 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

Press the button to start the data transmission to the chips; a message is displayed confirming
the writing of the data by pressing the TEST button on the PLC keyboard.

For BiesseWorks versions higher than 3.3, data transmission is only possible if the
value of the “Distance travelled” field of the tool in the database (dialogue box Tool
parameters) is different from the corresponding figure stored in the CHIP.

During the data transmission from the NC to the chips, the system reads the data stored in
the chips to check that the transmitted data is correct.
For example, if the name of the tool stored in the chip of the tool physically housed in tool
holder 4 does not correspond to the name of the tool inserted in tool holder 4 of the
magazine tooling window, the system recognises the difference and asks for confirmation
or otherwise to save the data.

Failure of data transmission to the chip

In the case where the transmission of data from the NC to the chips fails, a message is displayed
with a number of options:
z Retry the data transmission and writing.

z Indicate the tool as a tool equipped with chip that is not operational and save the modifications
made; in this case the tool/aggregate in the database will turn pink (see paragraph 10.3
“Managing a malfunctioning chip”).
z Annul the data transmission.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

265
10 Managing the tools with the Balluff device

10.3 Managing a malfunctioning chip

In the case where the data transmission fails due to a broken or malfunctioning chip, modify the
tool/aggregate concerned by inserting in the Chip field of the appropriate tool/aggregate data
dialogue box, the CHIP_ERROR option. In this way, the tool remains inserted in the database and
is marked in pink. Check the chips and repeat the data transmission. To return the chip to an
operational status, i.e colour blue, display the magazine tooling window, tool it and click on buttons
or .

266 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

11 Data import, backup and
restore

List of topics
• 11.1 “Importing machine data and tool database”
• 11.2 “Backup/restore machine data and tool database”
• 11.3 “Backup/restore machining programs and macros”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

267
11 Data import, backup and restore

11.1 Importing machine data and tool

database
The import procedure allows machine/tool data stored in the relevant directory of the NC or on
floppy disk to be imported and saved in the appropriate BiesseWorks directories.

The import of data from the NC to BiesseWorks on the software connected to the machine is
initially carried out by the installation technician (NC directories: ...\home\d_xnc per XNC/CNI ;
...\home per WRT/CNI). It can only be carried out at a later date in exceptional cases, for example
if the hard disk breaks, requiring the machine data to be installed again; this operation must only
be carried out on software that is not connected to the machine.

On the office software, the import of data is only carried out to effect a general update of the
system data, aligning it with that on the NC, thus ensuring that the created programs function in
the correct manner. It is advisable, therefore, to save this data on a floppy disk as follows:
z For NC1000 (XNC/CNI) controls, copy directories "conf" and "data" from the NC.

z For XP600 (WRT/CNI) controls, create two directories on the disk : “d_xnc” and “xnc”. Put
“confdata” and “data” in the “d_xnc” folder, the folder copied from the NC directory
wnc\home\d_xnc. Put “confdata” in the “xnc” folder, copied from the NC directory
wnc\home\xnc.

To import this data in the office software, refer to the procedure on page 269.

No partial import of machine data or tools database in the relative folders of the NC is
permitted.

268 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 11 Data import, backup and restore

Import procedure
To import data, run the ToolManager application software or the MachineConfiguration application
software and click on . The button is only enabled if a high level password has been entered
(see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143).
Figure 111: dialogue box Import data

1. Select the type of configuration.

2. Select the type of numerical control from where to import the data by clicking on option button
XNC - CNI or on option button NCxxx - HSD.

3. Use button to search for the drive on which the data to import in the software has been
stored.
To import the office software using the data saved on the floppy disk or in a PC drive, select
the following directories:
• for the XNC/CNI import, select the directory in which the “conf” and “data” folders are found;
• for the WRT/CNI import, select the directory in which the “d_xnc” and “xnc” folders are
found;

4. Click on the button.

5. Select the import filters, that is to say define the values of the data to be imported:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

269
11 Data import, backup and restore

• Tools; tick the check box to import the tool database;

• Machine; tick the check box to import the machine data;

• Tooling; tick the check box to import the machine and tool magazine tooling configuration;

• The remaining data fields must not be modified.

6. Click on the button.

7. Select the name to be given to the folder in which the data is to be saved:
• Sector; displays the type of machine.
• Machine; displays the name of the active machine. To change the data of the current
(active) machine with the data imported, proceed without carrying out any operation. To
save the data with a different name, click on button A and enter the name of the new
machine in the appropriate data field.

8. Click on the button.

9. Tick the check box Biesse.

270 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 11 Data import, backup and restore

10. Select the code that corresponds to the name of the machine from the list provided.

11. Click on the button.

12. Click on to start the import procedure.

13. Save and close the window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

271
11 Data import, backup and restore

11.2 Backup/restore machine data and tool

database
The backup operation stores the machine data, the work table data and the tool database data in a
file with a zip extension, while the restore operation overwrites this same data in the respective
software directories by extracting it from the previously saved zip file.

This operation is designed to:

z store the machine/tooling data and tool database data in a drive, a floppy disk for example, in
order to have it available at any time if the original data becomes corrupt. It is advisable,
therefore, to periodically carry out a backup procedure.
z update the data in the office software by replacing it with that taken from the software
connected to the machine.

Data backup procedure

To carry out the backup, run the BackupManager utility (see page 110) and proceed as follows:

1. Select the option button Copy.

2. Activate check box Data to copy data and check box Tool bitmap to copy images, BMP
formats and tools.

3. Click on the Setup button to set a high password level, only if the copy is to be saved and
protected by inserting a password.
Saving the backup file with a password means that it is protected from possible tampering.
Restore of this file will only be carried out if the pre-set password is entered.

4. Click on search button . A system window is displayed from where it is possible to select
the path on which to save the zip file containing the copy of the data. Enter the name of the file
in the appropriate field; the zip extension is inserted automatically when the system window is
closed.

5. Click on Go forward

6. Check one of the following boxes according to the amount of data to be saved:

272 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 11 Data import, backup and restore

• to save only the data of the active machine, check the Active machine box, click on Go
forward and enable the required boxes in the Select data box.

• to save all the data of one or more machines belonging to the sector indicated in the Sector
field, check the All data box and activate the required machines.

7. Click on Go forward

8. Click on the button to start the backup procedure.

9. Save and close the window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

273
11 Data import, backup and restore

Data restore procedure

Before restoring saved data, close all the BiesseWorks applications. At the end of the
operation reboot the applications.

To restore the backed up data, run the BackupManager utility (see page 110) and proceed as
follows:

1. Select the option button Restore.

2. Click on the search button to find the zip file containing the copy of the data to be
restored.

3. Click on Go forward

4. In the frame Select the items to be restored tick the required boxes to select the data you wish
to restore.

5. Check the Restore common data and merge with previous box to select how to restore the
tool/aggregate data saved in the Zip file. The disabled box allows to substitute all the data
stored in the local database. In the case of restoring the data on machines connected to the
NC, leave the box disabled so as to avoid possible misalignments.

• The common data are overwritten with file data; used to increase the local database with the
new tools/aggregates saved in the Zip file and to substitute those which are equal.
• The common data present are not overwritten; used to increase the local database with the
new tools/aggregates saved in the Zip file leaving those which are equal unchanged,
without being substituted.
• Overwrite of common data is carried out using a confirmation dialogue box; used to select
the tools/aggregates to be changed through the appropriate popped-up confirmation
window.

6. Click on Go forward

7. Click on the button to start the restore procedure.

8. Save and close the window.

274 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 11 Data import, backup and restore

11.3 Backup/restore machining programs and

macros
The backup operation is used to save the machining programs and the macros created in a file
with zip extension; whereas the restore operation is used to extract these files from the zip file that
was previously saved.

Data backup procedure

To carry out the backup, run the BackupManager utility and proceed as follows:

1. Select the option button Copy.

2. Activate the markPrograms to copy all the programs created;

3. Activate the markMacros to copy all the macros created.

4. Click on search button . A system window is displayed from where it is possible to select
the path on which to save the zip file containing the copy of the data. Enter the name of the file
in the appropriate field; the zip extension is inserted automatically when the system window is
closed.

5. Click on the Setup button to set a high password level, only if the copy is to be protected from
possible tampering.
Restore of this file will only be carried out if the pre-set password is entered.

6. Click on Go forward

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

275
11 Data import, backup and restore

7. To execute programs backup,

click on button ; the system A
window opens so you can search
the machining operation files.
To copy files in sub folders within
a folder, search the main folder
using the data field A and enter in
data field B the text: *.*;
remembering to tick the B
boxInclude sub-folders (see 8).
To copy all files in a folder,
search the folder using the data
field C and enter in the data field C
D the text: *.bpp.

8. To copy the files inside a sub

folder, click the boxInclude sub-
folders.

9. Click on Go forward
D
10. To make a backup of the macros,
move the macros to be copied
into the list on the right.
To move a single macro, select it and press .

To move all the macros, click on the button.

11. Click on Go forward

12. Click on the button to start the backup procedure.

13. Save and close the window.

276 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 11 Data import, backup and restore

Data restore procedure

Before restoring saved data, close all the BiesseWorks applications. At the end of the
operation reboot the applications.

To restore the copied data, proceed as described below:

1. Select the option button Restore.

2. Click on the search button to find the zip file containing the copy of data to be restored.

3. Click on Go forward

4. To reset the machining programs,

proceed as follows:
Move the machining programs to the
list at the bottom, using the buttons
A.
Search for the folder in which to
save the file using the search button
B.

5. Tick the boxUse paths saved in

archive to generate, inside the directory specified in field B, the original folders/sub-folders
stored in ZIP backup files. The directory stored in the ZIP file can be recreated partially or
wholly:
• The option buttonCompose the relative path makes it possible to recreate the folders in
which the files resided at the moment of backup, starting from the mother folder (see
point7).
• The option button Maintain the complete path makes it possible to recreate the folders/sub-
folders that the files resided in at the time of back up, starting from the root
(C:\programmi\lavori\fresature\rettangolo.bmp).
The disabled box makes it possible to restore BPPs directly inside the directory by specifying
in field B, without recreating the original folders/sub-folders stored during backup.

6. Click on Go forward

7. To carry out a restore of the macros, move the macros to be copied into the right hand list.

8. Click on Go forward

9. Click on the button to start the backup procedure.

10. Save and close the window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

277
11 Data import, backup and restore

278 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

12 Management of machine
axes and working units

The component relating to resetting of machine axes, axes drive and procedures to be used to
move the operating section units in order to tool up the machine is entirely managed by the CNI
application software, and is described in chapter 22 “Using the XNC” on page 551.

List of topics
• 12.1 “Consulting the machine axes”
• 12.2 “Resetting the machine axes”
• 12.3 “Moving the machine axes”
• 12.4 “Forced movement of the working units”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

279
12 Management of machine axes and working units

12.1 Consulting the machine axes

To consult the machine axis data, run the MachineConfiguration application software and click on
the button (orDatabase menu, option Axes). Select the axis to consult on the dialogue box
Axis manager.

Only a Biesse technician is authorised to modify this data.

Description of the dialogue box Axis -

; save the settings and close the dialogue box.

; close the dialogue box without saving modifications.

Type; type of axis:

• ROTATION; rotating axis (e.g. C-axis).
• LINEAR; linear axis (e.g. X, Y, Z interpolating axes).
• STRAIGHT POS.; linear axis positioner (e.g. non-interpolating axes useful only for
positioning the devices; magazine axis).
• ROTATING POS.; rotating axis positioner (e.g. non-interpolating axes useful only for
positioning the devices; magazine axis).

Direction; buttons to highlight the axis direction in relation to the kind of axis indicated in the field
Type.

Origin; axis origin in relation to the machine origin.

Bottom stroke limit; minimum reachable axis position.

Bottom safety limit; minimum safety value for the axis travel (cam position 1).

Top stroke limit; maximum reachable axis position.

Top safety limit; maximum safety value for the axis travel (cam position 2).

Interpolation; indicates the axis can be interpolated (box checked).

Max WSpd; maximum work speed of a linear axis.

Max RSpd [grd/sec]; maximum work speed of a rotating axis.

Max InterpSpd; maximum interpolating speed of the axis.

Tilting arm; (figure 112) distance A between the TILTING axis rotating centre and the spindle nose
located on the TILTING axis.

280 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 12 Management of machine axes and working units

Figure 112

Setting; indicates it is a Setting Axis (box ticked).

Setting parked pos.; position the vertical machine axis should reach (e.g. Z, Z1, etc.) when
machining with the Setting Axis.

12.2 Resetting the machine axes

For a detailed description on how to reset the axes, see paragraph 22.2 “Resetting the machine
axes” on page 561.

12.3 Moving the machine axes

For a detailed description on how to move the axes, see paragraph 22.3 “Moving the machine
axes” on page 562.

12.4 Forced movement of the working units

A description of the procedures used to carry out forced movement of the machine working units is
given in paragraph 22.4 “Moving the operating section elements” on page 565

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

281
12 Management of machine axes and working units

282 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

USE/PROGRAMMING
13 Management of the
machining program

The following chapter contains the basic instructions to be followed to create, optimise, simulate,
process and save a machining program.

List of topics
• 13.1 “Programming phases”
• 13.2 “Editor application software document”
• 13.3 “Program functions”
• 13.4 “Program optimisation”
• 13.5 “Program simulation”
• 13.6 “Automatic program parameter setting”
• 13.7 “Programs and macro storage”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

285
13 Management of the machining program

13.1 Programming phases

Below, you will find the procedure to follow in order to create a machining program.

1. Create a new document (see paragraph “Creating the document”, page 285).

2. Structure the machining operations using the tools necessary for modifying the characteristics
of the design: rotate the geometries, create new sides etc. (see paragraph 13.3 “Program
functions”, page 299).
The machining operations can be designed in the following ways:
• By importing drawings created using general CAD systems, described in chapter 18
“Importing graphic/technological files”, to which the machining operations can be
associated.
• By using the design tools of the Editor application software, described in chapter 14
“Creating profiles”, to create the geometries to which machining operations can be
associated (see chapter 15 “Programming the machining operations”).
• By using the appropriate commands to directly program the different operations-cutting,
boring, etc. -, as described in chapter 15 “Programming the machining operations”.
To develop the design, the macro can also be used (see chapter 17 “Macros”).

3. Enter the “positioning instructions” to manage the movement of the objects on the (EPS) work
table described in chapter 15 “Programming the machining operations”.

4. Tool the work table using the WorkTableTooling application (see chapter 9 “Work table
tooling”).

5. Start the optimiser to check that the machining operations are carried out correctly (see
paragraph 13.4 “Program optimisation”, page 331).

6. Simulate machining of the piece (see paragraph “Program simulation”, page 331)

7. Save the document (see paragraph “Saving the document”, page 331).

8. Process the machining program to generate the file with ISO extension so that it can be
executed on the machine, (see chapter 21 “Running the programs”).

286 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

13.2 Editor application software document

Figure 113: example of a new document to be filled in.

The BPP format machining program, or Editor application document, is a file containing all the
information necessary for carrying out a machining operation, and is displayed in the body of the
application itself (see “Structure of the body of the application”, page 63).

When carrying out programming operations it is possible to use inches or millimetres as the
unit of measurement. For example, if “millimetres” has been defined as the unit of
measurement in the Setup, enter the value in the various fields followed by an asterisk plus
the unit (E.g. 500*inc.) to use “inches” as the unit of measurement. If “inches” has been
defined as the unit of measurement in the Setup, enter the value in the various fields
followed by an asterisk plus the unit (E.g. 500*mm.) to use “millimetres” as the unit of
measurement. To use inches as the unit of measurement, without considering the value in
the Setup, open dialogue box Piece variablesand tick check box Measure in inches.

List of topics
• Creating the document
• Dialogue box Piece variables
• Saving the document
• Saving the document in different formats
• Printing the document
• Use of the commands area
• Using the tools Normal cursor
• Using the tools Graphic output

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

287
13 Management of the machining program

• Updating the graphics area

• Deleting parts of the document
• Copying parts of the document
• Consulting the set data
• Managing the levels (layers)

See also
• 15.1 “Piece data definition”

Creating the document

To create a new document in the Editor application, select the menu Fileand the option New, or
click the button provided on the toolbar (see “Description of buttons”, page 76).

The dialogue box Piece variablesis displayed. For the description of the box, refer to paragraph
“Dialogue box Piece variables”.
Figure 114: dialogue box Piece variables

The window is only displayed if the Show piece data on openingcheck box has been ticked
in the Setup Editor Environmenttab.

Modifying piece dimensions

To modify the dimensions of the piece in the active document, click on the button (for a
description of the window, see “Dialogue box Piece variables” on page 374).

Modifying the dimensions of the piece using the commands area

To modify the dimensions of the reference piece without using the relevant fields in dialogue box
Piece variables, type the parameters of the piece (LPX, LPY or LPZ) directly in the command area
followed by a value or expression and by the UpdatePanel function (see figure 115).

288 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

It is advisable to insert the UpdatePanel at program start function between the programming rows,
in that this function has been created to calculated the dimensions of the piece using expressions,
instructions or macros that make use of external variables. Inserting this function between the
programming rows after a machining operation could create problems in the execution of the
program.
Figure 115

If A=300 Then
LPX=A
End If
If B=100 Then
LPY=B
End If
If C=10 Then
LPZ=C
End If
UpdatePanel

Opening the document

To open a BPP formal file in the Editor application, select the menu Fileand the option Open, or
click the button provided on the toolbar (see “Description of buttons”, page 76). Find the file
required in the Open dialogue box; double-click on the file to open it.

Saving the document

z To save a document that has never been previously saved, select menu File, option Saveor

Save as, or click on .

Select the BPP extension (ref. A figure 116), specify the name of the file in field B and save by
clicking on button C. The file is saved in the default directory ...\Editor\Programs; if you wish to
save the file in another directory, use field D to find it.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

289
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 116

B C
A

z To save an active document, creating a copy of it with a different name, select menu Fileand
option Save as. In field B enter the new name (figure 116).

z To overwrite the active document, click on the button.

Saving the document in different formats

BiesseWorks can save (export) documents in different file formats in order to be able to use them
in other applications.
z To save documents in DXF format (technologic and graphic files), select menuExport and
option To DXF file. During the export phase, the system automatically creates layers
associated with the geometries and machining operations, the keys of which cannot be
modified as they are embedded in the system (see table 7).
z To save documents in CID format (technologic and graphic files), select menuExport and
option To CID file.
z To save documents in CIX format (technologic and graphic files), select menuExport and
option To CIX file.
z To save the documents in WMF format (vectorial graphic file) that can be read by applications
such as Illustrator or FreeHand, select menu Export and option To WMF file.
Table 7

List of keys created by the system while saving documents in DXF format

Keys Description

PANEL LPX and LPY dimensions of the piece.

FACE1 Face 1 of the piece.

FACE2 Face 2 of the piece.

FACE3 Face 3 of the piece.

290 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

List of keys created by the system while saving documents in DXF format

Keys Description

FACE4 Face 4 of the piece.

FACE%ld Non-standard faces (%ld = progressive identification number of the non-standard

faces). The bores on the non-standard faces are represented by a circle and are given
the same name as the face on which they have been created.

VERTICA Vertical bore

L

SIDE A Horizontal bore on face 1 of the piece.

SIDE B Horizontal bore on face 2 of the piece.

SIDE C Horizontal bore on face 3 of the piece.

SIDE D Horizontal bore on face 4 of the piece.

SIDE E Horizontal bore on face 5 of the piece.

BLADE Blade cuts.

ROUTER Milling operation

Printing the document

Printing a document in the Editor application will only involve the text that is present in the
commands area. It is not possible to obtain a printout on paper of the geometry in the graphics
area.

To print the document, select the menuFile and the option Print, or click the button provided on the
toolbar (see “Description of buttons”, page 76).

Use of the commands area

When a machining operation program is created with the use of the appropriate machining
operation dialogue box, the programming rows (commands and parameters) are displayed in the
commands area.

To create a program using the commands area itself without going through the dialogue box, use
the commands and parameters shown in appendix B “List of commands and programming
parameters”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

291
13 Management of the machining program

View the hidden parameters

To show the hidden parameters in the required programming row, place the text cursor at the end
of the row, press the CTRL key and the SPACE BAR. To view the other parameters in succession,
use the SPACE BAR while keeping the CTRL key down.

View the parameters list

To show the list of parameters belonging to the required programming row, place the text cursor at
the end of the row, press the CTRL key followed by the SHIFT key and the SPACE BAR key. Press
the ESC key to close the list.

Inserting indents
To insert an indent in a programming row, display the toolbar by clicking on the Displaymenu, on
options Toolbarsand Edit; position the cursor on a text row and click on . To remove the indent,
click on .

Inserting comments
To enter a comment between programming rows, display the toolbar by clicking on theDisplay
menu, on options Toolbarsand Edit; position the cursor on a text row and click on . If you wish
to turn a machining operation into a comment text, select the operation and press the same button;
to restore the machining operation click on . This operation can also be carried out by entering
a single quote (‘) at the beginning of the row that is to become a comment.

Using the command Implode

In order to incorporate all the programming rows appertaining to the same geometry or same
machining operation in a single row, use option Implodein the context menu or the Editmenu.

292 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Using the command Explode

To hide the programming row on which the text cursor is positioned and display all the elements
making it up one after the other, use optionExplode in the context menu or menu Edit.

Using the tools Normal cursor

When using zoom tools, to restore the cursor to normal pointer functions, so as to select the
elements in the graphics area, click on or press the right mouse button.

Click on to restore the cursor to normal pointer functions and to select the elements in the
graphics area.

To select an element in the drawing, use the cursor and wait until the element changes colour,
press the left mouse button to activate it and then wait until it changes colour again.

If you wish to select a number of separate elements in the drawing, after activating the first
element press the CTRL key on the keyboard, position the cursor on the second element and
press the left mouse button.
Figure 117: how to select a drawing element

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

293
13 Management of the machining program

Using the tools Graphic output

The Graphic outputtools are used to change the drawing display in the graphics area of the Editor
application. To display these tools, select the Display, option Toolbars > Graphic output (for a
description of the buttons, see “Graphic outputBar” on page 79).

These tools can be enabled simultaneously; for example, if you wish to view the correction and the
machining thickness only, click on and on and disable the other buttons.

Updating the graphics area

To update the drawing using the modifications made to the text in the commands area, press .

Deleting parts of the document

z To delete the drawing from the graphics area, select it, display the context menu and select

option Cutor click on button .

z To delete a programming row or an item from the tree list, select it, press the CANC key on the

keyboard or option Cutof the context menu or button .

Copying parts of the document

To copy a drawing, select it, display the context menu and select the Copyoption; to paste it to
another document select the Pasteoption. The same procedure is followed for programming rows
or for items in the tree list.

Alternatively, select the part to copy, click on and on .

294 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Consulting the set data

After having created the geometries or machining operations, and in order to consult the dialogue
boxes with the data fields, carry out one of the following operations:
z Position the cursor on the programming row, display the context menu and select the option
Properties....
z Position the cursor on the machining operation item in the tree list, and double-click the left
mouse button.
z Position the cursor on the programming row and press SHIFT and F2.

Managing the levels (layers)

The Layer management dialogue box allows you to hide the geometric profiles shown in the
graphic area of the Editor application software, thanks to the management of the layers (levels)
imported or generated during the programming phase. To display it, click on button .

Description of the dialogue box Layer management

Figure 118

A B A B

1 2

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

295
13 Management of the machining program

A Names of the layers. The name of the level visualised in this list varies according to the type of
document:
1 String of the levels (ref. 1, figure 118) generated in the imported documents (DXF, CID,
etc.).
2 Name of the programming commands (ref. 2, figure 118) created directly in the document
of the Editor application software (see “Creating and modifying levels”).

B Bulb showing graphic area enabled/disabled:

• the yellow bulb enables the visualisation of the geometric profiles associated with the level
• the grey bulb disables the visualisation of the geometric profiles associated with the level

Creating and modifying levels

Levels are automatically created every time a type of machining operation or geometry is
generated in the document of the Editor application software. The name of the level created is the
same as that of the programming command indicated in the appropriate commands area. For
example, all the milling operations generated with the “ROUT” command are brought together in a
single level, called “ROUT” (see figure 119).
Figure 119

To create as many levels as there are machining operations belonging to a type (e.g. the ROUT
type), select each single machining operation (e.g. ref. A, figure 120), visualise the context menu
and select the Opens the layer modification window for the drawing option. Enter the new name of
the level in the appropriate data field (ref. B, figure 120) and save. In this case, the Layer
management dialogue box will show a new level associated with the selected machining operation
(ref. C, figure 120).

296 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Figure 120

Examples of how to hide the graphics

z To hide - in the graphics area - all the geometric profiles associated with a type of machining
operation (e.g. all the profiles created as ROUT), click on the yellow bulb next to the ROUT
command (see figure 121), or select the machining operation or geometry in the tree list or
commands area, then visualise the context menu and choose the Shows/Hides the layer of
the machining operation in the graphics option.
Figure 121

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

297
13 Management of the machining program

z To hide the geometric profiles associated with a layer of an imported file (e.g. the profile
associated with the TCHW1B2 string), click on the yellow bulb next to the TCHW1B2 string
(see figure 121).
Figure 122

298 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

13.3 Program functions

The program functions are special instructions that, when inserted between programming rows,
allow certain characteristics of the program itself to be modified. To display theFunctions toolbar,
click on .

The functions can be recalled through the relevant options under the Insert item in the context
menu or menu bar as well.
Figure 123: toolbar Functions

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N

A ISO code; adds the instruction “ISO” to the programming row, to enter customised ISO
instructions. For the detailed description, see paragraph “ISO instructions” on page 300.

B Move piece; adds the instruction “OFFSET” to the programming rows, to transfer the origin.
For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Translation of the origin” on page 301.

C Rotate geometry; adds the instruction “ROTATE” to the programming rows for the rotation of
the geometry. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Rotating the geometry” on
page 302.

D Geometry scale; adds the instruction “SCALE” to the programming rows, to change the size of
the geometry. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Reducing/increasing the
geometry dimensions” on page 303.

E Move geometry; adds the instruction “SHIFT” to the programming rows, to move the geometry.
For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Translation of the geometry” on page 304.

F Wait for piece positioning; adds the instruction “WAIT” to the programming rows, to suspend
the machining operation. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Suspension of the
machining operation for piece positioning” on page 309.

G Entering a subprogram; adds the “PUTPROG” instruction to the programming rows. For the
detailed description, refer to paragraph “Inserting sub-programs” on page 304.

H Piece cleaning; adds the “SWEEP” statement to the programming rows. For the description,
see paragraph “Cleaning the piece”.

I Sides from geometry; adds the instruction “WFG” to the programming rows, to transform the
drawing elements into the piece sides. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Sides
obtained from a geometric profile” on page 312.

J Side from geometry on side faces; adds the instruction “WFGL” to the programming rows, to
obtain a new side from a segment generated on one of the four standard side faces. For the
detailed description, refer to paragraph “Sides obtained from drawings on side faces” on page
317.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

299
13 Management of the machining program

K Side from geometry using section plan; adds the instruction “WFGPS” to the programming
rows, to obtain a new side from a segment generated on the zero face and one of the four
standard side faces. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Sides obtained from
drawings on zero face and on the side faces” on page 320.

L Circular side; adds the instruction “WFC” to the programming rows, to create a side with a
curved surface. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Curved surface sides” on
page 324.

M Straight side; adds the instruction “WFL” to the programming rows, to create a side with a flat
surface. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Flat surface sides” on page 326.

N Clamping; for the “Skipper” machine only. Adds the “GRIP” instruction to the programming
rows. For the detailed description, refer to paragraph “Moving the vices of the “Skipper”
machine” on page 330.

ISO instructions
To enter the ISO instructions, click on the corresponding button and fill in the (ISO) field, entering
the instruction between quotation marks. In the commands area, the string ISO ISO=”n” appears.
The following instructions are allowed:
• Comments= recognisable by the semicolon, e.g. “;milling”.
• Skip line = “JM “ or “JP”.
• End of program instructions = “%%”.
• Labels = recognisable by the colon, e.g. “:<label>”.

300 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Translation of the origin

The “OFFSET” instruction is used for temporary translation of the program origin, moving the piece
so as to define a new offset. This instruction does not cause any visible results in the software
interface, in that it creates a piece offset with the consequent offset of the associated machining
operations.

So that the translation can be seen both in the simulator and in the WorkTableTooling
application software, the “OFFSET” instruction must be entered at the program start,
before any other command. Otherwise, the display will be incorrect and only the
machining operation performed without the piece will be shown.

Click on the Move piece button (ref. B, figure 123) to enter this instruction.

Description of the data fields

X; X-axis co-ordinate (see figure below).

Y; Y-axis co-ordinate (see figure below).

Z; Z-axis co-ordinate (see figure below).

Figure 124

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

301
13 Management of the machining program

Rotating the geometry

The “ROTATE” instruction allows the drawings present in the graphics area to be rotated. To input
it, position the text cursor on the row that goes before the geometry or the machining operation
control and click on buttonRotate geometry (ref. C, figure 123).

Description of the data fields

X; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.

Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.

(AR); geometry angle of rotation.

All the geometries after the “ROTATE” instruction are rotated. To annul this operation, reinsert the
“ROTATE” instruction between the programming rows and set all the data fields at zero (see figure
below).
Figure 125

ROTATE X=0 Y=0 A=10

GEO ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO
ROTATE X=0 Y=0
CUT_X ID=”P1003” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=0 Y=500 Z=0 DP=0 L=800

302 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Reducing/increasing the geometry dimensions

The “SCALE” instruction uses a scaling factor to reduce or increase the size of the geometries
present in the graphics area. To input it, position the text cursor on the row that goes before the
geometry or the machining operation control and click on buttonGeometry scale (ref. D, figure
123). Enter the value required in theScale factor data field.

The scale factor only acts on the X-axis and on the Y-axis, and not on the Z-axis.

All the geometries after the “SCALE” instruction are modified. To annul this operation, reinsert the
“SCALE” instruction between the programming rows and set field at zero Scale factor(see figure
below).
Figure 126

SCALE FCT=70
GEO ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO
SCALE FCT=0
CUT_X ID=”P1003” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=0 Y=500 Z=0 DP=0 L=800

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

303
13 Management of the machining program

Translation of the geometry

The “SHIFT” instruction allows the drawings present in the graphics area to be moved. To input it,
position the text cursor on the row that goes before the geometry or the machining operation
control and click on buttonMove geometry (ref. E, figure 123).

Description of the data fields

X; X-axis co-ordinate;

Y; Y-axis co-ordinate.

All the geometries after the “SHIFT” instruction are moved. Each instruction inserted between
programming rows annuls the previous one, in other words, the value used by the system for the
movement is that of the last instruction issued. To annul this operation, insert the instruction and
set field X and field Y at zero (see figure below).
Figure 127

SHIFT DX=-30 DY=-50

GEO ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO
SHIFT DX=0 DY=0
CUT_X ID=”P1003” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=0 Y=500 Z=0 DP=0 L=800

Inserting sub-programs
Function only active from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.

The “PUTPROG” instruction is used to insert sub-programs in the open document, in order to save
it as a machining program containing several machining profiles.

Description of the data fields

(SPNAME)Name
Name of the program to be inserted in the active document, and which will be considered a “sub-
program” as it will be inside another program. The insertion can be made in two different ways:

304 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

• clicking on the drop down button and choosing a program from the list. The programs are only
visualised if they were previously stored in the List of sub-programs area of Editor application
software (see page 63). In this case, the data in the programs are copied into the document
itself, losing every reference with the file of origin.
• clicking on the search button to navigate in the system folders and choose the machining
program to be inserted in the document. In this case, it is inserted as a reference, keeping a
stored memory of the absolute path of the file of origin. This link must always be maintained
because if the file of origin were to be cancelled and/or renamed, the inserted program would not
be found, and would therefore no longer be visualised.

(SPLPX)Width
X dimension of the piece of the sub-program. Leaving “-1”, the dimension indicated in the sub-
program is automatically used. To modify it, click on the adjacent box and insert the new value.

(SPLPY)Height
Y dimension of the piece of the sub-program. Leaving “-1”, the dimension indicated in the sub-
program is automatically used. To modify it, click on the adjacent box and insert the new value.

(SPLPZ)Thickness
Thickness of the piece of the sub-program. Leaving “-1”, the dimension indicated in the inserted
program is automatically used. To modify it, click on the adjacent box and insert the new value.

(SPCRN)Corner
Corner of the piece of the sub-program (ref. A, figure 128). The corner indicated is the point of
reference in order to position the piece in the graphics area. Click on the drop down button and
choose the required corner.
Figure 128

(ROT)ROTATION
Angle of rotation of the piece of the sub-program, starting from the corner indicated in the
“(SPCRN)Corner” field (see figure 129).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

305
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 129
+X

+Y
270°
180° Reference Corner

0°
90°

(SYMY)Symmetry Y
Used to horizontally flip the piece (see figure 130) of the sub-program. In this case, the overturned
piece will mirror the previous one.
Figure 130: A= flip disabled; B= flip enabled

A B

(RFT)(RFT) Position reference

Used to choose the type of reference for positioning the piece of the sub-program, starting from
the corner defined in the “(SPCRN)Corner” field:

(1) Positioning on the origin

The positioning is made, starting from the chosen work table origin. Fill in the fields below.

(REF)Machine origin
Indicate which machine origin the piece of the sub-program should be positioned on.

(BCK)Rear loading
Used to position the piece of the sub-program, using the rear part of the front stops.

XX offset
Indicate the distance in X between the origin chosen in the “(REF)Machine origin” field and the
corner of the piece of the sub-program indicated in the “(SPCRN)Corner” field.

(Y)Y offset
Indicate the distance in Y between the origin chosen in the “(REF)Machine origin” field and the
corner of the piece of the sub-program indicated in the “(SPCRN)Corner” field.

(2) Positioning on piece corner

The positioning is made, starting from the corner of the piece of the active document (ref. B,
figure 131). Fill in the fields below.

306 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Figure 131

B
Y A
X

(REF)Piece corner
Indicate which corner of the piece of the active document (ref. B, figure 131) the piece of the
sub-program should be positioned on.

XX offset
Indicate the distance in X (figure 131) between the corner chosen in the “(REF)Machine origin”
field and the corner of the piece of the sub-program indicated in the “(SPCRN)Corner” field
(ref. A, figure 131).

(Y)Y offset
Indicate the distance in Y (figure 131) between the corner chosen in the “(REF)Machine origin”
field and the corner of the piece of the sub-program indicated in the “(SPCRN)Corner” field
(ref. A, figure 131).

(PAV)Consider as piece
Used to choose whether the profile of the piece of the sub-program inserted in the document
should be considered during the semi-automatic positioning of the objects on the table (see
paragraph 4.3 “Settings for semi-automatic positioning”, page 115).
• YES = during the positioning, consider both the geometry in the sub-program and the piece
profile (ref. A, figure 132). In this case, the suction cups will lock the piece containing the
geometry as well.
• NO = during the positioning, consider only the geometry in the sub-program, without the piece
profile (ref. B, figure 132). In this case, the suction cups will only lock the geometry.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

307
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 132
A B

(VARS)Variables
Used to visualise the dialogue box in order to modify the variables. The creation or elimination of
variables is not allowed.
The modifications made will not alter the file of origin - they will be stored in the active document
only. For the description of the Program variables - [%1] dialogue box fields, see paragraph 19.2
“Managing the variables” on page 495.

Cleaning the piece

Statement “SWEEP” allows for the chips to be sucked up with device A (Sweeping).
Figure 133:

Description
Used to enter a brief description. The text entered in this field is displayed in the tree list next to the
function icon.

308 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Cleaning geometry
Identification code of the geometry to clean the piece. The geometry to draw must be a line along
X.

Locking areas
Used to select the areas where the locking will be enabled.

Z pos.
Height B (figure 133) of the unloader, from the piece surface.

Usage mode
Allows you to choose the type of machining operation.
z Use geometry
In this case, the geometry set in field Cleaning geometry, will be used.
z Sweep start
In this case the statement will enabled the function between a machining and the next.To
enable this option, another statement must be entered with option Sweep end.
z Sweep end
In this case the statement will disabled the function between a machining and the next.To
disable this option, another statement must have been previously entered with option Sweep
start.

Sweeper speed
Loading device transfer speed (Sweeping).

Suspension of the machining operation for piece positioning

Suspensions are instructions that allow the programmed machining operation to be suspended
temporarily to allow the piece to be moved or turned on the work table. It is possible to enter an
unlimited number of instructions between the programming rows. Click on button Wait for piece
positioning (ref. F, figure 123) to input them.

For the “Skipper” machine, it is possible to use the following fields only:
Rotation field, to rotate the piece 180° in order to work side 4 as well;
Tilting field along the X-axis only, as any change of position of faces 1 and 3 would modify
the XY dimensions of the piece.

Description of the data fields

; Suspends the machining operation to move the piece to another working area (translate
piece). This command enables automatic unlocking of the piece from the work table.
Define the following data fields:
Origin Identif.; number of the origin to which the piece is to be moved. If the set origin is the
same as that defined in the machining program, the system only generates one suspension
without translation.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

309
13 Management of the machining program

Tilting; type of overturning.

• X; to tilt the piece by turning it around the X-axis. In this way, the positions of the following
faces are inverted: 0 and 5; 2 and 4.
Figure 134

• Y; to tilt the piece, rotating it around the Y-axis. In this way, the positions of the following
faces are inverted: 0 and 5; 1 and 3.
Figure 135

• XY to tilt the piece by turning it around both the axes X and Y.In this way, the positions of all
the faces are inverted.
Figure 136.

Rotation; rotation of the piece.

Figure 137
+X

90° 270°
+Y 0° 180°

; Suspends the machining operation momentarily. If the piece is to be unlocked from the work
table to turn it, click on the check box Unlock.

310 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Tilting; type of overturning.

• X; to tilt the piece by turning it around the X-axis (figure 134).
• Y; to tilt the piece by turning it around the Y-axis (figure 135).
• XY; to tilt the piece by turning it around both the axes X and Y (figure 136)..
Rotation; rotation of the piece. Select the type of rotation required.

Avoids suspension step; if the box Unlock is disabled, the field gets enabled
Disables (box ticked) or enables the suspension of the program between a machining and the
next. In this case, you can rotate or tilt the piece.
Define the following data fields:
• Rotation
• Tilting

Recommendations for use

When using the suspension with piece rotation, if dimension X is such that after having completed
the rotation, the dimension is increased (figure 138), it could happen that when the piece is rotated
and positioned on the work table, the locking devices do not function as they should due to the
missing mobile supports. To prevent this from happening, it is always advisable to program the
machining operation starting with a dimension X of the piece larger than dimension Y.
Figure 138: A = piece before rotating; B = piece after rotating.

+X
X = 500
+Y
X = 1000
Y=1000

A
Y=500

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

311
13 Management of the machining program

Sides obtained from a geometric profile

The “WFG” instruction might be associated with a geometric profile created on face zero of the
piece, in this case it generates, non-standard sides on the basis of the type of profile (see the
example on page 314), or it might be associated with a single geometry for the purpose of
generating a single non-standard side.

To input this instruction, position the cursor aft the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on button
Sides from geometry (ref. I, figure 123).

Description of the data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to give to the first non-standard face generated by a shape or to the
individual side generated by a segment. Enter a number greater than five. Leaving the default
settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.

Geom. identif.; used to select the identification code of the geometry (drawing ID) made on face
zero of the piece.

Reverse; box used to enable reversing of the sides created. This command is connected to the
direction of the drawing. If the drawing has an anticlockwise direction, ticking this box indicates
that the elements in the drawing are internal sides of the piece (ref. B , figure 142). If the drawing
has a clockwise direction, ticking this box indicates that the elements in the drawing are sides of
the piece, and therefore external (ref. A , figure 142).

Panel Def.;box used to enable two different types of machined piece visualisation in the simulator.
When it is ticked, the drawing created is displayed as a profile of the piece (ref. A figure 139).
When it is not ticked, both the drawing created and the piece to be machined are displayed (ref. B
, figure 139).
Figure 139

Virtual Face; used to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. not displayed in the simulator.

Vertical; declares that the side is perpendicular to the X,Y plane. To give an inclination to the side
created, disable the check box and set the field “Inclination”.

Z pos.; Z position to establish the position of the upper side of the vertical face (calculated starting
from the zero face of the piece).
• Entering a value of zero, the starting point of the upper side of the new face (between corner 1
and corner 4) remains on the zero face of the piece (ref. B, figure 140).
• Entering a value greater than zero, the starting point of the upper side of the new face (between
corner 1 and corner 4) is translated beneath the zero face of the piece (ref. C, figure 140).

312 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Height; height or thickness of the new side (ref. D, figure 140). Entering a value of zero, the height
of the face terminates at the base of the piece (ref. E, figure 140).
Figure 140: A = GEO of the new side created on the zero face; B = position from which to start (equal to
zero); C = position from which to start (greater than zero); D = height of the new side (greater than zero); E =
height of the new side (equal to zero).
X 1 4

A
Y

2 3

D
E

Inclination; inclination of the created side (see figure 141). This is enabled by disabling the field
“Vertical”.
Figure 141

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

313
13 Management of the machining program

Notes on use
The “WFG” instruction associated with the milling of a geometrical profile makes it possible to
create new faces that can be machined.
From the geometry reported in figure 143 a type A or type B (see figure 142) machining operation
can be obtained from the reference piece.
Figure 142

A B

To carry out the type A machining and generate the machinable faces C, the geometry must be
created assigning the anticlockwise direction to the first segment (see figure 142); in the case
where the created drawing has a clockwise direction, the check box Reversemust be enabled.

To carry out the type B machining and generate the machinable faces D, the geometry must be
created assigning the anticlockwise direction to the first segment (see figure 142); in the case
where the created drawing has an anticlockwise direction, the check box Reversemust be
enabled.
Figure 143: For example: milling a geometric profile designed to start from a start point P in an anticlockwise
direction.

6
7
13 12 8
14 11 9
10
P 10
11
6 9 12
7 8 13
14

GEO ID=”P1000” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO

ROUTG GID=”P1000” Z=0 DP=10 OPT=NO DIA=10 RV=YES
WFG SIDE=6 GID=”P1000” PDF=YES RV=YES

314 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Examples of how to create inclined or vertical faces

z Vertical or inclined faces - creating geometries outside the zero face of the piece.

Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

z Vertical or inclined faces with a height less/greater than the one set in the LPZ piece
parameter, and with a zero value in the Z pos. field.
• Vertical face:
Z pos. = 0 mm
Height = 20 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

• Inclined face:
Z pos. = 0 mm
Height = 20 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

315
13 Management of the machining program

z Vertical or inclined faces inside the piece (Z pos. field greater than zero), without setting the
height.
• Vertical face:
Z pos. = 10 mm
Height = 0 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

• Inclined face:
Z pos. = 10 mm
Height = 0 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software
Simulator graphic area

z Vertical or inclined faces inside the piece (Z pos. field greater than zero), and with the height
set (Height field greater than zero).
• Vertical face:
Z pos. = 10 mm
Height = 20 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

316 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

• Inclined face:
Z pos. = 10 mm
Height = 50 mm
Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

Sides obtained from drawings on side faces

The “WFGL” instruction associated with a drawing created on one of the four standard side faces,
makes it possible to generate on the basis of the angle of the designated segment, one non-
standard vertical side (ref. A, figure 144) or inclined (ref. B, figure 144).

To input this instruction, position the cursor aft the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on button
Side from geometry on side faces (ref. J, figure 123).

Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated

By default, the machinable part of the side obtained from a geometrical segment realised on the
side face is linked to the direction of the geometry, direction indicated by the arrow and it is always
on its left (ref. left, figure 144); to invert it, use the Reversefield.
Figure 144: A = non-standard sides perpendicular to the X, Y plane. B = non-standard sides inclined on the X,
Y plane.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

317
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 144 “: A = non-standard sides perpendicular to the X, Y plane. B = non-standard sides inclined on the
X, Y plane.”

Description of the data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non-standard side created. Enter a number
greater than five. Leaving the default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.

Z geometry; allows the selection of the geometry identification code (drawing ID ) created on one
of the four side faces (1, 2, 3, 4).

Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side on which to apply the machining
operation is opposite to the default side (see “Notes to identify the machinable part of the side
generated”).

Virtual Face; used to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. not displayed in the simulator.

Notes on use
Generate the geometry on the required side, for example on side 1, and call it up using the field Z
geometry. The face created is developed perpendicularly at the side on which the segment has
been drawn.

318 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Examples of how to create faces (WFGL)

z Vertical face, designed on side 2 of the piece, higher than the one set in the LPZ piece
parameter. In this case, the machining operations can end outside the piece.

Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

GEO ID=”geo02” SIDE=2 CRN=”1” DP=0

WFGL ID=6 GIZ=”geo02” RV=YES
ROUT ID=”P1010” SIDE=6 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO TNM=”010”

z Inclined face, designed on side 2 of the piece, higher than the one set in the LPZ piece
parameter. In this case, the machining operations can end outside the piece.

Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

GEO ID=”3” SIDE=2 CRN=”1” DP=0

WFGL ID=6 GIZ=”3” RV=YES
ROUT ID=”P1012” SIDE=6 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO TNM=”010”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

319
13 Management of the machining program

Sides obtained from drawings on zero face and on the side

faces
The “WFGPS” instruction associated with two geometries designed one on the zero face and the
other on one of the 4 standard side faces (1, 2, 3, 4) can be used to generate - on the basis of the
angle of the segment created on the side face - a non-standard trapezoidal or vertical/inclined side
(figure 145).
For the examples, see “Examples of how to create faces (WFGPS)” on page 321.

To input this instruction, position the cursor aft the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on button
Side from geometry using section plan (ref. K, figure 123).

Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated

By default, the machinable part of the generated side is linked to the direction of the geometry
made on face zero of the piece, direction indicated by the arrow, and it is always on its right (ref.
right, figure 145); to invert it, use the field Reverse.
Figure 145:A = non-standard inclined side; B = non-standard trapezoidal side.

X A B
1 4 1 4
Y

2 3 2 3

1 4 1 4
2 3 2 3

Y X
Z

Description of the data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non-standard side created. Enter a number
greater than five. Leaving the default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.

320 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Geom. identif.; used to select the identification code of the geometry (drawing ID) drawn on face
zero.

Z geometry; allows the selection of the geometry identification code (drawing ID ) created on one
of the four side faces (1, 2, 3, 4).

Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side on which to apply the machining
operation is opposite to the default side (see “Notes to identify the machinable part of the side
generated”).

Virtual Face; used to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. not displayed in the simulator.

Section plan; used to indicate that the generated side is at right angles to plane X/Y. In this case,
you must check that the two segments generated (i.e. the geometries designed on the zero face
and the side face) have at least one extreme (start or end) point in common (ref. A, figure 146).
Figure 146

Examples of how to create faces (WFGPS)

Vertical/inclined face created on side one of the piece
z Create two geometries, one on the zero face and the other on face 1 of the piece.
• Both geometries must be formed of a single segment, and may also be designed outside
the piece margins.
• The geometry on the zero face allows the length of the new side to be defined, so it can also
be longer than the piece itself.
• The geometry on face 1 is used to establish the inclination of the new side.
z Recall the geometry drawn on the zero face, in the “Geom. identif.” data field.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

321
13 Management of the machining program

z Recall the geometry drawn on face 1, in the “Z geometry” data field.

Graphic area of the Editor application software

Simulator graphic area

GEO ID=”facciaV0” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=5 “length of the new side”

START_POINT X=LPX/2 Y=0 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=LPX/2 YE=LPY+50
ENDPATH
GEO ID=”iclinazVert” SIDE=2 CRN=”1” DP=0 “inclination of the new side”
START_POINT X=100 Y=-20 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=150 YE=40
ENDPATH
WFGPS ID=6 GID=”facciaV0” GIZ=”iclinazVert” “new side 6”
ROUT ID=”P1027” SIDE=6 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO

Trapezoidal face
z Create two geometries, one on the zero face and the other on face 1 of the piece. The two
geometries need only have a point in common (start or end) if you want to enable the “Section
plan” command.
• Both geometries must be formed of a single segment, and may also be designed outside
the piece margins.
• The geometry on the zero face allows the length of the trapezium to be defined.
• The geometry on face 1 allows you to establish the inclination of the trapezium, and the
direction.
z Recall the geometry drawn on face zero, in the “Geom. identif.” data field.

322 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

z Recall the geometry drawn on face 1, in the “Z geometry” data field.

Graphic area of the Editor application software
Simulator graphic area

GEO ID=”geo02” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0 “length of the trapezium”

START_POINT X=LPX-200 Y=LPY Z=0
LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=LPY-200
ENDPATH
GEO ID=”inc02” SIDE=2 CRN=”1” DP=0 “inclination/direction of the trapezium”
START_POINT X=100 Y=0 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=200 YE=50
ENDPATH
WFGPS ID=7 GID=”geo02” GIZ=”inc02” “new side 7”
ROUT ID=”P1027_2” SIDE=7 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

323
13 Management of the machining program

Curved surface sides

The “WFC” instruction makes it possible to generate a non-standard side with a curved surface by
making an arc on side 0 of the piece.

Click on the Circular side button (ref. L, figure 123) to enter this instruction.

Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated

By default, the machinable part of the generated side is linked to the direction of the geometry of
the piece, direction indicated by the arrow and it is always on its right (ref. right, figure 147); to
invert it, use the Reversefield.
Figure 147

right right

right right

Description of the data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non-standard side created. Enter a number
greater than five. Leaving the default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.

Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side to apply the machining operation to
is not the default side, i.e. the one linked to the direction of the generated segment but the opposite
one (see “Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated”).

Vertical; declares that the side is perpendicular to the X,Y plane. To give an inclination to the side
created, disable the check box and set the fieldInclination (figure 151).

Aut.Height; used to automatically calculate the height of the side on the basis of the thickness of
the piece. Tick the box to activate this operation and disable the Height field.

Height; height or thickness of the side.

Ang. size; (figure 148) size of circular side. Enter the angle value a to get the endpoint P2 of the
arc of circle B.

324 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Figure 148: P = centre of circle taken from X/Y co-ordinates; P1 = arc start point; P2 = arc endpoint; a = angle.
B
X P2

Y a
P1
P

X pos.; (figure 149) co-ordinate in the direction of the X-axis for the P centre of the circle arch.

Y pos.; (figure 149) co-ordinate in the direction of the Y-axis for the P centre of the circle arch.
Z pos.; co-ordinate in the direction of the Z-axis for the centre of the circle arch. Define where the
start point is with respect to the Z-axis. The Z value must always be negative.

Inclination; inclination of the side created. This is enabled by disabling the field Vertical. The value
to be entered in this field is linked to the activation/deactivation of the check box System:
• Box enabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthogonal side to
the X, Y, plane is 0° (drawing B, figure 151).
• Box disabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthogonal side to
the X, Y, plane is 270° (drawing A, figure 151).

Start angle; (figure 149) value of angle to get start point P1 of the circle arc. To move the start
point P1, enter a negative value a- or positive a+.

Radius; (figure 149) radius r of the circle arc.

Figure 149: Circle arc with starting angle at zero degrees. P = centre of circle; r = radius of circle; P1 = start
point of circle arc.
X

r a-
Y
P1
P a+

Virtual Face; used to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. not displayed in the simulator.
System; this makes it possible to modify the system with which to calculate the circular faces. The
enabled box indicates that the reference corner to make the face is corner 1; the disabled box
indicates that the reference corner to make the face is corner 2. This field is linked to the setting
chosen in field Inclination.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

325
13 Management of the machining program

; Direction of rotation of the arc. Click on the button to set clockwise rotation of the arc. Enable
if you wish to create a curved side located on the inside of the piece.

; Direction of rotation of the arc. Click on the button to set anticlockwise rotation of the arc.
Enable if you wish to create a curved side located on the outside of the piece.

The start point for the curved side is very important in defining the direction to be followed
during the machining phase. If the curved side is to be an external side, to be machined
from the outside, (ref. A, figure 153), set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the arc
goes in an anticlockwise direction and click on . If the curved side is to be an internal
side of the piece, (ref. B, figure 153), to be machined from the inside, set the X and Y co-
ordinates in such a way that the arc goes in a clockwise direction and click on .

Notes on use
This instruction must be associated with a milling operation. The example given in figure 150
shows how to carry out curved milling on the corners of the piece, defining the cut parts external
sides of the piece.
Figure 150: example of how to cut the corners of the piece, defining the cut parts as circular sides.

6
6 9 7
8
9

7 8

ROUT SIDE=0 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10

WFC ID=6 X=200 Y=200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=-90 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
ROUT SIDE=0 CRN=”2” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
WFC ID=7 X=200 Y=LPY-200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=180 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
ROUT SIDE=0 CRN=”3” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
WFC ID=8 X=LPX-200 Y=LPY-200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=90 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
ROUT SIDE=0 CRN=”4” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
WFC ID=9 X=LPX-200 Y=200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=0 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW

Flat surface sides

The “WFL” instruction is used to generate a non-standard side with a flat surface by making a
linear segment on side 0 of the piece.

Click on the Straight side button (ref. M, figure 123) to enter this instruction.

326 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Description of the data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non-standard side created. numbered code to
be attributed to the non-standard side created. Enter a number greater than five. Leaving the
default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.

Reverse; used to indicate that the part of the side to apply the machining operation to is not the
one linked to the direction of the generated segment, i.e. the one obtained on the basis of the rule
indicated in fieldDirection but the opposite one.
For example: a segment that has a direction leftwards, by default, the part that can be machined is
the one to its right; when this field is enabled the part that can be machined is the one on its left.

Vertical; declares that the side is perpendicular to the X,Y plane. To give an inclination to the side
created, disable the check box and set the fieldInclination (figure 151).

Aut.Height; used to automatically calculate the height of the side on the basis of the thickness of
the piece. Tick the box to activate this operation and disable the Height field.

Height; height or thickness of the side.

Aut.Length; this automatically calculates the length of the side created on the basis of co-
ordinates X,Y of the initial point and the AR angle. Tick the box to activate this operation and
disable the Length field.

Length; length of the side.

X pos.; co-ordinate in the direction of the X-axis of the p start point (figure 152) of the angled
straight line (figure 152).

Y pos.; co-ordinate in the direction of the Y-axis of the p start point (figure 152) of the angled
straight line (figure 152).

Z pos.; co-ordinate in the direction of the Z-axis of the start point. Define where the start point is
with respect to the Z-axis. If the box has not been markedSystem the value of Z must always be
negative.

Inclination; inclination of the side created. This is enabled by disabling the field Vertical. The value
to be entered in this field is linked to the activation/deactivation of the check box System:
• Box enabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthogonal side to
the X, Y, plane is 0° (drawing B, figure 151).
• Box disabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthogonal side to
the X, Y, plane is 270° (drawing A, figure 151).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

327
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 151

Direction; angle of rotation ar (figure 152) of the straight line r (figure 152). The angle must be
calculated from zero degrees (0°) that is always found on the right of the initial point p of the
segment (figure 152). To rotate the segment anticlockwise, use a negative value (from 0 to -360);
to rotate the segment clockwise, use a positive value (from 0 to +360). The part of the face that
can be machined follows the direction of the segment and is always on its right (ref. right figure
152).

Figure 152

Virtual Face; used to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. not displayed in the simulator.
System; used to modify the system that calculates the inclination of the linear faces defined in
theInclination field. By default, the reference corner from where to start calculating the face
inclination is corner number two (disabled box). The enabled box is used to select the reference
corner in the Corner field.

Corner; see field System.

Notes on use
This instruction must be associated with a cutting or a milling operation. The start point for the
straight side is very important in defining the direction to be followed during the machining phase.

328 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

If the straight side is to be an external side (ref. A figure below), to be machined from the outside,
set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the angled straight line goes in an anticlockwise
direction. If the straight side is to be an internal side of the piece. (ref. B figure below), to be
machined from the inside, set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the angled straight line
goes in a clockwise direction.
Figure 153

Example of a non-standard face by setting the automatic calculation of the length and height:

WFL ID=6 X=200 Y= 0 Z=-LPZ AR=-270 H=LPZ AFL= YES AFH= YES VRT= YES VF= NO

Example of how to cut the edges of the piece by defining the cut parts as external sides:

6
6 7
9
8
9

7 8

CUT_G SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 TYP=cutYA L=0 ANG=-45 XE=0 YE=200
WFL ID=7 X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=135 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
CUT_G SIDE=0 CRN=”2” X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 TYP=cutYA L=0 ANG=-45 XE=0 YE=200

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

329
13 Management of the machining program

WFL ID=8 X=0 Y=400 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=45 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ

CUT_G SIDE=0 CRN=”3” X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 TYP=cutYA L=0 ANG=-45 XE=0 YE=200
WFL ID=9 X=400 Y=600 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=-45 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
CUT_G SIDE=0 CRN=”4” X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 TYP=cutYA L=0 ANG=-45 XE=0 YE=200
WFL ID=10 X=600 Y=200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=-135 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ

Moving the vices of the “Skipper” machine

The “GRIP” instruction is used to move the vices to block the piece being worked.

Click on the Clamping button (ref. N, figure 123) to enter this instruction.

Description of the data fields

Description: used to enter a brief description.
CRN; piece reference corner.
• crnN1= corner “1”.
• crnN4= corner “4”.

X position; X co-ordinate for positioning the clamp defined in the “GNM” field.

GNM; used to choose which vice to move.

330 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

13.4 Program optimisation

Program optimisation is carried out to check that machining operations are correct and to ensure
optimum running of the program, that is to say by putting the machine in a condition to perform in
the best possible way, carrying out all machining operations in the shortest possible time.

To optimise the program, click on . During program processing, if the optimiser encounters
errors (graphs and machining operations in red), the diagnosis environment is displayed in the
application body. The button is used to get access to and exit this environment.

Structure of the diagnosis environment

The diagnosis environment is made up of two tree lists, A and B, and an information area C (figure
154).
Figure 154

; opens the filter window, to filter the information to be displayed in the information area.

Operating section tree list

The operating section tree list shows the list of spindles of the boring unit and the Slots, which
is the same list as the one illustrated in the left tree list of the operating section tooling window
(MachineConfiguration application).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

331
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 155

C
D

A Boring unit chucks (SL) and their corresponding horizontal spindles (TH).

B Vertical spindles (T).

C Container that shows the following list:

list of the spindles eliminated using the filters;
list of spindles eliminated from the optimiser because they are not foreseen for the machining
operation.

D Slot (TP).

Magazine tree list

The magazine tree list shows the list of magazine tool holders, which is the same list as the one
illustrated in the left tree list of the magazine tooling window (MachineConfiguration application).

If aggregates have been inserted in the magazine tool-holders, exploding the node of the tool-
holder containing the aggregate, e.g. the node 3<A15, where 3 is the tool-holder number three and
A15 is the aggregate number fifteen (figure 156), the list of subspindles with fitted tool is displayed
(e.g. A15_AT1 <FORA1040>: subspindle number 1 of aggregate 15 containing the bit
FORA1040).

The information shown in the magazine tree list is connected to the spindle selection carried out on
the operating section tree list.

332 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Figure 156

D
C
B

A Tool magazines.

B Tool holders (e.g. 1 and 3) with a tool (e.g. PS2) or with an aggregate (e.g. A15).

C Subspindles (e.g. AT2) of the aggregate (e.g. A15) plus the tool fitted on the single
subspindles (e.g. FORA1040).

D Container that shows the following list:

list of the tool holders eliminated using the filters;
list of tool holders eliminated from the optimiser because the tool to be used is present in one
magazine tool holder.

Informative area
The information area shows the results of the machining program processing.
The results shown in this area are related to the checks carried out by the optimiser on every tool,
taking into account the tool holder where it is housed or the spindle where it is fitted. Moreover,
they show the reasons why a certain tool, fitted on a specific spindle or housed in a tool holder, is
or is not taken into account while machining.
Therefore, the display of this information is linked to the selection of the single spindle/subspindle
of the operating section elements (operating section tree list) or to the single tool holder or
subspindle of the aggregate present in the magazine (magazines tree list).

The information displayed can be divided in three different groups:

A Information in red (figure 157): list of the checks carried out by the optimiser that, due to
several inconsistencies between the programmed machining operations and the available
tools, have caused negative results (errors). To remedy the errors, click on this information
group and consult the possible solutions.

B Information in grey (figure 157): list of the reasons why certain checks are not carried out by
the optimiser.

C Information in green (figure 157): list of the checks carried out by the optimiser that have
caused positive results.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

333
13 Management of the machining program

Figure 157

Filter window
To open the filters window, click on .
z To hide the information on the spindles and take it to the container, check the Number of errors
box. Enter the number of errors to be eliminated in the contiguous box. The spindles whose
number of errors exceeds the number indicated in this field are eliminated and taken to the
container.
z To hide the information in grey (figure 157), check the Hide unperformed items box.

z To hide the information in green (figure 157), check the Hides checked items box.

z To consult only some results, use the list, checking the box corresponding to the failed checks
to be hidden. All the positions where the specific checks have caused errors are automatically
taken to the HIDE container.

334 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

How to consult the diagnosis environment

The program optimisation results, found in the information area of the diagnosis environment,
relate to the type of programmed machining operation, and therefore to the selection of the
machining operation on the commands area, in the machining operations tree list or directly in the
graphics area.

The operations to be carried out to check these results are the following:

1. position the cursor on the machining operation to be checked;

2. select the spindle (T) and/or the Slot (TP) on the operating section tree list;

3. select the tool-holder, only when a Slot (TP) has been previously selected.

The programming rows in red indicate that the optimisation has produced errors. In this case,
check the causes of that error by clicking on the different spindles and/or tool holders.

If the machining operations that caused positive results are selected (ref. A), the tree lists of the
optimiser environment show the spindle (ref. B) and the magazine tool holder (ref. C) where the
programmed tool is housed, highlighting them in grey (see figure 158).
In this case, the results in the information area are highlighted in green and grey, and the list of the
spindles and the tool holders eliminated is regrouped in the HIDE container (ref. D).

If the tool selected from the optimiser to carry out the optimised machining operation becomes
brown, it means that this is the only useful tool. In other words, there are no other tools in the
magazine and/or the Slots that may be used to carry out the specific machining operation.
Figure 158

B A

C A

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

335
13 Management of the machining program

13.5 Program simulation

The simulator makes it possible to check all the planned piece machining phases on screen. When
it is run from the WorkTableTooling application it also allows the work table to be displayed.
To display theSimulator window, click on .

Figure 159

Description of fields
Tool Class; displays the tool class.

Tool Type; displays the tool type ID.

Tool Code; displays the tool name.

Diameter ; displays the tool diameter.

Rotation speed [rpm]; displays the tool rotation speed.
Desc.speed [mm/min]; displays the tool descent speed.

Speed [mm/min]; displays the speed at which the tool machines the piece.
Optimisation; used to display the machining operation associated with the programmed
processing centre and to its reference origin (e.g. C2 on origin 1, or C3 on origin 3, etc.).

View control; allows the view to be selected according to the side of the piece. Click on the side
required.

Axis control; allows the reference axes to be moved from one corner to another. The fields
indicated in the boxTool position will change value according to the position of the axes.

336 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

Time[sec]; indicates the approximate duration of the machining operation.

Speed Ratio; simulation speed value, deriving from the use of button I and button J (figure 160).
X (mm): value for the tool X position according to the reference axes.
Y (mm); value for the tool Y position according to the reference axes.

Z (mm); value for the tool Z position according to the reference axes.
Layer; name of the section of the route travelled by the tool.

Description of buttons
Figure 160

A B C D E F G H I J

A Starts the simulation.

B Temporarily suspends the simulation.

C Ends the simulation.

D Goes back to the previous working cycle.

E Moves on to the next working cycle.

F Goes back to previous element.

G Goes to the next element.

H Repeats simulation from start.

I Carries out rapid simulation.

J Carries out slow simulation.

Figure 161

A B C D E F G

A Carries out simulation in steps, to check tool movements in detail.

B Shows or hides the tool during simulation.

C Displays simulation graphics.

D Displays the three-dimensional image of the wooden piece and the machining operation.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

337
13 Management of the machining program

E Shows the geometries drawn on the zero side.

F Shows the graphic of the reference piece and hides the non-standard faces.

G Shows all the piece, including the non-standard faces and the tool path; only when non-
standard faces have been created. Graphic colours:
Red= geometries on the sides created.
Blue= actual sides on which to work.
Orange= tool path.
Sky-blue= tool lead-in and lead-out into the piece.

Using decorations
By activating the context menu in the graphics are of the simulator it is possible to develop the
decorations bar by selecting the Decorationsoption.
Figure 162

z To move the image forward or back, use the mouse on the side wheels or move the cursor
while pressing CTRL, SHIFT and the left mouse button.
z To turn the image around its vertical axis, use the mouse on the bottom wheel.

z To turn the image around its centre point, click the left mouse button to select button B
indicated in figure 163. Position the cursor on the image, click the left mouse button and turn
the figure.
z To move the image, press CTRL and the left mouse button.

338 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 13 Management of the machining program

ButtonsDecorations
Figure 163

A enables the cursor in order to select elements in the drawing.

B enables the cursor in order to move the drawing manually.

C displays the last view of the drawing saved previously using button D.

D saves the current view of the drawing.

E shows the whole drawing.

F allows an object to be selected and brought closer.

G allows perspective or isometric view to be set.

13.6 Automatic program parameter setting

The parametrisation of the program involves the automatic updating of the programmed machining
operation with any variation in the dimensions of the piece. To do this it is necessary to use
variables and in certain cases VBScript instructions. For a detailed description, see chapter 19
“Variables and VBScript instructions”.

13.7 Programs and macro storage

It is recommended that you save the programs created and the macros periodically to one of the
drives, for example onto a floppy-disk, to store the data and make it available in the event of
damage to the originals.

For the backup procedures, see paragraph 11.3 “Backup/restore machining programs and
macros”, page 275.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

339
13 Management of the machining program

340 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

14 Creating profiles

The following chapter shows the procedures for creating drawings through the use of EGA tools,
that is to say through the use of arcs and lines that assembled in tracts generates a geometrical
profile with which to associate technological data.

List of topics
• 14.1 “Drawing procedures”
• 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with EGA tools”
• 14.3 “Tools used to create the drawing”
• 14.4 “Duplicating the selected geometry”
• 14.5 “Creating a text”
• 14.6 “Breaking up a GEO/ROUT”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

341
14 Creating profiles

14.1 Drawing procedures

1. Click on , to display the toolbar for the carrying out of milling operations and geometries
and to develop the toolbar for creation of profiles..

2. Click on , to insert the command GEO in the programming row with the basic start
geometry data, or click on to insert the command ROUT in the programming row with the
start geometry data and the technological data
To draw a text to be associated with technological data, click on button (see page 367).

Button is used to define a “generic” geometric profile to be associated with a number of

machining operations, i.e. to be called up from within the command ROUTG (for a description
of the command ROUTG, see paragraph 15.2 “Milling programming” on page 390).
Button is used to define a genuine machining operation, with all the technological data
that it requires, including the “integrated” geometric profile, which cannot be used in other
machining operations (for a description of the ROUT command, see paragraph 15.2 “Milling
programming” on page 390).

3. Position the cursor in the commands area on the ENDPATH string indicating the end of the
machining operation. This string appears automatically each time tools are used to create the
geometry (GEO, ROUT, ROUTG) and it is used to determine the end of the drawing. To insert
additional end of machining operation strings, click on .

4. Click on the button to insert the OFFGEO command in the programming line, so the
selected geometries can be duplicated (see page 364).

5. Select the button to define the start point of the drawing. Proceed to create the drawing by
assembling lines and arcs (see page 350). To create elements with a closed profile, click on
the button for the relative figures.
The strings relating to geometries must always be positioned between the GEO, or ROUT,
string and the ENDPATH string indicating end of the machining operation/geometry.

6. Save the document created (see paragraph “Saving the document” on page 289).

When creating geometries to represent the boring operations using the GEO
command and then the ROUTG or ROUT command, it is necessary to observe the
following rules so that the geometries are valid::
• the geometric parameter strings (lines, arcs, etc.) must be present between the GEO or
ROUT command and the ENDPATH end of machining operation command;
• the geometry cannot be created using only the START_POINT command;
• between the commands GEO or ROUT and the command ENDPATH for the end of the
machining operation, there must be no insertion of geometries created via the insertion of
a number of initial points START_POINT.

342 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

How to insert the start point (START_POINT)

To enter the start point of the drawing, position the text cursor on the ENDPATH programming row
and click on .

Description of fields:

Start X; X axis co-ordinate of the start point of the drawing.

Start Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the start point of the drawing.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

343
14 Creating profiles

14.2 Definition of parameters used to draw

with EGA tools
The button displays the dialogue box Geometry definition used to set the basic parameters of
the geometric profile. This button allows the GEO command including the drawing created with the
aid of the EGA buttons to be input among the programming rows (see “Tools used to create the
drawing” on page 350).
Figure 164: dialogue box Geometry definition

Field list and description

CRN; used to set the piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; used to select the side of the piece on which to carry out the geometry. Select the side
required from the figure above, or type the side number in the field.

Description; description of the type of geometry, to distinguish it from the others. The text entered
in this field appears in the tree list near the geometry icon.

Geom. identif.; used to enter a code (name) to identify the geometry within the programming
rows. The ID is used to call up - into the machining operation windows - the geometry to be
machined.

Depth; used to define the distance DP between the top side of the piece (ref. A) and the top side
of the island (ref. B), if the geometry is used as an island

(COW)Generate opp. mach.; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 411.

344 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Figure 165

Reverse; reverses the direction of the programmed geometrical profile; the initial point of the
geometry thus becomes the final point.

Correction; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one of the following
items:
Central, positions the tool axis at the centre of the trajectory (ref. A figure 209).
Right, positions the tool axis to the right of the trajectory (ref. B figure 209) or positions the
trajectory to the right of the tool (ref. C figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.
Left, positions the tool axis to the left of the trajectory (ref. C figure 209), or positions the
trajectory to the left of the tool (ref. B figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.

Internal; positions the tool axis inside the closed profile (ref. A figure 166). Field only active
from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.

External; positions the tool axis outside the closed profile (ref. B figure 166). Field only active
from BiesseWorks version 3.4 onwards.
Figure 166
B

; used to select repeat operations along the X-axis;

Set the following fields:
X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DX figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeat operations along the Y-axis;

Set the following fields:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

345
14 Creating profiles

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DY figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeats along the step X-Y.

Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements.

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements.

No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeats along the angled straight line.

Set the following fields:

Angle [°]; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out (ref. ARP figure
167).

L. step; distance between the geometric elements (ref. LRP figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.
Figure 167

; used to select repeats on the circumference.

Set the following fields:

Start angle; value of the angle A from which to start when carrying out the repeats (see
examples shown in figure 170 and in figure 171). This is activated by removing the tick from
the data field First Item.

Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) that must be left between one repeat and the
next one.

Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see examples
shown in figure 170 and in figure 171). This is activated by removing the tick from the data field
First Item.

346 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

(XRC)X; X position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.

(YRC)Y; Y position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.

Radial; enables radial repeats (see the examples in figure 169 and figure 171).
First Item; enables the first element ER as the initial element in the repeat (focal repeats)
eliminating the field Start angle and the field Radius (see the examples in figure 168 and figure
169). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.

No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

Figure 168: example of a NON RADIAL repeat setting the basic geometry as the first element in the repeat
(ER), the centre of the circumference value X-Y and the angular step DA.

In this case the start point B of the geometry GEO is

considered to be the first element (command ER) from
which to start when carrying out the repeat. According to the
data defined, the geometries will all rotate around the
circumference in the same direction, starting from the first
one.

GEO ID=”2222” CRN=”1” DP=10 RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 DA=45 ER=YES RDL=NO
START_POINT X=LPX/4 Y=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2-50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4+150 YE=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2+50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

347
14 Creating profiles

Figure 169: example of a RADIAL repeat setting the basic geometry as the first element in the repeat (ER),
the centre of the circumference value X-Y and the angular step DA.

In this case the start point B of the geometry GEO is

considered to be the first element (command ER) from
which to start when carrying out the repeat. According to the
data defined, the geometries will all rotate around the radii of
the circumference, starting from the first one

GEO ID=”2222” CRN=”1” RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 DA=45 ER=YES RDL=YES
START_POINT X=LPX/4 Y=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2-50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4+150 YE=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2+50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH

Figure 170: example of a NON RADIAL repeat setting the centre of the circumference value X-Y, the angular
step DA, the angle A and the radius R.

In this case the start point of the geometry GEO coincides

with the values XRC and YRC of the centre of the
circumference. According to the data defined, the
geometries will all rotate around the circumference in the
same direction.

GEO ID=”2222” CRN=”1” RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 R=210 A=25 DA=45 RDL=NO
START_POINT X=LPX/4 Y=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2-50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4+150 YE=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2+50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH

348 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Figure 171: example of a RADIAL repeat setting the centre of the circumference value X-Y, the angular step
DA, the angle A and the radius R.

In this case the start point of the geometry GEO coincides

with the values XRC and YRC of the centre of the
circumference. According to the data defined, the
geometries will all rotate around the radii of the
circumference.

GEO ID=”2222”CRN=”1” RTY=rpCIR XRC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 R=130 A=30 DA=45 ER=NO RDL=YES NRP=8
START_POINT X=LPX/4 Y=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2-50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4+150 YE=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2+50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

349
14 Creating profiles

14.3 Tools used to create the drawing

The toolbars to create designs can be activated either through the Insert menu, option Millings or
through the specific EGA buttons.

To create the drawing there are three types of EGA tool:

z “Line” type tools

z “Arc” type tools

z “Figure” type tools

While creating the geometries, it is possible to enter the VBScript instructions (conditional
instructions “If…Then”, etc.). Example of a GEO where an instruction is entered between two
geometric elements:
GEO ID=”111” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0
START_POINT X=366.6139635 Y=86.0192323 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=600.574261 YE=86.0192323
ARC_EPCE XE=600.574261 YE=367.8152783 XC=600.574261 YC=226.9172553 DIR=dirCW
LINE_EP XE=132.653666 YE=367.8152783
LINE_EP XE=132.653666 YE=86.0192323
If LPX < 1000 Then
LINE_EP XE=366.6139635 YE=86.0192323
End If
ENDPATH

For the description of these instructions, see paragraph 19.4 “Predefined VBScript instructions” on
page 501.

350 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

“Line” type tools

The following are the commands available to create a “line” type geometric element.

Activation of these tools depends on their compatibility with the previous operation.

To display the line creation toolbar, click on .

Figure 172

A Starting point; enters the drawing start point (see “How to insert the start point
(START_POINT)”, page 343).
B Line given end point; creates a line using the co-ordinates of a known endpoint as reference
value.
C Line given length and angle; creates a line using a length and the angle with respect to the
positive direction of the X-axis as reference values.
D Line given angle and final X; creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the endpoint and the
angle with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis as reference values.
E Line given angle and final Y; creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the endpoint and the
angle with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis as reference values.
F Chamfer; creates a chamfer. Activated when the cursor is positioned on the line before the
angle to be chamfered.
G Line given length and final X; creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the known endpoint and
a length as reference values.
H Line given length and final Y; creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the known endpoint and
a length as reference values.
I Line given length and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the length and the
tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
J Line given end point angle and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the endpoint
co-ordinates, the angle of the line with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis, and the
tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
K Line given end point and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the endpoint co-
ordinates and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
L Incremental line given end point; creates a line, defining the endpoint co-ordinates as
increases to the endpoint co-ordinates of the preceding element.

The following is a list of the data fields that appear in the dialogue boxes during use of the “line”
type tools.

Alpha; inclination of the line.

Distance; length of the chamfer.
Increase in X; length along the X-axis of the segment to be drawn (ref. B figure 173). The value
set in this field must be added to the value of the X co-ordinate of the endpoint for the preceding
element (ref. A figure 173). The result of this sum corresponds to the co-ordinate X of the final
point of the segment B to be drawn.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

351
14 Creating profiles

Increase in Y; length along the Y-axis of the segment to be drawn (ref. B figure 173). The value
set in this field must be added to the value of the Y co-ordinate of the endpoint for the preceding
element (ref. A figure 173). The result of this sum corresponds to the co-ordinate Y of the final
point of the segment B to be drawn.
Figure 173

GEO ID=”P1001” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10

START_POINT X=0 Y=100
LINE_EP X=100 Y=100 (ref. A)
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=100 (ref. B)
ENDPATH

Length; length of the geometric element.

Repositioning; used to indicate whether the segment of the profile generated must be considered
as a tool positioning trajectory. If this is set at NO, the segment is considered as being part of the
machining; if it is set at YES, the segment is considered as the positioning trajectory.

Solution; solutions that can be applied to the line, on the basis of the data set previously. Select
one of the available options.

Sharp corner; set sharp corner. Used to define that the point of intersection between the line and
the next element must be machined leaving a sharp corner. To enable this function, select item
sc1; to disable it select item scOFF.

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Start X; X-axis co-ordinate of the start point of the element.
End X; X-axis co-ordinate of the endpoint of the element.

Start Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the start point of the element.

End Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the endpoint of the element.
Start Z; Z-axis co-ordinate to establish the depth of the initial point of the profile element.
The figure 174 demonstrates the result obtained by setting the initial depth data in segment B of
the profile: the tool descends to the depth (DP=10) set in the milling, follows the linear trajectory in
X equal to the length defined in the segment A, descends another 15mm (ZS=15) and follows the
linear trajectory in X equal to the length defined in segment B.

352 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Figure 174

ROUT ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10

START_POINT X=100 Y=100 Z=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0 ZS=15 ZE=0

End Z; Z axis co-ordinate to establish the depth of the final point of the profile element. The value
indicated in this field is distributed gradually over the whole length of the profile element.
The figure 175 demonstrates the result obtained by setting the final depth data in the profile
segment B: the tool descends to the depth (DP=5) set in the milling, follows a linear trajectory in X
equal to the length defined in the segment A, and performs a gradual decent Z (ZE=10) equal to
the length defined in segment B.
Figure 175

ROUT ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=10

START_POINT X=100 Y=100 Z=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0 ZS=0 ZE=10

“Arc” type tools

The following are the commands available to create an “arc” type geometric element.

Activation of these tools depends on their compatibility with the previous operation.

To display the arc creation toolbar, click on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

353
14 Creating profiles

Figure 176

A Curve given end point and centre; creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the centre of the
arc and the co-ordinates of a known endpoint as reference values.
B Curve given end point and tangency to previous item; creates an arc using the co-ordinates of
the endpoint of the arc and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
C Connector A; creates a connection radius between the selected element and the preceding
one (of type A).
D Connector B; creates a connection radius that can be used to machine door and window
frames (of type B).
E Curve given end point and radius; creates an arc using the radius of the arc and the co-
ordinates of the endpoint of the arc as reference values.
F Curve given angle and centre; creates an arc using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc
and the angle of the arc with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis as reference values.
G Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point determined); creates an
arc with a known start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc and the tangency to
the following element as reference values.
H Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates an arc with an unknown start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc and
the tangency of the arc to the following element as reference values.
I Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point determined); creates an
arc with a known start point, using the radius of the arc and the tangency of the arc to the
following element as reference values.
J Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined); creates
an arc with an unknown start point, using the radius of the arc and the tangency of the arc to
the following element as reference values.
K Curve given end point radius and tangency to previous item; creates an arc using the endpoint
of the arc, the radius of the arc and the tangency of the arc to the preceding element as
reference values.
L Curve given angle centre radius and tangency to previous item; creates an arc using the
radius and the co-ordinates of the centre of the arc, the tangency of the arc to the preceding
element, and the angle of the arc with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis as
reference values.
M Curve using three points; creates an arc passing through three points.
N Incremental curve given angle and centre point; creates an arc using the centre of the arc,
which is obtained by incrementing the co-ordinates of the endpoint of the preceding element,
and the angle of the arc with respect to the positive direction of the X-axis as reference values.
O Incremental curve given radius and end point; creates an arc using the radius of the arc and
the endpoint, which is obtained by incrementing the co-ordinates of the endpoint for the
preceding element, as reference values.

The following is a list of the data fields that appear in the dialogue boxes during use of the “arc”
type instruments.

Alpha; angular length of the arc.

354 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Centre X incr.; X-axis value of the centre of the arc to be added to the X co-ordinate for the
endpoint of the preceding element.

End X incr.; X-axis value of the endpoint of the arc to be added to the X co-ordinate for the
endpoint of the preceding element.

Centre Y incr.; Y-axis value of the centre of the arc to be added to the Y co-ordinate for the
endpoint of the preceding element.

End Y incr.; Y-axis value of the endpoint of the arc to be added to the Y co-ordinate for the
endpoint of the preceding element.

Radius; arc radius value.

Solution; solutions that can be applied to the arc, on the basis of the data set previously. Select
one of the available options.

Sharp corner; set sharp corner. Select one of the possible options to indicate that the point of
intersection between the arc and the next element must be machined leaving a sharp corner.

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance value.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed value.

X2; X-axis co-ordinate of the second point in the arc.

Centre X; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the arc.

End X; X-axis co-ordinate of the endpoint of the arc.

Y2; Y-axis co-ordinate of the second point in the arc.
Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the arc.

End Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the endpoint of the arc.

Start Z; value of the increase in machining depth in the initial part of the element.
End Z; value of the increase in machining depth in the final part of the element.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

355
14 Creating profiles

“Figure” type tools

Each button in the “figure” type geometric elements has a specific use.

To display the figure creation toolbar, click on .

Figure 177

A Ellipse; creates an ellipse. See Description of fields in the dialogue boxEllipse.

B Oval; creates an oval. See Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval.
C Circle given centre and radius; creates a circle using the centre and the radius as reference
values. See Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given centre and radius.
D Circle given three points; creates a circle passing through three points. See Description of
fields in the dialogue box Circle given three points.
E Rectangle; creates a rectangle with or without chamfers/radiusing. See Description of fields in
the dialogue box Rectangle.
F Polygon; creates a polygon with or without chamfers/radiusing. See Description of fields in the
dialogue box Polygon.
G Star; creates a star-shaped drawing with or without chamfers/radiusing. See Description of
fields in the dialogue box Star.

Description of fields in the dialogue boxEllipse

Centre X; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the ellipse.

Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the ellipse.

Axis 1; value for the larger semi-axis (ref. A1) of the ellipse.
X

A1
Y

Axis 2; value for the ellipse smaller semi-axis (ref. A2).

X

A2
Y

356 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Alpha; value for the angle of rotation of the ellipse (ref. A) with respect to the centre of the ellipse
itself.
X

Y
A

Start alpha; value for the ellipse start angle, if an elliptical arc is to be created. For example, by
setting a value of 180 in this field and a value of 0 in the next one you will obtain the semi-arc
shown in the figure below.
X

End alpha; value for the ellipse end angle, if an elliptical arc is to be created. For example, by
setting a value of 180 in this field and a value of 0 in the previous one you will obtain the semi-arc
shown in the figure below.
X

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance value.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed value.
Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Use; definition of the way in which the geometry is broken up into segments to allow proper
machining.

No. Items used; type of geometry segmentation. When this is set to ON, type the number of lines
or arcs for segmentation of the geometry into theNo. Items field. When it is set to OFF, type the
maximum length of the lines or the arcs into the No. Items field.

No. Items; see previous field.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval

X1; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the large circle in the oval (see figure 178).
Y1; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the large circle in the oval (see figure 178).
Radius 1; radius of the large circle in the oval (see figure 178).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

357
14 Creating profiles

X2; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the small circle in the oval (see figure 178).

Y2; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the small circle in the oval (see figure 178).
Radius 2; radius of the small circle in the oval (see figure 178).
Start alpha; angle of the oval.

Conn. radius; radius of the two arcs that unite the two circles in the oval (see figure 178).
Figure 178
X

X1, Y1
R1

X2, Y2

LRK
R2

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given centre and radius
Centre X; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the circle.

Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the circle.

Radius; circle radius value.
Start alpha; angle of the circle start point.

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance value.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed value.
Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given three points

X1; X-axis co-ordinate of the first point in the circle (see figure 179).

358 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Y1; Y-axis co-ordinate of the first point in the circle (see figure 179).

X2; X-axis co-ordinate of the second point in the circle (see figure 179).
Y2; Y-axis co-ordinate of the second point in the circle (see figure 179).
X3; X-axis co-ordinate of the third point in the circle (see figure 179).

Y3; Y-axis co-ordinate of the third point in the circle (see figure 179).
Figure 179
X X1, Y1

Y
X3, Y3 X2, Y2

Start alpha; angle of the circle start point.

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.
Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Rectangle

Use; reference point to determine the co-ordinates of the start point of the rectangle. Select
whether the system should consider the corner of the rectangle as the reference point, option
Corner, or the centre of the rectangle, option Centre.

Corner; reference corner used in the calculation of the co-ordinates of the start point of the
rectangle. Must only be used in the case where option Corner has been defined in field Use.

Centre X; X-axis co-ordinate for the centre of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case
where option Centre has been defined in field Use.

Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case
where option Centre has been defined in field Use.

Corner X; X-axis co-ordinate of the corner of the rectangle defined in field Corner used for
obtaining the start point of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case where option
Corner has been defined in field Use.

Corner Y; X-axis co-ordinate of the corner of the rectangle defined in field Corner used for
obtaining the start point of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case where option
Corner has been defined in field Use.

Length; dimensions of the rectangle along the X-axis.

Height; dimensions of the rectangle along the Y-axis.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

359
14 Creating profiles

Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the rectangle. Select one of the following
options:
None; to carry out no chamfering.
Straight; to carry out straight chamfering.
Round; to carry out rounded chamfering.

Chamfer distance; chamfer dimension.

Starting side; side of the rectangle from which to start when carrying out the machining operation
(see figure 180).
Figure 180
1

4 2

Starting distance; value for the start point of the side of the rectangle set above from which to
start the machining operation. If the centre of the side is to be selected, type the word HALF.

Alpha; angle of rotation of the rectangle (ref. A figure 181) with respect to the centre of the
rectangle itself.
Figure 181

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the rectangle. Select one of the possible options to indicate
that the rectangle must be machined leaving sharp corners.

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Polygon

Centre X; ; X-axis co-ordinate for the centre of the polygon.
Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the polygon.

Radius; value of the radius of the imaginary circle within which the polygon is formed.
No. sides; number of sides in the polygon.

360 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the polygon. Select one of the following
options:
None; to carry out no chamfering.
Straight; to carry out straight chamfering.
Round; to carry out rounded chamfering.

Chamfer distance; chamfer dimension.

Starting side; side of the polygon from which to start when carrying out the machining operation.
Starting distance; value for the start point of the side of the polygon set above from which to start
the machining operation. If the centre of the side is to be selected, type the word HALF.

Alpha; angle of rotation of the polygon (ref. A figure 181) with respect to the centre of the polygon
itself.

Work. Speed; tool speed of forward movement.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the polygon. Select one of the possible options to indicate that
the polygon must be machined leaving sharp corners.

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Description of fields in the dialogue box Star

Centre X; X-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the star.

Centre Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the centre of the star.

Ext. radius; radius of the circle outside the star (ref. A figure 182).
Int. radius; radius of the circle inside the star (ref. B figure 182).
Figure 182

Y
A
B

No. points; number of bits in the star.

Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the star. Select one of the following options:
None; to carry out no chamfering.
Straight; to carry out straight chamfering.
Round; to carry out rounded chamfering.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

361
14 Creating profiles

Chamfer distance; length of the chamfer.

Starting side; side of the star from which to start when carrying out the machining operation.
Starting distance; value for the start point of the side of the star set above from which to start the
machining operation. If the centre of the side is to be selected, type the word HALF.

Alpha; angle of rotation of the star (ref. A figure 183) with respect to the centre of the star itself.
Figure 183

Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.

Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the star. Select one of the possible options to indicate that the
star must be machined leaving sharp corners.

Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.

Example
Figure 184: example of how to create a drawing using the Lines and Arcs commands and taking corner “1” of
the piece as a reference point (ref. 1).

GEO ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO

362 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

START_POINT X=120 Y=264.2061763 (ref. A)

LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref. E)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=191.4352226 XC=584 YC=264.2061763 DIR=dirCCW (ref. F)
ARC_EPCE XE=584 YE=168.2038705 XC=607.9429514 YC=168.2038705 DIR=dirCW (ref. G)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

363
14 Creating profiles

14.4 Duplicating the selected geometry

The Geometry offset dialogue box lets you duplicate one or more geometries selected from the
graphics area, by inserting the “OFFGEO” command in the programming rows.
To display it, click on button .

Figure 185

The copies can be made on a single geometric part A, on an open geometry B, or on a closed
profile C (figure 186) and positioned at a certain distance from the original according to the
arithmetic symbol (+ or -) and the value defined in the “OFS Offset for compensation”field.
Figure 186: A = geometric part of a closed profile; B = open geometry; C= closed profile.

B + + -
-
A
C

+ -

Description of the data fields

Description; used to rename the “OFFGEO” instruction, to distinguish it from the others. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list near the instruction icon.

ID Generated geometry; for the description, see the “Geom. identif.” field on page 344.

GID Reference geometry; identification code of the geometry with which the instruction is to be
associated.

364 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

OFS Offset for compensation; distance from the geometry to be copied, as defined in the “GID
Reference geometry”field. The position of the copy is defined by the arithmetic symbol (see figure
186):
• plus (+); the copy is produced to the left of the movement direction of the selected geometry.
• minus (-); the copy is produced to the right of the movement direction of the selected geometry.

SHC Sharp corners; in the copy of the selected geometry, the sharp corners are rounded (see
figure 187):
• Yes; the sharp corners are not rounded (ref. A, figure 187).
• No; the sharp corners are rounded (ref. B, figure 187).
Figure 187
A
B

OSL Selection type; used to choose which parts of the selected geometry are to be copied:
z Only selected; only the selected geometry part is copied (ref. A, figure 188).

z Tangential profile; the tangential parts following on from the selected geometry are also copied
(ref. B, figure 188).
Figure 188

B
A

LTP Connect to the previous one; used to join the copy of a geometric unit with the preceding
one. In that case, the Name inserted in the data field “ID Generated geometry” of the control
“OFFGEO” of the two copied units is the same. To separate them, modify the Name of one of the
copies, by acting on data field “ID Generated geometry” of the control “OFFGEO”.
z Yes; the copies are joined (ref. A, figure 189).

z No; the copies are not joined (ref.B, figure 189).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

365
14 Creating profiles

Figure 189: A= copies joined; B= copies separated.

B
A

RV Reverse; for the description, see the “Reverse” data field on page 345.
CRT Type of compensation; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one
of the following items:
z Left/Right; entering a positive value in the data field “OFS Offset for compensation”, the
operation is the same as shown in the description of the data field Left (page 395).
; entering a negative value in the data field “OFS Offset for compensation”, the operation is the
same as shown in the description of the data field Right (page 395).
z From the geometry; positions the tool axis using the settings defined in the geometry (see the
“Correction” field).
z Internal/External; entering a positive value in the data field “OFS Offset for compensation”,
positions the axis of the tool at the outside of the closed profile (ref. B figure 166).
; entering a negative value in the data field “OFS Offset for compensation”, positions the axis
of the tool at the inside of the closed profile (ref. B figure 166).

366 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

14.5 Creating a text

With BiesseWorks it is possible to create a text-shaped profile (see chapter 15 “Programming the
machining operations”) to which the milling operation is associated.
To display the special dialogue box in which to define the text parameters, click on and then
on .

Figure 190: dialogue box Text

Field list and description

CRN; used to set the piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; used to select the side of the piece where the text is to be etched. Select the side required
from the figure above, or type the side number in the field.

Geom. identif.; used to enter a code (name) to identify the geometry within the programming
rows. The ID is used to call up the geometry to be machined into the special milling windows.

Font name; used to select the type of character required. You are advised to use only the “True
Type” font.

Height; used to define the height of the word.

Extension; used to define the extension of the word in length.

Bold; used to set bold characters, to make the word more evident.
Italics; used to change the word to italics.
Underlined; used to underline the word.

Barred; used to mark the word with a bar.

Text; used to insert the text to be displayed in the Editor application software graphics area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

367
14 Creating profiles

X; used to insert the X-axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word.

Y; used to insert the Y-axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word
Accuracy; used to define the character precision index.
Angle; used to define the angle of rotation of the text on plane X, Y.

Direction; used to define the direction of the word based on the start point.
Alignment; used to define the alignment of the word, based on the start point.
Radius; used to define the radius of the circle, only to be used if option Text on circle has been
selected in field Geometry.

Geometry; used to define the type of path to be followed by the text; i.e. a straight path or a
circular path.
Text on line; distributes the text in a straight line.
Text on circle; distributes the text in a circle.

Position; used to indicate the position of the text applied to the circle if the Text on circle option in
the Geometry field has been chosen.
External profile= the text is engraved following the external profile of the circle.
Internal profile= the text is engraved following the internal profile of the circle.

; used to select repeat operations along the X-axis; Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DX figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeat operations along the Y-axis; Set the following fields:

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DY figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeats along the step X-Y. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements.
Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

; used to select repeats along the angled straight line. Set the following fields:

Angle [°]; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out (ref. ARP figure
167).
L. step; distance between the geometric elements (ref. LRP figure 167).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

368 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

; used to select repeats on the circumference. Set the following fields:

Start angle; value of the angle A from which to start when carrying out the repeats (see
examples shown in figure 170 and in figure 171). This is activated by removing the tick from
the data field First Item.
Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) that must be left between one repeat and the
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see examples
shown in figure 170 and in figure 171). This is activated by removing the tick from the data field
First Item.
XRC; X position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
Radial; enables radial repeats (see examples shown in figure 169 and in figure 171).
First Item; enables the first element ER as the initial element in the repeat (focal repeats)
eliminating the field Start angle and the field Radius (see examples illustrated in figure 168 and
in figure 169). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

369
14 Creating profiles

14.6 Breaking up a GEO/ROUT

The command Divide machining operationin the context menu is used to separate the profiles
included within a single geometry, GEO or ROUT, creating a GEO or a ROUT for each one of
them.

The drawing in figure 191 shows two geometries included in the GEO “P1009” (example 1). In this
case it is possible to carry out a break-up of the GEO itself, which is automatically divided in two:
GEO “P1037” for profile A and GEO “P1038” for profile B (example 2).

Figure 191

Example 1: profiles illustrated in figure 191, included in the GEO "P1009".

GEO ID=”P1009” SIDE=0 CRN=”2” DP=20

START_POINT X=275.261954 Y=251.0540422

LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=90.1433395
ARC_EPCE XE=216.3439676 YE=72.2897433 XC=270.3291371 YC=0.2786228 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=125.7202393 YE=69.9980421 XC=169.4203013 YC=134.8814852 DIR=dirCW
ARC_EPCE XE=67.8693544 YE=91.0540422 XC=67.8693544 YC=1.0540422 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_EP XE=67.8693544 YE=411.0540422
ARC_EPCE XE=125.7202393 YE=432.1100424 XC=67.8693544 YC=501.0540422 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=216.3439676 YE=429.8183411 XC=169.4203013 YC=367.2265993 DIR=dirCW
ARC_EPCE XE=275.261954 YE=411.9647449 XC=270.3291371 YC=501.8294617 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=251.0540422
START_POINT X=400 Y=500
LINE_EP XE=700 YE=500
LINE_EP XE=700 YE=700
LINE_EP XE=400 YE=700
LINE_EP XE=400 YE=500
ENDPATH

Example 2: profiles illustrated in figure 191, divided into two GEO: “P1037”; “P1038”

GEO ID=”P1037” SIDE=0 CRN=”2” DP=20

370 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 14 Creating profiles

START_POINT X=275.261954 Y=251.0540422

LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=90.1433395
ARC_EPCE XE=216.3439676 YE=72.2897433 XC=270.3291371 YC=0.2786228 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=125.7202393 YE=69.9980421 XC=169.4203013 YC=134.8814852 DIR=dirCW
ARC_EPCE XE=67.8693544 YE=91.0540422 XC=67.8693544 YC=1.0540422 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_EP XE=67.8693544 YE=411.0540422
ARC_EPCE XE=125.7202393 YE=432.1100424 XC=67.8693544 YC=501.0540422 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=216.3439676 YE=429.8183411 XC=169.4203013 YC=367.2265993 DIR=dirCW
ARC_EPCE XE=275.261954 YE=411.9647449 XC=270.3291371 YC=501.8294617 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=251.0540422
ENDPATH

GEO ID=”P1038” SIDE=0 CRN=”2” DP=20

START_POINT X=400 Y=500

LINE_EP XE=700 YE=500
LINE_EP XE=700 YE=700
LINE_EP XE=400 YE=700
LINE_EP XE=400 YE=500
ENDPATH

To break up the geometry, select the programming row or item in the tree list area, display the
context menu, select the option Operations. > Divide machining operation.
Figure 192

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

371
14 Creating profiles

372 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

15 Programming the machining
operations

The data provided in the following chapter are expressed in millimetres. If the unit of
measurement is set to inches in the Setup, the data in BiesseWorks applications will be
expressed in inches.

List of topics
• 15.1 “Piece data definition”
• 15.2 “Milling programming”
• Milling with “integrated” geometric profile (ROUT) (page 391)
• Milling with “generic” geometric profile (ROUTG) (page 393)
• Description of the fields present in the milling windows (page 394)
• Geometric profile pocketing (page 412)
• Milling applied to the profile in the form of text (page 415)
• Emptying applied to the profile in the shape of text (page 416)
• 15.3 “Programming boring operations”
• 15.4 “Programming cutting operations”
• 15.5 “Programming "insertions"”
• 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”
• 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work table objects”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

373
15 Programming the machining operations

15.1 Piece data definition

• “Dialogue box Piece variables”
• “Dialogue box Customised panel parameters”

Dialogue box Piece variables

Given that the visualisation of the data fields is linked to the type of machine activated, the
list in this paragraph is a complete list of all the visible fields.
Figure 193: dialogue box Piece variables

List and description of data fields

Piece width; X dimension of the piece.

Piece height; Y dimension of the piece.

Piece thickness; thickness of the piece.
Origins list; working area reference origin up to which the piece is to be pushed. To display the
window containing the list of origins, click on the adjacent button. To enable simultaneous
machining of two pieces, enter the correct pair of origins in this field (see “Enable the two-piece
simultaneous machining mode”, page 582).

Set-down origins; specific data field for the “Skipper” machine. Area where the piece is unloaded,
when using manual unload.
• 1 = the piece is unloaded on the loading pallet.
• 2 = the piece is unloaded on the unloading pallet.

Sole origin; enables use of a single origin in the working area. With this field enabled, the program
is not considered symmetrical, even with field Symmetryenabled. For more detailed information on
the effects produced by the field, see paragraph 16.9 “Notes on boring program symmetry”, page
462.

374 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

User data; click on the button alongside, to display the dialogue box Customised panel
parameters. For a description of the fields, see “Dialogue box Customised panel parameters” on
page 377.

Symmetry; enables/disables program symmetry . Allows to use symmetrical spindles when the
piece is machined on the mirror origin. For more detailed information on the effects produced by
the field, see paragraph 16.9 “Notes on boring program symmetry”, page 462.

Measure in inches; enables measurements in inches.

Opposite machining; specific data field for the “Skipper” machine. Used when working two
overlapping pieces with both operating sections. The enabled box only activates the command if
option 2 has been chosen in the “PMOD” field and the “NPAN” field of the dialogue box
Customised panel parameters (see paragraph “Dialogue box Customised panel parameters” on
page 377).

X cut. position
z For the “Skipper” machine:
position in X for creating an imaginary line (ref. A, figure 194), in order to correct the position of
the machinings arranged on the right. This function is linked to the “PTIN” parameter (see
page 387).
Figure 194: A = cut position in X; 1 and 2 = corners of the side that rests on the stop.

z For all other machines:

(figure 195) position in X (ref. A) beyond which the system interrupts the machining,
automatically inserting a suspension with translation in X to allow the piece to be translated
onto the mirror origin. The machining operations that precede this position (ref. c, d) and the
machining operations after (ref. b) are executed taking the set origin as the reference, while
machining operations after this position (ref. e) are carried out after translation of the piece
taking the mirror origin as the reference. This data item may be useful for machining pieces
larger than the working field.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

375
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 195
A A

d e

Y cut. position
z For the “Skipper” machine:
position in Y for creating an imaginary line, in order to correct the machinings arranged at a
higher position. This function is linked to the “PTIN” parameter (see page 387).
z For all other machines:
position in Y beyond which the system interrupts the machining, automatically inserting a
suspension with translation in Y to allow the piece to be translated onto the mirror origin. The
machining operations that precede this position, and those that cross it, are executed
considering the set origin as the reference; the machining operations that follow this position
are executed after piece translation, considering the mirror origin as the reference.

Tooling; number of the machine data configuration saved in the appropriate numerical control
environment, to be used to work the piece.

Jig thickness; jig thickness, when used.

Keyboard offset; enables the use of the keyboard on the machine in order to move the origin, if
necessary.

Movement in X; enables movement of the origin along the X-axis, if there are physical reasons on
the machine that require this movement. Used when the stops for panels with protruding coating
(also known as two-movement stops) are fitted.

Movement in Y; enables movement of the origin along the Y-axis, if there are physical reasons on
the machine that require this movement. Used when the stops for panels with protruding coating
(also known as two-movement stops) are fitted.

Uniclamp; enables the use of Uniclamps. To use the shapeable suction cups, disable the check
box.

Collision control; activates the positioning control of the moving parts of the work table
(shapeable suction cups and mobile supports) in order to prevent interference with the objects on
the work table or the tools. For example, in the case where through machining has been
programmed, the system checks whether the positioning of the suction cups under the piece is
such that if the tool overruns the piece they could be damaged. This type of control is not active
when using the AGGRE42 aggregate or the chip deflector. When the box is disabled, this type of
check is not done.

376 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Waste blocking; enables the locking - via the special devices (shapeable suction cups, etc.) - of
all those piece areas considered as waste. This command is only valid when performing table
tooling by means of semi-automatic positioning (see paragraph “Semi-automatic positioning”,
page 249).

Machining working dim.; used to determine the type of check on the tool dimensions, to avoid
collisions.
Maximum diameter; the check is carried out taking into account the maximum diameter of the
tool defined in the Max Diameter [mm] field in the tools data box.
Diameter; the check is carried out taking into account the diameter of the tool defined in the
Diameter [mm] field in the tools data box.

Locking Zone; used to choose the type of independent locking zone configuration. Select a
configuration among the ones on the list. To include a configuration to be customised later in the
machining program, i.e. in the tooling stage (in the WorkTableTooling application software), click
on the Manual configuration option.
In order not to include it, click on the No configuration option.

Enable labelling; this field is only visible for machines equipped with a label printer and/or a
labelling machine. Used to generate - in the ISO file - the instruction for applying the labels.

Material; list of piece images. Select an image to identify the piece during simulation of the
machining operation and tooling of the work table with the WorkTableTooling application.

Subprograms merge; used to optimise the machinings of the sub-programs inserted in the active
document (see Inserting sub-programs, page 304).

By tool sequence; during the optimisation process, this is used to order the machinings,
respecting the sequence of the programming lines of each single sub-program. In this case, in
order to reduce the tool change operations, the CAM checks the various sub-programs and, if
it finds machinings that use the same tool, it tries to group them together (if permitted by the
order).

By Time; during the optimisation process, this gives the CAM the maximum freedom to order
the machinings of each single sub-program. In this case, the sequence will only remain
unaltered for those machinings in which the box of the “OPT” parameter has been disabled.
This option allows you to minimise machining times.

Optimise suction cups; used to enable the optimisation of the suction cups so that, during the
program execution phase, the objects are positioned semi-automatically on the work table. This
function prevents the start-up of semi-automatic positioning by pressing the button of the
WorkTableTooling application software.

Dialogue box Customised panel parameters

Inside this box it is possible to enable and/or set certain functions useful for creating the ISO file.
To visualise it, click on the button of the Piece variables dialogue box (Figure 114).

The data fields in window Customised panel parameters vary according to the type of enabled
machine.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

377
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 196: Examples

List of data fields divided per machine:

z “Description of the specific data fields for the “Rover” and “Arrow” machines” (page
379)
z “Description of the specific data fields for the “Excel” machine” (page 382)

z “Description of the specific data fields for the “Matrix” machine” (page 385)

z “Description of the specific data fields for the “Skipper” machine” (page 386)

z “Description of the specific data fields for the “Insider” machine” (page 388)

378 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the specific data fields for the “Rover” and “Arrow”
machines
Given that data field visualisation is linked to the “Arrow” and/or “Rover” machine
model activated, the list below is a complete list of all the visible fields associated
with these machine lines.

Index of data fields:

• Box Suction cups and clamps
• Box Idle Bars or Wheels or Air jet surface
• Top supports for blocking purposes
• Pushers
• Box Piece blocking
• Exclusion of piece blocking cycle
• Panel blocked at the program end
• Rows of top front stops
• Top side stops
• Box Systems of stops to be activated
• Front
• Side
• Auxiliary extruded element for side stops
• Exports the symmetric section
• Exports the work table tooling set-up
• Exports the tool list
• Levelling cycle activation
• Systems of stops to be activated
• FT multi-zone activation
• Lift the stops on vacuum
• Magazine tooling configuration

Description of the data fields

Suction cups and clamps; the button activates automatic piece locking using shapeable
suction cups; the button activates automatic piece locking using uniclamps; the
button indicates that piece locking is manual and must be activated using the specific key
present on the machine console.

Idle Bars or Wheels or Air jet surface; enables or disables the automatic use of the bar
supports, the ball supports or the electric fan to facilitate piece positioning on the work table, or
enables a loading cycle using the bar supports in the highest position. The button
indicates that bar support enabling is manual, in other words by means of the specific key on
the machine control panel.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

379
15 Programming the machining operations

Top supports for blocking purposes; used to disable the bar support release at the end of the
piece loading on the work table (field enabled). At the end of the piece locking phase, the bar
supports remain in the load position without descending; this type of function could be useful
when locking with clamps.

Pushers; enables or disables the automatic use of the pushing devices. The button indicates
that bar support enabling is manual, in other words by means of the specific key on the
machine control panel.

Exclusion of piece blocking cycle; disables the piece locking cycle.

Panel blocked at the program end; used to release the piece locked at the end of the machining
operation.

Rows of top front stops; used to choose which front stops must remain up during the locking
stage. Each number corresponds to a specific row of stops on the machine (e.g. 1 = first stop
row, etc.).

Top side stops; used to raise the side stops during piece locking.

Front; enables the use of the front stops (stops along the X-axis). Enter the numbers belonging to
the required stops, separating them with a comma (see the machine User Manual).

Side; enables the use of the side stops (stops along the Y-axis). Enter the numbers belonging to
the required stops, separating them with a comma (see the machine User Manual).

Auxiliary extruded element for side stops; enables the presence of the auxiliary support for the
side stops (ref. A, figure 197).
Figure 197

380 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Exports the symmetric section; used to export the data for machining on the mirror origin. In this
case, the ISO file generated contains the section for managing the mirror origins, called
“SECTION FOR SYMMETRIC ORIGIN”. This allows to create a machining operation inverting
the direction of the profile path (figure 198) to allow the tool to maintain the correct forward
direction (see paragraph 16.11 “Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin”, page 464).
Figure 198: A=straight origin; B=mirror origin.
X+

A B
Y+

Exports the work table tooling set-up; used to export the data relating to the position of suction
cups and mobile supports. In this case, the processed ISO file contains the section with the
positions of all the work table elements.

Exports the tool list; used to export the data relating to tools present in the database. In this
case, the processed ISO file also contains the section with the list of tools used.

Levelling cycle activation; enables the support panel levelling cycle.

Systems of stops to be activated; for the description, see the field of the same name on page
384.

FT multi-zone activation; activates the use of the independent locking areas (multi-area) to lock
the piece.

Lift the stops on vacuum; this field is only visible on machines equipped with auxiliary stops. It
enables the use of the auxiliary stops.

Magazine tooling configuration; this field is only visible on machines equipped with a
“Multistore” tool magazine. It is used to insert the number corresponding to the tooling
configuration of the “Multistore” tool magazine (from 1 to 99) previously saved. This means
you can recall the tooling of this magazine in the active program.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

381
15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the specific data fields for the “Excel” machine

Figure 199

Description of the data fields

Idle Bars or Wheels or Air jet surface; for the description, see the field of the same name on
page 379.

Levelling cycle activation; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 381.
Exports the work table tooling set-up; for the description, see the field of the same name on
page 381.

Exports the tool list; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 381.

Curtain guards lowered during machining operations; used to keep the curtain guards down
during the whole working cycle. Tick the box to enable this function.

382 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

CAM centres; used to select the processing centres with which to carry out the active machining
program and the tables on which to load the pieces to be machined (see figure 200). Tick the
required boxes.
• C2 = centre number 2 belonging to the single operating section, in the case of machines
with one centre, or to the front left operating section, in the case of machines with two
centres.
• C3 = centre number 3 belonging to the front right operating section, in the case of machines
with two centres.
• C4 = centre number 4 belonging to the rear operating section, in the case of machines with
two or three centres, one of which is front and another one rear.
Figure 200

C C

Ta Ta
bl bl

Machining operations in gantry; used to enable simultaneous machining operation, i.e. running
a machining program using the two front operating sections (centres C2 and C3) at the same
time. Indicate the distance there should be between the carriages in the operating sections in
one of the following fields:
• Origins; list of origins, separated by a comma, to define the distance between the carriages.
• Distance; distance along X between the centres of carriages.
The data fields are only enabled after activating, on one or both tables, the two compatible
centres (C2 and C3).

Multi-piece; used to carry out identical machining operation repeats that can be applied to more
pieces.
• To repeat the same machining operation on pieces loaded on more reference origins,
indicate the origins separated by a comma in the Origins field.
• To duplicate the machining operation at a well defined distance, enter the value in the
Distance field.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

383
15 Programming the machining operations

Systems of stops to be activated; used to indicate which stops to use for positioning the piece.
• Front; enables the use of the front stops (stops along the X-axis). Enter the numbers
belonging to the required stops, separating them with a comma (see the machine User
Manual).
• Side; enables the use of the side stops (stops along the Y-axis). Enter the numbers
belonging to the required stops, separating them with a comma (see the machine User
Manual).
• Auxiliary; enables the use of the intermediate side stops (stops along the Y-axis). Enter the
numbers belonging to the required stops, separating them with a comma (see the machine
User Manual).

The parameters inherent to the Machining operations in gantry field and to the Multi-piece
field are not interconnected at all; therefore, the data indicated in both fields do not
necessarily have to coincide.

Exclusion of piece blocking cycle; for the description, see the field of the same name on page
380.

Stop up: 1-all 2-by selection; allows you to decide whether or not to raise the stops:
• 0= all the stops are raised, after pressing the “START” button.
• 1= all the stops are raised, after pressing the lock command.
• 2= only the stops of the activated area are raised, after pressing the lock command.

Magazine tooling configuration; for the description, see the field of the same name on page
381.

384 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the specific data fields for the “Matrix” machine

Figure 201

Description of the data fields

Exports the tool list; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 381.
Exports the boring table; field not used.

Check of X-dimension; enables the check of the piece length in X. By ticking the box, you can
check that the length in X of the piece to be worked is equal to the programmed length.

Check of Y-dimension; enables the check of the piece length in Y. By ticking the box, you can
check that the length in Y of the piece to be worked is equal to the programmed length.

Check of Z-dimension; enables the check of the piece Z dimension. By ticking the box, you can
check that the thickness of the piece is equal to the programmed thickness.

PTIN; used to enable checking of dimensions before starting machining operations and only active
if one of the following check boxes is ticked: “Check of X-dimension”, “Check of Y-dimension”,
“Check of Z-dimension”.
The field that is enabled forces checking at the start of each machining operation and not
during the operation, so as to avoid spoiling the pieces if the dimension is not correct.

PTOR; field not used.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

385
15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the specific data fields for the “Skipper” machine

Figure 202

Programming notes:

• The piece programmed in the Editor graphics area is virtually tilted so the reference for
the point of contact with stop B (figure 203) is always corner “1” and not corner “4” (figure
203); in this way, all the machinings on the upper and/or lower face will be symmetrical in
X.
• When it is in the machine, the piece is seen as if it were tilted, so face “0” of the piece is
always worked with the lower operating section, and face “5” is always worked with the
upper operating section. To modify these conditions, you must make the machinings
symmetrical in Z, using the “PMOD” parameter.
• To see the real condition of the machinings generated, visualise the simulator.

Figure 203: A= work table origin; B= reference stop for piece positioning.
holes on face “0” of the piece, generated in the Editor

1 4

2 3

holes on face “0” of the piece, seen on the machine

B
4 1

3 2

386 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

PMOD; used to define which operating section (head) will perform the machining operation on the
single piece, or on two overlapping pieces.
• 0 = standard machining of a single piece.
The machining operation defined on face “0” is performed using the lower operating section.
The machining operation defined on face “5” is performed using the upper operating
section.
• 1= machining (symmetrical in Z) of a single piece.
The programmed machining on face “0” is made symmetrical in Z as it is performed using
the upper operating section.
The defined machining on face “5” is made symmetrical in Z as it is performed using the
lower operating section.
The horizontal machinings are made symmetrical in Z.
• 2= machining two overlapping pieces. The machinings programmed in Editor are
performed on face “0” of the piece below, while the symmetrical machinings are performed
on face “5” of the piece on top.
For machining programs requiring holes on face “5” of the piece, it is not possible to use this
option.
This data item enables the options of the “NPAN” field, which can be chosen to resolve the
optimisation problems that may arise in the Editor application. In this case, these will be
ignored by the work list and by the BatchRun application software.

NPAN; used to define which operating section (head) will perform the machinings programmed on
face “0” of two overlapping pieces. This parameter can only be used to search for any
optimisation errors in the Editor application software; during the program execution phase, it is
completely ignored.
• 0 = machining on face “0” of the piece below.
• 1 = machining on face “0” of the piece on top.
• 2 = machining on face “0” of the piece below. If the “Opposite machining” box (page 375) is
enabled, this means you can machine the “0” faces of both pieces, using the two operating
sections.

PLAV; used to vary (reduce) the speed of the piece movement axis, to facilitate transfers from one
machining operation to the next.

PSCA; used to reduce the speed of the piece movement axis, to move the piece at the end of the
machining operation and position it on the unloading pallet.

SPR; used to import a new program, to machine the piece on top (only if a value of 2 has been
inserted in the “PMOD” field). The imported program must have the same dimensions (X, Y
and Z) as the program in which it is inserted. The simulation of this program is not visible from
Editor.

PCAY; used to define the position for loading the piece.

PTIN; allows you to enable the use of the laser devices to measure the piece dimensions. In this
case, it is possible to choose the type of tracing of the piece:
• 0 = the tracing depends on the position defined in the X cut. position field and/or the Y cut.
position field. In this case, the position of the programmed holes, beyond the imaginary line
defined in these fields (ref. A, figure 194), is corrected after making the holes on the side
that rests on the stop (the side between corner 1 and corner 2; figure 194).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

387
15 Programming the machining operations

• 1= the tracing of the piece is performed before beginning the machining operation.
• 2= the tracing depends on the position defined in the X cut. position field and/or the Y cut.
position field. In this case, the tracing is performed before beginning the machining
operation, so it is possible to correct the position of the holes starting from the centre of the
piece, towards the sides.

Description of the specific data fields for the “Insider” machine

Figure 204

PMOD; used to define the type of piece to be machined.

• 0 = machines the piece as programmed in the Editor application software;
• 1 = machines the symmetrical piece.

PCOR; used to indicate which side to begin from when calculating the positions of the
programmed machinings, so they can be corrected and adjusted to the real piece dimensions.
• SX = the reference side is the left side, visible from Editor;
• DX = the reference side is the right side;
• CEN = no side is taken into consideration; the machining operations are performed
maintaining the distances between the holes, and distributing the remaining values half on
the right side and half on the left side.

PBLO; used to define the use of the pusher.

• SA = the pusher blocks the piece against the stop until the termination of the program;
• NA = the pusher is disabled after the first machining operations in the program.

388 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

PRUO; used to define the position of the mobile piece support roller (the one in the central area of
the machine).
• Off= rollers in idle position.
• On= rollers in working position.

PBAN; used to define the opening or closing position of the output conveyors.
• AP = open position. To be used in the presence of “inserts” too.
• CH = closed position;
• AUTO = automatic position. In this case the output conveyors will only be opened if the Y
dimension of the piece is greater than the PLC data item for the maximum dimension used
to define the piece as "small". Otherwise, they will remain closed to sustain the small pieces.

PTRA; used to enable the transit of the piece without blocking it, and to perform the programmed
machining operations. Enable the box to move the piece on the conveyors without machining
it.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

389
15 Programming the machining operations

15.2 Milling programming

Milling operations can be programmed using the following commands:
z ROUT command;
used to carry out a milling operation with an “integrated” geometric profile. The term
“integrated” geometric profile means a profile created using the ROUT command, and
therefore connected to the machining operation, which includes geometric and technological
data.
z ROUTG command;
used to call up a “generic” geometric profile created using the GEO command or a text created
using the GEOTEXT command (see page 393) in order to apply it in both technological data
related to machining.
z POCK command;
used to call up a profile where to apply technological data related to pocketing operations (see
page 412).

For further clarification on how to create geometric profiles and texts, see paragraph 14.1
“Drawing procedures” (page 342).

List of topics
• Milling with “integrated” geometric profile (ROUT)
• Milling with “generic” geometric profile (ROUTG)
• Description of the fields present in the milling windows
• Geometric profile pocketing
• Milling applied to the profile in the form of text
• Emptying applied to the profile in the shape of text

390 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Milling with “integrated” geometric profile (ROUT)

To program a milling operation using an “integrated” geometric profile, click on , position the
cursor in the commands area on an empty row and click on .

The toolbar is activated to create a profile in the EGA mode and the dialogue box Milling is
displayed. The string with the ROUT command is displayed in the commands area.
To use the EGA tools, see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.

For a description of the fields in the window, see “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows” on page 394.
Figure 205: dialogue box Milling

Example: milling with an “integrated” geometric profile

Figure 206: example of how to create a milling operation taking corner 1 of face zero of the piece as reference
point (ref. 1).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

391
15 Programming the machining operations

ROUT SIDE=0 CRN=”1” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=18 ER=NO

START_POINT X=120 Y=264.2061763 (ref. A)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref. E)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=191.4352226 XC=584 YC=264.2061763 DIR=dirCCW (ref. F)
ARC_EPCE XE=584 YE=168.2038705 XC=607.9429514 YC=168.2038705 DIR=dirCW (ref. G)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH

392 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Milling with “generic” geometric profile (ROUTG)

To program a milling operation calling up a “generic” geometric profile, click on , position the
cursor in the commands area on an empty line and click on . The Milling from geometry
dialogue box is displayed to define the parameters related to machining the profile created using
the GEO command. The string with the ROUTG command is displayed in the commands area.
Figure 207: dialogue box Milling from geometry

The fields in the window are the same as those described in the “Description of the fields present
in the milling windows” paragraph on page 394, with the exception of data field Geom. identif.
which represents the identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated.

Example: milling with a "general” geometric profile

Figure 208: example of how to create a “generic” milling operation taking corner 1 of face zero of the piece as
reference point (ref. 1).

GEO ID=”P1000” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=10 ER=NO

START_POINT X=120 Y=264.2061763 (ref. A)

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

393
15 Programming the machining operations

LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)

LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref.
E)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=191.4352226 XC=584 YC=264.2061763 DIR=dirCCW (ref. F)
ARC_EPCE XE=584 YE=168.2038705 XC=607.9429514 YC=168.2038705 DIR=dirCW (ref. G)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID=”P1000” Z=0 DP=10 DIA=18

Description of the fields present in the milling windows

Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first tab of the milling windows can be
customised by the customer (see theEditor windows tab of the Setup), the list shown below
has been ordered in line with default settings.

CRN; piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; piece side. Write the side number in the data field, or select it on the figure above.
Geom. identif.; identification code of the milling or the drawing to be called up. In the dialogue box
Milling it permits an alphanumeric code to be entered between the two superscripts or a parameter
for naming the machining operation; in the case in which it is omitted, the system will enter one
automatically.
In the Milling from geometry dialogue box, this allows an ID of the geometry to be called, i.e. the
identification code of the drawing created with the GEO command with which the machining
operation is to be associated, to be chosen

Description; description of the type of machining for each individual milling operation. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the milling icon.

Diameter; diameter of the mill carrying out the milling operation. By entering the tool diameter, the
CAM searches among all the tools belonging only to the C_Routing class, the one with a diameter
equal to the value defined in this field.
If you wish to select a tool directly, remove the adjacent lock by clicking on the check box, and
select a code in the Tool code field.

Depth; depth of the machining operation or of the perforation offset for through machining
operations. If a through machining operation is to be made, click on the adjacent check box.
The default value for the through milling operation must be set in the Piercing Z field in the
SetupMachining operations tab.

Tool type; predefined list of the types of mill present in the database. Select an item from the list, if
a value has been entered in the field Diameter. The CAM will find a tool with the specified diameter
among all those of the type selected and associated only to the C_Routing class.

Tool code; predefined list of the mills present in the database.

The list includes all the mills belonging to C_Routing class and all the tools defined as mills (see
field Active on milling operation, page 174), but belonging to C_Cutting class.

394 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Only make a direct selection of the tool with which to carry out the machining operation if no value
has been entered in the Diameter field.

Reverse; compels the tool to reverse its direction of advance. When milling the blade does not
begin at the profile start point, but at the endpoint.

Correction; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one of the following
items:
Central, positions the tool axis at the centre of the trajectory (ref. A figure 209).
Right, positions the tool axis to the right of the trajectory (ref. B figure 209) or positions the
trajectory to the right of the tool (ref. C figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.
Left, positions the tool axis to the left of the trajectory (ref. C figure 209), or positions the
trajectory to the left of the tool (ref. B figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.

From the geometry; positions the tool axis using the settings defined in the geometry indicated
in the Geom. identif. field. In this case, it is possible to define the “Internal” and “External”
options directly in the geometry (see page 345). Field only active from BiesseWorks version
3.4 onwards.
Figure 209

Length [mm|%]; portion of the entire profile that is to be worked starting from an initial point of the
geometry. The unit or measurement applied to the value entered in this field must be defined in
theLength as % field.

Length as %; this makes it possible to define whether the value indicated in fieldLength [mm|%] is
a value in millimetres/inches or whether it is a percentage. YES = the value is a percentage; NO =
the value is in mm/inches.

Lead-in Type; movement carried out by the tool in order to enter the piece to machine (see
paragraph 16.10 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items”, page 463). Select
the type of lead-in required.
None; the tool descends perpendicularly and reaches the machining operation start point
directly (ref. A, figure 210).
3D profile; the tool descends travelling along an inclined line and enters the piece directly
reaching the machining operation start point (ref. B, figure 210). The use of this type of
entrance is only allowed with closed profiles.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

395
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 210

A B

3DLineCurve; the tool descends travelling along an inclined line and enters the piece reaching
the machining operation start point (ref. C, figure 211) performing a short arc along which it
corrects its position.
Tg LineCurve; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters
the piece reaching the machining start point directly (ref. D, figure 211) forming a line and a
tangential arc along which it corrects its position.
Figure 211

C D

Corrected 3DLine; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries
out the correction, it descends and moves along an inclined line and enters the piece directly
reaching the machining operation start point (ref. A, figure 212).
Corrected Line; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries out
the correction, it descends and moves along a line perpendicular to the plane and enters the
piece directly reaching the machining operation start point (ref. B, figure 212).
Figure 212

A B

396 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Line; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters the piece
directly reaching the machining start point (ref. C, figure 213) performing a short linear course
along which it corrects its position. When the check box Correction in airis enabled, the tool
corrects its position before descending, thereby generating a short linear course parallel to the
face (ref. D, figure 213).
Helix; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries out the
correction, it descends and moves along a spiral course and enters the piece directly reaching
the machining operation start point (ref. E, figure 213).
Figure 213
C D E

Corrected 3DCurve; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it
carries out the correction, it descends and moves along an arc shaped course and enters the
piece directly reaching the machining operation start point (ref. A, figure 214).
Curve; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters the piece
directly reaching the machining start point (ref. B, figure 214) performing a short arc shaped
course along which it corrects its position. When the check box is enabled Correction in air, the
tool corrects its position before descending, thereby generating a short linear course parallel to
the face (ref. C, figure 214).
Figure 214

A B C

Lead-in Angle; lead-in angle of the tool (see paragraph 16.10 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in
and lead-out data items”, page 463). The type of angle to be entered will vary according to the type
of lead-in selected (figure 215).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

397
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 215: lead-in angle (ang) for the Line type of lead-in (ref. A) and for the Curve type of lead-in (ref. B).

For lead-in Corrected 3DLine, the angle between the line at an oblique angle to the work table and
the work table itself must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in Corrected 3DCurve, the angle of aperture of the arc on the three-dimensional plane
must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in 3DLineCurve, the angle of aperture of the arc must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in Helix, the angular width of the helix must be taken into consideration.

(CIN)Correction in air; see lead-in type Line or type Curve.

(GIN)Offset; distance in millimetres from the lead-in point of the machining operation to move the
tool sideways in such a way that it makes a slightly inclined descent. This data on can only be
used with lead-ins of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve type.

(TBI)Insert tabbing; used to generate a linear translation of the tool inside the lead-in trajectory of
the tool into the piece, in order to create a short step, that can be calculated on the depth A of the
programmed machining operation (figure 216). This data item can only be used with lead-outs of
the type: Corrected 3DLine;
3D profile;
Corrected 3DCurve.
Tabbing length; linear length C (figure 216) of the segment for translating the tool.
Tabbing position; position B (mm) to establish the initial translation point that can be calculated
by starting from the Z co-ordinate of the initial point of the milling P (figure 216).
Figure 216: A = depth of the machining operation; B = lead-in tabbing position; C = linear length of the
translation; D = linear length of the translation; E = lead-out tabbing position; P = initial milling point; P1 = final
milling point.

Lead-out type; movement carried out by the tool in order to exit the machined piece (see
paragraph 16.10 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items”, page 463).
Choose the required type of lead-out.

398 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

None; the tool leaves the piece directly at the end of machining point rising perpendicularly to
the face (ref. A, figure 217).
3D profile; the tool leaves the piece directly at the end of machining point and rises following
an inclined line (ref. B, figure 217). The use of this type of lead-out is only permitted on closed
profiles.
Figure 217
A B

3DLineCurve; the tool leaves forming a short arc-like course along which it corrects its position
and rises following an inclined line (ref. C, figure 218).
Tg LineCurve; the tool leaves the piece forming a line and a tangential arc along which it
corrects its position, and rises travelling along a line perpendicular to the face (ref. D, figure
218).
Figure 218

C C

Corrected 3DLine; the tool leaves the piece in an inclined rise and follows a line parallel to the
face, along which it corrects its position (ref. A, figure 219).
Corrected Line; the tool leaves the piece in a rise perpendicular to the face and follows a line
parallel to the face, along which it corrects its position (ref. B, figure 219).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

399
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 219
A B

Line; the tool leaves the piece along a short linear course along which it corrects its position
and a rise perpendicular to the face (ref. A, figure 220). When the check boxCorrection in air is
enabled, the tool corrects its position at the end of the re-rise, generating a short linear course
parallel to the face. If the values entered in the Starting Z and End Z fields are other than zero,
this data item is managed as if it were an extension of the geometry/machining operation.
Helix; the tool leaves the piece along a spiral path (ref. D, figure 220) and a line parallel to the
face.
Figure 220
C D

Corrected 3DCurve; the tool leaves the piece in an arc-like rise and follows a line parallel to
the face, along which it corrects its position (ref. A, figure 221).
Curve; the tool leaves the piece along a short arc-like course along which it corrects its
position and a rise perpendicular to the face (ref. B, figure 221). When the check
boxCorrection in air is enabled, the tool corrects its position at the end of the re-rise,
generating a short linear course parallel to the face. If the values entered in the Starting Z and
End Z fields are other than zero, this data item is managed as if it were an extension of the
geometry/machining operation.

400 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 221
A B

Lead-out Angle; lead-out angle of the tool from the piece. The type of angle to be entered varies
according to the type of lead-out selected.

(COU) Correction in air; see lead-in of the Linetype or the Curvetype.

(GOU)Offset; distance in millimetres from the lead-out point of the machining operation to move
the tool sideways in such a way that it makes a slightly inclined rise. This data on can only be used
with lead-ins of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve type.

(TBO)Insert tabbing; this makes it possible to generate a linear translation of the tool inside the
lead-out trajectory of the tool from the piece, in order to create a short step, that can be calculated
on the depth A of the programmed machining operation (figure 216). This data item can only be
used with lead-outs of the type: Corrected 3DLine;
3D profile;
Corrected 3DCurve.
Tabbing length; linear length D (figure 216) of the segment for translating the tool.
Tabbing position; position E (mm) to establish the initial translation point that can be calculated
by starting from the Z co-ordinate of the final point of the milling P1 (figure 216).

Initial ext.; transfer of the machining operation point of origin forwards or back along the same
trajectory.

Decel. Dist.; distance between the tool slowdown point and the point at which the geometry ends.
Slowdown takes place both when the tool approaches the end of the geometry, and when it moves
away from that point. If the value entered in this field is less than the value entered in field Min dec.
length of the Setup, the system will use the data item entered in the Setup field. If the value
entered is less than zero, during optimisation, an error message is displayed.

Final ext.; distance between the lead-in and lead-out points of the tool from the piece, to extend
machining operation.

Percent Radius; percentage value to modify the lead-in and lead-out radius.
Channel; translation position of the plane to be worked compared with the main plane of the piece
(figure 222).
When the adjacent TOS box is marked, during the calculation to establish the safety position, the
value set in field Z is ignored, i.e., it is created starting from the surface of the piece. When the box
is left disabled, the position defined in field Z is considered as a start point to position the tool at the
safety position.
For example (figure 222), if in field Safetyof the tool used, the value 10mm has been set (Tool
parameters dialogue box), considering the position Z of 5mm, by enabling field TOS (ref. B, figure

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

401
15 Programming the machining operations

222), the tool is positioned 10mm from the surface of the piece, leaving field TOS (ref. A, figure
222) disabled, the tool is positioned 10mm from position Z, i.e. 5mm from the surface of the piece.
Figure 222

TOS; see field “Channel”.

Rot. speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed. If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined
in the Std RotSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the tool used for machining.

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std RotSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.

Lowering speed; speed with which the tool moves from the surface of the piece to the position
where the machining operation begins D (figure 223). If the value entered is 0, the system uses the
speed defined in the Std LowSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the tool used for
machining. If the value entered is less than zero, an error message is displayed during
optimisation .

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.

Appr./output speed; speed used by the tool to move from the safety position A and move into
contact with the surface of the piece B, or to leave from the piece at the end of the programmed
machining operation and return to the safety position C (figure 223). This data is also used in the
stretches for the positioning of the tool. If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined
in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std LowSpd in dialogue box Tool
parameters.

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.

402 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 223

A C

B D

Work.Speed [mm/min]; milling tool speed of advance. The value to define for this field is linked to
the activation, or otherwise, of field Enable percentage speedin tab Milling data of Setup (see
chapter 4 “General settings”, page 136). If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed
defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std WorkSpd in dialogue box
Tool parameters.

(AZ); tool angle of inclination; that is to say the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation
with respect to the plane X, Y (see figure 224).
To tilt the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AZ) -incr : the angle is calculated taking axes X/Y of the required side as reference axes, for
example, side 1.
(AZ) -abs : the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as reference axes (see
figure 225).
Figure 224

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

403
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 225: A = (AZ) -incr; B = (AZ) -abs .

(AR); tool angle of rotation; that is to say the angle of rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y (see
figure 226).
To rotate the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AR) -incr : the angle is calculated taking axes X/Y of the required side as reference axes, for
example, side 1.
(AR) -abs : the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as reference axes (see
figure 227).
Figure 226

Figure 227: A = (AR) -incr; B = (AR) -abs .

404 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

GIP; used to indicate at what depth the system should consider the P profile (GEO) to obtain the
machining operation. The enabled box indicates that the profile start point (ref. A) is on the piece
surface (ref. B); in this case, it is the position that indicates the tool lead-in point corresponding to
the profile start point A.
The disabled box indicates that the profile start point (ref. A) has been moved along the Z-axis (ref.
C) and, therefore, it is not obtained from the X/Y co-ordinates alone but from the X/Y/Z co-
ordinates, where the data item referring to Z is the machining operation depth (ref. C). In the
second case, if machining operation is programmed with the tool inclined, the position indicating
the tool lead-in point (ref. D) does not correspond to the profile start point (ref. A).
Figure 228

With enabled box With disabled box

ISO instruction; ISO instruction. Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.

OPT; optimisation of the machining operation. Tick the box to enable optimisation of the machining
operation.
• If the box is disabled, the machining operation is not optimised and is performed respecting the
position indicated in the programming rows of the commands area. In this case, the
corresponding programming row maintains its execution position.
• If the box is enabled, the machining operation is optimised (processed by the CAM) and is
performed without respecting the sequence established in the programming rows of the
commands area. In this case, the corresponding programming row does not maintain its
execution position.

Starting Z; depth reached by the tool at the initial machining operation point. The value indicated
in this field is added to that indicated in the field Depth.
Figure 229

End Z; depth reached by the tool at the final machining operation point. The value indicated in this
field is added to that indicated in the field Depth.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

405
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 230

Vertical runs; number of passages that influence the depth of the programmed machining
operation (ref. A, figure 231). For example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining is split into 2
parts until the depth indicated in field Depthhas been reached (see paragraph 16.6 “Specifications
for “multiple-run” milling operations”, page 459).

Final run; depth that the tool must reach during the last pass in the case of more than one pass
(ref. B, figure 231).
For example, if the total depth of the machining is 30mm, by entering the value 10mm in this field
and in the Vertical runsfield value 2, the tool divides the machining into two parts:
- it descends into the piece and reaches a depth of 20mm (figure 231);
- it descends as far as 20mm and removes another 10mm (figure 231).
Figure 231: A = programmed depth; B = depth of last pass; 1 = first pass; 2 = second pass.

A 20
1 30
2

B 10

Horizontal runs; number of runs (ref. A, figure 232) to be carried out horizontally or vertically on
the surface of the programmed face (see paragraph 16.6 “Specifications for “multiple-run” milling
operations”, page 459).

Horizontal step; step between runs indicated in the data field Horizontal runs, that is to say the
distance between one run and the next (ref. C, figure 232), starting from the programmed
geometry position (ref. A, figure 232).
Figure 232: A = programmed geometry; B = number of vertical runs on face 0; C = distance between one run
and the next.

Enable finishing; used to choose (YES option) whether to generate the finishing operation.

Finishing step; depth of the finishing operation, if this type of machining operation has been
enabled (Enable finishing field).

406 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Two-way run; authorises the tool to work in alternate directions when carrying out successive
runs. The tool changes direction each time it makes a new movement. Enable the function by
clicking on the box (see paragraph 16.6 “Specifications for “multiple-run” milling operations”, page
459).

NEBSAvoids output between the runs; used to join the programmed steps in the data field
“Vertical runs” (enabled box), so that the tool carries out a fluid machining operation. In this way, at
the end of each step, the tool carries out the following one without being extracted from the panel.

Add. Z saf.; safety value along the Z axis, to be applied when the inclined machining operations
are carried out using, for example, the tilting axis (see figure 233). Leaving the value set to 0, the
system uses the data item defined in the Safety field in the Setup Machining operations tab.
Figure 233

, repeats along the X-axis. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the profiles (ref. DX, figure 234).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the Y-axis. Set the following fields:

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the profiles (ref. DY, figure 234).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the X-Y step. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the profiles.
Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the profiles.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the angled straight line. Set the following fields:

Angle [°]; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are to be carried out (ref. ARP,
figure 234).
L. step; distance between the profiles (ref. LRP, figure 234).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

407
15 Programming the machining operations

No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

Figure 234

, repeats along the circumference. Set the following fields:

Start angle; value of the angle A from which to start to carry out the repeats (see chapter 14
“Creating profiles”, figures 170 and 171). This is activated by removing the tick from the data
field First Item.
Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) that must be left between one repeat and the
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see chapter 14
“Creating profiles”, figures 170 and 171). This is activated by removing the tick from the data
field First Item.
XRC; X position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
Radial; enables radial repeats (see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, figure 169 and figure 171).
First Item; enables the first element ER as the initial element in the repeat (focal repeats)
eliminating the fields Start angle and Radius (see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, figures 168
and 169). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.
CEN Centre; identification code for the machine work centre to be used for the machining
operation. Insert the number between quotation marks (e.g. “3” to identify centre 3).

Spindle; used to indicate the electrospindle with which the machining operation is to be carried
out. This field can be useful when you need to carry out a machining operation with an aggregate/
tool that is only supported by a specific electrospindle. You should check that the electrospindle
chosen is present on the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is
housed in, if it is not the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the
CAM to choose the electrospindle.

AGG Aggregate; identification code for the aggregate - to be inserted between quotation marks.
Over-material; value for the amount of excess material to be left when machining the profile. The
value indicated in this field is linked to the type of correction (Correction field):

408 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

z With left or right correction, when a negative value is set the tool removes more material and
when a positive value is set the tool will remove less material.
z With a central correction, when a negative value is set the machine operation is moved
sideways to the right of the programmed trajectory and when a positive value is set the
machining is moved to the left of the programmed trajectory.

Enable TCP; enables the C axis to carry out interpolated milling operations with the tool at right
angles to the profile to be machined.

Sharp corners; enables sharp corners. When activated, it can be used to make all the sharp
corners during the machining operation defined in the geometries.

Floating; enables or disables the use of the copier or other similar devices (e.g.. aggregates with
copier). By enabling this option, the Presser box is automatically deactivated.
If you wish to define this datum as the active default form, enable the relevant box in the Setup
Milling data tab.

Presser; enables or disables the use of the presser. By enabling this option, the Floating box is
automatically deactivated.

Blower; enables or disables the use of the blower to clean the piece whenever the copier or the
presser is used. The box is enabled only when one of the previous two boxes has been ticked
(Presser or Floating).

Chip cleaning by blowing; enables or disables the use of the blower to remove from the piece
the chips eliminated during machining operations.

Hood position; hood position during machining operation. This data can only be utilised on
machines with the special device for correcting the hood position. Input a value from 1 to 6: The
value 0 enables automatic positioning of the hoods, which is managed according to the machining
data set.
If the value entered is not compatible with the settings defined in the machining operation, the
hoods will in any case be positioned at a limit height automatically worked out on the basis of the
defined data.

Corner speed; speed at which the sharp corner must be executed. If the field is left empty, the
system uses the speed defined in the Std WorkSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the
milling tool used for machining.

Aggr21 angle; enables the use of the AGGRE42 aggregate and allows to enter the direction angle
for the lead-in of the aggregate under the piece. This field is displayed only if the use of the
AGGRE42 aggregate has been foreseen (see paragraph 16.5 “Specifications for programming
milling operations using the AGGRE81 aggregate”, page 458). To active the command, tick the
contiguous box.

Aggr21 face; face that the system must consider when checking for potential collisions against
the piece being machined. This field is displayed only if the use of the AGGRE42 aggregate has
been foreseen (see paragraph 16.5 “Specifications for programming milling operations using the
AGGRE81 aggregate”, page 458).

Activates the electronic copier#; used to enable the data fields to program the position of the ZE
axis that can be reached by the electronic copier in the copying start and end phases. The
reference position to start from is zero, corresponding to the alignment of the copier with the

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

409
15 Programming the machining operations

spindle nose (see figure 235). The data defined in the following parameters therefore allow you to
move the copier, to bring it to the copying start and end positions.
Figure 235

ZE

Length of the initial section; PDIN distance from the machining operation start position I
(figure 236), to allow the electronic copier to position itself correctly at the copying start point P
(figure 236). If a value has been defined in the “Initial ext.” field, the start point for calculating
this distance is no longer the machining operation start point, but the position deriving from the
setting entered in the “Initial ext.” field.

Correction of initial depth; PCIN variation made to the effective depth of the PR machining
operation (see figure 236). This is used to establish - together with the tool length and
machining operation depth defined in the “Depth” field, the position to which the ZE axis must
move before positioning the electronic copier at the copying start point P (figure 236).
Figure 236: ZE = electronic copier axis; I = machining operation start position; P = copying start point; L = tool
length; PR = machining operation depth; PDIN = distance from P to I; PCIN = depth correction.

0
ZE=(L - PR) + PCIN

PCIN

PR

P PDIN

Length of the end section; PDU distance from the machining operation end position I (figure
237), to allow the electronic copier to position itself correctly at the copying end point P (figure
237). If a value has been defined in the “Final ext.” field, the start point for calculating this
distance is no longer the machining operation end point, but the position deriving from the
setting entered in the “Final ext.” field.

410 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Correction of end depth; PCU variation made to the effective depth of the PR machining
operation (see figure 237). This is used to establish - together with the tool length and
machining operation depth defined in the “Depth” field, the position to which the ZE axis must
move before positioning the electronic copier at the copying end point P (figure 237).
Figure 237: ZE = electronic copier axis; F = machining operation end position; P = copying end point; L = tool
length; PR = machining operation depth; PDU = distance from F to P; PCU = depth correction.

0
ZE= (L - PR) + PCU

PCU

PR

PDU P
F

ZE axis speed variation; reduction or increase in the speed of the ZE axis, to position the
electronic copier at the copying start point.

(COW)Generate opp. mach.; used to enable the machining operation also on the face opposite
the programmed one, using both operating sections. Tick the box to enable this function.

(AUX)AUX tables• ; used to define the position of the auxiliary tables. AUTO; the activation and
deactivation of the table is managed automatically.
• ON; auxiliary table activated. The table is used during the machining operation. In this case, the
machining operation would be suspended immediately if there were any possible collisions
between the vices and the working units.
• OFF; auxiliary table deactivated. The table is not used during the machining operation.

Description of the tab Advanced technological data

This tab is displayed only if the Chip deflector field on the Setup tab Milling data has been enabled.
For a description, see paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming using the chip deflector” on page
452.

To save the settings and close the machining window, click on . To close the windows without
saving, click on button .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

411
15 Programming the machining operations

Geometric profile pocketing

The term pocketing refers to internal machining of the geometric profile, that is to say the removal
of a certain amount of material inside or outside the profile so as to create a hole or indentation.
Figure 238

To carry out a pocketing operation, create a geometric profile. Pocketing must be carried out only
on geometric profiles created or imported as “generic” geometric profiles (GEO) and not as
“integrated” geometric profiles that include technological data (ROUT); for further clarification on
how to create geometric profiles, see paragraph 14.1 “Drawing procedures” (page 342).

After having created the drawing, to carry out a pocketing operation, position the text cursor on the
row beneath the drawing to be pocketed, and click on the command .

To carry out pocketing operations, the string containing the POCK command must be always
positioned under the geometries to be pocketed, see the example provided in figure 240.

Because the appearance of some data fields in the first tab of the dialogue box can be
customised by the customer (see tabEditor windows in the Setup), the list below is ordered
in accordance with the default settings.
Figure 239: dialogue box Pocketing

412 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the fields present in the box Pocketing

Description; description of the type of machining to distinguish each individual pocketing operation.
The text entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the pocketing icon.

Buttons defining the types of machining operation ; select the type of machining operation by
clicking on one of the following buttons:

Pocketing by machining in parallel lines.

Pocketing by continuous machining in parallel lines.

Pocketing using concentric profiles that go from the outside of the profile inwards.

Pocketing using concentric profiles that go from the inside of the profile outwards.

Profile finishing.

Geom. identif.; list of the geometries created. Select the code that identifies the geometry to be
pocketed.

Compensation; activates the fields present at the bottom of the window. Click on the check box.
Activ. islands; displays the field Islands listcontaining a list of the geometries created.

Islands list; list of the geometries created. Select the code for the drawing to be converted into an
island.

Work.Speed [mm/min]; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 403
(paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Diameter; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 394 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Depth; total depth of the machining operation.

Tool type; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 394 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Tool code; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 394 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Z step; depth of each run. Write the value of the depth of each run in millimetres. For example, if a
pocketing operation has been set to be carried out in three runs, with a total depth of 30 millimetres
and a step of 10 millimetres, this means that, to machine to a depth of 30 millimetres, the
electrospindle will carry out three runs at a depth of 10 millimetres.

Overlapping; overlap value for repeated milling operations.

Angle [°]; pocketing inclination. If pocketing is to be carried out with an inclination in the tool path
around the profile, set the value of the angle.

Reverse; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 395 (paragraph “Description
of the fields present in the milling windows”). In case of a new pocketing operation arranged into
several runs, this field cannot be enabled; in this case, the system generates an error message.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

413
15 Programming the machining operations

Finishing revers.; the tool is made to reverse its infeed direction during the finish operation. In
case of a finishing operation arranged into several runs, this field cannot be enabled; in this case,
the system generates an error message.

Lead-in Type; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 395 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Lead-in Angle; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 397 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Lead-out type; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 398 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Lead-out Angle; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

(COU) Correction in air; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401
(paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Initial ext.; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Decel. Dist.; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Final ext.; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Percent Radius; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Channel; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 401 (paragraph “Description
of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Rot. speed [rpm]; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 402 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Lowering speed; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 402 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Appr./output speed; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 402 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

ISO instruction; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 405 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

OPT; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 405 (paragraph “Description of
the fields present in the milling windows”).

Spindle; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph “Description
of the fields present in the milling windows”).

CEN Centre; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

AGG Aggregate; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

414 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Over-material; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Hood position; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 409 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Chip cleaning by blowing; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 409
(paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Aggr21 angle; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 409 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Aggr21 face; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 409 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

(COW)Generate opp. mach.; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 411.

Example of pocketing with island inside the pocketed profile

Figure 240

GEO ID=”P1002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0 ER=NO

GEO ID=”P1048” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0
POCK GID=”P1002” ISL=”P1048” DIA=10 DP=10 TYP=ptZZ A=0 TC=NO CKI=YES ZST=10

Milling applied to the profile in the form of text

To obtain a text-shaped incision on the piece (see figure241), create the text with GEOTEXT
command, click on , position the cursor in the commands area on an empty line and click on
(ROUTG command). For further information regarding text creation, see paragraph 14.1
“Drawing procedures” on page 342.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

415
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 241

In the Geom. identif.field, enter the identification code of the text to which the machining operation
is associated and complete the technological data fields (for the description of the data fields see
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 394).

As for the setting of the tool correction, the option defined in data field Correction is applied by the
system only to the outer letter edge, in the inside parts of the letters the correction opposite the
one chosen is automatically applied. For example, let's say you want to cut the letter R by using
the right correction, in such a case, this correction (ref. A, figure 242) is applied to the outside
perimeter of the letter while in the inside part is applied the left-hand correction (ref. B, figure 242).
Figure 242

Emptying applied to the profile in the shape of text

To create a text in relief A or sunken B (see figure 243), do the following:
z Create the text using the GEOTEXT command (see paragraph 14.5 “Creating a text”, page
367). The text in relief also needs the creation of the geometry of the piece to be pocketed
(GEO command).

z Click on , position the cursor in the commands area on an empty line and click on
(POCK command).

416 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 243

A B

z Enter the identification code of the text in field Geom. identif..

To generate the text in relief, input the identification code of the geometry of the piece to empty
in field Geom. identif., enable box Activ. islands and choose the identification code of the text
in field Islands list (for the description of the data fields see paragraph “Geometric profile
pocketing” on page 412).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

417
15 Programming the machining operations

15.3 Programming boring operations

When programming boring operations, there are a number of different commands that can be
used as and when required .
The following paragraph shows a list of the machining operations that can be programmed and the
description of all the fields present in the boring dialogue boxes.
z To carry out boring operations on any side of the piece using the vertical spindle or the

horizontal spindle, click on and on .

Figure 244: dialogue box Generic bore

z To create a boring operation to be carried out using the vertical spindle on side five or side

zero of the piece, click on and on .

z To create a boring operation to be carried out using the horizontal spindle on side one, two,

three or four of the piece, click on and on .

z To carry out a repeated boring operation in which the parameters are set on side zero and side

five of the piece, to be machined using the vertical spindle, click on and on .

418 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 245: dialogue box System bores

z To carry out a repeated boring operation with the C-axis on a non-standard side of the piece

with a flat surface, click on and on .

Figure 246: dialogue box Bore with C axis on straight side

z To carry out a repeated boring operation with the C-axis on a non-standard side of the piece

with a curved surface, click on and on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

419
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 247: dialogue box Bore with C axis on circular side

z To carry out a boring operation by assigning technological data to circular shapes that have
been created as geometries, i.e by calling up a geometric profile created using the GEO
command, click on and on . In this case, the bore will be made automatically at the
centre of the circle with a diameter equal to the one defined in the B_GEO command, without
considering the real diameter of the circle drawn.
For further clarification on how to create geometric profiles, see paragraph 14.1 “Drawing
procedures” (page 342).
Figure 248: dialogue box Bore from geometry

420 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Description of the fields present in the boring windows

Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first tab of the boring windows can be
customised by the customer (see theEditor windows tab of the Setup), the list shown below
has been ordered in line with default settings.

Geom. identif.; identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated. Only
visible in dialogue box Bore from geometry.

CRN; piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; piece side. Write the side number in the data field, or select it on the figure above.
Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual bore. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the boring icon.

Enable data settings taking the side created to be a two-dimensional plane X, Y.

Enter the X axis co-ordinate of the centre of the bore in field X.

Enable data settings taking the side created to be a three-dimensional plane X, Y, Z.

In field Starting angle,enter the value for angular aperture (ref. A , figure 249) between the bore
and the starting angle of the curved surface side.
Figure 249

types of repeat bores. Select the type of repeat by clicking on one of the following buttons.
For a detained description of the functions of these four types of boring operation, see
“Boring operations”, page 148.

X; X-axis co-ordinate for the centre of the bore.

Y; Y-axis co-ordinate for the centre of the bore.
For horizontal bores it is possible to select whether to bore to midway through the thickness of the
piece, or to enter the value of co-ordinate Y. In the former case, leave the adjacent check box
enabled; in the latter case, disable the check box and enter the position required in the data field.

Diameter; tool diameter. Enter the tool diameter value or, if you wish to select a tool directly,
remove the adjacent lock, clicking on its check box, and select a code in the data field Tool code.

Depth; depth of the bore or the perforation offset value for through bores. When needing to
execute a through bore, click on the adjacent check box; the number displayed represents the
distance between the bottom surface of the piece and the bottom of the bit (ref. A, figure 250)
defined in field Piercing Z in tab Machining operations of the Setup.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

421
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 250

Tool type; predefined list of the tool types present in the database. Select an item from the list, if a
value has been entered in the field Diameter. The CAM will find a tool with the diameter indicated
from among all those of the type selected.

Tool code; predefined list of the tools present in the database. Select the tool with which to carry
out the machining operation directly, only if the lock adjacent to theDiameter field has been
removed.

Minimum X; distance from the last bore to the end of the piece.
Distance; value for the distance between centres of the rows of bores.
Channel; translation position of the surface to be worked with respect to the main surface of the
piece (figure 222, page 402). For the description of the adjacent TOS field, see the example on
page 401 (data field“Channel”).

Rot. speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed.

To carry out boring operations with the spindles of the boring unit, leaving the field empty, the
system uses the value present in the “Rotation Speed” field in the “INVERTER DATA FOR T,TH"
table of the NC. For boring operations using the electrospindle, see the description of the “Rot.
speed [rpm]” data field on page 402.

Appr./output speed; represents the speed at which the tool moves from the safety position A to
the surface of the piece B. For boring operations using the electrospindle, see the description of
the “Appr./output speed” data field on page 402.
Figure 251

A C

Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the tool makes the bore. For boring operations using the
electrospindle, see the description of the “Work.Speed [mm/min]” data field on page 403.

422 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

(AZ); tool angle of inclination; that is to say the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation
with respect to the plane X, Y (see figure 224 on page 403).
To tilt the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AZ) -incr : (ref. A, figure 225) the angle is calculated taking axes X/Y of the required side as
reference axes, for example, side 1.
(AZ) -abs : (ref. B, figure 225) the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as
reference axes.

(AR); tool angle of rotation; that is to say the angle of rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y (see
figure 226, page 404).
To rotate the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AR) -incr : (ref. A, figure 227) the angle is calculated taking axes X/Y of the required side as
reference axes, for example, side 1.
(AR) -abs :. (ref. B, figure 227) the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as
reference axes.

ISO instruction; ISO instruction. Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.
OPT ; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 405 (paragraph “Description of
the fields present in the milling windows”).

Vertical runs; number of passages that influence the depth of the programmed machining. For
example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining is split into 2 parts until the depth indicated in
fieldDepth has been reached.

Add. Z saf.; safety value along the Z axis, to be applied when the inclined machining operations
are carried out using, for example, the tilting axis (see figure 233). Leaving the value set to 0, the
system uses the data item defined in the Safety field in the Setup Machining operations tab.
Figure 252

Step; centre distance between repeat bores (with System bores type boring).

, repeats along the X-axis. Set the following fields:

X step; value for the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the Y-axis. Set the following fields:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

423
15 Programming the machining operations

Y step; value for the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the X-Y step. Set the following fields:

Button is used to set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres in the direction of the X-axis of the distance
between the holes.
Y step; value for the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats.

Button is used to set the following fields:

Angular step;value of the angular step (DA) there must be between one repeat and the next
one.
Y step; value for the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats.

, repeats along the angled straight line. Set the following fields:

Angle [°]; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out.
L. step; distance between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the circumference. Set the following fields:

Start angle; makes it possible to set angle A from which to leave to carry out the repetitions
(see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, figure 170 and figure 171). This is activated by removing
the tick from the data field First Item.
Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) that must be left between one repeat and the
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see chapter 14
“Creating profiles”, figures 170 and 171). This is activated by removing the tick from the data
field First Item.
(XRC)X; X position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
(YRC)Y; Y position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
First Item; eliminates the fields Start angle and Radius, and enables the first bore ER as the
start bore in the repeat (see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, figure 168 and figure 169).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.
Machine; machine on which the machining operation is to be carried out. This data item is only
used if there are several machines arranged in a work line.

424 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Tool class; list of tool classes. Select the C_Drilling option to use the boring unit spindles, or the
C_Routing option to use the electrospindle.

CEN Centre; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Spindle; this is used to indicate the spindle of the boring unit or the electrospindle with which to
carry out the machining operation. You should check that the electrospindle chosen is present on
the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is housed in, if it is not
the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the CAM to choose the
electrospindle.

AGG Aggregate; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Lower. dist.; position (mm) at which the bit must begin slowing down before finishing the boring
operation. This value depends on the value set in the Depthfield. When value 0 is entered, the bit
does not slow down.
• Example of non-through borings A: if value 5 is entered in this field and value 30 is entered in the
Depth field, it means that when the bit reaches a depth of 25mm, it will slow down its descent
speed.
• Example of through borings B: if value 3 is entered in this field and the through machining
operation is defined in the Depth field, it means that when the bit is 3mm away from the piece
lower surface, it will slow down its descent speed.

5 30
3

Piercing speed; speed of the bit during the phases of the piece collapse, usable only for through
machining operations. Once the bit reaches the value set inLower. dist. field, it carries out the last
path of the machining operation (ref. C) at the speed set in this field. If the field is left empty, the
system uses the speed defined in the Std LowSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the
milling tool used for machining.
Figure 253

Presser; enables or disables the use of the presser.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

425
15 Programming the machining operations

Chip cleaning by blowing; enables or disables the use of the blower to remove from the piece
the chips eliminated during machining operations.

Hood position; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph “Description of
the fields present in the milling windows” on page 409. This function can only be controlled if the
boring is performed with a mill installed in the electrospindle (TP).

Aggr21 angle; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph “Description of the
fields present in the milling windows” on page 409.

Aggr21 face; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph “Description of the
fields present in the milling windows” on page 409.

(COW)Generate opp. mach.; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 411.

To save the settings and close the machining windows, click on button . To close the windows
without saving, click on button .

426 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

15.4 Programming cutting operations

When programming machining operations with circular blade tools, there are a number of different
commands that can be used as and when required.
The following paragraph contains the list of machining operations that can be programmed and a
description of all the fields present in the cutting with circular blade dialogue box.

z To create an angled cut on all sides of the piece, click on and on .

Figure 254: dialogue box Generic cut

z To create a cut along the X-axis on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and on
.

z To create a cut along the Y-axis on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and on
.

z To create a squaring operation centred on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and
on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

427
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 255: dialogue box Piece formatting

z To create a squaring operation that is not centred on the top or bottom side of the piece, click

on and on .

Figure 256: dialogue box Rectangular cut

z To perform a cut by assigning technological data to lines created as geometries, i.e. by calling

up a geometric profile created using the GEO command, click on and on . For further
clarification on how to create geometric profiles, see paragraph 14.1 “Drawing procedures”
(page 342).

428 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 257: dialogue box Cut from geometry

Description of the fields present in the cutting windows

Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first tab of the cutting windows can be
customised by the customer (see theEditor windows tab of the Setup), the list shown below
has been ordered in line with default settings.

Geom. identif.; identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated. Only
visible in dialogue box Cut from geometry.

CRN; piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; piece side. Select the side required from the figure above, or type the side number in the
field.

Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual cut. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the cutting icon.

; set the angled cut using the endpoint co-ordinates a reference values. Displays the data
fieldEnd X and the data field End Y.

; set the angled cut using the length and the angle as reference values. Displays the data
fieldAngle [°] and the data field Length.

; set the angled cut using the Y co-ordinate of the endpoint and the angle as reference values.
Displays the data fieldEnd Y and the data field Angle [°].

; set the angled cut using the X co-ordinate of the endpoint and the angle as reference values.
Displays the data fieldEnd X and the data field Angle [°].

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

429
15 Programming the machining operations

X; X-axis co-ordinate of the cut start point. When squaring and centring the piece, this data item
indicates the distance in X from the edge of the piece.

Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the cut start point. When squaring and centring the piece, this data item
indicates the distance in Y from the edge of the piece.

Thickness; blade thickness. By entering the blade thickness, the CAM searches among all the
tools belonging only to the C_Routing class, the one with thickness equal to the value defined in
this field.
If you wish to select a blade directly, remove the adjacent lock by clicking on the check box, and
select a code in the Tool code field.

Depth; depth of the cut or of the perforation offset for through cuts. If a through cut is to be made,
click on the adjacent check box.
The default value for the through cut must be set in thePiercing Z field in the SetupMachining
operations tab.

Tool type; pre-set list of the types of blade present in the database. Select an item from the list, if
a value has been entered in the field Thickness. The CAM will find a tool with the specific thickness
from among all those of the type selected and associated only to the C_Cutting class.

Tool code; pre-set list of the blades present in the database. The list includes all the blades
belonging to C_Cutting class and all the tools defined as blades (see field Active on cutting
operation, page 171) belonging to C_Routing class.
Select the tool with which to carry out the machining operation directly, only if the lock adjacent to
theThickness field has been removed.

End X; X-axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.

End Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.
Angle [°]; cut angle.

Length; cut length value.

X length; length of the cut in X starting from the position defined in field X.
Y length; length of the cut in Y starting from the position defined in field Y.

Reverse; forces the blade to reverse its direction of movement. When machining the cut the blade
does not begin at the profile start point, but at the endpoint.

Correction; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one of the following
items:
Central, positions the tool axis at the centre of the trajectory (ref. A figure 209).
Right, positions the tool axis to the right of the trajectory (ref. B figure 209) or positions the
trajectory to the right of the tool (ref. C figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.
Left, positions the tool axis to the left of the trajectory (ref. C figure 209), or positions the
trajectory to the left of the tool (ref. B figure 209); this type of correction can be set on the
Setup Machining operations tab.

Initial ext.; distance from the initial position of the cut, used to anticipate the start point of the
machining operation.

430 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Final ext.; distance from the final position of the cut, used to extend the machining operation.

Channel; translation position of the surface to be worked with respect to the main surface of the
piece (figure 222, page 402). For the description of the adjacent TOS field, see the example on
page 401 (data field“Channel”).

Rot. speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed. If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined
in the Std RotSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the tool used for machining.

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std RotSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.

Lowering speed; speed with which the blade moves from the surface of the piece to the position
where the cutting operation A begins (figure 258). When the field is left empty, the system uses the
speed defined in the Std LowSpd field in the Tool parameters dialogue box of the cutting tool used
for the machining operation.

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.
Figure 258

Appr./output speed; speed used by the tool to move from the safety position B and move into
contact with the surface of the piece C, or to leave from the piece at the end of the programmed
cutting operation and return to the safety position D (figure 259). This data is also used in the
stretches for the positioning of the tool. If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined
in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std LowSpd in dialogue box Tool
parameters.

When inserting a value greater than the one defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue
box Tool parameters of the tool used, the optimisation will not be successful.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

431
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 259

B D

Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the blade makes the cut. If the field is left empty, the
system uses the speed defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std
WorkSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters.

(AZ); cut angle of inclination. To change the name of the field, click on the adjacent check box.
(AZ) -abs ; absolute inclination. Define the cut angle of inclination with respect to the absolute
reference, which is perpendicular to side zero of the piece. If the angle is set to absolute, this
allows the blade to maintain the same inclination whichever side of the piece it has to
machine. When defining the angle, remember that it depends on the direction of movement of
the piece.
Figure 260

(AZ) -incr ; incremental inclination. Define the cut angle of inclination with respect to the
perpendicular on the side that is to be machined. If the angle is set to incremental, this allows
the blade to vary its inclination according to the side of the piece to be machined. When
defining the angle, remember that it depends on the direction of movement of the piece.

432 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 261

GIP; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 405 (paragraph “Description of
the fields present in the milling windows”).

ISO instruction; ISO instruction. Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.
OPT ; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 405 (paragraph “Description of
the fields present in the milling windows”).

Total Thickness; total cut thickness.

Vertical runs; number of passages that influence the depth of the programmed machining. For
example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining is split into 2 parts until the depth indicated in
fieldDepth has been reached.

DVR Final run; for the description, see the field with the same name on page 406 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Two-way run; authorises the tool to work in alternate directions when carrying out successive
runs. The tool changes direction each time it makes a new movement. This function is enabled by
clicking on the box.

This function is not taken into consideration if a through operation, divided into several
steps, has been programmed (because the blade is inverted to make the last cut anyway,
regardless of whether this field is enabled or not.

No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

Distance; distance that must be left between one repeat and the next one.

, repeats along the X-axis. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the cuts.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

433
15 Programming the machining operations

, repeats along the Y-axis. Set the following fields:

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the cuts.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the X-Y step. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between the cuts.
Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the cuts.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the angled straight line. Set the following fields:

Angle [°]; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are to be carried out.
L. step; distance between the cuts.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the circumference. Set the following fields:

Start angle; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 346.

Angular step; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 346.
Radius; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 346.
(XRC)X; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 347.
(YRC)Y; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 347.
Radial; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 347.
First Item; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 347.
No.Repeats; see chapter 14 “Creating profiles”, page 347.

CEN Centre; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Spindle; used to indicate the electrospindle with which the machining operation is to be carried
out. This field can be useful when you need to carry out a machining operation with an aggregate/
tool that is only supported by a specific electrospindle. You should check that the electrospindle
chosen is present on the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is
housed in, if it is not the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the
CAM to choose the electrospindle.

AGG Aggregate; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Over-material; value of the excess material that you wish to leave during the cut. The value
indicated in this field is linked to the type of correction (Correction field):

434 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

z With left or right correction, when a negative value is set the tool removes more material and
when a positive value is set the tool will remove less material.
z With a central correction, when a negative value is set the machine operation is moved
sideways to the right of the programmed trajectory and when a positive value is set the
machining is moved to the left of the programmed trajectory.

Reverse the cutting direction; forces the blade to make the cut (ref. c) reversing its direction of
movement (ref. a, figure 262), known as the “default direction”. Whatever the programmed
direction of the machining operation (ref. d, figure 262), the blade direction of movement will be
reversed.
Figure 262: a = blade default direction b = blade direction of rotation, which determines the default direction;
c= direction travelled by the blade when carrying out the machining operation, which is the opposite to the
default direction; d= programmed direction of drawing.

Possible reversing of the cut; enables a change in the blade direction of movement. If the
programmed cut goes from right to left (ref. d, figure 263), but the default direction of the blade is
from left to right (ref. a, figure 263), the CAM will reverse (ref. c, figure 263) the blade start point so
that it cuts correctly using its proper direction of movement (ref. a, figure 263). It is recommended
that this field be activated to prevent errors during program optimisation, as the programmed
direction of the drawing does not always correspond to the default direction of the blade.
Figure 263: a = blade default direction; b = blade direction of rotation, which determines the default direction;
c = direction travelled by the blade when carrying out the machining operation; d = programmed direction of
drawing.

Blade radius correction; enables the correction of the lead-in and lead-out blade radius from the
piece. The CAM performs a series of calculations, allowing the blade to start and finish the
machining operation at the programmed points.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

435
15 Programming the machining operations

When the check box is enabled, the blade effects the cut by moving down to the start point of the
machining operation with its lower tip A (figure 264). When the check box is disabled, the blade
effects the cut by moving down to the start point of the machining operation with its side extremity
B (figure 264).
Figure 264

Hood position: hood position during machining operation. This data can only be utilised on
machines with the special device for correcting the hood position. Input a value from 1 to 6: value
1 represents the highest position of the hood, value 6 the lowest. The value 0 enables automatic
positioning of the hoods, which is managed according to the machining data set.
If the value entered is not compatible with the settings defined in the machining operation, the
hoods will in any case be positioned at a limit height automatically worked out on the basis of the
defined data.

Chip cleaning by blowing; enables or disables the use of the blower to remove from the piece
the chips eliminated during machining operations.

(COW)Generate opp. mach.; for the description see the field of the same name in paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 411.

To save the settings and close the machining windows, click on button . To close the windows
without saving, click on button .

436 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

15.5 Programming "insertions"

This paragraph describes the procedures relating to programming "insertions". The insertions are
all those materials that can be applied to the piece, such as mounting plates, hinges, guides,
suspension brackets, etc.
To insert these materials you must use the command INSERT when using the material insertion
function on pre-arranged pieces, or the command INSERTG when creating a drawing with the
shape of the material to be inserted, to which a milling operation then an insertion operation will be
attributed.

z To program a machining operation using the INSERT command, click on , position the
cursor in the commands area on an empty line and click on .

Figure 265: dialogue box Insertion

z To program machining operations, using a geometric profile created using the GEO command

and describing the shape of the material to be inserted, click on , position the cursor in the
commands area on an empty line and click on . This button is used to enter the string with
the INSERTG command in the commands area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

437
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 266: dialogue box Insertion from geometry

Description of the fields present in the insertion windows

CRN; piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.

SIDE; piece side. Write the side number in the data field, or select it on the figure above.
Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual insertion. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the insertion icon.

X; X-axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is to be made.

Y :Y-axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is to be made.

Geom. identif.; code identifying the drawing. Select the drawing that represents the insertion to be
made on the piece from the codes in the list.

Depth; depth of the machining operation.

Tool type; pre-set type identifying insertions. Select the one required. In the case of an inactive
field, click on the lock next to the field Diameter.

Tool code; pre-set list of materials to be inserted in the piece. Select the one required. In the case
of an inactive field, click on the lock next to the field Diameter.

Channel; translation position of the surface to be worked with respect to the main surface of the
piece (figure 222, page 402).

Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the tool carries out the machining operation. If the field is
left empty, the system uses the speed defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining:
field Std WorkSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters.

ISO instruction; ISO instruction. Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.
OPT; insertion optimisation. Tick the box to enable optimisation of the insertion. If the box is not
ticked, the “INSERTG” programming row will be carried out in the order set down in the Editor

438 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

application software commands area. If the box is enabled, the optimiser carries out a calculation
and modifies the sequence of execution in the programming row.

, repeats along the X-axis. Set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres along the X-axis that defines the distance
between machining operations.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.

, repeats along the Y-axis. Set the following fields:

Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y-axis that defines the distance
between the machining operations.
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.
Machine; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 424 (paragraph 15.3
“Programming boring operations”).

Diameter; insertion diameter. To enter the diameter value, lock the adjacent padlock by clicking on
the check box.

CEN Centre; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Spindle; used to indicate the electrospindle with which the machining operation is to be carried
out. You should check that the electrospindle chosen is present on the machine or that it is
compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is housed in, if it is not the optimisation will not be
successful. The empty data field authorises the CAM to choose the electrospindle.

AGG Aggregate; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

To save the settings and close the window, click on button . To close the window without
saving, click on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

439
15 Programming the machining operations

15.6 Programming piece tracing

Thickness tracing is carried out on the piece in order to obtain the co-ordinates of a point to be
used as a reference when programming machining operations. It is normally carried out on pieces
with a shaped and not perfectly straight surface.

To enter the piece tracing command between the programming rows, click on , position the
cursor in the commands area on an empty line and click on .

Description of the fields present in the box Probe

X; co-ordinate along the X-axis of the tracing start point.
Y; co-ordinate along the Y-axis of the tracing start point For tracing on the horizontal faces, you can
choose whether to perform it midway through the piece thickness or indicate the Y co-ordinate. In
the former case, enable the check box next to the button; in the latter case, disable the check
box and enter the required position.

Channel; translation position of the plane to be traced with respect to the piece main plane (figure
267). Leaving the value set to 0, tracing is carried out on the piece main plane.
Figure 267

Tracer type; type of thickness tracer to be used to carry out the tracing operation.
0 = type A thickness tracer, used for vertical tracing (figure 268).
1 = type B thickness tracer (RENISHAW), used for vertical and horizontal tracing (figure 268) or C
thickness tracer tool that can be fitted on the electrospindle.

440 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 268

Dis. correction; used to disable correction of piece dimensions.

TSpd; thickness tracing speed.
Tool code; pre-set list of thickness tracers in the database.

Tool class; tool class.

ISO parameter; used to insert an alphanumeric identification value to show the row with the QTS
parameter in which the thickness tracing position is stored, in the ISO generated file. For example,
when PP1 is input the following string: PP1 = QTS appears in the ISO generated file.

CEN Centre; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

Spindle; used to select the electrospindle enabled when fitting the C thickness tracer tool (see
figure 268). If there are no lists in the field, it means that, in the electrospindles technical data, no
electrospindle has been enabled to use the thickness tracer, i.e. that the C_TRACING class has
not been indicated as a class for any electrospindle (see paragraph 7.1 “Technical data of spindles
T, TH and TP” on page 196). If there are electrospindles in the list, it is advisable to check that the
electrospindle selected is present on the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine where
the thickness tracer to be installed is housed; otherwise, the optimisation will not have good
results.

AGG Aggregate; for the description, see the field of the same name on page 408 (paragraph
“Description of the fields present in the milling windows”).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

441
15 Programming the machining operations

15.7 Positioning statements for the work table

objects
It is also possible to enter the instructions for programming the movement of the work table (EPS)
objects, called “positioning instructions”, in one single machining program.

Positioning instructions can also be modified or entered in the WorkTableTooling

application software.
To display the Machining operations toolbar where the positioning instructions are specified, click
on .
To enable the left area managing the movement of the objects on the work table in the
WorkTableTooling application software, it is necessary to enter the basic instruction
(WTMOVING) directly from the Editor application software by clicking on button.

z Click on and, in the References field, define the type of reference from where to start
calculating the positioning points:
Relating to the piece = the positioning points are calculated starting from the first corner of the
piece (relative positions). To be used to carry out a parametric positioning.
Absolute= the positioning points are calculated starting from the origin of the work table
(absolute positions). To be used to carry out a non-parametric positioning.
z Explode the Repositioning work table command on the tree list, position the cursor on the
ENDPATH end of machining operation string and add the desired instructions to those
specified in the toolbar Machining operations. The functions can be called up through the
relevant options under the Insert option in the context menu or the menu bar .

Entering the instruction Enable/Disable vacuum

The “WTVACUM” instruction is used to enable or disable the use of vacuum in the required
shapeable suction cup. To enter it, click on .

Description of data fields:

Name; index of the shapeable suction cup to be enabled and index of the mobile support panel
where the suction cup is placed, to be entered between quotation marks (e.g. “1.2”, i.e. suction
number 2 of the first mobile panel support).

Value; used to select one of the following options:

Deactivated = vacuum disabled;
Active = vacuum enabled.

442 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Entering the instruction Open/Close clamp

The "WTUNICLAMP” instruction is used to enable and disable the locking function of the required
Uniclamp clamp. To enter it, click on .

Description of data fields:

Name; index of the Uniclamp clamp to be enabled and index of the mobile support panel where
the clamp is placed, to be entered between quotation marks (e.g. “1.2”, i.e. clamp number 2 of the
first mobile panel support).

Value; used to select one of the following options:

Open = locking disabled;
Closed = locking enabled.

Entering the instruction Mobile support transfer

The “WTPLANE” instruction is used to move the mobile panel supports. To enter it, click on .

Figure 269

The data fields take on different meanings according to the setting selected in the References field
(option Relating to the piece or Absolute) of the “WTMOVING” instruction.
z In the case of absolute movement (Absolute option), the data fields take on the
following meaning:
Name; index of the mobile panel support to be positioned, to be entered between quotation
marks.
Increment Position; used to determine if the data item set in the Position field indicates the
positioning co-ordinate or an incremental positioning value. Yes= incremental value; No =
positioning co-ordinate.
Position; positioning of the mobile panel support in positive direction.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

443
15 Programming the machining operations

• If Yes is displayed in the Increment Position field = the support moves along the X-axis
according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. entering the value 100 and the option Yes
in this field, the support moves 100mm away from the position where it is.
• If No is displayed in the Increment Position field = the support moves to the X position in this
field, with respect to the work table origin; e.g. entering the value 100 and the option No in
this field, the support is moved to the 100 position of the millimetre scale.
Carriage reference; used to select the reference to position the support. Select a reference
type, among those in the list:
• Left; carriage left side (ref. A, figure 270).
• Central; carriage centre (ref. B, figure 270).
• Right; carriage right side (ref. C, figure 270).
Figure 270
X

A B C

z In the case of relative movement (Relating to the piece option), the data fields take on
the following meaning:
Name; index of the mobile panel support to be positioned, to be entered between quotation
marks, connected to the reference origin. In this case, the index 1 support is always next to the
reference origin. E.g. if the reference origin is reference number 4 and the work table is made
up of 4 mobile panel supports, the fourth mobile panel support will have index 1.
Increment Position; used to determine if the data item set in the Position field indicates the
positioning co-ordinate or an incremental positioning value. Yes= incremental value; No =
positioning co-ordinate.
Position; mobile panel support positioning.
• If Yes is displayed in the Increment Position field = the support moves towards corners
number 3 and 4 of the piece according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. (figure 271)
entering the value 100 and the option Yes in this field, the support moves 100mm away from
the position where it is, towards corners number 3 and 4 of the piece.
• If No is displayed in the Increment Position field = the support moves from corner number 1
of the piece according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. (figure 271) entering the value
250 and the option No in this field, the support is positioned 250mm from corner number 1 of
the piece.

444 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 271: Examples

X X

Y Y

Carriage reference; used to select the reference to position the support. Select a reference
type, among those in the list:
• Left; side of the carriage facing towards corners number 1 and 2 of the piece (ref. A, figure
272).
• Central; carriage centre (ref. B, figure 272).
• Right; side of the carriage facing towards corners number 3 and 4 of the piece (ref. C, figure
272).
Figure 272

X o

A B C C B A

Entering the instruction Carriage transfer

The “WTCARRIAGE” instruction is used to move the carriages. To enter it, click on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

445
15 Programming the machining operations

Figure 273

The data fields take on different meanings according to the setting selected in the References field
(Relating to the piece or Absolute) of the “WTMOVING” instruction.
z In the case of absolute movement (Absolute option), the data fields take on the
following meaning:
Name; index of the carriage to be positioned, to be entered between quotation marks.
Increment Position; used to determine if the data item set in the Position field indicates the
positioning co-ordinate or an incremental positioning value. Yes= incremental value; No =
positioning co-ordinate.
Position; positioning of the carriage in Y positive direction.
• If Yes is displayed in the Increment Position field = the carriage moves along the Y-axis
according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. entering the value 100 and the option Yes
in this field, the carriage moves 100mm away from the position where it is.
• If No is displayed in the Increment Position field = the carriage moves to the Y position in
this field, with respect to the origin of the work table; e.g. entering the value 100 and the
option No in this field, the carriage is moved to the 100 position of the millimetre scale.
Carriage reference; used to select the reference to position the carriage. Select a reference
type, among those in the list:
Upper; carriage upper side (ref. A, figure 274).
Central; carriage centre (ref. B, figure 274).
Lower; carriage lower side (ref. C, figure 274).
Figure 274
X

Y A

z In the case of relative movement (Relating to the piece option), the data fields take on
the following meaning:

446 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Name; index of the carriage to be positioned, to be entered between quotation marks,

connected to the reference origin. In this case, the index 1 carriage is always next to the
reference origin.
Increment Position; used to determine if the data item set in the Position field indicates the
positioning co-ordinate or an incremental positioning value. Yes= incremental value; No =
positioning co-ordinate.
Position; carriage positioning.
• If Yes is displayed in the Increment Position field = the carriage moves towards corners
number 2 and 3 of the piece according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. (figure 275)
entering the value 100 and the option Yes in this field, the carriage moves 100mm away
from the position where it is, towards corners number 2 and 3 of the piece.
• If No is displayed in the Increment Position field = the carriage moves from corner number 1
of the piece according to the value indicated in this field; e.g. (figure 275) entering the value
250 and the option No in this field, the carriage is positioned 250mm from corner number 1
of the piece.
Figure 275: Examples
X X

Y Y
2
1

Carriage reference; used to select the reference to position the carriage. Select a reference
type, among those in the list:
• Upper; side of the carriage facing towards corners number 1 and 4 of the piece (ref. A,
figure 276).
• Central; carriage centre (ref. B, figure 276).
• Lower; side of the carriage facing towards corners number 2 and 3 of the piece (ref. C,
figure 276).
Figure 276

X o

Y
A

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

447
15 Programming the machining operations

Entering instruction Start parallel unit and instruction End of

parallel unit
The “WTGROUP” instruction is used to start moving a group of objects, i.e. to indicate which work
table objects to move at the same time (e.g. two mobile panel supports).

To enter it, click on . Enter the “WTEND” instruction to move the supports or the carriages and
stop the unit.

Example:
WTMOVING TYPE=0
WT_GROUP OPEN=NO
WTPLANE OPEN=NO NAME=”4” INCPOS=YES POS=110 REF=refer2
WTPLANE OPEN=NO NAME=”3” INCPOS=YES POS=110 REF=refer2
WT_END
WTCARRIAGE OPEN=NO NAME=”1.3” INCPOS=YES POS=80 REF=refer2 ENDPATH
ENDPATH

Only with this type of instruction is it possible to move, at the same time, several
objects that carry out the same operation; for example, several suction cups in the
locking stage. It is not possible to move objects of a different type at the same time
(e.g. carriages together with supports) or objects that have different functions.

448 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 15 Programming the machining operations

Entering the instruction Bar support

The “WTLIFT” instruction is used to lift or lower the bar supports.
To enter it, click on .

Description of data fields:

Name; mobile panel support index where the bar support to be moved is placed. The index must
be entered between quotation marks.

Value; used to select one of the following options:

Up = high position (supports lifted);
Down = low position (supports lowered).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

449
15 Programming the machining operations

450 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

16 Notes and specifications on
programming

List of topics
• 16.1 “Notes for programming using the chip deflector”
• 16.2 “Notes on programming milling with the sharp corner”
• 16.3 “Specifications for programming milling operations interpolated with C-axis”
• 16.4 “Specifications for programming vertical milling operations in YZ/XZ”
• 16.5 “Specifications for programming milling operations using the AGGRE81 aggregate”
• 16.6 “Specifications for “multiple-run” milling operations”
• 16.7 “Notes for programming a machining operation with the “repositioning””
• 16.8 “Specifications for programming support panel levelling”
• 16.9 “Notes on boring program symmetry”
• 16.10 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items”
• 16.11 “Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin”
• 16.12 “Notes for programming "multi-descent" milling operations”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

451
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.1 Notes for programming using the chip

deflector
The position of the deflector during machining is not checked by the optimiser nor by
the machine. In order to prevent interference with the objects on the work table, it is
advisable to check personally for any potential risk of collision.

You are advised to associate the right deflector with the tool with rightwards rotation
and the left deflector with the tool with leftwards rotation. Failure to do this means the
optimisation is not carried out and the ISO file is not produced.
To enable the display of the chip deflector data, check boxChip deflector in tabMilling data of
Setup.

Create the profile to machine, click on tabAdvanced technological data in the milling window and
fill in the following data fields:

Use deflector; enables use of the chip deflector. The checked and disabled box (with light grey
colour) indicates that a milling cutter with deflector aggregate has been programmed.

Deflector; name of the deflector to be searched for in the list.

The combobox is disabled (with light grey colour) when in field “Tool code” the milling cutter with
integrated deflector is selected. In that case there appears the name of the deflector associated to
the tool, the one in the data field “Deflector” of the dialogue box Tool parameters (paragraph 6.5
“Recording the tools”).

Distance; safety distance between the chip deflector and the surface of the piece being machined
(ref. A, figure 277) or to machine (ref. A1, figure 277).

Thickness [inc]; thickness of material removed (ref. B, figure 277).

Starting distance; distance between the point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path
and the point in which the chip deflector must start turning (ref. C, figure 277).

Final distance; distance between the point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path and
the point in which the chip deflector must stop turning (ref. D, figure 277).

Rotation [%]; rotation of the chip deflector effected from the beginning point of the rotation to the
point of geometric break in the machining trajectory (ref. E, figure 277), expressed as percentage
of the total rotation necessary to turn around the break.

452 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

Figure 277: example

chip deflector

tool

point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path

Corner slow down; reduces the rotation speed of the chip deflector near rounded corners.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

453
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.2 Notes on programming milling with the

sharp corner
z Carry out the following operations on the Setup tab Milling data:

Tick the box Sharp corners.

Input the value of the lead-out angle of the tool from the piece to make the sharp corner in the
Corner angle data field.
z Display the dialogue box Tool parameters relevant to the tool to be used for the machining and
input a value other than 0 in the data field Corner ang..
z Check the box Sharp corners in the milling dialogue box.

z Create the geometry. Choose item sc1 in field Sharp corner of one of the two coinciding
segments that go together to form the sharp corner.

454 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.3 Specifications for programming milling

operations interpolated with C-axis
In order to carry out interpolated milling with the tool at right angles to the profile to be machined,
use the aggregate orientation device (C-axis) and follow the example reported below.

Suppose we need to program a horizontal milling operation as shown in figure 278.

Figure 278

Y X
Z

To do this, proceed as follows:

z Design the geometry on face 0 of the piece; GEO command (ref. A, figure 279).

z Click on button ROUTG to define the milling from geometry (ref. B, figure 279).

Figure 279
A
B

GEO ID=”P1001” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0

ROUTG GID=”P1001” ID=”P1009” Z=0 DP=20 DIA=12 AZ=90 CKA=azrABS CKT=YES OVM=-15

When programming this type of machining, the following fields must be set in dialogue box Milling
from geometry:
Geom. identif.; indicate the identification code of the geometry.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

455
16 Notes and specifications on programming

Depth; indicate the depth of the horizontal milling; how far the tool enters in the piece.
Tool code; indicate the type of tool mounted on the aggregate to use.
Correction; indicate the type of correction which, in this case, does not indicate the tool radius
correction but instead indicates the position of the aggregate with respect to the profile and its
direction of movement. Consequently, if the machining moves in an anticlockwise direction
and the aggregate must be positioned to the right of the profile, use option Right.
Lead-in Type; choose option None, because this type of machining operation does not require
the indication of the type of lead/in.
Lead-out type; choose option None, because this machining operation does not need to
indicate the type of lead-in.
Channel; indicate the machining start point on the Z axis, i.e. the distance from the upper
surface of the piece.
(AZ) -abs ; indicate the inclination angle of the tool with respect to the Z-axis. To carry out
horizontal milling, enter the number 90.
Over-material; indicate the value of the surplus material. A positive value moves the point of
the tool towards the outer edge of the piece, a negative value moves the point of the tool
towards the inside of the piece.
Enable TCP; check the box to enable the use of the C-axis.

This type of machining can only be enabled on NC version 2001 upgrade 13.

456 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.4 Specifications for programming vertical

milling operations in YZ/XZ
To carry out linear or curved pocketing on the upper surface of the piece, as shown in figure 280,
follow the instructions reported below.
Figure 280

Y X
Z

z Create the geometry/machining on the side faces or on the non-standard faces.

z Define the following data fields:

Geom. identif.; indicate the identification code of the geometry.

Depth; indicate the depth of the vertical milling; how far the tool enters the piece.
Tool code; indicate the type of tool to use.
Correction; select option Central.
Lead-in Type; choose option None, because this type of machining operation does not require
the indication of the type of lead/in.
Lead-out type; choose option None, because this machining operation does not need to
indicate the type of lead-in.
Channel; indicate the point on the Z axis where to start machining. Distance from the side face
of the piece or from the non-standard face.
(AZ) -abs ; indicate the inclination angle of the tool with respect to the Z-axis. To carry out
non-inclined milling, enter the number 0.
Over-material; indicate the value of the surplus material. A positive value moves the tip of the
tool towards the outer extremity of the piece.

The L=GTPON fixed cycle called up by parameter PTCP=1 appears in the ISO file generated in
the milling string .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

457
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.5 Specifications for programming milling

operations using the AGGRE81
aggregate
The position of AGGRE81 (EX AGGRE42) aggregate during machining is not checked
by the optimiser nor by the machine. In order to prevent interference with the objects
on the work table, it is advisable to check personally for any potential risk of
collision.

Before executing the machining program, enable the use of the AGGRE42 aggregate by
ticking the box Show description in the operations windows in the Setup tab Editor windows
.

When programming machining operations using the AGGRE42 aggregate, in order to position the
tool under the piece, the system needs to know towards which side of the piece the aggregate
must move when descending (see figure 281).
The lead-in of the aggregate under the piece is obtained by checking the Aggr21 angle box (milling
dialogue box), entering, in the adjacent field, the angle related to the corner on which the
machining operation is programmed, and entering in the Aggr21 face field, the number of the face
towards which the aggregate is directed to enter the piece.

For example, with corner 1 defined as reference corner, it is necessary to insert the following
angles:
0 = to make the aggregate descend below the side 1.
90 = to make the aggregate descend below the side 4.
180 = to make the aggregate descend below the side 3.
270 = to make the aggregate descend below the side 2.
Figure 281: aggregate descent under side 4 of the piece.

458 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.6 Specifications for “multiple-run” milling

operations
The programming of milling divided into several runs has limitations if the data field Two-way run
has been enabled. The function Two-way run does not generate errors and functions correctly
performing the same number of operations as input in field Vertical runs or in field Horizontal runs,
only observing the following settings:
z Field Correction: option Central.

z Field Lead-in Type: option None.

z Field Lead-out type: option None.

z Field Starting Z; value 0.

z Field End Z; value 0.

z Field Sharp corners: disabled .

In the case where field Two-way run has been enabled and field Correction has been defined with
option Right or option Left, the system generates an error and the machining is not carried out.

Notes to be complied with just for the horizontal/vertical multi-runs.

For programming the milling with the vertical spindle divided into several passes to be carried out
horizontally and vertically along the surface of the face, observe the following devices:

1. In data field Correction choose option Left (ref. B, figure 282) or optionRight (ref. C, figure
282). Option Central is only acceptable if mention is made in field Lead-in Type of option
None.

2. Input in data field Horizontal runs the number of passes (ref. B or C, figure 282).

3. Indicate in data fieldHorizontal step the distance between one pass and the next one (ref. D,
figure 282).
Figure 282: A = geometry; B = 10 passes with left correction; C = 10 passes with right correction;
D = distance between one pass and the next.
B C

A A

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

459
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.7 Notes for programming a machining

operation with the “repositioning”
The data regarding the positioning of the tool inside a programmed machining operation is defined
in the dialogue box to generate the line (command Line given end point).
During the creation of the geometry, to generate a tool positioning trajectory, it is necessary to
create a linear segment (ref. A, figure 283) with the command Line given end point and it is
necessary to choose the option YES in data field Repositioning.
Figure 283: A = linear segment for positioning the tool; B = machining operations.

B B
A
B
B

To ensure that the program is optimised, the following settings are necessary:
z In data field Correction select option Central.

z In data field Lead-in Type select option None.

460 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.8 Specifications for programming support

panel levelling
z Displays the Piece variables dialogue box.

z Enter a value over 1000mm in the LPX and LPY fields.

z Enter a value below 20mm in the LPZ field.

z Click on and check the Levelling cycle activation field.

z The machining depth value in the machining program for support panel levelling must not
exceed 10mm.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

461
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.9 Notes on boring program symmetry

Notes only valid for machines with more than one origin.

When the machine works on the mirror origin, it uses the mirror origin for each programmed
spindle. If the program has been declared as being symmetrical (check boxSymmetry in dialogue
box Piece variables enabled) and the boring programmed using straight spindles is carried out in a
single descent, in order to ensure that the same machining operation also functions on the mirror
origin, the tools installed in the symmetrical spindles must be the same as those installed in the
straight spindles, as the CAM automatically searches for the symmetrical spindles. If, instead, the
program has been declared as being non-symmetrical, the programmed boring has no restrictions
and as such the CAM searches for the spindles with the programmed tools.

For this reason, when creating a machining program, it is important to remember that the machine
behaves in a different manner according to the settings defined in dialogue box Piece variables
(see chapter 13 “Management of the machining program”).
z With field Sole origin enabled, the program is automatically considered as non-symmetrical.
When a straight origin is selected, the created ISO file stores the list of spindles as they were
created by the CAM, while if a mirror origin is selected, the created ISO file stores the list of
mirror spindles taking them from the list of spindles produced by the CAM.
z With field Symmetrydisabled, when the straight origin is selected as the origin, the machine
only carries out the programmed machining operations on the straight origins, whereas if the
mirror origin is selected as the origin, the machine only carries out the programmed machining
operations on the mirror origins.

462 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.10 Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and

lead-out data items
z When setting option Line as the tool lead-in and lead-out data item, the following procedure
must be adopted:
In field Correction select option Right or option Left.
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between -180 and 180.
z When setting option Curve as the tool lead-in and lead-out data item, the following procedure
must be adopted:
In field Correction select option Right or option Left.
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between -90 and 90.
z When setting option Corrected 3DLine or option Corrected 3DCurve as the tool lead-in and
lead-out data item, the following procedure must be adopted:
In field Correction select one of the three options.
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between 0 and 90.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

463
16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.11 Notes for milling operations on the mirror

origin
Enabling field Exports the symmetric section in dialogue box Customised panel parameters
exports the data for effecting the machining to the mirror origin. The generated ISO file will have
two sections, one for the straight origin and one for the mirror origin. In the mirror origin, the profile
is inverted, though the direction of the path of the milling cutter is the same as that defined in the
profile loaded on the straight origin.
Figure 284: A=straight origin; B=mirror origin.
X
A B
Y

It is advisable to set identical types of tool lead-in and type of lead-out, in that on the mirror origin
these settings do not produce any inversion. In fact, when the profile is overturned, the lead-in data
item becomes the lead-out, and vice versa.

464 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 16 Notes and specifications on programming

16.12 Notes for programming "multi-descent"

milling operations
To program machining operations to be carried out with two electrospindles that operate at the
same time, observe the following strategies:

1. Define some data items in the Setup Optimiser tab:

• enable the Enable multiple electrospindle lowering field and indicate the tolerance data item
(e.g. 2mm) in the Multiple lowering tolerance field.
• select the Optimisation type option in the By Timebox.

2. Make sure the parameters (ref. A and B, figure 285) of the two tools to be used for the two
machining operations are identical.
Figure 285: A = tool class and type; B = tool dimensions.

3. Make sure that the tools are present in the magazine and that the two electrospindles are
enabled to use said tools.

4. Create the program (see the example below), defining the following compulsory data items:
• disable the Symmetry field in the Piece variables dialogue box;
• make sure that the two geometries are identical and that their distance is equal to the
distance between centres of the two electrospindles.
• Enter the same machining operation depth value (Depth field), the same correction type
(Correction field) and the same rotation speed (Rot. speed [rpm] field) in both milling
operations. §
Select a tool in the Tool code field for the first milling operation and the same one (with the
same parameters described in point 2 ) for the other milling operation.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

465
16 Notes and specifications on programming

Example program:
Creation of two milling operations, to be carried out with the tools “PORI” and “PORI_C”.

GEO ID=”001” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0

START_POINT X=100 Y=100 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=100 YE=400
ENDPATH
GEO ID=”002” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0
START_POINT X=460 Y=100 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=460 YE=400
ENDPATH
ROUTG ID=”P1044” GID=”001” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20

ROUTG ID=”P1045” GID=”002” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20

466 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

17 Macros

In BiesseWorks the term “macro” is used to define programs saved with the extension BSM, which
can be called up and used within other documents (BPP files). Macros can thus be programmed
and automatic parameter setting can be obtained in them just like a BPP program, except for the
fact that they cannot contain user sides, that is to say the sides of a piece obtained by
transformation of the geometry.

List of topics
• 17.1 “Creating macros”
• 17.2 “Description of the dialogue box List of macros”
• 17.3 “Opening, modifying and saving the macro”
• 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”
• 17.5 “Inserting macros into the program”
• 17.6 “Macros for cleaning the hoods”
• 17.7 “Horizontal aggregate boring macro”
• 17.8 “Macros for unloading the electrospindle”
• 17.9 “Macros to create sharp corner”
• 17.10 “The macros to enable/disable the roller presser”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

467
17 Macros

17.1 Creating macros

The instructions for creation and application of macros are explained using special guided
exercises, in which reference is made to a macro with automatic parameter setting, to be used to
obtain “diamond” shaped pieces by milling. The macro and the drawing will both be given the
conventional name “Diamond”.
Figure 286:

Creation
Macros are obtained from programs, starting a guided procedure that allows a new or existing
machining program to be save with extension BSM.

How to create the “diamond” macro

1. Create a new document (see paragraph “Creating the document” on page 288), using the
dimensions LPX=800 (mm), LPY=500 (mm) and LPZ=12 (mm). Save using extension BPP to
avoid losing the data during the creation of the drawing.

2. Create two global type variables (see paragraph 19.2 “Managing the variables” on page 495)
to calculate the length (XX) and the angle (KK) of side 3:
AA=400
BB=250

468 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

3. Create two local type variables, from which to obtain values to be used subsequently to draw
the “diamond” figure:
XX=SQR((AA*AA)+(BB*BB))
KK=ATN(BB/AA)*(180/PI)
The global constant PI represents the symbol π (pi), which has a value of 3.1415926535...
SQR and ATN are VBScript functions (see appendix C)

4. Define the geometry with the name “diamond” and set the co-ordinates for the start point of the
diamond as follows: X= 0; Y=BB (see“How to insert the start point (START_POINT)” on page
343).

5. Click on and then on to draw the first line (3) of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as
indicated in the following figure.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

469
17 Macros

6. Click on to draw line 4 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.

7. Click on to draw line 5 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.

8. Click on , to draw line 6 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.

9. Select the geometry in the graphics area, click on and then on to apply a milling
operation to the geometry “diamond”, as indicated in paragraph 15.2 “Milling programming” on
page 390. Check that the programming rows correspond to the ones indicated below.
GEO ID=”diamond” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO
START_POINT X=0 Y=AA
LINE_LNAN L=XX AA=KK
LINE_LNAN L=XX AA=-KK
LINE_ANYE AA=KK YE=0
LINE_ANXE AA=-KK XE=0
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID=”diamond” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=10 THR=YES

10. To save the program as a “macro” file with extension BSM, open the macro dialogue box and
follow the instructions provided (see “Saving the operation”).

470 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

Saving the operation

To save the program using the extension BSM, select the File menu and the Create Macro option.
Figure 287: dialogue box Step 1/3 of MacroWizard

1. Enter in the data field Macro namethe name of the macro file without an extension (BSM),
which is added automatically at the end of the save operation.

2. Enter the title of the command in the data field Menu text and toolbar tooltip to recall the macro
to be used.

3. Set the file containing any information on use of the macro in the data field Help file name.
This setting is not compulsory.

4. Click on to continue.

5. Select in the data fieldName of the toolbar bitmap the bitmap to associate with the macro for
the toolbar.

6. Check box Show the button on the toolbarto create the macro button in the appropriate toolbar
(the dimensions of the button must be 32X32 pixels).

7. Select the bitmap image in data field Name of the help bitmap.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

471
17 Macros

8. Create the customised bitmap image using button . This setting is optional (the
dimensions of the image must be 288X224 pixels).

9. Click on to continue.

10. Indicate in the main box Special parameters common to all operationsthe boxes for the
parameters to include in the dialogue box of the macro created:
• Technological data (DIA DP OPT ...); enter the machining operation technological
parameters.
• Macro from geometry (GID); enter the data field Geom. identif. to search for the drawing ID
code.
• Side (SIDE); enter the part to indicate the piece reference corner.

• Corner (CRN); enter the part to indicate the side on which to apply the machining operation.

• ISO (IIS); enter the ISO data field.

11. In the box List of global variables, enable the type variables Global that you want to indicate in
the dialogue box of the macro created. In this case, recalling the macro, it will be possible to
modify the values of the chosen variables.

12. Click on to continue.

13. Check that the data and setting in window MacroWizard - Summaryare all correct.

472 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

14. Click on to terminate saving of the macro.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

473
17 Macros

17.2 Description of the dialogue box List of

macros
To display the dialogue box List of macros, close all the files open, select the menu Fileand the
option Macros.
Figure 288: dialogue box List of macros

z Enabled macros; shows the list of the enabled macros.

z Disabled macros; shows a list of all existing macros to be enabled.

z ; opens the selected macro and displays its content in the Editor application software.

z ; deletes the selected macro from the list Disabled macros. The macro will also be deleted
from the original folder (Biesse\BiesseWorks\Editor\Macros\....).

z ; closes the dialogue box and saves any settings made.

474 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

17.3 Opening, modifying and saving the macro

z To open a macro in order to display its content in the software interface, display dialogue box
List of macros (see paragraph 17.2 “Description of the dialogue box List of macros”, page
474), select the macro to open with a double click of the mouse or select it with a click of the
mouse and click button . The contents of the macro will be displayed in the application
software; make the necessary modifications and save the macro.
z To save the macro, select the menu Fileand the option Macro properties....
Follow the indications given below:
• Enable or disable the required variables in the appropriate table.

• To overwrite the macro, click on the button . To create another one with a new name,
input the new name in the relevant field and fill in the required fields (for the description of
the fields, see “Saving the operation”).
• To overwrite the modified macro when adding new variables type Global, tick the box
Activate compatibility. The activation of this parameter makes the modified macro
compatible with the old programs that contain it.

17.4 Activation/deactivation of the macros

To activate/deactivate the macros to be inserted in the active document, i.e. to display or not the
macros commands in the toolbar, in the dialogue box Call Macro and in the Insert Editor
application software menu, display the dialogue box List of macros (see paragraph 17.2
“Description of the dialogue box List of macros”, page 474) and observe the following indications:
z To enable or disable macros commands, select the items present in window List of

macros(see figure 288) and use the button or button to move them in the area
Enabled macros or in the area Disabled macros.
z To enable or disable all at the same time, click on the first option, press SHIFT on the PC

keyboard and then click on the last option, press either or .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

475
17 Macros

17.5 Inserting macros into the program

To insert a macro between programming rows of the active document, use one of the following
methods:
z Display windowCall Macro by clicking menuInsert and option Macros.
Double click on the icon of the desired macro and, if necessary, edit the data field. This
procedure is used to insert macro quickly into the active document.
Remember to enable the macros (see paragraph 17.4 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”),
otherwise the content of the above window will be void, i.e. the required commands will be
absent.

z Click on the button to recall the desired machining operation (boring, milling etc.). Click on
and select the button relating to the macro to insert.

• ; “HOOD_CLE” macro (see paragraph 17.6 “Macros for cleaning the hoods”).

• ; “No PRK” macro (see paragraph 17.7 “Horizontal aggregate boring macro”).

• ; “UNLOAD_T” macro (see paragraph 17.8 “Macros for unloading the electrospindle”).

• ; macro “PRE_RULLI” (see paragraph 17.10 “The macros to enable/disable the roller
presser”).

• ; macro “PRE_RULLI” (see paragraph 17.10 “The macros to enable/disable the roller
presser”).
Enter the data.
z Click on the menu of the required machining operation (boring, milling, etc.). Click on the
option for the macro and the command for the macro to be inserted. Enter the data.

476 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

17.6 Macros for cleaning the hoods

The macro “HOOD_CLE” is used to clean the hoods at the end of machining operations. To insert
the macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.5 “Inserting macros into the
program”.

Description of fields
CYCLES; the number of times the hood moves up and down during its cleaning cycle. Enter the
number value between the two ends.

SPINDLE ; number identifying the electrospindle on which the hoods to be cleaned are mounted.
Enter the number value between the two ends.

17.7 Horizontal aggregate boring macro

The “No PRK” macro is used to reduce the job time when carrying out repeated operations on side
faces of the piece with the same aggregate. Each time the machining is carried out with the
aggregate on a side face, before going to the next machining operation, the aggregate goes to its
park position, thus notably slowing down the machining time. The “No PRK” macro has been
created to by-pass this problem.

To insert the macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.5 “Inserting macros
into the program”. Fill in the ABL data filed; this type of function is enabled with the value 1.

The following instructions must be followed to ensure that the macro works:
z the machining operations must be consecutive;

z the machining operations must be programmed for the same face of the piece;

z the machining operations must be carried out using the same aggregate and the same tool.

z two macros must be inserted between the programming rows: one marking the start of the
machining operations and one marking the end, as in the following example.
NOPRK ABL=1
BH SIDE=1 CRN=”1” X=20 Y=20 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=10 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=3
BH SIDE=1 CRN=”4” X=20 Y=20 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=10 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=3
NOPRK ABL=0

With this macro active, the aggregate is brought into the parking position if there is a tool change
or if the machining operation has been programmed on different sides of the piece. For example, if
two machining operations have been programmed, one on side 1 and one on side 2 of the piece,
in this case the aggregate carries out the machining on the first side, moves to the parked position
and then carries out the machining on the second side.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

477
17 Macros

17.8 Macros for unloading the electrospindle

The “UNLOAD_T” macro is used to automatically tool-down the electrospindle at the end of the
machining operation.
This macro must be inserted at the end of the program, i.e. as the final string between the
programming rows.

The insertion of this macro between the programming rows could jeopardise the execution
of the program.

To include the “UNLOAD_T” macro in the document observe the procedure described in
paragraph 17.5 “Inserting macros into the program”.

478 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

17.9 Macros to create sharp corner

The “CORNER_SHAPING” macro is used to clean up the internal angles of the piece by
eliminating the excess material left by the mill during the machining operation to create a sharp
corner. To call it up, click on the button and on the button. The
“CORNER_SHAPING_START” macro must be called up only once, since it enables the
operation of the “CORNER_SHAPING” macro .

The following paragraphs describe the parameters specific to the macro. For a description
of the technological parameters in the dialogue box; see paragraph 15.2 “Milling
programming” (page 390).

POSX; X position of the angle vertex to be machined, in order to create a sharp corner (see figure
289).

POSY; Y position of the angle vertex to be machined, in order to create a sharp corner (see figure
289).

SPUL; length to be travelled by the mill to clean up the excess material and create a sharp corner
(see figure 289).
Figure 289

XY spul

ANG; orientation to define the position along the profile where the corner to be cleaned up is
placed. This angle allows to specify the direction of the tool (see figure 290).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

479
17 Macros

Figure 290

0°;360°

90°

270°

180°

The following instructions must be followed to ensure that the macro works:
z Set the Central option in the Correctionfield:

z It is recommended to set the Corrected 3DLine option in the Lead-in Type field.

z Set the None option in the Lead-out type field:

z The mill used must be at least twelve millimetres thick and the cutting edge inclined three
degrees in relation to the spindle axis of rotation (see figure 291).
Figure 291

3°

12

480 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 17 Macros

17.10 The macros to enable/disable the roller

presser
The macro “PRE_RULLI” is used to bring the roller presser A (see figure 292) to the working
position, taking it from the specific support B positioned between the work table and the unloading
pallet. To insert the macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.5 “Inserting
macros into the program”.

The macro “PRK_RULLI” is used to park the roller presser A (see figure 292) depositing it on
the specific support B positioned between the work table and the unloading pallet. To insert the
macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.5 “Inserting macros into the
program”.
Figure 292

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

481
17 Macros

482 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

18 Importing graphic/
technological files

BiesseWorks can be used to import two-dimensional figures known as “profiles”, created using
external CAD systems.
Table 8: list of importable files.

File to be imported Importable data

DXF The geometric profile and the technology are imported.

CID The geometric profile and the technology are imported.

CIX The geometric profile and the technology are imported.

NC code Only the geometric profiles and technology of the boring operations are
imported.

Two different modes are available to carry out the import procedure:
z Automatic mode.

z Manual mode.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

483
18 Importing graphic/technological files

18.1 Automatic mode

Automatic mode must only be applied if the files to be imported contain not only geometrical
information regarding the drawing, but also technological information, that is to say data relating to
machining of the piece.

To carry out an automatic import, click on , or position the cursor in one of the two areas of the
application, display the context menu and select Automatic import.... Find the file to be imported
using the relative Windows pop-up. In the case of DXF, CID and CIX files that do not contain
machining data, import may not be successful; if this is the case a short text message will be
displayed indicating why the operation has failed.

To automatically import a DXF file, the specific Setup tab has to be set for the type of
formalism applied during the design stage (see “Tab DXF Definition” on page 139).

484 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 18 Importing graphic/technological files

18.2 Manual mode

Manual mode allows a preview of the files to be imported to be displayed, so as to decide whether
to transport the drawing geometry data only, or the piece machining data as well into the Editor
graphics area.

To automatically import technological DXF files, the specific Setup tab has to be set for the
type of formalism applied during the drawing stage (see “Tab DXF Definition” on page 139).

To carry out this procedure, display the import area A (figure 293) using the cursor B (figure 293).
Click on button ; alternatively, search for the command in menu File or use item Manual
import... in the context menu. Select the file to be imported in the relative Windows pop-up and
select one of the following options:

Technological; used to import the file contents, transporting both the geometric data for the
drawing and the technological data relating to piece machining operations.

Geometric; used to import the file contents, transporting the geometric data for the drawing only.
Figure 293

To carry out the import operations, use the context menu or the buttons on the Technology toolbar.
For a description of the Technology toolbar, see “Description of buttons”, page 76.
For a description of the context menu, see page 486.

Structure of the import area

When a file is imported, the import area visualises an image made up of two drawings: drawing B
represents the geometry and possibly the piece created using CAD; drawing A reproduces the
characteristics of piece C, as defined in the graphics area. This reproduction (ref. A) allows a
visual comparison between the dimensions of the imported drawing B and the actual dimensions
of piece C in the graphic area.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

485
18 Importing graphic/technological files

Figure 294

Import area context menu

Description of the context menu options:

Manual import...; displays the Windows pop-up used to find the files to be imported.

Layer; displays the window with a list of the layers (levels) making up the drawing.

Delete; clears the import area, deleting the image.

Move; moves the drawing B (figure 294) away from the reproduction of the piece A (figure 294).

Scale; reduces the drawing B (figure 294) by the percentage required.

Rotate; rotates the drawing B (figure 294).

Centre; carries out horizontal or vertical centring, aligning the piece A with the drawing B (figure
294).

Import as; transports the selected drawing elements into the graphics area. The following is a list
of available options:
Bore; imports the selected element as a boring operation.
Cut; imports the selected element as a cutting operation.
Milling; imports the selected element as a milling operation;
Geometry; imports the selected element as a geometric drawing without technological data;
Insertion; imports the selected geometry (circle or rectangle) as the machining operation.
Straight side; imports the selected element, transforming it into a side of the piece with a flat
surface.
Circular side; imports the selected element, transforming it into a side of the piece with a
curved surface.

486 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 18 Importing graphic/technological files

Piece size; imports the selected element as if it were a side of the piece. This command allows
the dimensions of the piece C (figure 294) to be changed.

Import piece size; imports - into the editor graphic area - the piece dimensions as taken from the
file opened in the import area. This option can only be displayed if the file being imported contains
technological information.

Import; imports - into the editor graphic area - the geometries selected from the file opened in the
import area, defining them as machining operations. This option can only be displayed if the file
being imported contains technological information.

Properties; displays the window with the characteristics of the selected element.

Find paths; joins the selected segment to the following ones belonging to the same object.

Importing the drawing as piece sides

To modify the characteristics of the piece in the graphics area, select segment A, B or C and click
on or on the option Piece size in the context menu. Select the options: LPX for segment A,
LPY for segment B, LPZ for segment C.
Figure 295

Before proceeding with the above operation it is recommended that you centre the drawing,
aligning it (ref. A, figure 294) with the reproduction of the piece (ref. B, figure 294) using the
command Centre in the context menu.

Importing the drawing as a cutting operation

To introduce a circular blade cutting operation into the graphics area, select one or more elements
in the drawing (e.g. ref. A, figure 296) and click on or on the option Cut in the context menu.
Click on the button to import the data from the drawing. To define new parameters or modify
those indicated in the drawing, use the fields of the appropriate dialogue box.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

487
18 Importing graphic/technological files

Figure 296

Importing the drawing as a boring operation

For the boring operations, it is possible to visualise - in the import area - the circular or rectangular
geometries present in the imported files. The rectangular ones are automatically interpreted by the
system as bores to apply to horizontal faces.

Circular drawings
To introduce into the graphic area a boring operations represented as circular drawings, select one
or more circles (e.g. ref. A , figure 297) and click on or on the option Bore in the context menu.
Click on button to import the data from the DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify
those indicated in the drawing, use the fields of the appropriate dialogue box.
Figure 297

Rectangular drawings
These drawings are interpreted by the system as horizontal bores where the diameter is
represented by segment A (figure 298) and the depth by segment B (figure 298). In the graphic
area, the imported bore is shown in reference C (figure 298).

488 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 18 Importing graphic/technological files

To introduce this type of machining operation into the graphic area, select one side only of the
rectangle, the one where the bit enters, and click on or the context menu option Bore. Click on
button to import the data from the DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify those
indicated in the drawing, use the fields of the appropriate dialogue box.
Figure 298

B
C
A

Importing the drawing as a milling operation

To introduce a milling area into the graphics area, select the profile drawn (e.g. ref. A) and click on
or on the option Milling in the context menu. Click on button to import the data from the
DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify those indicated in the drawing, use the fields of
the appropriate dialogue box.
If the profile is made up of a number of segments, to select it all, click on a single segment, display
the context menu and select the option Find paths.
Figure 299

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

489
18 Importing graphic/technological files

Importing the drawing as a flat surface

To transform a segment into a side of the piece with a flat surface by importing it into the Editor
graphics area, select the straight segment (e.g. ref. A) and click on .

Figure 300

Importing the drawing as a curved surface

To transform a segment into a side of the piece with a curved surface by importing it into the Editor
graphics area, select the curved segment (e.g. ref. A) and click on .

Figure 301

Consulting the layers in the imported files

To refer to the list of levels generated in the imported document in the graphic area of the Editor
application software, visualise the Layer management dialogue box by clicking on the button
(see figure 302).

490 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 18 Importing graphic/technological files

Figure 302

Apart from showing the list of levels, this box allows you to hide the geometric profiles visualised in
the graphic area of the Editor application software. For a detailed description, see paragraph
“Managing the levels (layers)”, page 295.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

491
18 Importing graphic/technological files

492 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

19 Variables and VBScript
instructions

List of topics
• 19.1 “Variables”
• 19.2 “Managing the variables”
• 19.3 “Using the variables”
• 19.4 “Predefined VBScript instructions”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

493
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

19.1 Variables
The term variables is used to indicate a size or amount that can take on different values.
BiesseWorks distinguishes three types of variable: Environment, Global and Local.
z The variables of the Environment type are valid in all BiesseWorks programs/macro. Each
modification will have an effect on all the programs/macros in which these variables are
inserted. It is therefore recommended that you avoid making modifications to this type of
variable.
z The Global type variables are only valid in the program/macro in which they are created. They
can be modified from the outside on a temporary basis, for example in the variables table of a
program in a list or in the variables table of a macro inserted in a program.
z The Local type variables are only valid in the program in which they are created, and cannot
be modified from the outside. This type of variable includes those whose value echoes other
variables created (e.g. created as type Global).
The variables declared between the programming rows using the VBScript syntax also belong
to this type of variables, however, unlike the others, they cannot be modified from the dialogue
boxProgram variables - [%1], but only from the programming row in which they are located.
Caution: if the name of a variable indicated in the window Program variables - [%1]and the
name of a variable declared between the programming rows correspond, the value indicated
in the latter will be considered valid.

Piece variables
The “piece variables” are the parameters of the BiesseWorks software that may also be included in
the same variables. These variables are managed differently from the others, both when
displaying and when modifying them.
If they are included in a program that is called up in a list, their values can be modified temporarily,
like global variables. The parameters known as “piece variables” are listed below.

Parameter Text in the dialogue box Description

CKOP Movement in X; Allows movement of the origin to be

Movement in Y; enabled.
Keyboard offset

CUSTSTR User data Used to indicate customised parameters.

FCN Measure in inches Used to set the unit of measurement:

0=millimetres, 1=inches.

JIGTH Jig thickness Jig thickness.

LPX LPX Piece dimension along machine axis X

(length).

494 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 19 Variables and VBScript instructions

Parameter Text in the dialogue box Description

LPY LPY Piece dimension along machine axis Y

(width).

LPZ LPZ Piece dimension along machine axis Z

(thickness).

MATERIAL Material Used to indicate the name of the piece

material.

ORLST Origins list Used to indicate the list of origins (use the
comma as separator).

SYMMETRY Symmetry Used to enable symmetry during machining

of the piece.

TLCHK Used to enable optimisation on the current

tooling: 0=enabled, 1=disabled. Not active.

TOOLING Used to indicate the tooling. Not active.

UNICLAMP Uniclamp enables the use of the Uniclamps. 0 =

DISABLED; 1 = ENABLED.

UNIQUE Sole origin Used to enable the sole origin (0/1).

XCUT X cut. position Safety position along machine X-axis for

automatic suspension of the machining
operation.

YCUT Y cut. position Safety position along machine Y-axis for

automatic suspension of the machining
operation. Not active.

19.2 Managing the variables

Variables are managed (created, deleted, ordered, saved, etc.) in the Program variables - [%1]
dialogue box. To display it, click on or select the Programmenu, option Variables.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

495
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

Figure 303: Window Program variables - [%1]

z Environment option button; used to manage only the Environment type variables.

z Global option button; used to manage only the Global type variables.

z Local option button; used to manage only the Local type variables.

z All option button; used to manage all the 3 variable types.

Creating the variables

When creating the name of the variable, bear in mind the following rules:
z it must never start with a number, but always with a letter of the alphabet;

z it must not contain spaces and other special characters (e.g. operators such as: +; <; >; -; x;
etc.);
z it must never contain more than 255 characters;

z it can be written either in capitals or in lower case letters.

When creating the value of the variable, bear in mind the following rules:
z it can be a number;

z it can be an expression containing pre-set variables (e.g.: LPX; LPY etc.) or variables created
by the same operator. The variables that have an expression constructed with variables
(example: VARIAB=VARX1+VARX2*2) as a value must always be inserted after the variables
contained in them.

The expressions can be constructed bearing in mind all the arithmetical operators that are
accepted by VBScript (see “Arithmetical operators”, page 497).

To create programs that are easier for other users to read and interpret, it is recommended that
you give logical names to variables. For example, a variable that has to contain or calculate the

496 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 19 Variables and VBScript instructions

number of repeats can be called “nrRep”, where “nr…” indicates the number and “…Rep” stands
for repeats.

Follow the procedure below to create variables:

1. Select the option button that corresponds to the type of variable you wish to create.

2. Click on to add a new row.

3. Fill in the data fields on the row. Type the name of the variable in the column Name; caution, to
ensure that the program operates correctly, give the variables different names from the ones
indicated in appendixes B and C.

In the column Value enter the value of the variable. In the column Description type a comment
(not compulsory).
In the column Type select the attribute that defines use of the variable:
• Distance; defines the value as a distance that can be processed during conversion from
millimetres to inches and vice versa;
• Generic; indicates that the value defines itself automatically according to the context in
which it finds itself, for example in the case of support variables;
• Whole; defines valid the whole part of the value only, without taking into consideration any
decimals, i.e. numbers after the comma;
• Real; defines valid both the whole part of the value and any decimals, i.e. numbers after the
comma;
• String; indicates that the value must be considered as text only;
• Speed; defines the value as a speed that can be processed during conversion from
millimetres to inches or vice versa.

4. Save the modifications by clicking on .

Arithmetical operators
As well as normal alphanumeric characters, BiesseWorks allows the value of a variable or a data
field to be defined using a set of “standard” calculation characters, and the special calculation
functions foreseen by the VBScript language.

List of standard arithmetical operators

Character Mathematical operation Syntax

+ Addition X+X or (X)+(X)

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

497
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

Character Mathematical operation Syntax

- Subtraction X-X or (X)-(X)

* Multiplication X*X or (X)*(X)

/ Division X/X or (X)/(X)

List of main VBScript calculation functions

Function Mathematical operation Syntax

Abs Calculate the absolute value of “X” Abs(X)

Atn Calculate the tangent arc of “X” Atn(X)

Cos Calculate the cosine of “X” Cos(X)

Int Calculate the whole part of the value of “X” Int(X)

Sgn Calculate the algebraic sign of “X” Sgn(X)

Sin Calculate the sine of “X” Sin(X)

Sqr Calculate the square root of “X” Sqr(X)

Tan Calculate the tangent of “X” Tan(X)

List of “advanced” VBScript arithmetical operators

Description of the Example of syntax

Character Result of the example
operator (a=5, b=2)

\ Whole division c=a\b 2

Mod Module c=a Mod b 1

^ Raise to the power of c=a^b 25

& String chain c=a & b 52

498 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 19 Variables and VBScript instructions

List of VBScript comparison operators

Character Description of the operator

= Equal to

>= Greater than or equal to

<= Less than or equal to

<> Other than

< Less than

> Greater than

List of VBScript logic operators

Character Description of the operator

Not Negation

And Logic conjunction

Or Logic disjunction

Ordering the variables

To arrange the variables in sequential order, select them and then click on or .

Modifying the type of variables

To change the type of a variable, select it and then click on . Select the new type to be
assigned to the variable and then click on .

Updating the list

Select the list of variables by clicking on the corresponding option button, and then click on .

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

499
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

Deleting
Select the variable to be deleted and then click on .

Deleting the variables displayed

To delete the variables of the active type, i.e. those displayed through one of the four option
buttons mentioned above, click on .

Deleting type Environment variables affects the entire program where they are
included. Before removing them therefore, you are advised to always check whether
there are programs containing this type of variable.

Saving variables
To save modifications, click on ; to cancel modifications, click on .

Printing a list of variables

Select the list of variables by clicking on the corresponding option button, and then click on .

19.3 Using the variables

To obtain automatic parameter setting in a program, enter the variables created for that purpose in
the data fields. Each program can be fully or partially parameterised, according to the result you
wish to obtain. If the variables are only entered in certain data fields then program parameter
setting will be partially automatic.

Displaying and identifying the available variables

For complete viewing of all the available variables, click on or select the menu Program >
Variables and access the Program variables - [%1] window.

To display them all simultaneously, click on the option button All. The variables of the Global type
have a (blue) icon , those of the Local type have a (blue) icon and those of the Environment
type have a (red) icon .

500 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 19 Variables and VBScript instructions

19.4 Predefined VBScript instructions

The VBScript instructions allow operations to be carried out solely under certain conditions. For
less experienced users, BiesseWorks allows the syntax of certain VBScript instruction, indicated
below, to be inserted in the programming rows. Subsequently, the instructions inserted will have to
be completed manually by entering or defining any variables and relative values.

In view of the widespread use of VBScript (Visual Basic Scripting) as a programming language,
certain functions only are indicated in this manual, and the consultation of texts dealing more
specifically with this subject is suggested for those wishing to go into greater depth.

Instruction “For…Next”
The instruction For…Next allows a block of instructions or programming rows to be repeated for
the number of times indicated. In For cycles a counter variable is used, the value of which is
increased or decreased each time the cycle is repeated.
The instruction For specifies the counter variable i and the relative start and end values.
The instruction Next increases the counter variable by 1.

In the following example the syntax is set up to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm):
Figure 304: example of a syntax used to create a repeat.

AxisToAxis is the variable created to define the

distance between the centres of each bore;

Limit is the variable created to define the

maximum limit for repeats of the bore;

Dim i,Limit,AxisToAxis
AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
For i=1 to Limit step 1
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=100+AxisToAxis*i Y=80 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=5
Next

Conditional instructions “If…Then” and “If…Then…Else”

The instructions If…Then…Else allow a specific instruction or a block of instructions to be run,
based on the value of a condition that can be true or false.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

501
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

In the example that follows the syntax is set to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm) only if the condition LPX=>LPY*2 is true, that is to say if the size of piece along
the X-axis (LPX) is equal to or higher than the result of multiplying the size of piece along the Y-
axis by 2 (LPY*2).
If the condition is not met, the instruction For…Next is not carried out and the program moves on
directly to interpret the row following End If.
Figure 305: example of a syntax used to create a repeat.

AxisToAxis is the variable created to define the

distance between the centres of each bore;

Limit is the variable created to define the

maximum limit for repeats of the bore;

Dim i,Limit,AxisToAxis
LPX=600
LPY=300
AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
If LPX=>LPY*2 Then
For i=1 to Limit step 1
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=100+AxisToAxis*i Y=80 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
Next
End If

In the following example the key word Else, which signifies “otherwise”, is used, that is to say if the
condition If is not met the programming rows after Else and up to End If are interpreted. In this
case a bore with a diameter of 20 (mm) and a depth of 10 (mm) is created at the centre of the
piece.
Figure 306

502 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 19 Variables and VBScript instructions

If LPX<LPY*2 Then
For i=1 to Limit step 1
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=100+AxisToAxis*i Y=80 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
Next
Else
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=LPX/2 Y=LPY/2 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=20
End If

Instruction “While…WEnd”
This carries out a series of instructions for as long as a specific condition is found to be true, after
which it terminates the operation.
Thus, if the condition is true, all the instructions up to Wend are carried out. After this the condition
is checked again and, if it is still true, the process is repeated. If the condition is no longer true the
programming rows after Wend will be interpreted.

The cycles While…Wend can be nested at any level. Each instruction Wend corresponds to the
most recent instruction While.

In the following example the syntax is set up to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm):
Figure 307: example of a syntax used to create a repeat.

AxisToAxis is the variable created to define the

distance between the centres of each bore;

Limit is the variable created to define the

maximum limit for repeats of the bore;

Dim i,Limit,AxisToAxis
AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
i=0
While (i<Limit)
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=200+AxisToAxis*i Y=180 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10
i=i+1
Wend

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

503
19 Variables and VBScript instructions

504 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

20 Planning DXF files

This chapter introduces the rules to be followed when creating profiles saved in DXF format so that
the various geometrical elements can be imported into the BiesseWorks document and recognised
as technological elements.
BiesseWorks is only able to interpret files in 2D type DXF format, commonly known as DXF-2D.
The various geometric elements in a DXF file can be associated with additional information to
allow them to be recognised as machining operations. Thus, a circle can only be interpreted as a
bore if the string that identifies the layer associated with it contains the boring data.
Geometric elements with no layer are interpreted as simple geometries.

When planning a DXF file that can be used in BiesseWorks, it is necessary to use certain
“formalisms”, that is to say a set of rules that define the structure of layers and the syntax used to
import them to the Editor application software. These formalisms are of two types:
z BIESSE type formalism;

z CNI type formalism.

List of topics
• 20.1 “List of drawing commands”
• 20.2 ““BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism”
• How to represent the piece (page 513)
• How to represent bores (page 519)
• How to represent cuts (page 524)
• How to represent a milling operation (page 524)
• Using blocks (page 525)
• 20.3 ““CNI DXF” type formalism”
• How to represent the piece (page 532)
• How to represent bores (page 532)
• How to represent cuts (page 534)
• How to represent milling operations (page 535)
• Using blocks (page 535)
• 20.4 “How to set the formalism”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

505
20 Planning DXF files

20.1 List of drawing commands

When creating geometries using general CAD systems, in order for them to be imported into the
BiesseWorks Editor application, the following commands must be used:
z Command for creating lines;

z Command for creating multilines;

z Command for creating closed polygons (rectangles, squares, stars, etc.);

z Command for creating arcs (arcs for three points, arcs with angle, etc.);

z Command for creating circles and ellipses.

Do not use the FreeForm (SPLINE) commands, i.e. the commands that create free form
curves.

506 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

20.2 “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism

This paragraph explains how to associate each element in the drawing created using a generic
CAD with layers, so that they can be imported correctly to the Editor application software, using
the setting BiesseWorks DXF (see “How to set the formalism” on page 537).

The layers are the “levels” present in the CAD which allow one drawing to be separated from
another, and each layer can be named by inserting numbers and keys. The operation to be carried
out thus relates to the procedure used to name the layer in such a way that the drawing associated
with it will be interpreted correctly.

To create the layers there are two different procedures:

z “Creating layers with the customised keys” (page 507).
z “Creating layers with the commands of the Editor application software” (page 527).

Creating layers with the customised keys

The string (name) of the layer created in the DXF to be imported must be created using the keys
defined in the DXF Definition Setup tab (see“Customising the layer keys”), and must be formed as
follows:
z Keys: used to define the type of geometry and certain technological data, and can be
customised within the DXF Definition Setup tab (see“Customising the layer keys”).
z Numbers: used to define the geometric and technological values (see“Customising the layer
keys”).

To create the layers, observe the following rules:

z Each layer must start with the key TCH.

z Each layer can contain linear dimensions for piece side depth, thickness, diameter and height,
which can be expressed in millimetres or in inches. Decimal figures must always be indicated.
When the values are expressed in millimetres it is necessary to specify 2 decimal figures:
when they are expressed in inches it is necessary to specify 4 decimal figures.
For example:
to indicate a depth of 30.5mm, enter D3050, where 50 is a 2 figure decimal value;
to indicate a diameter of 5mm, enter D500, where 00 is a 2 figure decimal value;
to indicate a diameter of 2.5 inches, enter 25000, where 5000 is a 4 figure decimal value.
z Each layer can contain linear velocities relating to working speed and descent speed, which
can be expressed in mm/min or in inches/min. When indicating the value for these speeds, if
they are expressed in mm/min the decimals need not be indicated, whereas if they are
expressed in inches/min it is necessary to indicate 2 decimal figures.
For example:
to indicate a speed of advance of 12000 mm/min for a tool, enter F12000;
to indicate a speed of advance of 5000 inches/min for the tool, enter F500000, where 00
represents the 2 decimal figures.
z Each layer can contain the rotation speeds, which are expressed as rpm.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

507
20 Planning DXF files

z The alphanumeric values must start and end with the separator character.
For example: the characters MN$MACRO1$ within a layer indicate that the parameter MN has
a value of MACRO1.

The keys indicated in the examples for the “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism help
explain how to generate the layer syntax and are reported in table 9, page 508.
Due to the fact that they can be customised, the keys reported in the Setup table may
not correspond to those listed in table 9.

Customising the layer keys

In order to customise the layer keys, display tab DXF Definition of Setup. By default, each
parameter of the table corresponds to a key (see figure below).
Figure 308

Table 9: List of table parameters to which a key must be associated for insertion in the layer syntax of the DXF
files when needing to store geometric and technological data in the files interpreted by the system during
import. The keys indicated as examples are the default keys displayed in the Setup table.

Parameters Keys

MacroName Key indicating the macro (e.g. MN).

Face Key (e.g. W) indicating the standard piece side. The number to be
associated with this key is shown in“Sides of the face” on page
510.

Generic face Key (e.g. WG) indicating the general face, to be used for defining
all the faces. See“Creating and naming standard panel faces” on
page 514.

508 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Parameters Keys

Work Key (e.g. B) indicating the type of machining. The number to be

associated with this key is shown in “Types of machining operation”
on page 511.

Tool correction Key (e.g. TC) indicating the tool correction. The number to be
associated with this key is shown in“Tool correction” on page 511.

Working speed Key (e.g. F) indicating the feed speed of the tool in mm/min or
inches/min.

Rotation speed Key (e.g. S) indicating the rotation speed of the tool in rpm.

Depth Key (e.g. D) indicating the depth or the position of the tool in z in
the machining in mm or inches.

Thickness Key (e.g. TH) indicating the thickness of the tool in mm or inches.

Diameter Key (e.g. DI) indicating the diameter of the tool in mm or inches.

Lowering speed Key (e.g. DES) indicating the descent speed of the tool in mm/min
or inches/min.

Direction Key (e.g. DIR) indicating the machining direction. The number to be
associated with this key is shown in“Tool direction” on page 512.

Through Key (e.g. PT) indicating through machining; 0 = no = default; 1 =

yes.

Tool class Key (e.g. TCL) indicating the tool class; code as per database. The
number to be associated with this key is shown in“Tool class” on
page 512.

Tool code Key (e.g. TCD) indicating the tool code; alphanumeric value.

Tool type Key (e.g. TTY) indicating the type of tool; alphanumeric value.
The number to be associated with this key is shown in“Tool type”
on page 513.

AR Key (e.g. AR) indicating angle AR expressed in degrees, no

decimals.

AZ Key (e.g. AZ) indicating angle AZ expressed in degrees, no

decimals.

Face height Key (e.g. HF) indicating the height of the general face in mm or
inches. See“Creating and naming generic faces” on page 516.

Origins list Key (e.g. LO) indicating the list of origins, alphanumeric value.

Symmetrical Program Key (e.g. PS) indicating the symmetrical program.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

509
20 Planning DXF files

Parameters Keys

Aggregate tooling Key (e.g. AA) used to indicate the aggregate tooling to which the
aggregate tooling file name must be associated.

Machine tooling Key (e.g. AM) used to indicate the machine tooling to which the
machine configuration file name must be associated.

Magazine tooling Key (e.g. AS) used to indicate the magazine tooling to which the
magazine tooling file name must be associated.

Lead-in: %tool radius Key (e.g. IP) indicating the percentage value with which to modify
the tool lead-in radius.

Lead-in: angle Key (e.g. IA) indicating the tool lead-in angle.

Lead-in: type Key (e.g. IT) indicating the type of tool lead-in. The number to be
associated with this key is shown in“Tool lead-in/lead-out” on page
512.

User panel Key (e.g. CP) indicating the customised parameters of the piece
(custom parameters).

Tool rotation Key (e.g. TR) indicating the direction of rotation of the tool.

Lead-out: %tool rad. Key (e.g. OP) indicating the percentage value with which to modify
the tool lead-out radius.

Lead-out: angle Key (e.g. OA) indicating the tool lead-out angle.

Lead-out: type Key (e.g. OT) indicating the type of tool lead-out. The number to be
associated with this key is shown in“Tool lead-in/lead-out” on page
512.

Sides of the face

Associate the side number to the parameter key Face indicating the face of the piece using the
numbering shown in figure 309.

510 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Figure 309: Numbering piece sides (faces).

Types of machining operation

The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter keyWork.

Code Machining operation

1 Milling (see “How to represent a milling operation”, page 513)

2 Bore (see “How to represent bores”, page 519)

3 Cut (see “How to represent cuts”, page 524)

8 Piece (see “How to represent the piece”, page 513)

Tool correction
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter keyTool correction.

Code Correction

0 Absent (pre-set)

1 Left

2 Right

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

511
20 Planning DXF files

Tool direction
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter keyDirection.

Code Direction

0 Direction indicated in the drawing

1 Direction opposite to that in the drawing

Tool lead-in/lead-out
The following table shows the list of numbers to be associated with the key of the Lead-in: type
parameter and theLead-out: type parameter.

Code Type of lead-in/lead-out

0 None

1 Curve

2 Line

3 Tg LineCurve

5 Helix

6 3DLineCurve

7 Corrected 3DLine

11 Corrected 3DCurve

Tool class
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter keyTool class.

Code Class

0 C_Drilling

1 C_Routing

2 C_Cutting

512 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Tool type
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter keyTool type.

Code Types

0 NORMAL (boring tools)

1 LANCE (boring tools)

2 COUNTER SUNK (boring tools)

3 NORMALEG (boring tools)

100 CANDLE (mills)

101 SHAPED (mills)

102 ROUT0 (mills)

103 ROUT1 (mills)

104 - 111 ROUT2 - 9 (customised mills)

200 CUTT0 (blades)

201 CUTT1 (blades)

202 - 209 CUTT2 - 9 (customised blades)

250 HEAD0 (trimming blades)

251 HEAD1 (trimming blades)

How to represent the piece

The piece should be geometrically represented by a closed rectangle through the use of the
command to generate closed polygons, lines or polylines (see paragraph 20.1 “List of drawing
commands”).
To create the piece, use one of the following methods:
z using a single rectangle, to which the three dimensions (width, thickness, height) are
assigned. The dimensions relating to the length of the piece along the X and Y axes are
provided directly by the geometry, whereas the thickness must be inserted in the layer
associated with the rectangle. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero.
Example:
To draw a panel with dimensions 1000 x 300 x 30.20 (mm), it will be necessary to associate a
rectangle 1000mm wide and 300mm high with the layer TCHW0B8D3020:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

513
20 Planning DXF files

W0; W = parameter key Face; 0 = face number.

B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece.
D3020; D = parameter key Depth; 3020 identifies the value, i.e. 30.20 mm (the last two
numbers represent the obligatory decimals).
Figure 310

z using a number of rectangles, to create the standard sides of the piece or lines internal to side
zero associated with rectangles to create generic sides of the piece (see paragraphs “Creating
and naming standard panel faces” and “Creating and naming generic faces”). A layer must be
associate with each side created.
Standard sides are the 6 sides of the piece: the top, bottom and side faces. Generic sides
are the sides created by the user.

For piece recognition, always insert the parameter key (e.g. B) and the value 8 (e.g. B8) in the
layer associated to the rectangle describing the single face Work.

Creating and naming standard panel faces

The standard panel faces can be created in two different ways:
z with rectangles drawn around face 0 of the panel. The external segments of the rectangles are
the ones that are considered as reference sides to define the surfaces and direction of the
panel face (see corner 2 ref. A figure 311).
Figure 311:

1 0 3

z With rectangles drawn under face zero of the panel (see figure 312). The bottom segments of
the rectangles are the ones that are considered as reference sides to define the surfaces and
direction of the panel face (see corner 2 ref. B figure 312).

514 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Figure 312:

1
B
2

The parameter key Generic face (e.g. WG) can be used to define any face, while parameter key
Face(e.g. W) can only be used to define the 5 standard faces of the piece when they are
represented by a central rectangle and by rectangles drawn around it (figure 311).

The syntax to be used to create the layers differs according to the type of creation.

If the length of the side faces (ref. 1, 2, 3 and 4) constructed as rectangles does not coincide with
the length of the segments of the rectangle for face 0 (ref. A, B, C and D), the length of the
segments of the rectangle for face 0 will be considered valid (figure 313).
Figure 313
D

A 0 C

Examples:
z If the faces are drawn around face 0 (see figure 311), then face 1 must be associated with the
layer TCHW1B8:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number.
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

515
20 Planning DXF files

z If the faces are drawn under face 0 (figure 312), then face 1 must be associated with the layer
TCHWG1B8:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
WG1; WG = parameter key Generic face; 1 = face number.
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece.

Creating and naming generic faces

A generic face must be represented by a line or an arc, according to whether it is a straight or
circular face. The arcs and lines must be drawn inside face 0, in the exact point in which a new
side of the piece is to be created.
The layer must indicate the key for the generic face and the identification number for the new side,
and it must provide the height of the side. If the height is not indicated, the height of the panel will
be used.

Example:
To create a generic linear face associated with a line drawn inside face 0 of the piece with a height
of 30mm, the face must be associated with the layer TCHWG6B8HF3000:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
WG6; WG = parameter key Generic face; 6 = face number (ref. 6 figure 314).
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece (obligatory).
HF3000; HF = parameter key Face height; 3000 identifies 30mm (the last two numbers
represent the obligatory decimals).
Figure 314

1 0 3

The surface of the machinable side of the piece is determined by the direction in which segment 6
shown in figure 314 is drawn. The direction of the segment thus has a start point P1 and an
endpoint P2. The part of the segment that identifies the machinable face (ref. A and B, figure 315)
is the one that goes from the start point P1 to the endpoint P2 (on the left of the segment along
direction P1-P2). It is possible to force one corner of the segment by drawing a circle around it,
defining it as the start point. This operation cancels the order in which the corners of the segment
were drawn, so that the machinable face will always be recognisable.

516 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Figure 315: Machinable surface of face 6 (ref. A and B) identified by the start point.

P1 A P2

6 6

0 P2 0 P1
B

Figure 316: Forced setting of the segment corner to establish the start point P1, i.e. the machinable surface of
face 6 (ref. C).

P2 C

0 P1

When an arc is created to represent a generic curved face, the system interprets it as if it were
created anticlockwise irrespective of the direction of what has been created. For this reason it is
advisable always to use forcing, i.e. the circle to establish the arc initial vertex (figure 317).
If for example, we wish to create an arc going from P1 to P2, figure 317, in a clockwise direction.
The system will interpret P2 as the first vertex of the arc and P1 as the second vertex; therefore, to
establish the vertex P1 as the first vertex of the arc, it is necessary to using forcing on P1 to mark
it with a circle.
Figure 317: Arc vertex forcing to establish the start point P1

P2

P1

Machining operations on generic faces

If the generic face is to contain machining operations, it must not only be drawn as a line/arc inside
the piece, but also as a horizontal rectangle located under face 0 of the piece. In this case different
layers must be assigned to the line/arc identifying the face and to the rectangle.

To create generic faces with identification numbers higher than 5, always use parameter key
Generic face, (e.g. WG) and draw the rectangle that represents them under face 0 or adjacent to it,

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

517
20 Planning DXF files

with corner 2 facing towards the bottom left hand corner of the rectangle.
The dimensions of the rectangle drawn to represent the generic face do not have to coincide with
those of the segment (line or arc) associated with them, as this value will be detected from the
segment geometry and layer.

Example:
If the line or arc describing the position of the face has a layer named TCHWG6B8HF3000, the
rectangle that represents it and on which the machining operations are to be carried out has a
layer named using the same code used for the line, which may or may not include the face height
data (H3000); it is thus possible to use two types of code, code TCHWG6B8HF3000 or code
TCHWG6B8.
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
WG6; WG = parameter key Generic face; 6 = face number.
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece (obligatory).
HF3000; HF= parameter key Face height; 3000 identifies the value, i.e. 30mm (the last two
numbers represent the obligatory decimals).

518 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

How to represent bores

Bores can be represented in two different ways:
z by a circle, which can be drawn directly on the standard or generic faces created as
rectangles. In this way it is possible to machine bores with the vertical spindle on face 0 or on
face 5 of the panel (see “Vertical bore represented by a circle”), and bores with the horizontal
spindle on side 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the piece or on the generic sides (see “Horizontal bore
represented by a circle”).
Figure 318

z by creating a rectangle or a closed polygonal line. In this case the rectangle must be created
directly on face 0 of the piece, and indicates a bore to be applied to the relative side face, for
example face 4 of the piece. This method can be used to machine bores with the horizontal
spindle on side 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the piece (see “Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle”).
Figure 319

Vertical bore represented by a circle

The vertical bore, which can be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the piece, must be represented
by a circle, which must be drawn inside the rectangle representing the face required.

The diameter of the bore is given by the diameter of the circle, whereas the depth must be
specified in the layer. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero. The bore application
point coincides with the centre of the circle.

Example:
To create a bore with a depth of 25.5 mm on face 0 of the piece, associate the bore drawing with
the layer TCHW0B2D2550:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W0; W = parameter key Face; 0 = standard face number.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

519
20 Planning DXF files

B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.

D2550; D = parameter key Depth; 2550 = identifies the value, i.e. 25.50mm.

Horizontal bore represented by a circle

A horizontal bore can be represented by a circle drawn on one of the side faces of the piece.

The diameter of the bore coincides with the diameter of the circle, while the depth must be
specified in the layer.

Example:
To create a bore with a depth of 25.5 mm on face 3 of the piece, associate the bore drawing with
the layer TCHW3B2D2550:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W3; W = parameter key Face; 3 = standard face number.
B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.
D2550; D = parameter key Depth; 2550 = identifies the value, i.e. 25.50mm.

Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle

When a bore is created using a rectangle, the diameter and bore depth are obtained from the
geometry. The diameter is indicated by the length of segment A (figure 320) made on segment C
(figure 320) which represents face 1 on which to machine the bore, whereas the depth is indicated
by the length of segment B (figure 320). The point of application is given by the midpoint of the
segment representing the bore diameter.
Figure 320 shows a rectangle drawn on side 0 of the piece, to be interpreted as a bore to be
machined in side 1 of the piece.
Figure 320

A
B
C
0

To indicate the point at which the bore must be machined, type the value of the distance between
the bore and the top side of the face in the string for the layer associated with the bore rectangle. If
this value is not set, the bore will be considered by default to be positioned half way down the
panel thickness.

Examples of horizontal boring:

z To represent a horizontal bore to be machined on face 1 at a position equal to half the
thickness of the piece, drawn as a rectangle on face 0, associate the drawing with layer
TCHW1B2:

520 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.

W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number (side face).
B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.
z To represent a horizontal bore machined on face 1 at a distance of 20mm from corner 1 of the
face, drawn as a rectangle on face 0, associate the drawing with layer TCHW1B2D2000:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number (side face).
B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.
D2000; D = parameter key Depth; 2000 = identifies the value, i.e. 20.00mm.
Figure 321: example of how to interpret the rectangle created on face 0.

SP1
X A, bore;
20 mm B, face 1;
Y A 20mm; distance of bore from top side
of face.
B

Should you wish to apply a milling groove on the piece within which to machine a bore, the milling
groove is represented by the distance (ref. A) between the bore application point and side 1 (ref.
B) of face 0.
Figure 322: example of a milling groove.

B
0

Angular bore
The BIESSE formalism makes it possible to define inclined bores. To identify these bores it is
necessary to provide the application point and the angles AR and AZ. The following figure shows
the angles AR and AZ.
Angle AR represents rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y.
Angle AZ represents the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation with respect to plane X,
Y.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

521
20 Planning DXF files

Figure 323: Angles AR and AZ

Angular bores can be illustrated by a circle, a rectangle or a closed polygonal line on the 0 face.

Angular bore represented by a circle

If the angular bore is represented by a circle, the depth and the angles AR and AZ must be
specified in the layer.

The pre-set value for angles AR and AZ is zero.

Example:
To create a bore applied to face 0 of depth 10mm, angle AR 45° and angle AZ 30°, associate the
layer TCHW0B2D1000AR45AZ30 to the hole drawing.
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W0; W = parameter key Face; 0 = face number.
B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.
D1000; D = parameter key Depth; 1000 identifies the value, i.e. 10mm (the last two numbers
represent the obligatory decimals).
AR45; AR = parameter key AR; 45 = angle value.
AZ30; AZ = parameter key AZ; 30 = angle value.

Angular bore represented by a rectangle

If the angular bore is represented by a rectangle, the diameter is given by the length of the first
side, the one between corners 1 and 2 (ref. A, following figures), and the depth is given by the
length of the second side, the one between corners 2 and 3 (ref. B, following figures).
The angle of inclination is between the second side and the positive X-axis, similarly to the CNI
formalism. In this case the corners of the rectangle must be drawn in the correct order. If the angle
AZ is other than zero, this must be specified in the layer.

To specify the side of the rectangle that represents the diameter, it is possible to use a line to be
drawn on this side (see figure 325).

522 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Figure 324: Definition of the diameter of an inclined rectangular bore using the order of corners.

3 4

4 B 1
2 A 3
A
1 2
B

Figure 325: Definition of the diameter of an inclined rectangular bore using a line.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

523
20 Planning DXF files

How to represent cuts

A cut is represented geometrically by a line. The layer associated with the line is used to specify
not only the type of machining operation and the face on which it is carried out, but also the cut
depth and other technological parameters.

If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.

The BIESSE formalism can therefore also be used to manage cuts on the side faces.

Example:
To create a cut applied to face 2, depth 15mm and width 2mm, associate the following layer
TCHW2B3D1500TH0200 to the drawing:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W2; W = parameter key Face; 2 = face number.
B3; B = parameter key Work; 3 = identifies the cut.
D1500; D = parameter key Depth; 1500 identifies the value, i.e. 15mm (the last two numbers
represent the obligatory decimals).
TH0200; TH = parameter key Thickness; 200 = identifies the value, i.e. 2mm.

How to represent a milling operation

A milling operation can be represented geometrically by lines, arcs, circles and closed or open
polygonal lines.

The layer associated with the geometric elements is used to specify not only the type of machining
operation, but also the milling depth and other technological parameters (tool descent speed, tool
type, etc.). If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.

Example:
To create a milling operation on face 1 depth 10mm, associate layer TCHW1B1D1000 to the
drawing:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number.
B2; B = parameter key Work; 1 = identifies the milling.
D1000; D = parameter key Depth; 1000 identifies the value, i.e. 10mm (the last two numbers
represent the obligatory decimals).

When creating a drawing that is to be used to carry out machining operations, if every geometric
element in the drawing is to be given specific technological data for milling, associate a different
layer with each element, for example TCHW0B1DP1000 ref. B, TCHW0B1PT1 ref. C,
TCHW0B1DP2000 ref. D. To ensure that all the geometric elements in the drawing form part of the

524 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

same milling operation, associate a single layer with the whole drawing, for example
TCHW0B1DP1000 ref. A.

A B C

The BIESSE formalism can also be used to manage milling operations on the side faces.

Using blocks
Blocks can only be used to represent bores. For a block to be recognised as a bore it is necessary
to enter information on the diameter, depth, tool characteristics, etc. in the symbols section of the
BIESSE format DXF file.
Figure 326: Definition of symbols in the software settings (Setup)

The block must be drawn directly on the destination face; the face must be specified in the layer.

It is not possible to draw a block on face 0 of the panel and then specify in the layer that the bore is
on another face.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

525
20 Planning DXF files

unit of measurement
It is possible to import DXF files expressed using the following units of measurement:
z millimetres;

z inches.

If the geometric data are expressed in millimetres, the unit of measurement for the data in the layer
must be millimetres. If the geometric data are expressed in inches, the unit of measurement for the
data in the layer must be inches. The two units of measurement must not be used simultaneously.
The blocks are an exception to this, and follow the rule whereby if the units of measurement in the
drawing in which the block is used are expressed in inches, the values for ‘Diameter’ and ‘Depth’
set in the setup program must be such that:
z the value assigned to the diameter is expressed in millimetres,

z the value assigned to the depth is expressed in inches.

According to the unit of measurement used it will be necessary to specify a certain number of
decimal figures. The following table summarises the various situations.

unit of Number of compulsory

Dimension expressed in the layer
measurement decimal figures

Millimetres Depth 2

Millimetres Thickness 2

Millimetres Diameter 2

Millimetres Face height 2

Millimetres Pocket depth 2

Millimetres Working speed 0

Millimetres Descent 0

Inches Depth 4

Inches Thickness 4

Inches Diameter 4

Inches Face height 4

Inches Pocket depth 4

Inches Working speed 2

Inches Descent 2

526 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

Creating layers with the commands of the Editor application

software
z The string (name) of the layer created in the DXF to be imported must be produced using the
keys and values:
Keys: these allow you to define the type of machining operation and the type of technological
parameter. The keys to be used are the programming commands and parameters used by the
Editor application software (see appendix B). In this case, the programming parameters can
also be mixed with the customised keys (see paragraph “Creating layers with the customised
keys”).
Values: these allow you to define the geometric and technological data, and must be written in
the following way:
• The strings must start and end with the separator character.
For example: TCD$tool name$, where $ represents the separator character defined in the
“String separator” field of the Setup (see “Tab DXF Definition”, page 139).
• The whole numbers must be written without a point. For example: (DP)12, where 12
represents 12 millimetres.
• The decimal numbers must be written with a point. For example: (DP)12.34, where 12.34
represents 12.34 millimetres.
z To create the layers, observe the following rules:

Each layer must start with the key TCH.

Each key relating to the programming commands must be written between square brackets,
e.g. [ROUT], [BG], [CUT_G], etc. To view the complete list of programming commands, see
appendix B.
Each key relating to the parameters must be written between round brackets, e.g. (SIDE),
(DIA), (CRN), (DP), etc. To view the complete list of programming parameters, see appendix
B.
z To create the geometry in the DXF, see the paragraphs listed below, but without taking into
consideration the examples (as they are created using the customised keys):
• “How to represent the piece” (page 513)
• “How to represent bores” (page 519)
• “How to represent cuts” (page 524)
• “How to represent a milling operation” (page 524)

How to create a layer

The layer associated with the creation of a milling operation on the zero face can be constructed in
different ways:

1. Using just the “TCHW0B1D1255” customised keys (see paragraph “Creating layers with the
customised keys”):
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

527
20 Planning DXF files

• W0; W = key of parameter Face (see table 9, page 508); 0 = face number.
• B1; B = key of parameter Work (see table 9, page 508); 1 = identifies the milling operation.
• D1255; D = key of parameter Depth (see table 9, page 508); 1255 = identifies the value, i.e.
12.55 mm.

2. Using both the TCHW0B1D1255 customised keys (see paragraph “Creating layers with the
customised keys”) and the “(CRC)1(CRN)$1$” programming commands/parameters. In this
case, to import the new parameters into the Editor version prior to version 3.3, they must be
inserted after the customised keys: TCHW0B1D1255(CRC)1(CRN)$1$ (see appendix B).
• TCHW0B1D1255; see point 1.
• (CRC)1; CRC = parameter Correction; 1 = identifies the type of correction.
• (CRN)$1$; CRN = parameter CRN; $1$ = identifies the corner number.

3. Using only the TCH[ROUT](SIDE)0(DIA)12.55(CRC)1(CRN)$1$ programming commands/

parameters (see appendix B).
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
• [ROUT]; command identifying the type of machining operation;
• (SIDE)0; SIDE = parameter Face; 0 = face number.
• (DIA)12.55; DIA = parameter Diameter; 12.55 = identifies the value, i.e. 12.55 mm.
• (CRC)1; CRC = parameter Correction; 1 = identifies the type of correction.
• (CRN)$1$; CRN = parameter CRN; $1$ = identifies the corner number.

Examples of machining operations to be imported

z Creating a milling operation (see ref A, figure 327):
to create a milling operation on the zero face of the piece, with a depth of 20 mm, using the
“SPID20” tool, design the profile and create the following layer:
TCH[ROUT](SIDE)0(CRN)$1$(DP)20(DIA)30(TNM)$SPID20$(TTP)100
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
• [ROUT]; command Milling.
• (SIDE)0; parameter Face;
0 = standard face number.
• (CRN)$1$; parameter identifying the corner of the piece;
$1$ = corner number.
• (DP)20; parameter Depth;
20 = identifies the value, i.e. 20 mm.
• (DIA)30; parameter Diameter;
30 = identifies the value, i.e. 30 mm.
• (TNM)$SPID20$; parameter Tool code;
$SPID20$ = name of the “SPID20” tool
• (TTP)100; parameter Tool type; 100 = identifies the value, i.e. the tool type “CANDELA”.
z Creating a vertical cut (see ref. B, figure 327):

528 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

to make a cut on the zero face of the piece, 10 mm thick, 15 mm deep, with right-hand
correction and data inherent to the descent and work speed, design the profile and create the
following layer:
TCH[CUT_G](SIDE)0(DSP)4000(WSP)2500(DP)15(TH)10(CRC)1
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
• [CUT_G]; command Generic cut.
• (SIDE)0; parameter Face;
0 = standard face number.
• (DSP)4000; parameter Lowering speed;
4000 = identifies the value, i.e. 4000 mm/min.
• (WSP)2500; parameter Work.Speed [mm/min];
2500 = identifies the value, i.e. 2500 mm/min.
• (DP)15; parameter Depth;
15 = identifies the value, i.e. 15 mm.
• (TH)10; parameter Thickness;
10 = identifies the value, i.e. 10 mm.
• (CRC)1; parameter Correction;
1 = identifies the type of correction: Right.
z Creating a vertical bore (see ref. C, figure 327):
to make a bore on the zero face of the piece, 30 mm diameter, 20 mm deep, design a circle
and create the following layer:
TCH[BG](SIDE)0(DIA)30(DP)20(TTP)2
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
• [BG]; command Generic bore.
• (SIDE)0; parameter Face;
0 = standard face number.
• (DIA)30; parameter Diameter;
30 = identifies the value, i.e. 30 mm.
• (DP)20; parameter Depth;
20 = identifies the value, i.e. 20 mm.
• (TTP)2; parameter Tool type; 2 = identifies the value, i.e. the tool type “SVASATA”.
z Creating a geometry without machining operations (see ref. D, figure 327):
to create a simple geometry to be imported, design it and create the following layer:
TCH[GEO](ID)$P1002$(CRN)$2$
• TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
• [GEO]; command Geometry definition.
• [ID]$P1002$; command Geom. identif..
$P1002$ = IP name
• (CRN)$2$; parameter identifying the corner of the piece;
$2$ = corner number.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

529
20 Planning DXF files

Figure 327: Importing the above-listed machining operations into the Editor application software.

B
C

530 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

20.3 “CNI DXF” type formalism

This paragraph explains how to associate each element in the drawing created using a generic
CAD with layers, so that they can be imported correctly to the Editor application software, using
the setting CNI DXF (see “How to set the formalism” on page 537).

The layers are “levels” present in the CAD that allow one drawing to be separated from another,
and each layer can be named by inserting keys (see the table in “Customising the layer keys”) and
numbers. The operation to be carried out thus relates to the procedure used to name the layer in
such a way that the drawing associated with it will be interpreted correctly.

The keys indicated in the examples for the “CNI DXF” type formalism help explain
how to generate the layer syntax and are reported in table 10, page 531.
Due to the fact that they can be customised, the keys reported in the Setup table may
not correspond to those listed in table 10.

Customising the layer keys

In order to customise the layer keys, display tab DXF Definition of Setup. By default, each
parameter in the table corresponds to a key.
Table 10: List of table parameters to which a key must be associated for insertion in the layer syntax of the
DXF files when needing to store geometric and technological data in the files interpreted by the system during
import. The keys indicated as examples are the default keys displayed in the Setup table.

Parameters Keys

Panel Key indicating the piece (e.g. PANEL).

Cut Key indicating the cutting operation (e.g. BLADE).

Electrospindle Key indicating the milling operations (e.g. MILL).

Boring side 1 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 1 (e.g. SIDE1).

Boring side 2 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 2 (e.g. SIDE2).

Boring side 3 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 3 (e.g. SIDE3).

Boring side 4 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 4 (e.g. SIDE4).

Boring side 5 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 5 (e.g. SIDE5).

Vertical Boring Key indicating the vertical boring on side 0 (e.g. VERTICAL).

Angular Boring Key indicating the inclined boring operations (e.g. BORES).

Point Key indicating the decimal separator (e.g. K).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

531
20 Planning DXF files

Parameters Keys

Disable channel (Z) Keys for indicating whether to consider the co-ordinate Z of the
machining/geometry indicated in the imported DXF layer or not.
The values to be input are:
0 = the Z co-ordinate is considered and is seen as position of
translation of the surface to be worked with respect to the main
piece surface.

1 = the Z co-ordinate is not considered.

How to represent the piece

The piece should be geometrically represented by a closed rectangle through the use of the
command to generate closed polygons, lines or polylines (see paragraph 20.1 “List of drawing
commands”).
The dimensions along the X and Y axes are provided directly by the geometry, whereas the
thickness must be entered in the layer associated with the rectangle.
If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.

Example:
To draw a panel with dimensions 1000 x 300 x 30.20 (mm), it will be necessary to associate a
rectangle 1000mm wide and 300mm high with the layer PANEL30K20 (see table 10, page 531).

Generic Face
The concept of generic face does not exist in the CNI formalism.

How to represent bores

Bores can be represented in two different ways:
z by a circle used to represent a vertical bore, to be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the
piece.

532 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

z by a rectangle or a closed polygonal line to be drawn on face 0, used to represent bores to be

machined with the horizontal spindle on the side faces of the piece.

Vertical bore represented by a circle

The vertical bore, which can be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the piece, must be represented
by a circle, which must be drawn inside the rectangle representing the face required.

The diameter of the bore is given by the diameter of the circle, whereas the depth must be
specified in the layer. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero.

The bore application point coincides with the centre of the circle.

Example:
To create a vertical bore of depth 15mm, associate layer VERTICA15 to the bore drawing (see
table 10, page 531).

Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle

When a bore is created using a rectangle, the diameter and bore depth are obtained from the
geometry. The diameter is indicated by the length A of segment D (figure 320) parallel to segment
C (figure 320) on face 0 which represents face 1 on which the bore is to be machined, whereas the
depth is indicated by the length of segment B (figure 320) perpendicular to segment C (figure 320).
The point of application is given by the midpoint of the segment representing the bore diameter.
Figure 320 shows a rectangle drawn on side 0 of the piece, to be interpreted as a bore to be
machined in side 1 of the piece. Figure 321, on the contrary, shows how this bore is interpreted.

To indicate the point at which the bore must be machined, type the value of the distance between
the bore and the top side of the face in the string for the layer associated with the bore rectangle. If
this value is not set, the bore will be considered by default to be positioned half way down the
panel thickness.

Should you wish to apply a milling groove on the piece within which to machine a bore, the milling
groove is represented by the distance (ref. A, figure 322) between the bore application point and
side 1 (ref. B, figure 322) of face 0.

Examples
z To drawing a rectangle that represents a horizontal bore to apply to face 1 of the piece at a
distance of 20mm from corner 1 of this face, associate layer SIDE120 to the rectangle (see
table 10, page 531).
z To drawing a rectangle representing a horizontal bore to apply to face 1, half of the thickness
of the piece, associate layer SIDE1 to the rectangle (see table 10, page 531).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

533
20 Planning DXF files

Angular bore
The CNI type formalism can only be used to manage “AR” rotations of the spindle axis on the X-Y
axis, and not “AZ” inclinations of the spindle axis of rotation with respect to the plane X, Y (i.e.
inclination of the spindle in space).

It is thus possible to create bores on side faces (ref. A figure below) by rotating the axis of the
spindle on plane X, Y.
Figure 328

In this case, the diameter of the bore is given by the length of the first side, the one between
corners 1 and 2 (see ref. A in the figure below) and the depth is given by the length of the second
side, the one between corners 2 and 3 (see ref. B in the figure below). The angle of inclination is
between the second side and the positive X-axis. It is therefore necessary to draw the corners of
the rectangle in the correct order.
Figure 329

4 B

2
A
1

How to represent cuts

A cut is represented geometrically by a line. The layer associated with the line can be used to
specify both the type of machining operation and the cut depth. If the depth is not specified it will
be assumed to be 0.

Cuts on side faces are not managed.

534 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

How to represent milling operations

A milling operation can be represented geometrically by lines, arcs, closed polygonal lines, open
polygonal lines and dots. The dot is generally used to specify the co-ordinates for the start of the
milling operation.

The layer associated with the geometric elements is used to specify both the type of machining
operation and the milling depth. If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be 0.

When creating a drawing that is to be used to carry out machining operations, if every geometric
element in the drawing is to be given specific technological data for milling, associate a different
layer with each element (ref. B, C, D). To ensure that all the geometric elements in the drawing
form part of the same milling operation, associate a single layer with the whole drawing (ref. A).

A B C

The CNI type formalism does not manage milling operations on side faces.

Using blocks
Blocks can only be used to represent bores. To enable a block to be recognised as a bore, the
values for diameter, depth and tool type must have been entered in the software settings (setup).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

535
20 Planning DXF files

Figure 330: Definition of symbols in the software settings (Setup)

A block indicating a bore on a side face must have a layer specifying that face. Management is
totally similar to that of horizontal bores represented using a rectangle.

unit of measurement
It is possible to import DXF files expressed using the following units of measurement:
z millimetres;

z inches.

If the geometric data are expressed in millimetres, the unit of measurement for the data in the layer
must be millimetres. If the geometric data are expressed in inches, the unit of measurement for the
data in the layer must be inches. The two units of measurement must not be used simultaneously.
The blocks are an exception to this, and follow the rule whereby if the units of measurement in the
drawing in which the block is used are expressed in inches, the values for ‘Diameter’ and ‘Depth’
set in the setup program must be such that:
z the value assigned to the diameter is expressed in millimetres,

z the value assigned to the depth is expressed in inches.

536 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 20 Planning DXF files

20.4 How to set the formalism

To define the type of formalism to be applied to imported files, run the Editor application software,
select the menu File and the option Settings..., or the button provided on the toolbar. Click on the
DXF Definition tab.
In the data field Active type select the item BiesseWorks DXF for the BIESSE type formalism or the
item CNI DXF for the CNI type formalism.

Make sure that the keys indicated in the table below correspond with the ones used in the DXF file
to be imported.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

537
20 Planning DXF files

538 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

21 Running the programs

The following chapter describes the procedures for using the machining operation programs, so
they can be run on the machine.
In order for the files to be executed they must be processed. The operation can be carried out with
the corresponding button on the Tools bar in the Editor application software (see paragraph 21.1
“Creating the ISO file from Editor application software”) or with the BatchRun utility (see paragraph
21.2 “Creating ISO files with BatchRun utility”).

Program running phases check the creation of ISO files, the creation of the work list and the use of
the machine during program suspensions to move the piece on the work table.

List of topics
• 21.1 “Creating the ISO file from Editor application software”
• 21.2 “Creating ISO files with BatchRun utility”
• 21.3 “Running the programs and the list”
• 21.4 “Restarting the program after a machining suspension”
• 21.5 “Stop/cancel running of the program”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

539
21 Running the programs

21.1 Creating the ISO file from Editor

application software
To process the machining program and generate the ISO file for running on the machine, click on
in the toolbar of the Editor application or on Create NC Code option of the Tools menu.

The ISO extension file is created in the directory defined in theLead-in Lead-out tab in the Setup
dialogue box.

To save the ISO file with a different name and in a different directory, select optionCreate NC Code
on file... of menu Tools.

540 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 21 Running the programs

21.2 Creating ISO files with BatchRun utility

To run this utility, use the Start menu of the Windows applications bar (see chapter 3). For a
detailed description of this utility, see chapter 3.

To execute files with extension BPP, it is not necessary to create an ISO file.

Setting the utility

To define the BatchRun default data, click on .

Figure 331: dialogue box Settings

z In the File extensions that can be processedfield, define the types of file to be imported for
processing and creating an ISO file with the same name. Enable or disable the boxes that
correspond to the type of file required.
z Enable the check box Show date of creation and last modification to display the box with the
job creation date and modification date alongside the job area.

z Enable the check box Show CAM buttons to view the CAM buttons .
z In the Piece data field, define the default data for certain piece characteristics (only if they are
not mentioned in the imported BPP files).
z Enable the check box Add extension of the imported files to the name of the ISO generated
files if it is necessary to generate the ISO file while keeping the extension acronym in the
name.
For example, by enabling the box, the Milling.CID file is renamed during the conversion with
the insertion of an underscore between name and acronym (Milling_CID.ISO). To leave the
name unaltered and only changing the extension, disable the box.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

541
21 Running the programs

Managing imported files

The following paragraph explains the procedures for managing the files visualised in the import
area:
z “Importing files for processing” (page 542)

z “Creating copies of files” (page 542)

z “Deleting imported files” (page 542)

z “Modifying imported files” (page 543)

z “Generating the list for the work list” (page 543)

z “Optimising and simulating imported files” (page 544)

z “Processing the selected file” (page 544)

Importing files for processing

To import the files, click on and follow the suggestions provided below:
z To import the contents of a whole folder, find the folder that contains the files to be imported
and type the code “*.*” in the field provided.
z To import certain files only, for example files with the extension DXF, type the code “*.DXF” in
the field provided.
z To import different files, select them by pressing holding the SHIFT key on the keyboard.

A single BatchRun job cannot contain two files with the same name. Therefore, if files that are
already present are imported, a message will be displayed allowing a copy to be made. On the
contrary, a number of different jobs can contain identical files, but for each job it will be necessary
to create a sub-folder where to store the processed filed (figure 333).

Creating copies of files

To create a copy of one or more files, select the file/s to copy. If more than one file is to be copied,
select them using the SHIFT key on the keyboard, then press and . The file is created with
the same name and the addition of the symbol “_#” followed by a progressive number.

Deleting imported files

z To delete files from the import area, select one or more files (using the SHIFT key if

necessary) and press .

z To clean the import area, eliminating all the imported files, click on the button.

542 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 21 Running the programs

Modifying imported files

The imported files can be modified, that is to say it is possible to access and modify data relating to
variables and the panel.

z To modify data relating to the panel, select the file required and press . The modifications
made to the panel will not change the file, as they are simply temporary modifications that are
stored by BatchRun. For the description of the Piece variables dialogue box fields, see
paragraph “Creating the document” on page 288.

z To modify data relating to variables, select the file required and press . The variables can
only be modified: it is not possible to eliminate them or create new ones. The modifications
made to the variables will have no effect on the file, as they are simply temporary
modifications that are stored by BatchRun. For the description of the Program variables - [%1]
dialogue box fields, see paragraph 19.2 “Managing the variables” on page 495.

When the piece or variable data in an imported file is modified, the file is not actually changed.
Therefore, if it is opened using the Editor application software, it will still show the settings entered
when it was created. The modifications will only become effective if they are made by the Editor,
which interacts with BatchRun.

Generating the list for the work list

z To generate a list of programs - to be saved in a DSTN-format document for the NC “work list”

application software - click on the button.

The document produced gives a file list consisting of the name of the programs plus the
relative BPP/CID/DXF extensions, etc. (ref. A, figure 332). To generate it, the programs
imported in the utility must be housed in the folder indicated in the Programs directory data
field (tab Job list) of the Setup dialogue box.
z To generate a list of ISO files - to be saved in a DSTN-format document for the NC “work list”

application software - click on the button.

The document produced will give a file list consisting of the name of the programs plus the ISO
extension (ref. B, figure 332). In this case, the files it contains cannot be executed until the
corresponding programs in the utility have been processed (ref. C, figure 332).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

543
21 Running the programs

Figure 332
C

B A

Optimising and simulating imported files

To optimise a single file from the import area, select it and press . This operation may be useful
to check whether or not the imported file is correct and therefore whether it can be processed.

To simulate a single file from the import area, select it and press .

Processing the selected file

To process a single file from the import area, select it and press .

544 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 21 Running the programs

Managing the job orders

The term “job” is used to indicate a work group used to hold the files to be processed, so that they
can be recognised and distinguished from others.
For example, the same files may be imported to various jobs, to which a specific name is given
(figure 333), so as to distinguish various types of machining operation. In this case, the files in
each job must be saved in different folders, otherwise during processing the ISO file obtained from
one of the files with the same name present in various jobs would be overwritten, as it is not
possible to have two ISO files with the same name in the same folder.
Figure 333

When the files are processed, the sub folders defined in the field Output settings will be created in
the directory set in field Sub-folder (see figure below).
Figure 334

Creating a job
To create a job, press and rename the job (see“Renaming a job” on page 546). Always give
the job created the name of one or several machines belonging to the same family (figure 333).
Failure to do this will make it impossible to save BatchRun; information is displayed by means of
an error message, in which the operator is requested to associate a machine to the job in question.

The jobs created are added after the existing ones, but their order can be changed and they can
be moved using the drag and drop method.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

545
21 Running the programs

Renaming a job
To rename a job, select and press the F2 key on the PC keyboard or the button, or
alternatively, double click with the left mouse button. Type the new name and press ENTER on the
keyboard.

Deleting a job
To delete a job, select and press the CANC button on the keyboard or the context menu option, or
alternatively, click on .

Disabling a job
To disable a job, so that the files it contains are not processed, click with the mouse to remove the
tick in the check box alongside the name of the job.

546 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 21 Running the programs

Imported file processing procedure

1. Create a new job to be associated with a number of files to be processed (see “Managing the
job orders” on page 545) Each job can be requested to be performed by only one family of
machines (e.g. the Rover line) and not by several families (e.g. Rover and Arrow). Therefore,
only the programs created for a specific family can be processed.

2. Indicate the type of file to be exported, by clicking on the relevant check box:
Export Bpp to generate files in BPP format;
Export Iso to generate files in ISO format.

3. In the Output settings frame, select the name of the machine being used, which must be the
same as the one in the Setup tab User. Use the search button to find the path to be used to
store the ISO files, if you wish to use a path other than the default one indicated in the field
adjacent to the machine name.

4. In the Sub-folder field, write the name of the sub-folder in which to save the files to be
exported, which is created and stored in the directory defined in the preceding field. This
setting is optional and may be useful for splitting up files grouped together in each job, saving
them in different subdirectories in order to speed up the search for the processed files.

5. Carry out the operations required within the import area. The following operations are
possible:
• Importing files; “Importing files for processing” on page 542.
• Modification of required file data, piece data and variables; “Modifying imported files” on
page 543.
• Creation of copies of files; “Creating copies of files” on page 542.
• Deletion of files; “Deleting imported files” on page 542.
• Optimisation of files required; “Optimising and simulating imported files” on page 544.
• Simulation of files required; “Optimising and simulating imported files” on page 544.
• Processing of single files; “Processing the selected file” on page 544.
• Definition of keys for DXF files; “Setting the utility” on page 541.

6. Enable the option button Process all to process all the files in the import area. Enable the
option button Process selected files to process selected files in the import area only.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

547
21 Running the programs

7. Click on the button to start processing the files. The second page of the application will be
displayed, containing the list of files to be processed. The files being processed are marked in
yellow, those that have already been processed correctly are marked in green, whereas those
for which processing has not been successful are marked in red.

When the file processing operation has been completed, click on to return to the main
page.

Saving the data and closing the utility

z Click on the button to store the data without closing down BatchRun.

z Click on the button to store the data and close down BatchRun.

z Click on the button to closed the BatchRun utility without saving.

548 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 21 Running the programs

21.3 Running the programs and the list

The machining programs can be run singly or using a list. The work list is a table that is used to
prepare a sequence of programs to be used to run the machining operations on a pre-set number
of pieces.

For a detailed description on how to run a machining program or a job list, see chapter 22 “Using
the XNC”.

To activate the files in DXF format, check that the reading keys of the layers associated with
the geometries correspond with the formalism imposed in the Active type field on the DXF
Definition Setup tab.

21.4 Restarting the program after a machining

suspension
When a program that contains a machining suspension is run, consult the “User Manual” for the
machine on how to restart machining operations.

21.5 Stop/cancel running of the program

1. Press STOP to stop movement of the axes.

2. Press RESET to cancel running of the program or START to resume running of the program.

If any error messages are displayed in the bar provided, press CLEAR to delete them, after taking
note of the contents of the message.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

549
21 Running the programs

550 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

22 Using the XNC

On the machine the component relating to axis management and drive and to running machining
operations is entirely managed by the integrated XNC. Only certain applications (The Positions
application software, work list, Debug application software, Statistics application software) and the
Errors window of this software are used.

List of topics
• 22.1 “The Positions application software”
• 22.2 “Resetting the machine axes”
• 22.3 “Moving the machine axes”
• 22.4 “Moving the operating section elements”
• 22.5 “Running single programs”
• 22.6 “work list”
• 22.7 “Debug application software”
• 22.8 “Statistics application software”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

551
22 Using the XNC

22.1 The Positions application software

The POSITIONS application software is used to display the axis co-ordinates, the machine
operating status (manual, automatic), the panel origin, the type of spindle selected and the
percentage override.

Using this application software it is possible to carry out reset, movement and positioning of the
machine axes, command lowering of the operating section to tool-up the machine, and run a single
machining program or a job list.

Figure 335: POSITIONS application software

A Menu bar (see “Description of the menu bar”on page 553).

B Axis override (see “Axis override” on page 555).
C Errors present indicator (see “Errors present warning indicator” on page 556).
D Machine status indicator (see “Machine status indicator” on page 556).
E Axis positions box (see “Axis positions box” on page 557).
F Machine environments box (see “Machine environments box” on page 557).
G Command buttons (see “Command buttons” on page 558).
H Information bars (see “Information bars” on page 558).

552 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Description of the menu bar

The following are the menus with a description of their options.

Some of these options may not be enabled, as they may require a suitable password. To
enter the correct level of password, see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143.

OPTIONS:
CONFIGURATION:
displays the CONFIGURATION window with the current Configuration. To change the current
configuration, type the number corresponding to the new configuration and press Enter (or Return)
on the keyboard, or the Confirm button.

VERSIONS:
displays the versions of the XNC application software.

SIMULATION:
used to enable or disable NC simulation state. This state is indicated by the icon .

RESET:
selects the type of machine reset. There are four types of reset foreseen:

GLOBAL;
CENTRE;
SINGLE;
MANUAL.

MOVEMENTS MODE:
used to display the exact position of the tool installed on an axis of rotation, when working in TCPM
(Tool Center Point Management).
AXES:
the positions displayed refer to the connection point of the spindle or aggregate on which the
tool is fitted.
CARTESIAN:
the positions displayed refer to the position of the end of the tool.
TOOL:
fixes the NC reference system so that the Z-axis coincides with the working direction of the
tool (this function is particularly useful when programming inclined bores).

For further information, see the on-line XNC manual.

WINDOWS:
PROGRAM:
displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window used to select the program to be run. The option is
only active in the AUTOMATIC environment with the LIST application software closed.

LIST:
displays the LIST application software. The option is only active in the AUTOMATIC environment.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

553
22 Using the XNC

DEBUG:
displays the DEBUG application software. This is used to debug the program in START. The option
is only active in the AUTOMATIC environment.

ACTIVATE SPINDLES:
displays the ACTIVATE SPINDLES application software. The option is only active in the MANUAL
MOVEMENTS environment. If no spindles are present in the machine, the option ACTIVATE
SPINDLES will never be available.

ERRORS:
displays the ERRORS window to check Errors caused by software malfunctions.

MESSAGES:
displays the MESSAGES window containing the messages controlling the machining programs
being run and the PLC program.

ERROR MESSAGES:
displays the window with the messages that the numerical control sends when it encounters a
malfunction in certain of its parts. Some messages may not be visible, as they require a suitable
level password. To enter the correct level of password, see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page
143.

POSITION:
RELATIVE:
displays the position for the origin and the spindle selected.

ABSOLUTE:
position between the reference spindle (typically T1) and the machine zero.

RESIDUAL:
difference between the target position and the absolute position, when the axis is controlled.

THEORETICAL:
ideal absolute position in which the axis should be were it to respond immediately to input (speed
data) received from the NC.

REL. THEOR.:
ideal position, for the reference in consideration, in which the axis should be were it to respond
immediately to input (speed data) received from the NC.

TARGET:
absolute final position for the row being run.

REL. TARGET:
final position, for the reference in consideration, for the row being run.

ERROR:
difference between the theoretical position and the absolute position of the axis.

SPEED:
speed at which the axis moves.

554 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

MILLIMETRES (INCHES):
displays the positions in the axis positions box according to the unit of measurement selected:
millimetres or inches.

ORIGIN:
displays the list of origins used to select the reference origin.

SPINDLE:
displays the box used to modify the reference spindle.

CENTRE:
This item is only present in software connected to multiple centre machines.

HELP:
Displays the on-line help manual.

Axis override
The axis overrides are boxes used to display the percentage value of axis speeds.

The Axis Override is a tool that is particularly useful when running test boring or profiling
operations to check machining operations. Using the Axis Override it is possible to very the speed
at which the machine axes are moved, using a percentage value with respect to the value set in
the machine data or in the program.
To activate this function, use the “Remote override” knob on the machine axes control button pad
(see the User Manual provided with the machine).

Spindle override
The spindle overrides are boxes used to display the percentage value of spindle speeds.

To modify the speed, insert suitable instructions in the machining programs or use the “Remote
override knob on the machine axes control button pad (see the User Manual provided with the
machine).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

555
22 Using the XNC

Errors present warning indicator

The errors present warning indicator has the job of indicating the presence of a generic error. It
normally shows the CNI device; if an error occurs, the CNI device will disappear and an
exclamation mark will be displayed.

Icons Description

No error active.

Active errors present.

NC in “Simulation” status.

Machine status indicator

Indicates the current status of the machine using the icons listed below.

Icons Description

Reset

Manual movement

Positioned movement

Start program

Start cycle from PLC

Stop (program suspended)

Break (programmed suspension)

PLC disabled. Also indicates the absence of certain application software necessary to
operate the NC.

556 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Axis positions box

This box contains the names of the axes with their respective positioning values. The reference
spindle, if there is one, is displayed alongside the axis name.
Figure 336

Machine environments box

This box contains the commands used to move the machine.

Commands Description

Used to access the RESET environment and display the type of

machine axes reset enabled from the OPTIONS menu; see
“Resetting the machine axes” on page 561.
When the button is blue, this indicates that the environment is
active.

Enables manual movement of the axes; see “Manual axis

movement mode” on page 562. When the button is blue, this
indicates that the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment is being
used.

Enables MDI axis movement mode; see “MDI axis movement

mode (positioned)” on page 562. When the button is blue, this
indicates that the POSITIONED MOVEMENTS environment is
being used.

Allows access to the AUTOMATIC environment. In this

environment it is possible to search for the single programs to be
run (see “Running single programs”, page 566), control the
programs being run (see “Debug application software”, page 586),
and fill in or call up a job list to be run on the machine (see
“Command buttons” on page 558).
When the button is blue, this indicates that the environment is
active.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

557
22 Using the XNC

Command buttons
Each command button, flanked by a reference icon, gives access to an application software and
can only be activated from within the correct environment.
If the button is red, this indicates that the application software to which it is linked has been
displayed, although it might not be visible but merely displayed as an icon on the Windows
applications bar.

Buttons/icons Description

Displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window, only with the AUTOMATIC

environment active.

Displays the LIST application software, only with the AUTOMATIC

environment active.

Displays the DEBUG application software, only with the AUTOMATIC

environment active.

Displays the Enable Spindles application software, only with the MANUAL
MOVEMENTS environment active.

Information bars
Figure 337

A Shows information relating to:

The code for the main/auxiliary axis selected.
The centre to which the selected axis is connected.
Optionally, a text describing the axis.
The active origin for the centre to which the axis belongs.
The type of position displayed.
B Shows information that varies according to the machine environment being used.
In the MANUAL RESET environment, when the type of machine axes reset is selected, the
centre selected from the menu bar is displayed, along with a message relating to the type of
reset.
In the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment the slow and fast speed values are shown. In the
POSITIONED MOVEMENTS environment the data item relating to movement of the selected
axis (ref. A, figure 338) and the field used to enter a programming row (ref. B, figure 338) are
shown.
In the AUTOMATIC environment the name of the selected program (ref. C figure 338) and the
field used to enter a programming row (ref. D, figure 338) are shown.

558 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Figure 338

Information bars context menu

In the AUTOMATIC environment it is possible to display a context menu that is used to carry out
certain operations rapidly. To display it, click with the right mouse button on the bar with the
program name.
Figure 339

Description of the context menu options

EDIT: starts the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application. The BiesseWorks Editor application is
only started if the selected file displayed in the information bar has one of the extensions DXF, CID
and BPP.

DRAW: starts the BiesseWorks Simulator for programs with extension DXF, CID and BPP, or the
XNC graphic window for programs with other extensions.

SUCTION CUPS: starts the WorkTableTooling application, for programs with extension DXF, CID
and BPP, or the XNC Tooling System for programs with other extensions.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

559
22 Using the XNC

OPTIMISE: optimises the selected machining program. Programs with the extensions DXF, CID
and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser.

PRINT: prints the program. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual.
PARAMETERS: displays the dialogue box used to create or modify the variables. When the
context menu is displayed on a file with extension BPP the dialogue box Program variables - [%1]
will be displayed.

RESET PIECE COUNTER: resets the values in the fields in column COUNT.

PANEL: displays the dialogue box used to create or modify the piece parameters. When the
context menu is displayed on a file with extension BPP the dialogue box Piece variables will be
displayed.

560 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

22.2 Resetting the machine axes

Resetting is a procedure that serves to bring the axes to a position known to the NC, so that it can
calculate their movements correctly. This position is established during testing of the machine,
taking the absolute machine origin as a reference point.

Carry out the reset after starting the software or when an error message appears requesting that
you do so.

1. Enter the RESET ambient (see “Machine environments box” on page 557.)

2. In the OPTIONS menu, select the item RESET and one of the following options: GLOBAL,
CENTRE, SINGLE, MANUAL (see “The Positions application software”, page 552).

3. Press START to carry out the reset operation required. Before proceeding make sure that
there is nothing liable to obstruct normal movement of the axes.

Description of options
GLOBAL: used to carry out automatic reset of all the axes.
CENTRE: used to carry out simultaneous reset of all the axes in the selected centre.

SINGLE: used to carry out automatic reset of the selected axis.

MANUAL RESET: used to carry out a reset of each axis singly. Select an axis, for example the X-
axis, press Enter (or double-click on the axis), enter the reset position in the window provided and
press START. In this case the axis does not move, as the operation only serves to define the
actual position of the axis manually. The manual reset position for the selected axis is displayed in
the specific information bar (figure 335).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

561
22 Using the XNC

22.3 Moving the machine axes

There are two modes available to move the axes: manual and MDI. Before reading this paragraph,
see “The Positions application software” on page 552.

Manual axis movement mode

Manual movements of the axes are known as “JOG movements”, because the JOG keys on the
main control panel are used. Generally speaking this type of movement is used during machine
preparation phase. To carry out this type of movement, proceed as described below:

1. Select the specific command in the Machine environments box (see the table on page 557);

2. Select the axis to be moved in the axis positions box. The active axis is indicated by a blue
surround (figure 336).

3. Use the JOG keys to carry out the movement. For a detailed description of the JOG keys, see
the “User Manual” for the machine. To define the speed of the axis during movement, see
“Variation of the axis manual movement speed”.

Variation of the axis manual movement speed

To set the speed of manual axis movements, select the axis to be moved in the box and press
Enter, to display the data dialogue box. Define the values in fields Slow speed and Fast speed.
The first field defines the low speed for the movements that were registered using the JOG keys,
whereas the second field defines the high speed for the movements that were registered using the
JOG keys and the VEL key (for the description of the following keys refer to the machine “User
Manual”). The data defined in this dialogue box will not modify the default data, which remain
active until the machine shutdown.

By default these items will take the values indicated in the corresponding machine data, and will be
displayed in the specific information bar (figure 337).

Modifying these data does not change the machine data, as the modifications are valid until the
next time that machine data are saved (in this case the initial data are restored) or until the next
NC turning of.

The percentage variation in the set movement speed of the axes can be effected when needed by
rotating the machine OVERRIDE.

MDI axis movement mode (positioned)

The MDI axis movement mode is known as “positioned”, because it allows the position to which
the axis must move to be entered.

There are three types of positioned movement:

562 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

1. “Single step” type

2. “Positioned” type

3. “Step” type

“Single step” type

The movement is carried out using a programming row that can be written in field B shown in
figure 338. Press START to perform the inserted row.

“Positioned” type
Movement of the selected axis is carried out by setting the position required and pressing START.
To set the position, press ESC on the keyboard, double-click on the box for the axis required and
type the value into the Target position field.

To define the reference spindle, click on the following button.

The name of the reference spindle is shown in the Spindle field.

For a description of the remaining fields in the window, see ““Step” type”.

“Step” type
It is used to move the selected axis with the JOG and VEL keys, but with definition in millimetres of
the length of each step and the speed of the axis.

These values are set using the fields provided in the window described in ““Positioned” type”, or
displaying the window illustrated in figure 340.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

563
22 Using the XNC

Figure 340: AXIS DATA window

To display the window, double-click on the axis required.

Description of fields:

Movement: used to define the value in millimetres of each movement made using the JOG keys.
Extended Movement: used to define the value in millimetres of each movement made using the
JOG keys, plus the VEL key.

Speed: used to define the value of the axis speed during each movement.

564 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

22.4 Moving the operating section elements

It may be useful to move the parts of the operating section in order to facilitate the tool installation
or to carry out maintenance operations. To carry out this operation, proceed as follows:

1. Enable the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment in the machine environments box.

2. Select the WINDOWS menu and the SPINDLES option or the icon.

3. Select the SPINDLES menu to display the list of the types of spindles.

4. Activate the VERTICAL entry to display the vertical spindles (T) of the boring unit, the
HORIZONTAL entry to display the horizontal spindles (TH) in the boring unit, or the MILL
UNITS to view the electrospindles (TP). The button of the type activated becomes red.

5. Select the spindles required to activate their pneumatic drive.

6. Carry out the tooling or maintenance operations.

7. Set the lowered spindles back to their initial position, selecting them again.

8. Close the SPINDLE ACTIVATION window by selecting the CLOSE option.

It is recommended that you use this procedure after turning the Tooling selector key,
so as to cut off power to the machine and carry out tooling or maintenance
operations in full safety.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

565
22 Using the XNC

22.5 Running single programs

To run single programs, display the AUTOMATIC environment by clicking on the command
provided in the machine environments box (see “Machine environments box” on page 557), call up
the program and select one of the two running modes: Automatic or Manual.

The BPP format file, which for a number of reasons cannot be optimised, is not executed.
Whenever an attempt is made to execute the file, the system produces an error message.

Procedure used to call up a single program to be run

1. Check that the LIST application software has been closed and click on command button

. The SELECT PROGRAMS window will be displayed (figure 341) in which it is possible
to find the program to be run on the machine.

2. Select the program required and press Confirm. The name of the program selected will appear
in the POSITIONS application software information bar.

3. Run the program in automatic or semi-automatic mode.

To disable the command button and close the SELECT PROGRAMS window, press Cancel
(ref. E figure 341).

How to run the program in Automatic mode

Running the program in Automatic mode is a one-off type of running, that is to say one that is
carried out in a single operation. The machine runs the whole of the program and only suspends
machining operations if it encounters suspensions in the program itself.

To carry out machining operations in Automatic mode, call up the single program and press
START on the main control panel.

To run the program via the DEBUG application software, proceed as follows:

1. call up the single program (see “Procedure used to call up a single program to be run”, page
566)

2. display the DEBUG application software and press to enable automatic mode.

3. press START on the main control panel. If the program to be run is not a file with extension
ISO it will first be optimised and then run. If the program to be run is already an ISO file, having
been transformed previously, for instance using BatchRun, it will be run immediately

The ISO strings area in the DEBUG application software will display the content of the single
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation.

566 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

For the procedure used to load and lock the panel on the work table, see the “User Manual” for the
machine.

How to run the program in semi-automatic mode

Running the program in semi-automatic mode is a running method that is controlled and guided by
the operator. To use this method, proceed as follows:

1. call up the single program (see “Procedure used to call up a single program to be run”, page
566)

2. display the DEBUG application software and press

3. press START on the main control panel to start step-by-step machining of the program. If the
program to be run is not a file with extension ISO it will first be optimised and then run. If the
program to be run is already an ISO file, having been transformed previously, for instance
using BatchRun, it will be run immediately

4. to move on to the next step in the program, press START again; repeat this operation until the
machining operation has been completed.
The ISO strings area in the DEBUG application software will display the content of the single
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation in
detail

For the procedure used to load and lock the panel on the work table, see the “User Manual” for the
machine.

To check the types of parameter used in each programming row to be run, use the PARAMETERS
field in the Break/Parameters Box, typing the parameter codes separated by a space. During the
machining operation the name and value of the parameter in the row being executed will be
displayed in the PARAMETER information bar.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

567
22 Using the XNC

Description of the SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box

Figure 341: SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box

A Toolbar and select directory button (see “Toolbar and select directory button”, page 568).
B Directory box; indicates the name of the directory selected.
C Central area; displays a list of files and directories.
D Names box; highlights the name of the file selected in the central area.
E Command buttons (see “Command buttons”, page 569).

Toolbar and select directory button

Buttons Description

Displays the next directory up.

Updates files in the visible directory.

Displays the following toolbar:

Displays an additional toolbar, for a description of which please see the XNC on-
line manual.

Used to select the drive containing the files to be used:

z Disk A; i.e. the floppy-disk inserted in the NC drive.

z NC; i.e. the NC hard disk.

z The name of the remote PC connected to the NC.

Starts the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application. The BiesseWorks Editor

application will only be started if a file with one of the extensions DXF, CID and
BPP has been selected.

568 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Toolbar and select directory button

Buttons Description

Optimises the machining program selected. Programs with the extensions DXF,
CID and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser.

Starts the BiesseWorks Simulator, for programs with extension DXF, CID and
BPP, or the XNC graphic window, for programs with other extensions.

Starts the WorkTableTooling application, for programs with extension DXF, CID
and BPP, or the XNC Tooling System, for programs with other extensions.

Prints the selected program. For further information, see the on-line XNC
manual.

Makes a copy of the selected file. For further information, see the on-line XNC
manual.

Pastes the copy made of the file. For further information, see the on-line XNC
manual.

Deletes the selected file from the directory. For further information, see the on-
line XNC manual.

Renames the selected file.

Command buttons

Buttons Description

Previous Page button. Used to scroll through the list of files.

Next Page button. Used to scroll through the list of files.

Confirm button. Displays the selected file in the POSITIONS application software
information bar and closes the SELECT PROGRAMS window.

Cancel button. Closes the SELECT PROGRAMS window.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

569
22 Using the XNC

22.6 work list

The work list is a file containing a list of machining programs (BPP, ISO, DXF, CID) arranged in
sequential order for transmitting to the machine for execution. In every job list it is possible to
modify parameters in each of the programs. As these modifications have no effect on the structure
of the source file, they will only apply within the list itself.

All the files inserted in the work list must contain technological information in order
to be executed. For example, documents in DXF format containing vectorial graphics
only cannot be executed.

To display the LIST application software, click on the command button .

Figure 342: LIST application software

A Machine command mode indicator.

B Menu bar. See “Description of the menu bar” on page 572.
C List operation mode indicator. The job list can be run in one of two modes, NORMAL and
SELF-EXPIRING.
D Program (file) insertion table. See“Insert programs table” on page 574.
E Command buttons. See“Command buttons” on page 575.
F File status indicator. See“File status indicator” on page 575.
G Information bars. See“Information bars” on page 575.

570 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

LIST application software context menu

To display the context menu, select the row required in the table and click with the right mouse
button.

Description of the context menu options:

EDIT: opens the program selected using the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application, if they have
been started. Only files with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are opened with the BiesseWorks
Editor application.

DRAW: displays the XNC or BiesseWorks Simulator graphic window. Files with extension DXF,
CID and BPP are only simulated if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.

SUCTION CUPS: starts the XNC Tooling System or the WorkTableTooling application, according
to the program selected. For files with extension DXF, CID and BPP tooling of the table will only be
started if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.

OPTIMISE: optimises the selected machining program. Files with the extensions DXF, CID and
BPP are only optimised if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running (see “Optimising the
programs in the list”, page 582).

PRINT: prints the program. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual. Files with the
extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only printed if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.

INSERT: inserts an empty row in the list under the one in which the text cursor is located.

DELETE: deletes the row in the list on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
highlighted using the MARK function.

COPY: makes a copy of the row in the list on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
highlighted using the MARK function.

MARK: used to select one or more rows in the list. To select a number of rows, mark the first row
and the last one. This operation is used to delete or copy rows.

PARAMETERS: displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables (see “Modifying
variables for a program inserted in the list”, page 581). If the context menu is displayed with a file
with extension BPP, this option is only enabled if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.

PANEL: displays the BiesseWorks Editor application dialogue box Piece variables, if a file with the
extension BPP has been selected and the BiesseWorks Editor application is running. This option
is only enabled when files with extension BPP are selected (see “Modifying panel data”, page
581).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

571
22 Using the XNC

Description of the menu bar

The following are the menus with descriptions of all the options they contain.

Some of these options may not be enabled, as they may require a suitable password. To
enter the correct level of password, see paragraph 4.6 “Password” on page 143.

FILE:
OPEN:
displays the SELECT LISTS window to open a job list.

INSERT:
displays the SELECT LISTS window to insert the contents of another job list into the current job
list.

SAVE:
saves the current job list by overwriting it.

SAVE AS:
displays the SELECT LISTS window to create a copy of the current job list with a different name.

PROGRAM:
displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window to select a program to be inserted in the current job
list.

LIST:
displays the SELECT LISTS window to select a job list to be inserted in the current job list.

PRINT:
prints the current job list.

CLOSE:
closes the LIST application software.

EDIT:
INSERT:
inserts an empty row in the insert programs table under the one in which the text cursor is located.

DELETE:
deletes the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
highlighted using the MARK function.

COPY:
makes a copy of the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or the block
of rows highlighted using the MARK function.

MARK:
used to select one or more rows in the insert programs table. To select a number of rows, mark the
first row and the last one. This operation is used to delete or copy rows.

572 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

FIND:
enables the find and replace words function, which is only valid in the column of the insert
programs table on which the cursor is positioned.

RESET PIECE COUNTER:

resets the values in the fields in column COUNT.

DELETE ALL:
deletes all the rows in the insert programs table.

PARAMETERS:
displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables (see “Modifying variables for a
program inserted in the list”, page 581).

PANEL:
displays the BiesseWorks Editor application dialogue box Piece variables, if a file with the
extension BPP has been selected and the BiesseWorks Editor application is running (see
“Modifying panel data”, page 581).

SERVICES:
PROGRAM:
develops the following list of options:
EDIT:
opens the program selected using the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application, if they have
been started. Files with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are opened with the BiesseWorks
Editor application.
DRAW:
displays the XNC or BiesseWorks Simulator graphic window. Files with extension DXF, CID
and BPP are only simulated if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
OPTIMISE:
optimises the selected machining program, if the correct application is running. Files with the
extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only optimised if the BiesseWorks Editor application is
running (see “Optimising the programs in the list”, page 582).
SUCTION CUPS:
starts the XNC Tooling System or the WorkTableTooling application, according to the program
selected. For files with extension DXF, CID and BPP tooling of the table will only be started if
the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
PRINT:
prints the program. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual. Files with the
extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only printed if the BiesseWorks Editor application is
running.
PRINT OPTIONS:
displays the dialogue box used to define advanced printing options. For further information,
see the on-line XNC manual.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

573
22 Using the XNC

MODE:
NORMAL:
used to define the mode used to run the job list. In this case it is run row by row until reaching the
instruction END or until reaching an empty row. For further information, see the on-line XNC
manual.

SELF-EXPIRING:
used to define the mode used to run the job list. In this case the rows in the list are automatically
deleted after they have been performed. The list stops running when it reaches the instruction
END or an empty row. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual.

HELP:
used to display the on-line manual.

Insert programs table

The insert programs table forms the central area of the application software, and is made up of
rows and columns. To scroll from one row of the table to the next or from one column to the next,
use the mouse cursor or the keys on the PC keyboard (ref. A/B, figure 343). To move the text
cursor within a field, using keyboard ALT plus the Arrow keys (ref. A, figure 343).
Figure 343: PC keyboard keys

Description of the table columns:

LABL: used to enter a numeric or alphanumeric string.

PROGRAM: displays the names of the machining programs inserted in the list. For programs
created using the BiesseWorks Editor application, the file extension (BPP) will be displayed along
with the name of the program.

QTY: used to enter the number indicating how many times the machine must run the program.

COUNT: indicates the count of programs machined. This value is incremental, as it is connected to
the number of times the programming row has to be run.

COMMENT: this is used for the input of a simple comment or global parameters and variables
useful for the program (see “Rules for compiling the COMMENT field”, page 576).

574 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Command buttons
Buttons Description

displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window (figure 341) to select a program to be

inserted in the current job list (see “Inserting files in the list”, page 577).

inserts an empty row in the insert programs table under the one in which the text
cursor is located. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual.

deletes the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or
the block of rows highlighted using the MARK function. For further information, see
the on-line XNC manual.

makes a copy of the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is
positioned, or the block of rows highlighted using the MARK function. For further
information, see the on-line XNC manual.

displays the SELECT LISTS window to select a job list to be inserted in the current
job list. For further information, see the on-line XNC manual.

displays the SELECT LISTS window to open a job list (see “Procedure when
opening a work list”, page 576).

saves the current job list by overwriting it (see “Saving the list”, page 582).

displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables. (see “Modifying
variables for a program inserted in the list”, page 581).

File status indicator

Used to indicate the status of the current job list. The icon depicting a closed safe indicates that the
file has already been saved. The icon depicting an open save indicates that a modification has
been made to the file, so that it needs to be saved.

Information bars
Part in which information on the selected program field is displayed.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

575
22 Using the XNC

Rules for compiling the COMMENT field

Through this field a comment or variables can be input (piece variables or global variables). As far
as the piece variables and the global variables of the BPP files are concerned it is necessary to
observe the following rules:
z Unlike the ISO files, the variables for the BPP files must not be included between the dollar
characters($).
z The value of the variable must be preceded by the equals sign (=).
E.g.: LPX=300.
z To separate one variable from the next it is necessary to use the space.
E.g.: LPX=300 LPY=500.
z A point must go before the decimal places.
E.g.: LPZ=30.5.
z The value of the variable considered as a string must be marked by two quotes: one at the
beginning of the string and one at the end.
E.g. MATERIAL=’Beech’.
z The list of values must be separated using the semicolon.
E.g.: ORLST=’1;2;3’.

Procedure when opening a work list

1. Display the LIST application software.

2. Click on the menu FILE and the option OPEN or on the button provided.

3. Select the file required and click on the Confirm button.

For further information on how to use the SELECT LISTS window, see the on-line XNC manual.

Procedure when filling in a job list

1. Display the LIST application software, which always opens to show the list opened during the
last operation. Select the file menu and type the name of the list in the field provided, or delete
the contents of the list displayed and generate a new file by saving it with a different name, if
you wish to create a new list, or make any modifications and overwrite the work list.

2. Insert the files into the list (see “Inserting files in the list”, page 577). To replace a file in the list
with another one, see “Replacing a program in the list” on page .577

3. In the QTY column (figure 344), indicate the number of times the machine has to run the
program.

4. In the LABL column (figure 344) insert the instruction regulating the order in which the single
programs are to be run (see “Using the programming instructions” on page 577).

576 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Figure 344

5. Save the list. To save the list with a different name, see “Saving the list” on page 582; to
overwrite the list, see “Saving modifications to the current list” on page 582.

Within the list it is possible to carry out the following additional operations:
z Modify/insert variables in the single programs (see “Modifying variables for a program inserted
in the list”, page 581).
z Modify or check data relating to the piece; this operation is only valid for programs with the
extension BPP (see “Modifying panel data”, page 581).
z Optimise single programs to check operation (see “Optimising the programs in the list”, page
582).

Inserting files in the list

To insert one or more files in the list, click on , select the file and click on .

For further information on how to use the SELECT PROGRAMS window in the LIST application
software, see the on-line XNC manual.

Replacing a program in the list

To replace a program in the list with another one, proceed as follows:

1. Select the program in the list to be replaced.

2. Click on to display the SELECT PROGRAMS window.

3. Select the file and click on .

For further information on how to use the SELECT PROGRAMS window in the LIST application
software, see the on-line XNC manual.

Using the programming instructions

The following table gives a list and description of the programming instructions and the name of
the list column into which they must be inserted.

Instruction Description Column

; Defining a comment row. LABL

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

577
22 Using the XNC

Instruction Description Column

<label> 4-character alphanumeric string. LABL

STOP Used to interrupt the job list being run. LABL

JMP Used to go to a row in the list marked with a label. This PROGRAM
passage takes place while the job list is running.

READ Used to open a file relating to a job list while running an LABL
active list.

WRIT Writes the list being viewed in a file. LABL

_NOR Enables NORMAL list running mode. LABL

_SXG Enables SELF-EXPIRING list running mode. LABL

END Terminates running of the job list. LABL

Instruction “;”
This instruction must be inserted in the LABL column field. The row preceded by this instruction
will not be run and can be used to insert comments. The fields in the row with this instruction can
also be used to insert comments.

Instruction “<label>”
This instruction must be inserted in the LABL column field. A label is an alphanumeric string with a
maximum length of 4 characters. It is used to identify a particular row in association with the
instruction JMP.

Instruction “STOP”
The instruction STOP must be inserted in the LABL column field and determines a stop during
running of the job list. Stoppage due to the presence of the instruction STOP is also known as
“programmed stoppage”.

The instruction can be entered in two different ways:

z in the LABL field of the row containing the program name;

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

... ... ... ... ...

STOP Fori.bpp 4 0

578 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

z in the LABL field of an empty row, positioned before the row containing the program to be run.

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

STOP ... ... ... ...

Fori.bpp 4 0

The function is the same; the job list will stop running when it encounters the instruction STOP.
Press the START button to run the program following this instruction the number of times indicated
in the QTY column. If the QTY column field does not contain a number, the NC will automatically
set it to 1.

Instruction “JMP”
The instruction JMP must be inserted in the PROGRAM column field and determines a jump, while
the job list is running, to a row marked with a label. Two types of jump are possible:
z jump to a row preceding the one containing the instruction JMP;

z jump to a row following the one containing the instruction JMP.

The following example shows a jump to a row preceding the one containing the instruction JMP.

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

LBL Fori.bpp 2 0

Tagli.bpp 2 0

JMP LBL 3 0

END

The job list will be run in the following way:

1. the program Fori.bpp will be run twice;

2. the program Tagli.bpp will be run twice;

3. the value in the COUNT column field of the row containing the instruction JMP will be
incremented;

4. the COUNT column fields in the rows containing the programs Fori.bpp and Tagli.bpp are
reset and the program jumps to the row containing the label LBL. The list will stop running
when the numbers in the COUNT and QTY column fields of the row containing the instruction
JMP are identical.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

579
22 Using the XNC

Instruction “READ”
The instruction READ must be inserted in the LABL column field and is used to run a list inserted
between the rows of the current list.

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

... ... ... ... ...

Tagli.bpp 2 0

READ DistintaAnte 0

This list can be run in two different ways:

z if NORMAL running mode is enabled, the instruction READ is used to jump to the list inserted
in the PROGRAM column field (e.g. DistintaAnte, table below), to open it, run it and, after
running it, to stop running, without having any effect on the remaining programs in the current
list (e.g. Fori.bpp and Antine.bpp, table below). In this case it is only possible to insert one
READ instruction.

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

... ... ... ... ...

READ DistintaAnte 0

Fori.bpp 2 0

Antine.bpp 2 0

z if SELF-EXPIRING running mode is enabled, the instruction READ is used to explode the list
inserted in the PROGRAM column field, inserting its contents between the rows of the current
list, and to run the whole contents of the current list. In this case it is possible to insert more
than one READ instruction.

Instruction “WRIT”
The instruction WRIT must be inserted in the LABL column field, whereas the name of a job list
must appear in the PROGRAM column field. The instruction WRIT is used to write the list in the
PROGRAM field in a file.

LABL PROGRAM QTY CONT COMMENT

... ... ... ... ...

Tagli.bpp 2 0

WRIT DistintaAnte 0

580 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Instruction “_NOR”
The instruction _NOR enables NORMAL running mode. It must be inserted in the LABL column
field, at the start of the block containing the list to be run.

Instruction “_SXG”
The instruction _SXG enables SELF-EXPIRING running mode. It must be inserted in the LABL
column field, at the start of the block containing the list to be run.

Instruction “END”
The instruction END identifies the last row to be run, regardless of the rows that follow it, and it
must be inserted in the LABL column field. This instruction can be used to divide the list into
various blocks, which can be run separately. This function can be replaced by an empty row.

Modifying variables for a program inserted in the list

Within the list it is possible to modify the values of machining program variables. These
modifications do not affect the program itself, but are only stored in the list.
This operation varies according to the type of file selected: BPP or non BPP.
z BPP: files with the extension BPP created using the BiesseWorks Editor application. In this
case, select one of these files to display the dialogue box Program variables - [%1] (for a
description of the dialogue box see chapter 19 “Variables and VBScript instructions”). The
dialogue box is only displayed if the source file has been created using variables and if the
BiesseWorks Editor application is running, that is to say if it is present in the Windows
applications bar. The values for the variables present in the dialogue box will automatically be
inserted in the COMMENT column field.
z Non BPP: files with other extensions, created using other application software. In this case,
please consult the on-line XNC manual. The added values will appear in the COMMENT
column field.

To carry out this operation, select the button provided or the menu EDIT and the item
PARAMETERS.

Modifying panel data

Within the list it is possible, by selecting a file, to modify certain program characteristics, that is to
say to modify the panel data. This modification can only be made in BPP files created using the
BiesseWorks Editor application.

To carry out this operation, position the cursor on the row in the table containing the name of the
BPP file required, display the context menu and click on the item PANEL, or click on the menu
EDIT and the option PANEL.

The dialogue box Piece variables (figure 345) is displayed. For a description of the fields in the
window, see paragraph “Creating the document”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

581
22 Using the XNC

Figure 345

Modifications made to the machining program in the list will have no effect on the program itself,
but will only be stored within the list, and will therefore only be applied within the list itself.

Enable the two-piece simultaneous machining mode

To enable the simultaneous machining of two pieces, insert the required program in the work list,
display dialogue box Piece variables and in field Origins list enter the correct pair of origins (see
machine instructions for use). The simulation and display of the double tooling is only possible
after having inserted the program in the work list.
In this way, it is also possible to run parametric programs with parametric tooling.

Saving the list

To save the job list and create a new file, click on the menu FILE and the option SAVE AS. The
SELECT LISTS window is displayed; type the name of the new list in the field provided and click
on Confirm. The new list name will appear on the LIST application software heading bar.

The icon depicting an open save will be displayed near the left hand corner of the LIST application,
to indicate that it is necessary to save the list.

Saving modifications to the current list

To save modifications made to the current, active job list, click on . The modifications will be
overwritten.

The icon depicting an open save will be displayed near the left hand corner of the LIST application,
to indicate that it is necessary to save the list following a modification.

Optimising the programs in the list

To optimise a program, select it, click on the menu SERVICES and the item PROGRAM >
OPTIMISE, or display the context menu and click on the item OPTIMISE.

582 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Programs with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser. If
the BiesseWorks Editor application is not running, i.e. it is not present on the Windows applications
bar, the operation will not be carried out.
The command OPTIMISE can be used to optimise, save and overwrite files with the extension
ISO.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

583
22 Using the XNC

Running the work list

The job list can be run in one of the following modes:
z Automatic mode;

z Semi-automatic mode.

The name of the job list selected is displayed in the POSITIONS application software information
bar.

How to run the job list in Automatic mode

Running the job list in automatic mode is a one-off type of running, that is to say one that is carried
out in a single operation. The machine runs the whole of the work list and only suspends
machining operations if it encounters suspensions.

To carry out machining operations in automatic mode, call up the job list and press START on the
main control panel.

To run the job list via the DEBUG application software, proceed as follows:

1. open the LIST application software and call up the list (see “Procedure when opening a work
list”, page 576)

2. display the DEBUG application software and press to enable automatic mode.

3. press START on the main control panel. If the list contains programs that do not have the
extension ISO they will first be optimised and then run. All programs with extension ISO will be
run immediately without being processed For this reason, to speed up operations, it is
recommended that you insert ISO files in the list.

The ISO strings area in the DEBUG application software will display the content of the single
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation.

For the procedure used to load and lock the panel on the work table, see the “User Manual” for the
machine.

How to run the job list in Semi-automatic mode

Running the job list in semi-automatic mode is a running method that is controlled and guided by
the operator. To use this method, proceed as follows:

1. open the LIST application software and call up the list (see “Procedure when opening a work
list”, page 576)

2. display the DEBUG application software and press

3. press START on the main control panel. If the list contains programs that do not have the
extension ISO they will first be optimised and then run. All programs with extension ISO will be
run immediately without being processed

584 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

4. to move on to the next step in the program, press START again; repeat this operation until the
machining operation has been completed.
The ISO strings area in the DEBUG application software will display the content of the single
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation in
detail

For the procedure used to load and lock the panel on the work table, see the “User Manual” for the
machine.

To check the types of parameter used in each programming row to be run, use the DEBUG
application software PARAMETERS field (Break/Parameters Box), typing the parameter codes
separated by a space. During the machining operation the name and value of the parameter in the
row being executed will be displayed in the PARAMETER information bar.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

585
22 Using the XNC

22.7 Debug application software

In order to be run, the program files must be transformed into files with extension ISO. The
DEBUG application software displays the contents of the ISO files during running of the programs.
When a single machining program or a work list is being run, with this application software
displayed it is possible to check each machining step and intervene if necessary.
Figure 346: DEBUG application software

A Menu bar (see “Menu bar” on page 586).

B Break/Parameters box (see “Break/Parameters box” on page 588).
C Instructions box (see “Instructions box” on page 588).
D ISO strings area (see “ISO strings area” on page 588).
E Accessory command buttons (see “Accessory command buttons” on page 589).
F Instructions relating to axes (see “Instructions regarding the axes” on page 589).
G Information bars (see “Information bars” on page 589).

Menu bar
The following are the menus with a description of their options.

SELECTIONS:
LINE:
displays the window used to define the programming row number from which the machining
operation is to start

RESET BREAK:
Deletes the break enabled in the box provided.

586 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

ROUTINES: button used to define whether or not to explode the routine* in the programming row
being performed, to display its contents in the DEBUG application software (example shown in
figure 347).

COMMENTS:
button used to define whether or not to display the comments inserted in the program being run in
the DEBUG application software, i.e. whether or not to display rows that start with “;” (example
shown in figure 347).
Figure 347: example of a comment row containing the routine L=PCDA.

CLOSE:
closes the DEBUG application software. If you exit with breaks still set, the program being run will
still stop when it encounters the breaks.

MODE:
AUTOMATIC:
enables automatic machining program execution mode.

SEMI-AUTOMATIC:
enables semi-automatic machining program execution mode.

INSTRUCTIONS:
SPEED:
develops a sub menu containing the F instructions.

ACCELERATION:
develops a sub menu containing the E instructions.

ADVANCE:
develops a sub menu containing the II instructions.

CIRCLE/ELLIPSE:
develops a sub menu containing the R, I, J, K instructions.

HELP:
Displays the on-line help manual.

*
Routine = this is the name of a sub program or fixed cycle both inserted in a single machining program. The
fixed cycle can be recognised by the fact that it starts with the letter G or P. The routine is carried out using
the instruction (e.g. L=PCDA is a routine that calls up the fixed cycle PCDA, figure 347). For a description of
the ISO instructions that appear in the DEBUG, please consult the on-line XNC manual.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

587
22 Using the XNC

Break/Parameters box
z BREAK N field:
used to suspend running of the program at the row required, typing the row number in the field
and confirming with Enter. The number is the one at the beginning of the row followed by the
letter N (figure 348).
Figure 348

If the program contains a number of rows with the same number, the program will stop at the
first row it encounters.
It is also possible to activate a break (a suspension) within a routine* called up by a program,
by typing the row number and the name of the routine required. The break will be displayed in
the first information bar. The programming row highlighted in break status is the one that has
already been performed.
z PARAMETERS field:
used to type the name of the parameters, to display their value during running of the program
in semi-automatic mode.

Instructions box
Used to display the state of the following instructions in real time:

T; instruction relating to spindle activation;

G; modal instruction;
S; instruction relating to spindle rotation speed;
M and KA; instructions relating to the PLC.

ISO strings area

This area displays the ISO instruction strings for the program being run. Display of the comment
strings and routines can be disabled using the command provided in the SELECTIONS menu.

While the machining program is running the Debug rows will gradually change colour as they are
carried out.

For a description of the ISO instructions, see the on-line XNC manual.

*
Routine = this is the name of a sub program or fixed cycle both inserted in a single machining program. The
fixed cycle can be recognised by the fact that it starts with the letter G or P. The routine is carried out using
the instruction (e.g. L=PCDA is a routine that calls up the fixed cycle PCDA, figure 347). For a description of
the ISO instructions that appear in the DEBUG, please consult the on-line XNC manual.

588 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Accessory command buttons

Buttons Description

Enables automatic machining program execution mode.

Enables semi-automatic machining program execution mode.

Deletes the break enabled in the relative box.

Displays the window used to define the number of the programming row from which
the machining operation is to start. The number to be entered is at the start of the
row, followed by the letter N.

Instructions regarding the axes

The instructions selected in the INSTRUCTIONS menu items appear. For each menu item the
selected instruction code and value are displayed. The following instructions are visible:
z F; instructions relating to speed. FX, FY, FZ, FC are the instructions for independent
movements along each of the axes.
z E; instructions relating to acceleration along the path. EX, EY, EZ, EC are the instructions for
independent movements along each of the axes.
z II; IX, IY, IZ, IC are the instructions for independent movements along each of the axes.

z R, RI, RJ; instructions relating to the radius of the circle.

z I, J, K; instructions relating to the ellipse semi-axes and the co-ordinates of the centre.

Information bars
z The Active Breaks bar displays the number of the row at which the program has been
suspended.
z The Parameters bar displays the status of the parameters, requested in the Parameters Box,
at the moment the program was suspended.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

589
22 Using the XNC

22.8 Statistics application software

The Statistics application software is an environment where to save the information coming from
the working machine (machine processes) and the operations carried out by the operator so as to
check machine productivity and reliability.
Figure 349

The following information can be saved in the statistics environment:

z information inherent to the machine; information concerning problems detected in the machine
during machining. They are classified as “Machine events” or “Reliability events”:
• machine events; they provide useful information for programming the maintenance stages
and for checking the appropriateness of the solutions or choices made by the operator
(machine Statistics environment);
• reliability events; events related to the machine type and configuration. In certain cases,
apart from being a safe system for understanding the coherence of the selections made,
they can suggest the cause of machine malfunctioning, resulting from the deterioration
(wear) of some devices used beyond their maximum life time (reliability Statistics
environment).
z information inherent to production, to the processes related to the operations carried out by
the machine while operating, that is to say, to the operations required for machining, called
“Production events” (production Statistics environment).

The temporal duration of each event and the number of times it occurs can be saved.

590 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Button and menu description

Buttons Description

see Save option from the File menu.

see Open option from the File menu.

see Statistics in progress option from the File menu.

command not run.

see Cancel option from the Edit menu.

see Enter option from the Edit menu.

see Delete option from the Edit menu.

see Statistics option from the Windows menu.

see Machine Statistics option from the Windows menu.

see Production Statistics option from the Windows menu.

see Reliability Statistics option from the Windows menu.

see Machine Graphs option from the Windows menu.

see Production Graphs option from the Windows menu.

see Scheduled Maintenance option from the Windows menu.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

591
22 Using the XNC

Description of menus
File:
Save; stores the configuration data defined in the Statistics environment and in the Programmed
Maintenance environment in a number of files with extension DAT, storing them in the default
directory: C:\WNC\home\d_xnc\statistica\swap.

Exit; minimises the application software icon.

Open; displays the window to search for the statistics file to open.
Statistics in progress; displays the active statistics.
Delete; displays the window to select the statistics file to delete.

Delete by date; displays the window to select a statistics file group to delete according to a stated
time period.

Copy to A; displays the window to select the statistics file to save on a floppy-disk.
Copy to A: by date; displays the window to select a statistics file group to save on the floppy-disk
according to a stated time period.

Close; closes all the statistics files opened in the Machine Statistics environment or in the
Production Statistics environment.

Edit:
Cancel; cancels the last modification done in the OPERATOR table from the Statistics
environment.

Enter; inserts a new empty row in the OPERATOR table from the Statistics environment.
Delete; cancels the selected row in the OPERATOR table from the Statistics environment.

Setup:
Machine; displays the Statistics environment.
Operator; displays the Machine Statistics environment.

Commands:
List of the OPERATOR events previously enabled for activation (see “Running the statistics and
activating the events to be saved”, page 595).

View:
Total data;displays all the data of the opened statistics.
Machine data;only displays the data inherent to the MACHINE events of the opened statistics.

592 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Operator N data;only displays the data inherent to the OPERATOR events of the opened
statistics.

Operator 1 data;only displays the data inherent to the OPERATOR events of the selected
operator in the opened statistics.

Percentage;displays the graphics based on percentage.

Time;displays the graphics based on time.

Windows:
Statistics; displays the Statistics environment.
Machine Statistics; displays the Machine Statistics environment.

Production Statistics; displays the Production Statistics environment.

Reliability Statistics; displays the Reliability Statistics environment.
Machine Graphs; displays the Machine Statistics Graphs environment.

Production Graphs; displays the Production Statistics Graphs environment.

Scheduled Maintenance; displays the Scheduled Maintenance environment.

Procedure for using statistics

1. Set up statistics, if necessary (see “Setting up statistics” on page 593).

2. Record the personal identifying data (see “Registering personal data” on page 594).

3. Select the kind of events to be carried out during the working shift, to be included in the file
with the statistics data (see “Setting and enabling the events to be recorded” on page 594).

4. Run the statistics and enable the previously selected event (see item 3) so as to have it saved
(see “Running the statistics and activating the events to be saved” on page 595).

5. Stop the statistics recording (see “Stopping and saving statistics” on page 596). This operation
can be done manually or automatically.

Setting up statistics
z In the Statistics environment, select the Setup menu, the Machine option and set the following
data fields:
Name: enter the machine name.
Serial number: enter the machine serial number (mandatory).
z Set the expiration date for storing machine and production statistics data by using one of the
following options:

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

593
22 Using the XNC

Manual: used to decide, in automatic mode, the moment to stop active statistics storing,
saving the data in the appropriate file. In that case, press to execute data storing.
Daily: used to carry out automatic statistics saving at the end of each working day. Double-
click to select the Daily option, set the hour and minutes, confirm by clicking OK.
If the machine turns off before this setting, the saving process begins at the first start-up after
the set time.
Weekly: used to carry out automatic statistics saving at the end of each week. Double-clicking
to select the Weekly option, set the day, hour and minutes, confirm by clicking OK.
If the machine turns off before this setting, the saving process begins at the first start-up after
the set day and time.
Monthly: used to carry out automatic statistics saving at the end of each month. Double-click
to select the Monthly option, set the date (from 1 to 31), hour and minutes, confirm by clicking
OK.
If the machine turns off before this setting, the saving process begins at the first start-up after
the set day and time.

z Click on to confirm the settings carried out.

Registering personal data

To be able to use the statistics, enter and record your personal particulars in the specific
dialogue box. Every time the statistics are used, it is necessary to define the data in the same way
the registration was made, respecting small/capital letters, spaces, etc. Every tiny difference
produces a new registration.

To carry out this operation, select the Setup menu and the option Operator. Set the following data
fields:
Name: type your name.
Personal number: type your personal number (mandatory).
Working shift: type the working shift number.

Click on OK to confirm the settings carried out.

Setting and enabling the events to be recorded

Setting the events to be recorded includes recording the operations that are usually carried out
during the working shift and drafting of a list of these possible operations.
Each operation is defined as “event”, for example, the Tooling event (column A, fig. 350) includes
the tooling operation to be carried out physically on the machine. In this way, other options can be
added to the event list or the existing ones, modified. This setting is carried out in the OPERATOR
table.

594 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Description of theOPERATOR table

Figure 350

A B C D

A Event name. Click twice on an empty row of the table and enter the event name in the
appropriate field. To modify the event, double click on the required text and modify it.

B Used to enable/disable the event so as to be able to activate and record it. Click on the cell
and enter Y to enable the event and include it in the list of the Commands menu, or enter N to
disable it and remove it from the list.

C Used to define the recording mode of the event data.

Click on the cell and enter the following options:
• TT: used to survey only the duration.
• Q: used to survey only the number of times it occurs.
• QT: used to survey either the duration or number of times it occurs.

D Used to define under which kind of statistics the event should be saved.
Click on the cell and enter the following options:
• MM: saves the event only in the machine statistics.
• MM: saves the event only in the production statistics.
• MP: saves the event either in the machine or the production statistics.

Running the statistics and activating the events to be saved

Running the statistics allows to acquire the machine data, that is to say, the processes that occur
in the machine while working, and to store all the tasks carried out by the operator in the software
short-term memory in order to save their duration.
This data is stored in the memory and gets continuously updated until it is finally saved (see
“Stopping and saving statistics”, page 596).

Before proceeding, make sure to have set the correct password level.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

595
22 Using the XNC

z Click on the MACHINE button to run the machine statistics and/or on the PRODUCTION
button to run the production statistics. When the statistics are run, all the programmed
events are continuously saved in the software memory until the recording is stopped.
z Select the Commands menu and click on the event to record which is indicated with a yellow
mark. Once the operation is finished, deselect the option activated before (remove the yellow
mark). To open the Commands menu, the options should be enabled in the OPERATOR table
by the Y in column B (figure 350).
z To finish the activated event recording and save it in a file, see “Stopping and saving statistics”
on page 596.

This procedure should be performed in order to record the operations carried out during the daily
working shift (pause, programming of a machining operation, etc.).

Example of how to carry out the marking:

Suppose that the production statistics is running and that the following events have been included
in the list of the Commands menu through the OPERATOR table:
z Tooling; event to activate when a machine tooling operation is carried out.

z Programming; event to activate when a machining program is carried out.

z Machining check; event to activate when checking machining operations.

z Pause; event to activate when pausing.

Each event should be marked when the specific operation is carried out. If during a working phase,
a tooling operation is carried out, the relative associated event should be activated (Tooling option
of the Commands menu). Deactivate it once the operation is finished so as to save the necessary
data: hour, duration, etc.

Stopping and saving statistics

To finish recording the activated event and to stop recording the statistics, click on .

When the statistics are finished, a file is created in the default directory. Its code indicates the year,
month, date and time of the stop (figure 351).
Figure 351: A = kind of statistics (P= production, M= machine); B = year; C = month;
D = day; E = time (15 is the hour, 49 are the minutes).

P9906031.549

A B C D E

596 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 22 Using the XNC

Viewing the active statistics in real time

To view the machine and/or production statistics situation in real time, select the Machine Statistics
window (or Production Statistics) and the Statistics in progress option of the File menu.

Viewing the statistics in graphic mode

To view the graph result of the machine and/or production statistics currently in progress or
previously saved, select the Windows menu and the Machine Graphs option for the machine
statistics, or the Production Graphs option for the production statistics.

Opening and reading the machine/production statistics

1. Display the Machine Statistics or the Production Statistics environment.

2. Click on the File menu and the Open option.

3. Double-click to select the statistics to be displayed.

Viewing the data saved in the opened file

z To check the data concerning the statistics stages related to one particular operator, select the
Display menu and the Operator 1 Data option. Double-click to select the operator's name and
the working shift.
z To check all the statistics data or only the machine data, click on the specific option of Display
menu.

Deleting statistics
To delete a file with statistics data from the directory where it is saved, display the Machine
Statistics or Production Statistics environment and observe the following indications:
z To delete the statistics of a single machine/production statistic, click on the File menu and the
Delete option. Double-click to select the statistics to be deleted and confirm.
z To delete several machine/production statistics, click on the File menu and the Delete by date
option. Enter the start date and the end date of the statistics to be deleted and click on OK to
confirm.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

597
22 Using the XNC

Programmed maintenance
Scheduled maintenance checks the status of the machine components so as to carry out the
periodic maintenance scheduled by Biesse technicians.
If the operation time of the component exceeds the scheduled time period, the statistics will
display an inspection warning message.

After the inspection, and in order to reset the elapsed time counted, click on the button.

598 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

APPENDICES
A Practice

This chapter contains a few examples illustrating some of the techniques used to create machining
programs. The examples are explained using practical examples which include simple boring and
milling operations.

List of topics
• A.1 “General boring program”
• A.2 “Boring program for a “non-standard” side”
• A.3 “Milling program”
• A.4 “Boring program with parametric tooling”
• A.5 “Programs for multi-centre machines”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

601
A Practice

A.1 General boring program

Suppose we need to run a general boring program using an Ø 8mm tool and following the
procedure explained below.

Produce the drawing as follows:

1. Create a new document and define the dimensions of the reference panel.
LPX = 810
LPY = 320
LPZ = 30

2. Carry out the first vertical boring:

X = 157
Y = lpy-64
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
Y step = 32
No.Repeats = 2

3. Carry out the second vertical boring:

X = 157
Y = 37
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
Y step = 32
No.Repeats = 2

4. Carry out the third vertical boring:

X = lpx-64*3
Y = lpy-24.5
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10

602 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

X step = 32
No.Repeats = 3

5. Carry out the fourth vertical boring:

X = 157+32
Y = 37
Diameter = 5
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 9

6. Carry out the fifth vertical boring:

X = 157+32
Y = lpy-32*2
Diameter = 5
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 9

7. Carry out the sixth vertical boring:

X = 195
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10

8. Carry out the seventh vertical boring:

X = 195+346
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10

9. Carry out the eighth vertical boring:

X = 195+346+224
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10

10. Carry out the ninth vertical boring:

X = 157
Y = 37+32+96
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10

11. Carry out the first horizontal boring:

CRN = 1
SIDE = 1
X = 54

Y=
Diameter = 8

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

603
A Practice

Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 2

12. Carry out the second horizontal boring:

CRN = 1
SIDE = 1
X = 54+32+160

Y=
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 2

13. Carry out the third horizontal boring:

CRN = 1
SIDE = 4
X = 35

Y=
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 64
No.Repeats = 5

14. Check that the machine has Ø 8mm bits mounted.

The following result is obtained:

BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=157 Y=LPY-64 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpY DX=0 NRP=2
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=157 Y=37 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpY DX=0 NRP=2
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=LPX-64*3 Y=LPY-24.5 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DX=63 DY=0 NRP=3
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=157+32 Y=37 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=5 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=9
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=157+32 Y=LPY-32*2 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=5 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=9
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=195 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=195+346 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=195+346+224 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN=”1” X=157 Y=37+32+96 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BH SIDE=1 CRN=”1” X=54 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=2 MD=YES

604 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

BH SIDE=1 CRN=”1” X=54+32+160 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=2 MD=YES
BH SIDE=4 CRN=”1” X=35 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DX=64 DY=0 NRP=5 MD=YES

A.2 Boring program for a “non-standard” side

Suppose we need to run a boring program with a Ø 8mm tool on one side of a panel defined as
“non-standard”, using the following procedure.

Boring on the “non-standard” sides is carried out using the aggregates, for this reason
remember to insert the aggregate in the magazine or in the electrospindle after having
tooled it with an Ø 8mm bit.

As this type of boring is carried out on a “non-standard” side, the geometry from which to obtain
the side to machine, the milling of the geometry created and the non-standard side on which to
carry out the boring must be defined in order to effect the machining operation.
Proceed as follows:

1. Create a new document and define the dimensions of the reference panel.
LPX = 800
LPY = 600
LPZ = 30

2. Click on to start the drawing and enter the word “NewSide” in the Geom. identif.field.

3. Click on Starting point

Start X = 0
Start Y = 0

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

605
A Practice

4. Click on Line given end point

End X = lpx
End Y = lpy

5. Click on Line given end point

End X = lpx
End Y = 0

6. Click on Line given end point.

End X = 0
End Y = 0

7. Click on .
Geom. identif. = NewSide

Depth =
Correction = Left
Lead-in Type = Curve
Lead-out type = Curve
Lead-in Angle = 45
Lead-out Angle = 45
select the name of the tool in field Tool code.

8. Click on to enter a suspension; select option .

9. Click on to enter the “WFG” instruction:

• Side Identif. = 6
• Geom. identif. = NewSide

• Panel Def. =

10. Click on to enter the general boring:

• CRN = 1
• SIDE = 6
• X = 200
• Y = lpz/2
• Diameter = 8 (remember the Ø 8 tool must be fitted in an aggregate, which in its turn must
be inserted in the magazine or electrospindle).
• Depth = 5

• click on and enter the value 32 in the X step field and number 8 in the No.Repeatsfield.

606 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

The following result is obtained:

6
8 7
8

6 7

GEO ID=”LatoNuovo” SIDE=0 CRN=”1” DP=0 DX=5 DY=5

START_POINT X=0 Y=0 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=LPY
LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID=”LatoNuovo” ID=”0” Z=0 DP=0
WAIT TYP=stNT OG=1 RT=0 MR=mrrNO UK=NO
WFG ID=6 GID=”LatoNuovo” PDF=NO
BG SIDE=6 CRN=”1” X=200 Y=LPZ/2 Z=0 DP=20 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=8

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

607
A Practice

A.3 Milling program

Suppose we need to create the geometry described below using a milling machining operation and
Ø 20mm tool.

Create the geometry using one of the following procedures.

First procedure:
1. Create a new document and define the dimensions of the reference panel.
LPX = 1755
LPY = 1170
LPZ = 30

2. Click on to start the drawing. Field Geom. identif. is entered directly by the system.

3. Click on Starting point.

Start X = 0
Start Y = LPY/2

4. Click on Line given end point.

End X = 0
End Y = LPY

5. Click on Line given length and angle.

608 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

Length = 606.42
Alpha = -35

6. Click on Line given angle and final X.

End X = LPX-584.06
Alpha = 16,46

7. Click on Curve given angle and centre.

Centre X = LPX-455
Centre Y = LPY/2
Alpha = 106.48*2
Direction = dirCCW

8. Click on Line given angle and final Y.

End Y =LPY/2-237.17
Alpha = 180-16.46

9. Click on Line given end point

End X = 0
End Y = 0

10. Click on Line given end point

End X = 0
End Y = LPY/2

11. Enter the two radiuses using the Connector Acommand. Enter the value 130 in the
Radiusfield. To enter radiusing between two consecutive elements, select the first one.

Second procedure:
This procedure only differs from the previous one in how the arc of the drawing is made:
Click on Curve given end point and radius.
End X = LPX
End Y = LPY/2
Radius = 455
Direction = dirCCW
Solution = 1
Click on Curve given end point and radius.
End X = LPX-584.06
End Y = 148.64
Radius = 455
Direction = dirCCW

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

609
A Practice

Solution = 0

Geometry Milling:
position the text cursor beneath the GEO string and click on the button Milling from geometry.
Geom. identif. = search for the GEO identification code

Diameter =

Depth =
Correction = Left
Lead-in Type = Curve
Lead-in Angle = 45
Lead-out type = Curve
Lead-out Angle = 45
Final ext. = 100
Percent Radius = 200
Select the name of the tool in the fieldTool code; remember that the selected tool must be Ø
20mm and must be inserted in the magazine or in the electrospindle.

The result obtained from the programming rows is the following.

z First procedure:
GEO ID=”333” SIDE=0 CRN=”1”
START_POINT X=0 Y=LPY/2 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY
LINE_LNAN L=606.42 A=-35
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_ANXE A=16.46 XE=LPX-584.06
ARC_ANCE A=106.48*2 XC=LPX-455 YC=LPY/2 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_ANYE A=180-16.46 YE=LPY/2-237.17
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID=”333” ID=”P1026” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20

610 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

z Second procedure:
GEO ID=”333” SIDE=0 CRN=”1”
START_POINT X=0 Y=LPY/2 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY
LINE_LNAN L=606.42 A=-35
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_ANXE A=16.46 XE=LPX-584.06
ARC_EPRA XE=LPX YE=LPY/2 R=455 DIR=dirCCW SOL=1
ARC_EPRA XE=LPX-584.06 YE=148.64 R=455 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_ANYE A=180-16.46 YE=LPY/2-237.17
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID=”333” ID=”P1026” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

611
A Practice

A.4 Boring program with parametric tooling

Suppose we need to execute a boring program using parametric tooling.

1. Create a new document and define the dimensions of the reference panel.
LPX = 1000
LPY = 1000
LPZ = 30

2. Define the following fields in the Piece variables dialogue box:

Origins list = 1

Sole origin =

Symmetry =

3. Carry out the first general boring:

X = 100
Y = 100
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5

4. Carry out the second general boring:

X = LPX/2
Y = LPY/2
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5

5. Carry out the third general boring:

X = LPX-100
Y = LPY/2
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5

6. Save the program and launch the WorkTableTooling application.

7. Select the Edit menu and click with the mouse on Parametric tooling (relative values) to select
it.

612 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

8. Select the first mobile support.

In the Reference side field, select theLeft option.

Click on option button Condition and key in the following condition:
if lpx> = 470 and lpx<=1000 then
result = 65
end if
if lpx<470 then
result = lpx/2-55
end if

Confirm the settings with the button.

9. Select the second mobile support.

In the Reference side field, select theCentral option.

Click on option button Condition and key in the following condition:
if lpx> = 720 and lpx<=1000 then
result = lpx/2
end if
if lpx>=470 and lpx<720 then
result = lpx-110
end if

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

613
A Practice

Confirm the settings with the button.

10. Select the third mobile support.

In the Reference side field, select theRight option.

Click on option button Condition and key in the following condition:
if lpx> = 720 and lpx<=1000 then
result = lpx-10
end if
if lpx<720 then
result = lpx/+500
end if

Confirm the settings with the button.

11. Select the shapeable suction cups of the first row.

In the Reference side field, select theUpper option.

Click on option button Expression and enter the number 50.

Confirm the settings by clicking on the button.

614 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

12. Select the shapeable suction cups of the second row.

In the Reference side field, select theLower option.

Click on option button Expression and enter the following expression: lpy-50.

Confirm the settings with the button.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

615
A Practice

A.5 Programs for multi-centre machines

Find below three examples of how to carry out the machining operations using a machine with two
processing centres and work table made up of two tables.

EXAMPLE 1: “gantry” mode

Profile milling A. Piece with dimensions LPX = 1000, LPY = 700, LPZ = 30.

Enabling the “gantry” mode (simultaneous use of both front carriages) on both tables at a distance
of 1100 with machining operation repeated at a distance of 1100.

616 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

617
A Practice

EXAMPLE 2: use of alternate processing centres

Profile milling A. Panel with dimensions LPX = 1000, LPY = 700, LPZ = 30. Enabled origins 1 and
3 (field Origins list).

Use of centre C2 on table one, on reference origin 1; and of centre C3 on table two, on reference
origin 3. In this case, to carry out the machining program, optimise it just once.

618 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 A Practice

EXAMPLE 2: use of the “multiple centre” for machining operations in pendular mode
Programming machining operations to be carried out in part with centre C2 and in part with centre
C3. In this case, the two centres will operate in pendular mode; both operating sections will
operate either on one table or on the other respecting the programmed restrictions.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

619
A Practice

620 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

B List of commands and
programming parameters

The commands or system instructions to program BiesseWorks machining operations are found in
the commands area of the Editor application software. The following is a list of the commands to
create and modify the geometrical figures, to create milling, boring and cutting operations. Each
command is associated with a list of parameters with relative description.

List of topics
• B.1 “Commands Piece variables”
• B.2 “Commands and geometric parameters”
• B.3 “Commands and parameters for boring”
• B.4 “Commands and parameters for cutting”
• B.5 “Commands and parameters for milling and insertions”
• B.6 “Commands and parameters to create the drawing”
• B.7 “Commands and parameters for the functions”
• B.8 “Positioning instructions and parameters”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

621
B List of commands and programming parameters

B.1 Commands Piece variables

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

PANEL piece data

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

CHKCOLL see the Collision control field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.

CKOP see the Keyboard offset field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.
• Bit 0 = Movement in X
• Bit 1 = Movement in Y

COLLTOOL see the Machining working dim. field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”,
page 374.

CUSTSTR see the User data field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.
Indicate the string with the personalised data separated by a comma.

ENABLELABEL allows you to generate the ISO code for labelling operations. This
parameter only appears in the dialogue box Piece variables when the
machine is fitted with a label printer.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

FCN allows you to define the multiplying factor for the units of measurement
(e.g. set 1.0 for the millimetres; set 25.4 for the inches). See the Measure
in inches field in paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

JIGTH see the Jig thickness field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

LOCKWASTE see the Waste blocking field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

LPX see the LPX field in paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.

622 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

LPY see the LPY field in paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.

LPZ see the LPZ field in paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

MATERIAL see the Material field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374. The
values allowed are those which appear in the list of the piece images.

OPPWKRS (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “Opposite machining” field in
paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

ORLST see the Origins list field in paragraph “Dialogue box Piece variables”,
page 374. Indicate the list of whole numbers separated by a comma (e.g.
1,4).

RUNPAV see the Optimise suction cups field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”,
page 374.

SYMMETRY see the Symmetry field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TOOLING see the “Tooling” field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

UNICLAMP see the Uniclamp field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

UNIQUE see the Sole origin field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

WTPIANI see the Locking Zone field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

XCUT see the X cut. position field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page 374.

YCUT see the “Y cut. position” field in “Dialogue box Piece variables”, page
374.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

623
B List of commands and programming parameters

B.2 Commands and geometric parameters

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

GEO Geometry definition (for the list of parameters, see page 624).

GEOTEXT Text (for the list of parameters, see page 626).

OFFGEO Geometry offset (for the list of parameters, see page 629).

z GEO

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Start angle field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw
with EGA tools”, page 344.

ARP see the Angle [°] field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw
with EGA tools”, page 344.

COW (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the (COW)Generate opp. mach.
field in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with EGA
tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CRC see the Correction field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw
with EGA tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• 0 = Central.
• 1 = Right.
• 2 = Left.
• 5 = Internal.
• 6 = External.
• 7 = From the geometry.

CRN see the CRN field in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to
draw with EGA tools”, page 344.

DA see the Angular step field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw
with EGA tools”, page 344.

624 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z GEO

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DP see the Depth field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

DX see the X step field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

DY see the Y step field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

ER
see the First Item field (option ) in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of
parameters used to draw with EGA tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

ID geometry identification string

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the geometry. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

LRP see the L. step field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

NRP see the No.Repeats field in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of parameters

used to draw with EGA tools”, page 344.

R see the Radius field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

RDL
see the Radial field (option ) in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of
parameters used to draw with EGA tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

625
B List of commands and programming parameters

z GEO

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

RTY enables the type of repetition. See the description of the repetition
buttons in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• -1 = “rpNO”
• 0 = “rpX”.
• 1 = “rpY”.
• 2 = “rpXY”.
• 3 = “rpCIR”.
• 5 = “rpAL”.

RV see the Reverse field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw

with EGA tools”, page 344.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph 14.2 “Definition of
parameters used to draw with EGA tools”, page 344.

XRC see the (XRC)X field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

YRC see the (YRC)Y field in 14.2 “Definition of parameters used to draw with
EGA tools”, page 344.

z GEOTEXT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see parameter A of the “GEO” command (page 624).

ACC see the Accuracy field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

ALN see the Alignment field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367. Values
allowed:
• 0 = central alignment.
• 1 = left-hand alignment.
• 2 = right-hand alignment.

626 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z GEOTEXT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

ANG see the Angle field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

ARP see parameter ARP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

BOL see the Bold field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367. Values allowed:
• 0 = normal.
• 1 = bold.

CIR see the Geometry field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367. Values
allowed:
• 1 = circular path (option Text on circle).
• 0 = linear path (option Text on line).

CRN see the CRN field in paragraph 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

DA see parameter DA of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DX see parameter DX of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DY see parameter DY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

ER see parameter ER of the “GEO” command (page 624).

FNT see the Font name field in paragraph 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

ID text identification string

ITL see the Italics field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.
Values allowed:
• 0 = normal.
• 1 = italics.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This
string is not visualised between the programming lines, but in the
dialogue box Layer management.

LRP see parameter LRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

NRP see parameter NRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

627
B List of commands and programming parameters

z GEOTEXT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

PST see the Position field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “txtExt”
• 1 = “txtInt”

R see parameter R of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDL see parameter RDL of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDS see the Radius field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367. Only to be used
if parameter CIR=1.

RTY see parameter RTY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph 14.5 “Creating a text”, page
367.

SZE see the Height field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

TXT see the Text field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

VRS see the Direction field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.
Values allowed:
• 0 = option From right to left.
• 1 = option From left to right.
• 2 = option From top to bottom.
• 3 = option From bottom to top.

WGH see the Extension field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

X see the X field 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

XRC see parameter XRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Y see the Y field in 14.5 “Creating a text”, page 367.

YRC see parameter YRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

628 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z OFFGEO

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

CRT see the Type of compensation field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.

Values allowed:
• 0 = Left/Right.
• 1 = From the geometry.
• 2 = Internal/External.

GID see the GID Reference geometry field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.

ID see the ID Generated geometry field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the geometry. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

LTP see the Connect to the previous one field in chapter 14 “Creating
profiles”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

OFS see the OFS Offset for compensation field in chapter 14 “Creating
profiles”.

OSL see the OSL Selection type field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “oslTan”.
• 1 = “oslSel”.

SIL ID list of the individual geometric entities to be included between double

quotes. Each geometry entity is identified by a numeric ID. The SIL
parameter allows you to define a list of IDs - separated by a comma - in
order to identify the single geometric parts you need to work on (e.g.
PARAM, NAME=SIL, VALUE=”59891, 59802, 59896”).

RV see the Reverse field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

629
B List of commands and programming parameters

z OFFGEO

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

SHC see the SHC Sharp corners field in chapter 14 “Creating profiles”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

630 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

B.3 Commands and parameters for boring

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

B_GEO Bore from geometry

BCA Bore with C axis on circular side

BCL Bore with C axis on straight side

BG Generic bore

BH Horizontal bore

BV Vertical bore

S32 System bores

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see parameter A of the “GEO” command (page 624).

A21 see the Aggr21 angle field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

AGG aggregate identification.

AP
see the description of the buttons in “Description of the fields present in
the boring windows”, page 421. Values allowed:
• 0 = NO; linear ( ).

• 1 = YES; circular ( ).

AR see the (AR) field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

ARP see parameter ARP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

AZ see the (AZ) field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

AZS see the Add. Z saf. field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

631
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

BFC see the Chip cleaning by blowing field in “Description of the fields present in the
boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CEN see the Centre field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

CKA enables the type of inclination AR/AZ. See the (AZ) field and the (AR) field in
“Description of the fields present in the boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “azrNO”.
• 1 = “azrABS”.
• 2 = “azrINC”.

CRN Number of corners. See the CRN field in “Description of the fields present in the
boring windows”, page 421.

COW (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “(COW)Generate opp. mach.” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

DA see parameter DA of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DDS see the Lower. dist. field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

DIA see the Diameter field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

DIR
Direction of the repetitions; option or option (in the case of System bores
type boring). This parameter is linked with parameter STP. Values allowed:
• 0 = “drX”.
• 1 = “drY”.

DP see the Depth field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

DSP see the Piercing speed field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

DST see the Distance field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

632 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DX see parameter DX of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DY see parameter DY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

EA21 enables the use of parameters A21 and S21.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

ER see parameter ER of the “GEO” command (page 624).

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

ID machining operation identification string.

IOS see the Appr./output speed field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

ISO ISO instruction.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box Layer
management.

LRP see parameter LRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

MAC see the “Machine” field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

MD enables the creation of a bore midway through the piece thickness. See also the
Y field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

NRP see parameter NRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

OPT see the OPT field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

PRS see the Presser field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

633
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

R see parameter R of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDL see parameter RDL of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RSP see the Rot. speed [rpm] field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

RTY see parameter RTY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

S21 see the Aggr21 face field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.
Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4 (i.e. the indicators identifying the standard side faces) or
an indicator of the customised face.

SHP see the Hood position field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed from 0 to 6:
• 0 = automatic.
• 1 = all up.
• 6 = all down.

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in
the boring windows”, page 421.

SIL parameter only valid for the B_GEO command. For the description, see the SIL
parameter of the “OFFGEO” command (page 629).

SPI see the Spindle field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

STP see the “Step” field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

TCL see the Tool class field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 1 = C_ROUTING
• 0 = C_DRILLING

THR enables the through bore. See also the Depth field in “Description of the fields
present in the boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 1 = through bore operation enabled.
• 0 = through bore operation disabled.

TNM see the Tool code field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421. Indicate the string with the name of the tool.

634 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TOS see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TTP see the Tool type field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

Values allowed with C_ROUTING tool class:

• 100 = CANDELA
• 101 = SAGOMATA
• 102 = ROUT0
• 103 = ROUT1

Values allowed with C_DRILLING tool class:

• 0 = NORMALE
• 1 = LANCIA
• 2 = SVASATA
• 3 = NORMALEG

TYP
type of repeat bores. See the description of the buttons in
“Description of the fields present in the boring windows”, page 421.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “sysCorr”.
• 1 = “sysHole”.
• 2 = “sysSpace”.
• 3 = “sysOffset”.

VTR see the Vertical runs field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

WSP see the Work.Speed [mm/min] field in “Description of the fields present in the
boring windows”, page 421.

X X co-ordinate of the first bore. See the X field in “Description of the fields present
in the boring windows”, page 421.

XMI see the Minimum X field in “Description of the fields present in the boring
windows”, page 421.

XRC see parameter XRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Y Y co-ordinate of the first bore. See the Y field in “Description of the fields present
in the boring windows”, page 421.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

635
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

YRC see parameter YRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Z see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the boring windows”,
page 421.

636 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

B.4 Commands and parameters for cutting

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

CUT_F Piece formatting

CUT_FR Rectangular cut

CUT_G Generic cut

CUT_GEO Cut from geometry

CUT_X Cut in X

CUT_Y Cut in Y

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see parameter A of the “GEO” command (page 624).

AGG aggregate identification.

ANG see the Angle [°] field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

ARP see parameter ARP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

AR see the (AZ) field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

BDR see the Two-way run field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BFC see the Chip cleaning by blowing field in “Description of the fields present in the
cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

637
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

BRC see the Blade radius correction field in “Description of the fields present in the
cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CEN see the Centre field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

CKA enables the type of inclination AR/AZ. See the (AZ) field and the (AR) field in
“Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “azrNO”.
• 1 = “azrABS”.
• 2 = “azrINC”.

CRC see the Correction field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = Central.
• 1 = Right.
• 2 = Left.
• 7 = From the geometry.

CRN see the CRN field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

COW (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “(COW)Generate opp. mach.” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

D see the Distance field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

DA see parameter DA of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DIN see the Initial ext. field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

DOU see the Final ext. field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

DP see the Depth field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

638 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DSP see the Lowering speed field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

DVR see the Final run field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

DX see parameter DX of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DY see parameter DY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

ER see parameter ER of the “GEO” command (page 624).

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

GIP see the GIP field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

ID machining operation identification string.

IOS see the Appr./output speed field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

ISO ISO instruction.

L see the Length field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box Layer
management.

LRP see parameter LRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

LX see the X length field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

LY see the Y length field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

NRP see parameter NRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

639
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

NRV see the Reverse the cutting direction field in paragraph “Description of the fields
present in the cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

OPT see the OPT field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

OVM see the Over-material field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

PRV see the Possible reversing of the cut field in “Description of the fields present in
the cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

R see parameter R of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDL see parameter RDL of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RSP see the Rot. speed [rpm] field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

RTY see parameter RTY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RV see the Reverse field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

SHP see the Hood position field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed from 0 to 6:
• 0 = automatic.
• 1 = all up.
• 6 = all down.

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in
the cutting windows”, page 429.

SIL parameter only valid for the CUT_GEO command. For the description, see the
SIL parameter of the “OFFGEO” command (page 629).

640 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

SPI see the Spindle field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

TCL see the Tool class field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 1 = C_ROUTING
• 2 = C_CUTTING

TH see the Thickness field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

THR enables the through bore. See also the Depth field in “Description of the fields
present in the cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 1 = through bore operation enabled.
• 0 = through bore operation disabled.

TNM see the Tool code field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429. Indicate the string with the name of the tool.

TOS see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TTK see the Total Thickness field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

TTP see the Tool type field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.
Values allowed with C_ROUTING tool class:
• 100 = CANDELA
• 101 = SAGOMATA
• 102 = ROUT0
• 103 = ROUT1
Values allowed with C_CUTTING tool class:
• 200 = CUTT0
• 201 = CUTT1
• 250 = HEAD0
• 251 = HEAD1

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

641
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TYP
type of repeat cuts. See the description of the buttons in
“Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”, page 429.
Values allowed:
• 2 = “cutXY”.
• 3 = “cutXA”.
• 4 = “cutYA”.
• 5 = “cutLA”.

VTR see the Vertical runs field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting
windows”, page 429.

WSP see the Work.Speed [mm/min] field in “Description of the fields present in the
cutting windows”, page 429.

X see the X field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”, page
429.

XE see the End X field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

XRC see parameter XRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Y see the Y field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”, page
429.

YE see the End Y field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

YRC see parameter YRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Z see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the cutting windows”,
page 429.

642 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

B.5 Commands and parameters for milling

and insertions
COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

INSERT Insertion (for the list of parameters, see INSERTG on page 643).

INSERTG Insertion from geometry (for the list of parameters, see page 643).

POCK Pocketing (for the list of parameters, see page 645).

ROUT Milling (for the list of parameters, see ROUTG on page 650).

ROUTG Milling from geometry (for the list of parameters, see page 650).

TT Probe (for the list of parameters, see page 660).

z INSERTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see parameter A of the “GEO” command (page 624).

AGG see the Aggregate field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438.

ARP see parameter ARP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

CEN see the Centre field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion
windows”, page 438.

CRN see the CRN field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion
windows”, page 438.

DA see parameter DA of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DP see the Depth field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion
windows”, page 438.

DP see the Depth field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion
windows”, page 438.

DX see parameter DX of the “GEO” command (page 624).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

643
B List of commands and programming parameters

z INSERTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DY see parameter DY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

ER see parameter ER of the “GEO” command (page 624).

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438.

ID machining operation identification string.

ISO ISO instruction.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This
string is not visualised between the programming lines, but in the
dialogue box Layer management.

LRP see parameter LRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

MAC see the “Machine” field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438.

NRP see parameter NRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

OPT see the OPT field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

R see parameter R of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RTY see parameter RTY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph “Description of the fields
present in the insertion windows”, page 438.

SIL see parameter SIL of the “OFFGEO” command (page 629).

SPI see the Spindle field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion
windows”, page 438.

TCL see the Tool class field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438.
Values allowed:
• 3 = C_INSERTING

TNM see the Tool code field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438. Indicate the string with the name of the
tool.

644 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z INSERTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TTP see the Tool type field in “Description of the fields present in the
insertion windows”, page 438.
Values allowed:
• 300 = BASETTA
• 301 = ATTACCAGLIA
• 302 = REGGIPIANI
• 303 = CERNIERA
• 304 = GUIDA
• 305 = BUSSOLA
• 306 = SPINA
• 307 = PARACOLPI
• 308 = COLLA

WSP see the Work.Speed [mm/min] field in “Description of the fields present
in the insertion windows”, page 438.

X see the X field “Description of the fields present in the insertion

windows”, page 438.

XRC see parameter XRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Y see the Y field in “Description of the fields present in the insertion

windows”, page 438.

YRC see parameter YRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Z see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the

insertion windows”, page 438.

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Angle [°] field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

A21 see the Aggr21 angle field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

AGG aggregate identification.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

645
B List of commands and programming parameters

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AIN see the “Lead-in Angle” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

AOU see the “Lead-out Angle” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

CEN see the Centre field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

CIN see the “(CIN)Correction in air” field in “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CKI see the Activ. islands field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

COU see the “(COU) Correction in air” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

COW (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “(COW)Generate opp. mach.”
field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

DIA see the “Diameter” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DIN see the “Initial ext.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DLT see the Overlapping field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

DOU see the “Final ext.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DP see the Depth field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

646 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DSP see the Lowering speed field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

EA21 enables the use of parameters A21 and S21.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

ID machining operation identification string.

IOS see the Appr./output speed field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

ISL see the Islands list field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.
Indicate the string with the list of islands. The names of the islands must
be inside quotation marks, and separated by commas, e.g. “is1”, “is2”.

ISO ISO instruction.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This
string is not visualised between the programming lines, but in the
dialogue box Layer management.

OPT see the OPT field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

OTR see the Horizontal runs field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

PRP see the “Percent Radius” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

RRV see the Finishing revers. field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page
412.

RSP see the Rot. speed [rpm] field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

647
B List of commands and programming parameters

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

RV see the Reverse field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

S21 see the Aggr21 face field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4 (i.e. the indicators identifying the standard
side faces) or an indicator of the customised face.

SDS see the “Decel. Dist.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

SHP see the “Hood position” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed from 0 to 6:
• 0 = automatic.
• 1 = all up.
• 6 = all down.

SPI see the Spindle field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

TBI see the “(TBI)Insert tabbing” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TBO see the “(TBO)Insert tabbing” field in “Description of the fields present
in the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TC see the Compensation field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TCL see the Tool class field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 1 = C_ROUTING
• 2 = C_CUTTING

648 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TIN see the “Lead-in Type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = None
• 1 = Curve
• 2 = Line
• 3 = Tg LineCurve
• 5 = Helix
• 6 = 3DLineCurve
• 7 = Corrected 3DLine
• 8 = Corrected 3DCurve
• 9 = Corrected Line
• 14 = 3D profile

TNM see the “Tool code” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394. Indicate the string with the name of the tool.

TOS see the TOS field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TOU see the “Lead-out type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = None
• 1 = Curve
• 2 = Line
• 3 = Tg LineCurve
• 5 = Helix
• 6 = 3DLineCurve
• 7 = Corrected 3DLine
• 8 = Corrected 3DCurve
• 9 = Corrected Line
• 14 = 3D profile

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

649
B List of commands and programming parameters

z POCK

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TTP see the “Tool type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed with C_ROUTING tool class:
• 100 = CANDELA
• 101 = SAGOMATA
• 102 = ROUT0
• 103 = ROUT1
Values allowed with C_CUTTING tool class:
• 200 = CUTT0
• 201 = CUTT1
• 250 = HEAD0
• 251 = HEAD1

TYP see the description of the buttons to define the types of machining
operation in paragraph “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “ptZIG”.
• 1 = “ptZZ”.
• 2 = “ptIN”.
• 3 = “ptOUT” .
• 4 = “ptFSH”.

WSP see the “Work.Speed [mm/min]” field in “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”, page 394.

Z see the Z step field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

ZST see the Overlapping field in “Geometric profile pocketing”, page 412.

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see parameter A of the “GEO” command (page 624).

A21 see the Aggr21 angle field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

AGG aggregate identification.

650 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AIN see the “Lead-in Angle” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

AOU see the “Lead-out Angle” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

AR see the “(AR)” field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

ARP see parameter ARP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

AUX (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “(AUX)AUX tables” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”.

AZ see the “(AZ)” field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

AZS see the Add. Z saf. field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

BDR see the Two-way run field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BFC see the Chip cleaning by blowing field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BLW see the Blower field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CEN see the Centre field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

CIN see the “(CIN)Correction in air” field in “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

651
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

CKA enables the type of inclination AR/AZ. See the (AZ) field and the (AR)
field in “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”, page
394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “azrNO”.
• 1 = “azrABS”.
• 2 = “azrINC”.

CKT see the Enable TCP field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

COF see the Enable finishing field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

COU see the “(COU) Correction in air” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CRC see the “Correction” field in paragraph “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = Central.
• 1 = Right.
• 2 = Left.
• 7 = From the geometry.

COW (for the “Skipper” machine only) see the “(COW)Generate opp. mach.”
field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CRN see the CRN field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

652 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

CRR see the Corner slow down field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for
programming using the chip deflector”, page 452. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CSP see the Corner speed field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DA see parameter DA of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DDT see the Distance field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming using
the chip deflector”, page 452.

DIA see the “Diameter” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DIN see the “Initial ext.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DOF see the Finishing step field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DOU see the “Final ext.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DP see the “Depth” field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

DSP see the Lowering speed field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

DVR see the Final run field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

DX see parameter DX of the “GEO” command (page 624).

DY see parameter DY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

EA21 enables the use of parameters A21 and S21.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

EECS see the “Activates the electronic copier#” field in “Description of the
fields present in the milling windows”, page 394.

ER see parameter ER of the “GEO” command (page 624).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

653
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

FDT see the Final distance field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming
using the chip deflector”, page 452.

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

GIN see the “(GIN)Offset” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

GIP see the GIP field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

GOU see the “(GOU)Offset” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

ID machining operation identification string.

IDT see the Starting distance field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for
programming using the chip deflector”, page 452.

IOS see the Appr./output speed field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

ISO ISO instruction.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This
string is not visualised between the programming lines, but in the
dialogue box Layer management.

LNG see the Length [mm|%] field in paragraph “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”.

LPR see the Length as % field in paragraph “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”.

LRP see parameter LRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

NEBS see the Avoids output between the runs field in “Description of the
fields present in the milling windows”, page 394.

NRP see parameter NRP of the “GEO” command (page 624).

654 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

OPT see the OPT field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

OTR see the Horizontal runs field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

OVM see the Over-material field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

PCIN see the “Correction of initial depth” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

PCU see the “Correction of end depth” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

PDIN see the “Length of the initial section” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

PDU see the “Length of the end section” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

PMOL see the “ZE axis speed variation” field in “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

PRP see the “Percent Radius” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394.

PRS see the Presser field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

R see parameter R of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDL see parameter RDL of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RDT see the Rotation [%] field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming
using the chip deflector”, page 452.

RSP see the Rot. speed [rpm] field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

655
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

RTY see parameter RTY of the “GEO” command (page 624).

RV see the “Reverse” field in “Description of the fields present in the

milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

S21 see the Aggr21 face field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4 (i.e. the indicators identifying the standard
side faces) or an indicator of the customised face.

SC see the Sharp corners field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

SDS see the “Decel. Dist.” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

SDT see the Thickness [inc] field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming
using the chip deflector”, page 452.

SHP see the “Hood position” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed from 0 to 6:
• 0 = automatic.
• 1 = all up.
• 6 = all down.

SIL see parameter SIL of the “OFFGEO” command (page 629).

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph “Description of the fields
present in the milling windows”, page 394.

SPI see the Spindle field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

SVR see the Horizontal step field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

656 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

SWI see the Floating field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TBI see the “(TBI)Insert tabbing” field in “Description of the fields present in
the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TBO see the “(TBO)Insert tabbing” field in “Description of the fields present
in the milling windows”, page 394. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

TCL see the Tool class field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 1 = C_ROUTING
• 2 = C_CUTTING

TDT see the Deflector field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming using
the chip deflector”, page 452. Indicate the string with the name of the
chip deflector.

THR enables the through machining operation. See the “Depth” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”,
page 394.
Values allowed:
• 1 = through bore operation enabled.
• 0 = through bore operation disabled.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

657
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TIN see the “Lead-in Type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = None
• 1 = Curve
• 2 = Line
• 3 = Tg LineCurve
• 5 = Helix
• 6 = 3DLineCurve
• 7 = Corrected 3DLine
• 8 = Corrected 3DCurve
• 9 = Corrected Line
• 14 = 3D profile

TLI see the Tabbing length option of the “(TBI)Insert tabbing” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”,
page 394.

TLO see the Tabbing length option of the “(TBO)Insert tabbing” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”,
page 394.

TNM see the “Tool code” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394. Indicate the string with the name of the tool.

TOS see the TOS field in paragraph “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

658 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

TOU see the “Lead-out type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed:
• 0 = None
• 1 = Curve
• 2 = Line
• 3 = Tg LineCurve
• 5 = Helix
• 6 = 3DLineCurve
• 7 = Corrected 3DLine
• 8 = Corrected 3DCurve
• 9 = Corrected Line
• 14 = 3D profile

TQI see the Tabbing position option of the “(TBI)Insert tabbing” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”,
page 394.

TQO see the Tabbing position option of the “(TBO)Insert tabbing” field in
paragraph “Description of the fields present in the milling windows”,
page 394.

TTP see the “Tool type” field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.
Values allowed with C_ROUTING tool class:
• 100 = CANDELA
• 101 = SAGOMATA
• 102 = ROUT0
• 103 = ROUT1
Values allowed with C_CUTTING tool class:
• 200 = CUTT0
• 201 = CUTT1
• 250 = HEAD0
• 251 = HEAD1

UDT see the Use deflector field in paragraph 16.1 “Notes for programming
using the chip deflector”, page 452. Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VTR see the Vertical runs field in “Description of the fields present in the
milling windows”, page 394.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

659
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROUTG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

WSP see the “Work.Speed [mm/min]” field in “Description of the fields

present in the milling windows”, page 394.

XRC see parameter XRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

YRC see parameter YRC of the “GEO” command (page 624).

Z see the Channel field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

ZE see the End Z field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

ZS see the Starting Z field in “Description of the fields present in the milling
windows”, page 394.

z TT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AGG aggregate identification.

CEN see the Centre field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

COR see the Dis. correction field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page
440.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

CRN see the CRN field in paragraph 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page
440.

ISO see the ISO parameter field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page
440.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the machining operation. This
string is not visualised between the programming lines, but in the
dialogue box Layer management.

660 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z TT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

MD enables the creation of a bore midway through the piece thickness. See
also the Y field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

SIDE piece side. See the SIDE field in paragraph 15.6 “Programming piece
tracing”, page 440.

SPD see the TSpd field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

SPI see the Spindle field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

TNM see the Tool code field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.
Indicate the string with the name of the tool.

TYP see the Tracer type field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

X see the X field 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

Y see the Y field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

Z see the Channel field in 15.6 “Programming piece tracing”, page 440.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

661
B List of commands and programming parameters

B.6 Commands and parameters to create the

drawing
z List of commands and parameters to design the arches (page 662).

z List of commands and parameters to design the lines (page 664).

z List of commands and parameters to design the figures (page 665).

List of commands and parameters to design the arches

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

AINC_ANCE Incremental curve given angle and centre point.

AINC_EPRA Incremental curve given radius and end point.

ARC_ANCE Curve given angle and centre.

ARC_ANCERATP Curve given angle centre radius and tangency to previous item.

ARC_CETS Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point
determined).

ARC_CETSPK Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point not
determined).

ARC_EPCE Curve given end point and centre.

ARC_EPRA Curve given end point and radius.

ARC_EPRATP Curve given end point radius and tangency to previous item.

ARC_EPTP Curve given end point and tangency to previous item.

ARC_IPEP Curve using three points.

ARC_RATS Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point
determined).

ARC_RATSPK Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point not
determined).

CONNECTOR Connector A.

CONNECTOR2 Connector B.

START_POINT Starting point (for the list of parameters, see page 673).

662 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

DIR see the Direction field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

R see the Radius field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

SC see the Sharp corner field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “scOFF”.
• 1 = “sc1”.
• 2 = “sc2”.

SOL see the Solution field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.
Values allowed: 0.1. For the ARC_EPRATP command only, the values allowed
are: AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

X2 see the X2 field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

XC see the Centre X field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

XE see the End X field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

XI • For the AINC_ANCE command, see the Centre X incr. field in ““Arc” type tools”,
page 353.
• For the AINC_EPRA command, see the End X incr. field in ““Arc” type tools”,
page 353.

Y2 see the Y2 field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

YC see the Centre Y field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

YE see the End Y field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

YI • For the AINC_ANCE command, see the Centre Y incr. field in ““Arc” type tools”,
page 353.
• For the AINC_EPRA command, see the End Y incr. field in ““Arc” type tools”,
page 353.

ZE see the End Z field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

663
B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

ZS see the Start Z field in ““Arc” type tools”, page 353.

List of commands and parameters to design the lines

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

CHAMFER Chamfer.

LINC_EP Incremental line given end point.

LINE_ANXE Line given angle and final X.

LINE_ANYE Line given angle and final Y.

LINE_EP Line given end point.

LINE_EPANTP Line given end point angle and tangency to previous item.

LINE_EPTP Line given end point and tangency to previous item.

LINE_LNAN Line given length and angle.

LINE_LNTP Line given length and tangency to previous item.

LINE_LNXE Line given length and final X.

LINE_LNYE Line given length and final Y.

START_POINT Starting point (for the list of parameters, see page 673).

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

D see the Distance field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

FD see the Work. Speed field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

L see the Length field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

664 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

MVT see the Repositioning field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

SC see the Sharp corner field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “scOFF”.
• 1 = “sc1”.
• 2 = “sc2”.

SOL see the Solution field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351. Values allowed: 0, 1.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

XE see the End X field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

XI see the Increase in X field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

XS see the Start X field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

YE see the End Y field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

YI see the Increase in Y field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

YS see the Start Y field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

ZE see the End Z field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

ZS see the Start Z field in ““Line” type tools”, page 351.

List of commands and parameters to design the figures

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

CIRCLE_3P Circle given three points (for the list of parameters, see page 666).

CIRCLE_CR Circle given centre and radius (for the list of parameters, see page 667).

ELLIPSE Ellipse (for the list of parameters, see page 667).

OVAL Oval (for the list of parameters, see page 668).

POLYGON Polygon (for the list of parameters, see page 669).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

665
B List of commands and programming parameters

COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

RECTANGLE Rectangle (for the list of parameters, see page 671).

STAR Star (for the list of parameters, see page 672).

START_POINT Starting point (for the list of parameters, see page 673).

z CIRCLE_3P

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AS see the Start alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given three points”, page 358.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle
given three points”, page 358.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given three points”, page 358.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given three points”, page 358.

X1 see the X1field in paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Circle given three points”, page 358.

X2 see the X2 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given
three points”, page 358.

X3 see the X3 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given
three points”, page 358.

Y1 see the Y1 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given
three points”, page 358.

Y2 see the Y2 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given
three points”, page 358.

Y3 see the Y3 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle given
three points”, page 358.

666 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z CIRCLE_CR

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AS see the Start alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given centre and radius”, page 358.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle
given centre and radius”, page 358.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given centre and radius”, page 358.

R see the Radius field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle
given centre and radius”, page 358.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Circle given centre and radius”, page 358.

XC see the Centre X field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle
given centre and radius”, page 358.

YC see the Centre Y field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Circle
given centre and radius”, page 358.

z ELLIPSE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue boxEllipse”,

page 356.

A1 see the Axis 1field in paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

A2 see the Axis 2field in paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

AE see the End alphafield in paragraph “Description of fields in the

dialogue boxEllipse”, page 356.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

667
B List of commands and programming parameters

z ELLIPSE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AS see the Start alphafield in paragraph “Description of fields in the

dialogue boxEllipse”, page 356.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

ELM see the No. Itemsfield in paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue
boxEllipse”, page 356.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

UA see the Usefield in paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.
Values allowed:
• 0 = NO (Lines).
• 1 = YES (Arcs).

UNE see the No. Items usedfield in paragraph “Description of fields in the
dialogue boxEllipse”, page 356.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

XC see the Centre X field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

YC see the Centre Y field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

boxEllipse”, page 356.

z OVAL

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AS see the Start alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Oval”, page 357.

668 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z OVAL

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”,
page 357.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Oval”, page 357.

LKR see the Conn. radius field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Oval”, page 357.

R1 see the Radius 1 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”,
page 357.

R2 see the Radius 2 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”,
page 357.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Oval”, page 357.

X1 see the X1 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”, page
357.

X2 see the X2 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”, page
357.

Y1 see the Y1 field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Oval”, page
357.

Y2 see the Y2 field.in the paragraph “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Oval”, page 357.

z POLYGON

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Polygon”, page 360.

CD see the Chamfer distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Polygon”, page 360.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

669
B List of commands and programming parameters

z POLYGON

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

CT see the Chamfer type field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “cmfNO”.
• 1 = “cmfLIN”.
• 2 = “cmfCIR”.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.

R see the Radius field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Polygon”, page 360.

S see the No. sides field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.

SC see the Sharp corner field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “scOFF”.
• 1 = “sc1”.
• 2 = “sc2”.

SD see the Starting distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Polygon”, page 360.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360.

SS see the Starting side field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Polygon”, page 360. Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

XC see the Centre X field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Polygon”, page 360.

YC see the Centre Y field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Polygon”, page 360.

670 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z RECTANGLE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Rectangle”, page 359.

CD see the Chamfer distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Rectangle”, page 359.

CRN see the Corner field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.
Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

CT see the Chamfer type field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “cmfNO”.
• 1 = “cmfLIN”.
• 2 = “cmfCIR”.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.

H see the Height field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Rectangle”, page 359.

L see the Length field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Rectangle”, page 359.

SC see the Sharp corner field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “scOFF”.
• 1 = “sc1”.
• 2 = “sc2”.

SD see the Starting distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Rectangle”, page 359.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

671
B List of commands and programming parameters

z RECTANGLE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

SS see the Starting side field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

USC see the Use field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle”, page 359.Values allowed:
• 1 = Center (centre).
• 0 = Corner (corner).

XC see the Centre X field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Rectangle”, page 359.

YC see the Centre Y field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box

Rectangle”, page 359.

z STAR

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Alpha field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.

CD see the Chamfer distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Star”, page 361.

CT see the Chamfer type field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “cmfNO”.
• 1 = “cmfLIN”.
• 2 = “cmfCIR”.

DIR see the Direction field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

ER see the Ext. radius field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.

FD see the Work. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.

672 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z STAR

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

IR see the Int. radius field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.

PS see the No. points field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.

SC see the Sharp corner field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “scOFF”.
• 1 = “sc1”.
• 2 = “sc2”.

SD see the Starting distance field in “Description of fields in the dialogue

box Star”, page 361.

SP see the Rot. Speed field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361.

SS see the Starting side field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Star”, page 361. Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

XC see the Centre X field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.

YC see the Centre Y field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.

ZE see the End Z field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.

ZS see the Start Z field in “Description of fields in the dialogue box Star”,
page 361.

z START_POINT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

X Start X; X-axis co-ordinate of the drawing start point.

Y Start Y; Y-axis co-ordinate of the drawing start point.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

673
B List of commands and programming parameters

B.7 Commands and parameters for the

functions
COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

GRIP (for the “Skipper” machine only) Clamping (for the list of parameters, see page
674).

ISO ISO code (for the description, see paragraph “ISO instructions”, page 300).

OFFSET Move piece (for the list of parameters, see page 675).

PUTPROG (for the “Skipper” machine only) Entering a subprogram (for the list of
parameters, see page 675).

ROTATE Rotate geometry (for the list of parameters, see page 676).

SCALE Geometry scale (for the list of parameters, see page 677).

SHIFT Move geometry (for the list of parameters, see page 677).

SWEEP Piece cleaning (for the list of parameters, see page 677).

WAIT Wait for piece positioning (for the list of parameters, see page 678).

WFC Circular side (for the list of parameters, see page 678).

WFG Sides from geometry (for the list of parameters, see page 680).

WFGL Side from geometry on side faces (for the list of parameters, see page 681).

WFGPS Side from geometry using section plan (for the list of parameters, see page
681).

WFL Straight side (for the list of parameters, see page 682).

z GRIP

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

CRN see the “CRN”field in paragraph “Moving the vices of the “Skipper”
machine”, page 330.
Values allowed:
• “crnN1”
• “crnN4”

674 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z GRIP

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

X see the “X position”field in paragraph “Moving the vices of the

“Skipper” machine”, page 330.

GNM see the “GNM”field in paragraph “Moving the vices of the “Skipper”
machine”, page 330.
Values allowed:
• “gcGrip1”
• “gcGrip2”

z OFFSET

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

X see the X field “Translation of the origin”, page 301.

Y see the Y field in “Translation of the origin”, page 301.

Z see the Z field in paragraph “Translation of the origin”, page 301.

z PUTPROG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

BCK see the “(BCK)Rear loading” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page

304.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

PAV see the “(PAV)Consider as piece” field in “Inserting sub-programs”,

page 304.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

REF see the “(REF)Machine origin” and “(REF)Machine origin” fields in

paragraph “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

675
B List of commands and programming parameters

z PUTPROG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

RFT see the “(RFT)(RFT) Position reference” field in “Inserting sub-

programs”, page 304.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “(1) Positioning on the origin”
• 2 = “(2) Positioning on piece corner”

ROT see the “(ROT)ROTATION” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page

304.

SPCRN see the “(SPCRN)Corner” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

Values allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

SPLPX see the “(SPLPX)Width” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

-1= default value

SPLPY see the “(SPLPY)Height” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

-1= default value

SPLPZ see the “(SPLPZ)Thickness” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page

304.
-1= default value

SPNAME see the “(SPNAME)Name” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

SYMY see the “(SYMY)Symmetry Y” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page

304.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VARS see the “(VARS)Variables” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

X see the “XX offset” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

Y see the “(Y)Y offset” field in “Inserting sub-programs”, page 304.

z ROTATE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AR see the (AR) field in “Rotating the geometry”, page 302.

X see the X field “Rotating the geometry”, page 302.

676 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z ROTATE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

Y see the Y field in paragraph “Rotating the geometry”, page 302.

z SCALE

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

FCT see the Scale factor field in “Reducing/increasing the geometry

dimensions”, page 303.

z SHIFT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

X see the X field “Translation of the geometry”, page 304.

Y see the Y field in “Translation of the geometry”, page 304.

z SWEEP

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

GID see the Cleaning geometry field in “Cleaning the piece”, page 308.

LOCK see the Locking areas field in “Cleaning the piece”, page 308.

Z see the Z pos. field in “Cleaning the piece”, page 308.

MODE see the Usage mode field in “Cleaning the piece”, page 308.

FD see the Sweeper speed field in “Cleaning the piece”, page 308.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

677
B List of commands and programming parameters

z WAIT

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

MR see the Tilting field in “Suspension of the machining operation for piece
positioning”, page 309.

OG see the Origin Identif. field in “Suspension of the machining operation

for piece positioning”, page 309.

RT see the Rotation field in paragraph “Suspension of the machining

operation for piece positioning”, page 309.

SWS see the Avoids suspension step field in “Suspension of the machining
operation for piece positioning”, page 309.

TYP
type of suspension. See the description of the buttons in
paragraph “Suspension of the machining operation for piece
positioning”, page 309.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “stNT”.
• 1 = “stTR”.

UK see the Unlock field in “Suspension of the machining operation for

piece positioning”, page 309.

z WFC

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

A see the Start angle field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

AFH see the Aut.Height field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

AZ see the Inclination field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

DA see the field. Ang. size

678 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z WFC

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

DIR
rotation direction. See the description of the buttons in
paragraph “Curved surface sides”, page 324.
Values allowed:
• 1 = “dirCW”.
• 2 = “dirCCW”.

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

H see the Height field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

ID see the Side Identif. field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the side created. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

R see the Radius field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

RV see the Reverse field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

UCS see the System field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VF see the Virtual Face field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VRT see the Vertical field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

X see the “X pos.” field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

Y see the “Y pos.” field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

Z see the “Z pos.” field in “Curved surface sides”, page 324.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

679
B List of commands and programming parameters

z WFG

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AZ see the Inclination field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”,

page 312.

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”,
page 312.

HGT see the “Height” field in paragraph “Sides obtained from a geometric
profile”, page 312.

ID see the Side Identif. field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”,
page 312.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the side created. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

PDF see the Panel Def. field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”,
page 312.

RV see the Reverse field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”, page
312.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VF see the Virtual Face field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”,
page 312.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VRT see the Vertical field in “Sides obtained from a geometric profile”, page
312.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

Z see the “Z pos.” field in paragraph “Sides obtained from a geometric

profile”, page 312.

680 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z WFGL

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

GIZ see the Z geometry field in “Sides obtained from drawings on side
faces”, page 317.

ID see the Side Identif. field in “Sides obtained from drawings on side
faces”, page 317.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the side created. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

RV see the Reverse field in “Sides obtained from drawings on side faces”,
page 317.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VF see the Virtual Face field in “Sides obtained from drawings on side
faces”, page 317.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

z WFGPS

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

GID see the Geom. identif. field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero
face and on the side faces”, page 320.

GIZ see the Z geometry field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero face
and on the side faces”, page 320.

ID see the Side Identif. field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero face
and on the side faces”, page 320.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the side created. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

681
B List of commands and programming parameters

z WFGPS

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

PS see the “Section plan” field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero
face and on the side faces”, page 320.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

RV see the Reverse field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero face
and on the side faces”, page 320.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VF see the Virtual Face field in “Sides obtained from drawings on zero face
and on the side faces”, page 320.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

z WFL

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

AFH see the Aut.Height field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

AFL see the Aut.Length field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

AR see the (AR) field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

AZ see the Inclination field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Only to be used if parameter VRT = NO.

FRC see the Corner field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326. Values
allowed: 1, 2, 3, 4.

H see the Height field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

682 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z WFL

PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
S

ID see the Side Identif. field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

L see the Length field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

LAY string to identify the layer associated with the side created. This string is
not visualised between the programming lines, but in the dialogue box
Layer management.

RV see the Reverse field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

UCS see the System field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VF see the Virtual Face field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

VRT see the Vertical field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.
Values allowed:
• 0 = “NO”.
• 1 = “YES”.

X see the “X pos.”field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

Y see the “Y pos.” field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

Z see the “Z pos.” field in paragraph “Flat surface sides”, page 326.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

683
B List of commands and programming parameters

B.8 Positioning instructions and parameters

INSTRUCTIONS DESCRIPTION

WTCARRIAGE Carriage transfer

WTEND End of parallel unit

WTGROUP Start parallel unit

WTLIFT Bar support

WTMOVING Repositioning work table

WTPLANE Mobile support transfer

WTUNICLAMP Open/Close clamp

WTVACUM Enable/Disable vacuum

z WTCARRIAGE

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

NAME see the Name field in “Entering the instruction Carriage transfer”, page
445.

INCPOS see the Increment Position field in “Entering the instruction Carriage
transfer”, page 445.

POS see the Position field in “Entering the instruction Carriage transfer”, page
445.

REF see the Carriage reference field in “Entering the instruction Carriage
transfer”, page 445.

z WTLIFT

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

NAME see the Name field in “Entering the instruction Bar support”, page 449.

VALUE see the Value field in “Entering the instruction Bar support”, page 449.

684 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 B List of commands and programming parameters

z WTMOVING

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

TYPE see the References field in 15.7 “Positioning statements for the work table
objects”, page 442. Values allowed:
• 0 = “movRel”.
• 1 = “movAbs”

z WTPLANE

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

NAME see the Name field in “Entering the instruction Mobile support transfer”,
page 443.

INCPOS see the Increment Position field in “Entering the instruction Mobile
support transfer”, page 443.

POS see the Position field in “Entering the instruction Mobile support transfer”,
page 443.

REF see the Carriage reference field in “Entering the instruction Mobile
support transfer”, page 443.

z WTUNICLAMP

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

NAME see the Name field in “Entering the instruction Open/Close clamp”, page
443.

VALUE see the Value field in “Entering the instruction Open/Close clamp”, page
443.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

685
B List of commands and programming parameters

z WTVACUM

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION

NAME see the Name field in “Entering the instruction Enable/Disable vacuum”,
page 442.

VALUE see the Value field in “Entering the instruction Enable/Disable vacuum”,
page 442.

686 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

C VBscript commands and
Editor constants

This chapter gives a list of VBScript commands and certain BiesseWorks parameters (Editor
application constants) that the operator must be aware of in order to avoid incorrect procedures
when creating the “variables” to be used to program machining operations. Therefore, do not use
the codes listed in this chapter so as not to create duplicates of codes that already exist.

List of topics
• C.1 “Unit of measurement and functions”
• C.2 “VBscript commands”
• C.3 “Editor constants”

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

687
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

C.1 Unit of measurement and functions

Table 11

DESCRIPTION

inc Unit of measurement in inches. E.g. 3*inc indicates 3 inches (if the millimetre unit
of measurement has been set in the Editor application software).

mm Unit of measurement in millimetres. E.g. 3*mm indicates 3 millimetres (if the inch
unit of measurement has been set in the Editor application software).

PI Pi.

Dtr(angle) Function to convert the angles from deg to rad.

688 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 C VBscript commands and Editor constants

C.2 VBscript commands

Table 12

VBScript functions, constants and instructions

Predefined
Functions Constants Instructions
constants

Abs vbBlack Call False

Array vbRed Class True

Asc vbGreen Const Empty

Atn vbYellow Dim Nothing

CBool vbBlue Do Null

CByte vbMagenta Loop

CCur vbCyan Erase

CDate vbWhite Execute

CDbl vbSunday ExecuteGlobal

Chr vbMonday Exit

CInt vbTuesday For

CLng vbWednesday Each

Conversions vbThursday Next

Cos vbFriday Function

CreateObject vbSaturday If

CSng vbUseSystemDayOfWeek Then

Date vbFirstJan1 Else

DateAdd vbFirstFourDays On

DateDiff vbFirstFullWeek Error

DatePart vbGeneralDate Option

DateSerial vbLongDate Explicit

DateValue vbShortDate Private

Day vbLongTime Property

Derived vbShortTime Get

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

689
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

VBScript functions, constants and instructions

Predefined
Functions Constants Instructions
constants

Maths vbObjectError Let

Eval vbOKOnly Set

Exp vbOKCancel Public

Filter vbAbortRetryIgnore Randomise

FormatCurrency vbYesNoCancel ReDim

FormatDateTime vbYesNo Rem

FormatNumber vbRetryCancel Select

FormatPercent vbCritical Case

GetLocale vbQuestion Set

GetObject vbExclamation Sub

GetRef vbInformation While

Hex vbDefaultButton1 Wend

Hour vbDefaultButton2 With

InputBox vbDefaultButton3

InStr vbDefaultButton4

InStrRev vbApplicationModal

Int vbSystemModal

Fixs vbOK

IsArray vbCancel

IsDate vbAbort

IsEmpty vbRetry

IsNull vbIgnore

IsNumeric vbYes

IsObject vbNo

Join vbCr

LBound VbCrLf

690 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 C VBscript commands and Editor constants

VBScript functions, constants and instructions

Predefined
Functions Constants Instructions
constants

LCase vbFormFeed

Left vbLf

Len vbNewLine

LoadPicture vbNullChar

Log vbNullString

LTrim vbTab

RTrim vbVerticalTab

Trims vbUseDefault

Maths vbTrue

Mid vbFalse

Minute vbEmpty

Month vbNull

MonthName vbInteger

MsgBox vbLong

Now vbSingle

Oct vbSingle

Replace vbCurrency

RGB vbDate

Right vbString

Rnd vbObject

Round vbError

ScriptEngine vbBoolean

ScriptEngineBuildVersion vbVariant

ScriptEngineMajorVersion vbDataObject

ScriptEngineMinorVersion vbDecimal

Second vbByte

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

691
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

VBScript functions, constants and instructions

Predefined
Functions Constants Instructions
constants

SetLocal vbArray

Sgn

Sin

Space

Split

Sqr

StrComp

String

Tan

Time

Timer

TimeSerial

TimeValue

TypeName

UBound

UCase

VarType

Weekday

WeekdayName

Year

692 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 C VBscript commands and Editor constants

C.3 Editor constants

Table 13: * Value of the constant.

CONSTANTS * DESCRIPTION

azrABS 1 Inclination/rotation type -abs . Constant of the CKA parameter of the boring,
milling and cutting commands (see paragraphs B.3, B.4 and B.5).

azrINC 2 Inclination/rotation type -incr. Constant of the CKA parameter of the boring,
milling and cutting commands (see paragraphs B.3, B.4 and B.5).

azrNO 0 Inclination disabled. Constant of the CKA parameter of the boring, milling
and cutting commands (see paragraphs B.3, B.4 and B.5).

cmfCIR 2 Rounded chamfer. Constant of the CT parameter of the commands to

create the drawing (see paragraph B.6).

cmfLIN 1 Linear chamfer. Constant of the CT parameter of the commands to create

the drawing (see paragraph B.6).

cmfNO 0 Chamfer disabled. Constant of the CT parameter of the commands to create

the drawing (see paragraph B.6).

crcA 1 RightConstant of the CRC parameter of the milling and cutting commands
(see paragraphs B.4 and B.5).

crcB 2 LeftConstant of the CRC parameter of the milling and cutting commands
(see paragraphs B.4 and B.5).

crcCen 0 CentralConstant of the CRC parameter of the milling and cutting commands
(see paragraphs B.4 and B.5).

crcInt 5 Internal. Constant of the CRC parameter of the geometry commands (see
paragraph B.2).

crcExt 6 External. Constant of the CRC parameter of the geometry commands (see
paragraph B.2).

crcGeo 7 From the geometry. Constant of the CRC parameter of the milling
and cutting commands (see paragraphs B.4 and B.5).

crnN1 ”1” Corner 1. Constant of the CRN parameter.

crnN2 ”2” Corner 2. Constant of the CRN parameter.

crnN3 ”3” Corner 3. Constant of the CRN parameter.

crnN4 ”4” Corner 4. Constant of the CRN parameter.

cutLA 5
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the cutting commands (see
paragraph B.4).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

693
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

CONSTANTS * DESCRIPTION

cutXA 3
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the cutting commands (see
paragraph B.4).

cutXY 2
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the cutting commands (see
paragraph B.4).

cutYA 4
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the cutting commands (see
paragraph B.4).

dirCCW 2 Anticlockwise direction. Constant of the DIR parameter (see paragraphs B.6
and B.7).

dirCW 1 Clockwise direction. Constant of the DIR parameter (see paragraphs B.6
and B.7).

drX 0 Direction in X. Constant of the DIR parameter of the boring commands (see
paragraph B.3).

drY 1 Direction in Y. Constant of the DIR parameter of the boring commands (see
paragraph B.3).

gcGrip1 “#1” First vice. Constant of the GNM parameter of the GRIP command (see
paragraph B.7).

gcGrip2 “#2” Second vice. Constant of the GNM parameter of the GRIP command (see
paragraph B.7).

HALF Constant of the SD parameter of the “RECTANGLE” command. For a

description of the constant, see “Description of fields in the dialogue box
Rectangle” on page 359.

ioArc 1 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Curve.

ioArc3DTC 8 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Corrected 3DCurve.

ioHelic 5 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Helix.

ioLine 2 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Line.

ioLine3DTC 7 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Corrected 3DLine.

ioLineArc3D 6 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type 3DLineCurve.

ioLineArcT 3 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Tg LineCurve.

694 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 C VBscript commands and Editor constants

CONSTANTS * DESCRIPTION

ioLineTC 9 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type Corrected Line.

ioNone 0 Constant of the TIN parameter of the milling commands (see paragraph
B.5); type None.

movAbs 1 Constant of the TYPE parameter of the “WTMOVING” command (page

685). Reference type “Absolute“.

movRel 0 Constant of the TYPE parameter of the “WTMOVING” command (page

685). Reference type “Relating to the piece“.

mrrNO 0 Tilting disabled. Constant of the MR parameter of the “WAIT” command

(page 678).

mrrX 1 Tilting in X. Constant of the MR parameter of the “WAIT” command (page

678).

mrrXY 3 Tilting in XY. Constant of the MR parameter of the “WAIT” command (page
678).

mrrY 2 Tilting in Y. Constant of the MR parameter of the “WAIT” command (page

678).

NO 0 Option disabled.

oslSel 1 Selected elements only. Constant of the OSL parameter of the “OFFGEO”
command (page 629).

oslTan 0 Tangent profile. Constant of the OSL parameter of the “OFFGEO” command
(page 629).

ptFSH 4
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “POCK” command (page
645).

ptIN 2
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “POCK” command (page
645).

ptOUT 3
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “POCK” command (page
645).

ptZIG 0
Option . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “POCK” command (page
645).

ptZZ 1
Option .Constant of the TYP parameter of the “POCK” command (page
645).

refer1 1 Reference type Upper or type Left. Constant of the REF parameter of the
positioning instructions (see paragraph B.8).

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

695
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

CONSTANTS * DESCRIPTION

refer2 2 Reference type Central. Constant of the REF parameter of the positioning
instructions (see paragraph B.8).

refer3 3 Reference type Lower or type Right. Constant of the REF parameter of the
positioning instructions (see paragraph B.8).

rpAL 5
Enable repetition type . Constant of the RTY parameter (see
paragraph B.2).

rpCIR 3
Enable repetition type . Constant of the RTY parameter (see
paragraph B.2).

rpNO -1 Repetitions disabled. Constant of the RTY parameter (see paragraph B.2).

rpX 0
Enable repetition type . Constant of the RTY parameter (see
paragraph B.2).

rpXY 2
Enable repetition type . Constant of the RTY parameter (see
paragraph B.2).

rpY 1
Enable repetition type . Constant of the RTY parameter (see
paragraph B.2).

sc1 1 Solution 1. Constant of the SC parameter of the commands to create the

drawing (see paragraph B.6).

sc2 1 Solution 2. Constant of the SC parameter of the commands to create the

drawing (see paragraph B.6).

scOFF 0 Option disabled. Constant of the SC parameter.

scON 1 Option enabled. Constant of the SC parameter.

stNT 0
Suspension type . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “WAIT”
command (page 678).

stTR 1
Suspension type . Constant of the TYP parameter of the “WAIT”
command (page 678).

sysCorr 0
Boring “centre correction type” . Constant of the TYP parameter of the
boring commands (see paragraph B.3).

sysHole 1
Boring “centre-bore type” . Constant of the TYP parameter of the boring
commands (see paragraph B.3).

696 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

 C VBscript commands and Editor constants

CONSTANTS * DESCRIPTION

sysOffset 3
Boring “correction with movement type” . Constant of the TYP
parameter of the boring commands (see paragraph B.3).

sysSpace 2
Boring “centre-space type” . Constant of the TYP parameter of the
boring commands (see paragraph B.3).

tclBOR 0 C_DRILLING type tool class. Constant of the TCL parameter of the boring
and milling commands (see paragraphs B.3 and B.5).

tclCUT 2 C_CUTTING type tool class. Constant of the TCL parameter of the milling
and cutting commands (see paragraphs B.4 and B.5).

tclINS 3 C_INSERTING type tool class. Constant of the TCL parameter of the
“INSERTG” command (page 643).

tclROUT 1 C_ROUTING type tool class. Constant of the TCL parameter of the boring
and milling commands (see paragraphs B.3 and B.5).

tclTAST 4 C_TRACING type tool class. Constant of the TCL parameter of the “TT”
command (page 660).

txtExt 0 Option External profile. Constant of the PST parameter of the “GEOTEXT”
command (page 626).

txtInt 1 Option Internal profile. Constant of the PST parameter of the “GEOTEXT”
command (page 626).

vOFF 0 Constant of the VALUE parameter of the positioning instructions (see

paragraph B.8). Option disabled.

vON 1 Constant of the VALUE parameter of the positioning instructions (see

paragraph B.8). Option enabled.

YES 1 Option enabled.

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

697
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

698 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 021013

Retro LOGO BIESSE nella body
BIESSE S.p.A.
Registered office:
Via della Meccanica, 16
61122 Pesaro (PU) - Italy
Tel. +39 0721 439100
Fax +39 0721 439150
[email protected]
www.biesse.com